Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=136 // Print scale=81%

Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 6.800000 mm

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111

1060/1075 Operating Instructions Copy Reference

1060/1075 Operating Instructions Copy Reference

1060/1075
Operating Instructions
Copy Reference

Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A. Spain
RICOH CORPORATION RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
5 Dedrick Place Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 08005 Barcelona
Phone: +1-973-882-2000 Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands Italy
RICOH EUROPE B.V. RICOH ITALIA SpA
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen Via della Metallurgia 12,
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111 37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500 Placing Originals
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD. Hong Kong Copying
Ricoh House, RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, 21/F., Tai Yau Building, Program
Middlesex, TW13 7HG 181, Johnston Road,
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000 Wan Chai, Hong Kong Troubleshooting
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Germany User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Singapore
Mergenthalerallee 38-40, RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD. Specifications
65760 Eschborn 260 Orchard Road,
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060 #15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
France Phone: +65-830-5888
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26

Printed in The Netherlands For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the
EE GB B064-6600 General Settings Guide before you use it.
 Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=136 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 6.800000 mm

Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Declaration of Conformity
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. “The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC.”

In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
Notes a means POWER ON.
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine. c means STAND BY.
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-
chine before reading this manual. (For details, ⇒ P.2 “Machine Types”.)
• Type1: Aficio 1060
• Type2: Aficio 1075
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.

Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts with your Ricoh office products.

Power Source
220 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 10A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see “Power Connection” in General Settings Guide.

Copyright © 2002 Ricoh Co., Ltd.

MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page i Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

What You Can Do With This Machine

The following sections introduce the duplex and combining functions of this machine.

Types of Duplex Copies

1-sided 2 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.43 2-sided 1 Page 2-sided 1 Page p.43
" 1 Sided 2 Sided" " 2 Sided 2 Sided"

1-sided 4 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.47 2-sided 2 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.47
" 1 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Side" " 2 Sided 4 Pages Combine 2 Side"

1-sided 8 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.47 2-sided 4 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.47
" 1 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Side" " 2 Sided 8 Pages Combine 2 Side"

Front Back

Front Back

1-sided 16 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.47 2-sided 8 Pages 2-sided 1 Page p.48
" 1 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Side" " 2 Sided 16 Pages Combine 2 Side"

Front Front

Back Back

Bound Originals 2-sided Pages p.49 Front/Back Bound Originals 2-sided Pages p.49
" Book 2 Sided" " Front & Back 2 Sided"

i
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page ii Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying Book Originals

1-sided 4 Pages Booklet ( P.50 " 1 Sided Booklet")

Open to Left
1
2
3 2 3 3
4 1

1 4

Open to Right
1
2
3 3 2 3
4 1

4 1

2-sided 2 Pages Booklet ( P.51 " 2 Sided Booklet")

Open to Left
3
1

Open to Right
3
1

1-sided Magazine ( P.51 " 1 Sided Magazine")

Open to Left
1
2

5
2 7 4 5 1 3

7
8 1 8 3 6

Open to Right
1
2

5
7 2 5 4 3 1

7 8 1 6 3
8

2-sided Magazine ( P.51 " 2 Sided Magazine")

Open to Left

5
1 3

Open to Right

5
3 1

ii
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page iii Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Combining Multiple Pages onto a Single Page ( p.45 "1 Sided Combine")

1-sided 2 Pages 1-sided 1 Page 2-sided 1 Page 1-sided 1 Page

1-sided 4 Pages 1-sided 1 Page 2-sided 2 Pages 1-sided 1 Page

1-sided 8 Pages 1-sided 1 Page 2-sided 4 Pages 1-sided 1 Page

Copying Originals Such as Books Copying 2-Sided Pages onto 1-Sided Pages
( p.48 "Series Copies") ( P.50 "2 Sided 1 Sided")
Bound Originals 1-sided Pages 2-sided 1 page 1-sided 2 pages

Bound Originals 2-sided Pages

Front/Back Bound Originals

2-sided Pages

iii
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page iv Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
What You Can Do With This Machine ................................................................... i
How to Read this Manual ......................................................................................1
Machine Types .......................................................................................................2
Functions that Require Options ...........................................................................3
Control Panel..........................................................................................................4
Common Key Operations ...........................................................................................5

1. Placing Originals
Originals .................................................................................................................7
Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals......................................................... 7
Sizes Detectable by Auto Paper Select .....................................................................8
Missing Image Area ................................................................................................. 10
Direction-fixed paper or 2-sided paper..................................................................... 11
Placing Originals.................................................................................................. 12
Original Orientation .................................................................................................. 12
Placing Originals on the Exposure Glass................................................................. 13
Placing Originals in the Document Feeder............................................................... 13

2. Copying
Basic Procedure................................................................................................... 17
Auto Start ................................................................................................................. 18
Interrupt Copy .......................................................................................................... 18
Original Beeper ........................................................................................................ 18
Copy Face Up .......................................................................................................... 19
Job Preset ................................................................................................................ 19
Copying onto Tab Stock........................................................................................... 20
Copying from the Bypass Tray........................................................................... 22
Copy Functions.................................................................................................... 25
Adjusting Copy Image Density ................................................................................. 25
Selecting Original Type Setting................................................................................ 26
Selecting Copy Paper .............................................................................................. 27
Preset Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................ 30
Zoom ........................................................................................................................ 31
Auto Reduce/Enlarge ............................................................................................... 32
Size Magnification .................................................................................................... 33
Directional Magnification (%) ................................................................................... 33
Directional Size Magnification (mm)......................................................................... 34
Sort........................................................................................................................... 35
Stack ........................................................................................................................ 37
Staple ....................................................................................................................... 37
Sample Copy............................................................................................................ 40
Changing the Number of Sets.................................................................................. 40
Punch ....................................................................................................................... 41
Duplex ...................................................................................................................... 43
1 Sided Combine...................................................................................................... 45
2 Sided Combine...................................................................................................... 47

iv
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page v Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Series Copies........................................................................................................... 48
2 Sided→1 Sided ..................................................................................................... 50
Copying Book Originals............................................................................................ 50
Image Repeat........................................................................................................... 53
Double Copies.......................................................................................................... 54
Centering.................................................................................................................. 55
Scanning Position .................................................................................................... 55
Erase........................................................................................................................ 56
3 Edges Full Bleed ................................................................................................... 61
Margin Adjustment ................................................................................................... 62
Background Numbering ........................................................................................... 63
Preset Stamp ........................................................................................................... 63
User Stamp .............................................................................................................. 65
Date Stamp .............................................................................................................. 67
Page Numbering ...................................................................................................... 69
Covers...................................................................................................................... 72
Designate ................................................................................................................. 73
Chapter .................................................................................................................... 74
Blank Slip Sheets ..................................................................................................... 75
Slip Sheets ............................................................................................................... 76
Storing Originals in the Document Server ........................................................ 78

3. Program
Programs .............................................................................................................. 79
Storing a Program .................................................................................................... 79
Deleting a Program .................................................................................................. 80
Recalling a Program................................................................................................. 80

4. Troubleshooting
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want .............................................. 83
When a Message is Displayed................................................................................. 83
If You Cannot Make Clear Copies....................................................................... 84
If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want ......................................................... 85
When Memory Is Full ............................................................................................... 87

v
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page vi Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

5. User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features) .................................... 89
Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features) .............................. 96
Exiting From User Tools........................................................................................... 96
General Features 1/5 ................................................................................................ 97
General Features 2/5 ................................................................................................ 99
General Features 3/5 ................................................................................................ 99
General Features 4/5 ................................................................................................ 99
General Features 5/5 ..............................................................................................100
Reproduction Ratio 1/2 ...........................................................................................100
Reproduction Ratio 2/2 ...........................................................................................100
Edit 1/2 ....................................................................................................................100
Edit 2/2 ....................................................................................................................102
Stamp .....................................................................................................................104
Input/Output 1/2 ......................................................................................................106
Input/Output2/2 .......................................................................................................107

6. Specifications
Combination Chart............................................................................................. 109
Supplementary Specifications.......................................................................... 111
INDEX....................................................................................................... 125

vi
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

How to Read this Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are in-
cluded in the Safety Information section in the General Settings Guide.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in the Safety
Information section in the General Settings Guide.
• WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfeed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation or actions to take after misoper-
ation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's control panel.

Notice
• B4JISKL,B5JISKL,B6JISLarereferredasB4KL,B5KL,B6Linthismanual.
• The image of the display panel may be different depending on the installed
option.
1
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Machine Types
This machine comes in two models which vary by copy speed. To make sure
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Type 1 Type 2
Copy speed 60 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" 75 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2"
× 11"K) × 11"K)

2
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Functions that Require Options

Available functions depend on your machine configuration and which options
you have. See the table below.
❍Required options
Functions

Copying onto the Tab Stock

Staple (Saddle Stitch)

Shift Sort

Punch
Staple
Stack
Tab Sheet Holder ❍
Finisher 3000M(50-sheet staples) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
*1

Booklet Finisher ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
*1
Options

Finisher 3000B(100-sheet staples) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

*1

*1
To use the Punch function, you need an optional Punch Unit.

3
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Control Panel
Note
❒ This illustration shows the Control Panel of the machine with options fully in-
stalled.

ZGVH010E

1. Screen Contrast knob 6. {Program}} key

Adjusts the brightness of the display pan- Press to store or recall a program. ⇒ p.79
el. “Programs”
2. Indicators 7. {Clear Modes}} key
These indicators show the status of the Press to clear previously entered copy job
machine or indicate errors. ⇒ “Control settings.
Panel” in the General Settings Guide.
8. {Energy Saver}} key
3. {User Tools/Counter}} key Press to switch to and from Energy Saver
• User Tools mode. ⇒ “Saving Energy” in the General
Press to change the default settings Settings Guide.
and conditions to meet your require-
ments. ⇒ p.89 “User Tools 9. {Interrupt}} key
(Copy/Document Server Features)” Press to interrupt a long copy job to make
• Counter copies. ⇒ p.18 “Interrupt Copy”
Press to check or print the Counter 10. Main power indicator, On indi-
value. ⇒ “Counter” in the General cator
Settings Guide.
The main power indicator goes on when
• Inquiry the main power switch is turned on and
Shows where to order expendable goes off when the switch is turned off.
supplies and where to call when a
malfunction occurs. You can also print The On indicator goes on when the oper-
these details. ⇒ “Inquiry” in the Gen- ation switch is turned on and goes off
eral Settings Guide. when the switch is turned off.
4. Display panel Important
Shows operation status, error messages, ❒ Do not turn the main power off
and function menus. ⇒ “Display Panel” while the On indicator is flashing.
in the General Settings Guide. The hard disk may malfunction.
5. {Check Modes}} key
Press to check the entered copy job set-
tings.
4
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

11. Operation switch 15. {Clear/Stop}} key

Press this switch to turn the power on • Clear
(the On indicator goes on). To turn the Press to delete a number entered.
power off, press this switch again (the On • Stop
indicator goes off). ⇒”Turning On the Press to stop a copy job in progress.
Power” in the General Settings Guide. Press to stop Scanning and printing in
Document Server mode.
12. Clip Tray
Holds clips and staples. 16. {#}} key
Press to enter a value.
13. {Sample Copy}} key
Use this key to make a single sample 17. Number keys
copy before starting a long copy run. By Use to enter the desired number of cop-
checking the sample copy and making ies, and data for selected modes.
any necessary changes to the image qual-
ity settings before you make multiple
18. Function keys
copies, you can save time and paper. ⇒ These keys switch display to the operat-
p.40 “Sample Copy” ing screen of each function. Follow the in-
st r uct ion s d is pla y e d b y s wi tch in g
14. {Start}} key between screen with the function keys.
Press to start copying. Press to start scan-
ning and printing in Document Server
19. Function Status indicator
mode. These show the status of the above func-
tions:
• Green: the function is active.
• Red: the function has been interrupt-
ed.

Common Key Operations

The following keys are common to all screens.
[Exit] Returns to the previous screen.
[Cancel] Deletes a selected function or entered values, and then returns
to the previous screen.
[OK] Acknowledges a selected function or entered values, and then
returns to the previous screen.
[▲Prev.] [▼Next] Moves to the previous or next page when all the functions can-
not be displayed on one page.

5
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

6
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

1. Placing Originals

Originals

Sizes and Weights of Recommended Originals

❖ Metric version
Where Original Is
Placed Original Size Original Weight
Exposure glass Up to A3 --
Document feeder 1-sided originals: 40 – 128 g/m2
A3L – B6KL
2-sided originals: 52 – 128 g/m2
A3L – A5KL

❖ Inch version
Where Original Is
Placed Original Size Original Weight
Exposure glass Up to 11" × 17" --
Document feeder 1-sided originals: 11 – 34 lb.
11" × 17" L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL
2-sided originals: 14 – 34 lb.
11" × 17" L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL

Note
❒ The number of originals that can be placed in the document feeder is about
100.
❒ The weight range for originals in the Mixed Size mode is 52–81.4 g/m2, 13.8–
21.7 lb.

Non-recommended originals for the document feeder

Placing the following types of originals in the document feeder can cause paper
misfeeds or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on the expo-
sure glass instead.
• Originals other than those specified in p.7 “Sizes and Weights of Recom-
mended Originals”
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals 7
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, alu-
minum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other raised parts
1 • Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin originals that have low stiffness
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
Note
❒ The original might become dirty if it is written on with a pencil or similar
instrument.

Sizes Detectable by Auto Paper Select

❖ Metric version
Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 11" 81 / 2 81/2 5 1/ 2 81/2 8K 16K
L L K K K K × "× "× "× "× L K
L L L L 17" 14" 11" 81/2 13" L
Location of the L L K "K L
original L L *1

Exposure glass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × × × ❍ × ×
Document ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ *2 × ❍ *3 × ❍ ❍ ❍
feeder
*1
You can select from 81/2" × 13", 81/4" × 13" or 8" × 13" with the User Tools (System
Settings). See "<F/F4>Size Setting" in the General Settings Guide.
*2
If you wish to switch detectable paper size from 8K L to 11" × 17" L, please contact
your service representative.
*3
If you wish to switch detectable paper size from 16K K to 81/2" × 11" K or from 16K
L to 81/2" × 11" L, please contact your service representative.

❖ Inch version
Size A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 11" 81/2 81/2 51/2 8 1/ 2 11" 8" × 10"
L L K K K × "× "× "× "× × 10" ×
L L L 17" 14" 11" 81/2 13" 15" L 14"
Location of the L L K "K L L L
original L L
Exposure glass × × × × × ❍ ❍ ❍ × × × × ×
Document ❍ × ❍ × × ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ *1 ❍ *2 ❍ *3 ❍
feeder
*1
If you wish to switch detectable paper size from 81/2" × 14"L to 81/2" × 13" L, please
contact your service representative.
*2
If you wish to switch detectable paper size from 11" × 17" L to 11" × 15" L, please
contact your service representative.
*3
If you wish to switch detectable paper size from 81/2" × 11" L to 8" × 10" L, please
8 contact your service representative.
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Originals

❖ Exposure glass

❖ Document feeder

Sizes difficult to detect

It is difficult for the machine to detect the sizes of the following originals, so se-
lect manually.
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other raised parts
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
• Originals that partially contain a solid image
• Originals that have solid images at their edges

9
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

Missing Image Area

Even if you correctly place originals in the document feeder or on the exposure
glass, margins of a few millimeters on all four sides of the original might not be
1 copied.

1. 0.5 mm, 0.02” 3. 0.5 mm - 3.5 mm, 0.02” - 0.14”

2. 1 mm or more, 0.04” or more 4. 2 - 6 mm, 0.08”- 0.24”

10
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Originals

Direction-fixed paper or 2-sided paper

Direction-fixed (top to bottom) or 2-sided paper (e.g., letterhead paper, punched
paper, or copied paper) might not be printed correctly depending on how the
originals and paper are placed. Set "Letterhead setting" in system settings, and 1
then place the original and paper as shown below. ⇒ p.108 “Letterhead Setting”

11
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

Placing Originals
Note Example: When you want to staple
copies, but you cannot select be-
1 ❒ Place originals after correction flu-
cause the original size is A3K, select-
id and ink have completely dried.
ing enables you to staple copies
Not taking this precaution could
correctly.
dirty the exposure glass with
marks that will be copied.
Reference
For document sizes you can set. ⇒
p.7 “Originals”.

Original Orientation
When you place the original into the
document feeder, place it face up so
you can see the print.
When you place the original on the
exposure glass, place it face down.

Note
❒ It is recommended to use this func-
2
tion together with the Auto Paper
Select or Preset Reduce/Enlarge
function.
1. Document feeder A Press the [Special Original] key.
2. Exposure glass
When you cannot place originals as
described because the size is A3 or A4
or because of its condition, you can-
not staple copies as you want. In this
case, select as the Original Orien-
tation.

B Select the original orientation

( or ) and press the [OK]
key.
12
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

Placing Originals on the Placing Originals in the

Exposure Glass Document Feeder
Reference Settings should be made in the fol-
lowing situations:
1
Related Initial Settings ⇒ p.108
“Eject Copy Face Up/Down in ❖ When placing originals one by one:
Glass” ⇒ p.15 “SADF mode”
A Lift the exposure glass cover or ❖ When placing originals consisting of
the document feeder. more than 100 pages:
Important ⇒ p.14 “Batch mode”
❒ Do not open the exposure glass ❖ When copying originals of various
cover or the document feeder
sizes:
forcefully. Otherwise, the cover
of the document feeder might ⇒ p.15 “Mixed Size mode”
open or be damaged. ❖ When placing custom size originals:
Note ⇒ p.16 “Placing Custom Size Orig-
❒ Be sure to open the exposure inals”
glass cover or the document Note
feeder by more than 30°. Other- ❒ Do not stack originals beyond the
wise, the size of the original limit mark on the side fence of the
might not be detected correctly. document feeder.
B Place the original face down on the ❒ The last page should be on the bot-
exposure glass. The original should tom.
be aligned to the rear left corner. ❒ When you copy 2–sided originals,
both front and back sides of each
original are scanned at once.
❒ Do not place any foreign objects on
the sensors or cover them with
your hands. This could cause a
malfunction or the size to not be
detected properly.

1. Reference mark
2. Left scale
Note
❒ Start with the first page to be
copied.

C Lower the exposure glass cover or 1. Sensors

the document feeder.
13
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

A Set the document guide to the Batch mode

original size.
In batch mode, the machine copies an
B Align the edges of the original original of more than 100 pages as one
1 and place it on the document
feeder (ADF) with the side to be
document, even if it is placed on the
document feeder in parts.
copied facing up.
Important
❒ When placing special originals
such as translucent paper, place
one by one.

A Press the [Special Original] key.

1. Limit mark
2. Document guide
Note
❒ Straighten curls in the original B Select the [Batch] key, and then
before placing it on the docu- press the [OK] key.
ment feeder (ADF).
Note
❒ To prevent multiple sheets from ❒ When [Batch] is not displayed,
being fed at once, fan the origi- change the settings in ⇒ p.106
nal before placing it on the doc- “Switch to Batch (SADF)”.
ument feeder (ADF).
❒ Set the original squarely. C Place the first part of the original,
then press the {Start}
} key.

D After the first part of the original

has been fed, place the next part
and then press the {Start}
} key.
Note
❒ If you want to copy subsequent
originals in this mode, repeat
step D.

E When the Sort, Combine or 1 Sid-

ed → 2 Sided mode has been set,
press the {#}
} key after all origi-
nals have been scanned.

14
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 15 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

SADF mode Mixed Size mode

In SADF mode, even when an origi- When you place different size origi-
nal is placed page by page in the doc- nals in the document feeder at the
ument feeder (ADF), each page is same time, the machine automatically 1
automatically fed when placed. checks the size of the originals and
makes copies.
Preparation
To use the SADF function, you Note
should make a setting in "User ❒ When placing originals of different
Tools (Copy/Document Server sizes in the document feeder and
Features)", so that [SADF] will be making copies without using the
displayed when you press [Special Mixed Size mode, parts of the orig-
Original]. ⇒ p.106 “Switch to Batch inal image might not be copied or
(SADF)” paper might become jammed.
Reference ❒ The sizes of the originals that can
be placed together with this func-
Related Initial Settings ⇒ p.106
tion are as follows:
“SADF Auto Reset”
Metric A3L , B4L, A4KL , B5KL
A Press the [Special Original] key. version
Inch 11" × 17"L , 81/2" × 14"L,
version 81/2" × 11"KL , 51/2" ×
81/2KL

A Press the [Special Original] key.

B Press the [SADF] key, and then

press the [OK] key.

C Place one page of an original, and

then press the {Start}
} key.
The Auto Feed indicator is shown B Press the [Mixed size] key, and then
on the display. press the [OK] key.
D When the machine instructs you
to place another original, place
the next page.
The second and subsequent pages
will be fed automatically without
{Start}
pressing the{ } key.

15
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 16 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Placing Originals

C Align the rear and left edges of C Enter the horizontal size of the
originals as shown in the illustra- original with the Number keys,
tion. and then press the [#] key.
Note
1 1 B4 A3 ❒ If you make a mistake, press the
2 [Print Inquiry List] or {Clear/Stop}
}
key, and then enter the value
again.
CP19AE
D Enter the vertical size of the origi-
1. Place into the document feeder. nal with the Number keys, and
then press the [#] key.
2. Vertical size
D Adjust the guide to the widest
E Press the [OK] key.
original size. F Place originals, and then press the
{Start}
} key.
E Place aligned originals face up
into the document feeder.

F Press the {Start}} key.

Placing Custom Size Originals
When placing custom size originals in
the document feeder, specify the size
of the originals.
Note
❒ Paper that has a vertical length of
128–297 mm (5" – 11") and a hori-
zontal length of 128–1260 mm (5" –
49.6") can be placed with this func-
tion.

A Press the [Special Original] key.

B Press the [Custm Size Origi.] key.

16
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 17 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

2. Copying

Basic Procedure

A When the machine is set for user F Enter the number of copies re-
codes, enter a user code (up to 8 quired with the number keys.
digits) with the number keys, and
then press the {#}} key. Note
❒ The maximum copy quantity
The machine is ready to copy.
that can be set is 999.
Reference
For Users Code, see ⇒“Key Op-
G Press the {Start}} key.
erator Tools” in the General Set- The machine starts copying.
tings Guide.
Note
B Make sure "Ready" is displayed ❒ When you place originals on the
on the screen. exposure glass, press the { #}}
key after all originals are
If any other function is displayed,
scanned.
press the {Copy}
} key.
❒ Copies are delivered face down.
❖ Initial copy display

-How to Operate

❖ To stop the machine during a multi-

copy run.
⇒Press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.

❖ To return the machine to the initial

condition after copying.
C Make sure there are no previous ⇒Press the {Clear Modes} } key.
settings remaining.
❖ When clearing entered values.
Note ⇒Press the {Clear/Stop} } key or the
❒ When there are previous set- [Clear] key on the display.
tings remaining, press the {Re-
❖ To confirm settings.
} key and enter again.
set}
⇒Press the {Check Modes}
} key.
D Place originals.
Reference
⇒ p.12 “Placing Originals”

E Set desired settings.

Reference
Please refer to each functions.
17
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 18 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

C When the copy job is finished,

Auto Start remove originals and copies.
D Press the {Interrupt}
} key again.
Copy starts automatically when the
machine is ready. The Interrupt indicator goes off.
E When the display prompts
A Set the copy contents while “Se- you, set the remaining origi-
lect copy mode and press {Start} }” nals again before interrupting.
2 and “Scanning originals can be
started” are displayed alternately. F Press the {Start}
} key.

B Set the original. Note

❒ By pressing the {Start} } key,
C Press the {Start}} key. the previous copy job set-
tings will be restored and the
The machine scans the original.
machine will continue copy-
When the machine is ready, it
ing from where it left off.
starts copying automatically.

When the machine keeps

Interrupt Copy copying
Use this function to interrupt a long A Place the originals you wish to
copy job to make urgently needed copy.
copies.
B Press the {Start}
} key.
A Press the {Interrupt}} key. The machine stops the other
original job and starts copying
your original.
C When copying is complete, re-
move the originals and copies.
D Press the {Interrupt}
} key again.
The Interrupt indicator goes off.
The previous copy job settings
will be restored and the ma-
chine will continue copying
ZGVS020E
from where it left off.

When the originals stop scanning Original Beeper

A Remove originals that have The beeper sounds and an error mes-
been copied and place origi- sage is displayed when you leave the
nals you wish to copy. originals on the exposure glass after
B Press the {Start}
} key. copying.
The machine starts making your Reference
copies.
⇒ p.99 “Tone: Original remains”

18
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 19 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Basic Procedure

Copy Face Up B Set up the next copy job.

Use this function to reverse the order
C Place the originals in the docu-
ment feeder, and then press the
of copies. {Start}
} key.
Preparation All originals are scanned.
Before using this function, register After the current copy job, the next
"Face up" for a copy function key. job starts automatically. 2
⇒ p.99 “Copy Function Key: F1–
F5” Note
❒ Each copy job set up is stored
A Press {Face Up}} key. with a job number in the pre-
served job screen.
❒ To switch the display to the cur-
rent copy job, press the [Re-
served] key, select the [Printing]
key and then press the [Exit]
key.

Editing Job Preset

B Place originals, and then press the You can check and change the con-
{Start}
} key. tents of preset jobs. You also can de-
lete preset jobs.
Job Preset A Press the [Reserved Job] key.
You can set up next copy content dur-
ing copy.
If a long copy job is in progress and
you do not wish to wait for it to finish,
you can use this function to set up the
next copy job in advance. When the
current copy job is finished, the next
job will be started automatically. You
can set up to 8 copy jobs.
B Select the number of the job you
A Press the [New Job] key when want to check or change.
"Copying" is shown.
C Press the [Check/Change Job] key.
The contents of the job are dis-
played.

19
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 20 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

To check job contents B Select the number of the job you

want to delete.
A Check contents. C Press the [Delete Job] key.
B Press the [Confirmed] key. D Press the [Delete] key.
You return to the Reserved Job You return to the Reserved Job
screen. screen.
2
To change job contents after
checking Copying onto Tab Stock
You can copy onto tab stock.
A Check job contents.
B Change contents and press the
[Confirmed] key.

C Press the [Change] key.

You return to the Reserved Job
screen. Preparation
Before using this function, set the
To delete a job after checking its tray for tab stock and set the posi-
contents tion of the index tab. ⇒ “Paper
Type” in the General Settings
A Check job contents. Guide

B Press the [Delete Job] key.

C Press the [Delete] key.
You return to the Reserved Job
screen.

Deleting a Preset Job

A Press the [Reserved Job] key.

20
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 21 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Basic Procedure

Important
❒ When you set tab stock, be sure to 1 2 3
use the optional tab sheet fence.

1. Originals
2. Tab stock
❒ Set tab stock so that it will be fed
from the side without the tab first.
3. Copies
❒ Adjust the back fence position so A Select the paper tray where the
that the tab sheet fence will fit the tab sock is set.
tab stock.
B Place originals, and then press the
{Start}
} key.

Note
❒ Check the position of the index tab
to avoid cropping the image.
❒ Set the tab stock with the side to be
copied facing down.
❒ Tab stock is always fed starting
from the top tab.

21
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 22 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Copying from the Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to copy onto spe- ❒ If you want to use the size of paper
cial paper (OHP transparencies, label other than ones in the above table,
paper, adhesive labels), thick paper be sure to specify the size. ⇒ p.23
(postcards and thin paper), and copy “When copying onto standard size
paper that cannot be loaded in the pa- paper”, ⇒ p.79 “Program”
2 per trays. ❒ When copying on OHP transpar-
Preparation encies or paper heavier than 105
g/m2 (about 27.9 lb.), you need to
When copying from the bypass
specify the paper type. ⇒”Paper
→ 1 Sided] for
tray, select [1 Sided→
T ype”in the General Settings
copying in [Dup./Combine/Series].
Guide
You can change the initial settings.
⇒ p.99 “Duplex Mode Priority” ❒ If you want copies to be delivered
face down when placing originals
Important on the exposure glass, select “Face
❒ When paper larger than 433 mm in down” for both ”Eject Copy Face
size is used, it may become wrin- Up/Down in Glass Mode” and
kled, may feed into the machine, or “Eject Copy Face Up/Down in By-
may cause jams. pass Mode” of User Tools.
❒ When copying onto special paper, ❒ If you have selected OHP transpar-
such as adhesive labels, be sure to encies or thick paper paper in
select “Face up” in ⇒ p.108 “Eject “Special paper”, you cannot have
Copy Face Up/Down in Bypass copies delivered face down.
Mode”. If you select “Face Down”, ❒ If you use label paper, you cannot
a paper misfeed may occur. have copies to be delivered face
Note
down.
❒ The sizes of paper you can use ❒ If you use paper larger than 432
with the bypass tray are as follows. mm, 17” in size, you cannot make
copies to be delivered face down.
Metric • Vertical: 100 – 305 mm
version ❒ The maximum number of sheets
• Horizontal: 139.7 – 600 mm
you can load into the bypass tray
Inch • Vertical: 3.9" – 12.0" depends on paper type. The
version • Horizontal: 5.5" – 23.6” number should not exceed the up-
per limit.
❒ The machine can automatically de-
tect the following sizes as standard
size copy paper.
Metric A3L, A4L, A5L, 100 × 148
version mm
Inch A3L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
version 14"L, 51/2" × 81/2"L, 100 ×
148 mm

22
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 23 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying from the Bypass Tray

A Open the bypass tray. C Select the type and size of the pa-
per.

When copying onto standard size

paper
A Press the {#}
} key.
B Press the [Select Size] key. 2
C Select the paper size.
D Press the [OK] key.

B Insert copy paper with the side When copying onto custom size
you want to copy facing up, pus- paper
ing until you hear the beep, and
then align the paper guide to the A Press the {#}} key.
paper size. B Press the [Custom Size] key.
C Press the [Vertical mm] key, en-
ter the vertical size of the paper
with the number keys, and
then press the [#] key.
D Enter the horizontal size of the
paper with the number keys,
and then press the [#] key.
Note
❒ If the [Horiz mm] key is not
highlighted, press the [Horiz
1. Extender mm] key.
Note ❒ To register the custom size
❒ If the guides are not flush entered, press the [Program]
against the paper, images might key and then press the [Exit]
be skewed or misfeeds might key.
occur.
❒ Do not stack paper over the lim-
it m a rk , o t h e rw is e i m a g e s
might be skewed or paper mis-
feeds might occur.
❒ Swing out the extender to sup-
port paper sizes larger than
A4L, 81/2" × 11"L.
❒ Fan paper to get air between the E Press the [OK] key.
sheets and avoid multi-sheet
feed.

23
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 24 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

When copying onto special paper

A Press the {#}
} key.
B Select paper type in "Special
paper".
C Press the [OK] key.

2 D Place your originals, and then

press the {Start}
} key.

E When your copy job is finished,

press the { Clear Modes}
} key to
clear the settings.

24
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 25 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Copy Functions

Adjusting Copy Image Density B Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to

adjust image density.
There are three types of adjustment
available:
2
❖ Auto image density
The machine automatically adjusts
the image density.

❖ Manual image density

You can adjust the density of the
original in seven increments.
Combined auto and manual image
❖ Combined auto and manual image
density
density
Use when copying originals with
dirty backgrounds (such as news- A Make sure the [Auto Image Density]
papers). You can adjust fore- key is selected.
ground density while leaving the
background unchanged.
B Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to
adjust the density.

Auto image density

A Make sure the [Auto Image Density]

key is selected.

Manual image density

A Press the [Auto Image Density] key

to cancel it.

25
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 26 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Selecting Original Type When the original type keys are

not displayed
Setting
A Press the [Original Type] key.
Select one of the following five types
to match your originals: B Select the original type, and
then press the [OK] key.
❖ Text
2 Select this mode when your origi-
nals contain only text (no pictures).

❖ Photo
Delicate tones in photographs and
pictures can be reproduced with
this mode.

❖ Text/Photo
Select Text/Photo when your orig-
inals contain photographs or pic-
tures with text.

❖ Pale
Select this mode for originals that
have lighter lines written in pencil,
or for faint copied slips. Faint lines
will be clearly copied.

❖ Generation Copy
If your originals are copies (gener-
ation copies), the copy image can
be reproduced sharply and clearly.
Reference
Related Initial Settings ⇒ p.98
“Original Type Display”, ⇒ p.1
“Notice”

A Press the appropriate key to select

the original type.

26
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 27 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Selecting Copy Paper

There are two ways to select copy paper:

❖ Auto Paper Select

The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper automatically, based on
original size and reproduction ratio.

❖ Manual Paper Select

2
Choose the tray containing the paper you wish to copy onto: a paper tray, by-
pass tray or large capacity tray (LCT).
Reference
⇒ p.9 “Sizes difficult to detect”
Note
❒ See the following table for copy paper sizes and directions that can be used
with Auto Paper Select (when copying at a ratio of 100%).

❖ Metric version
Where Original Is Placed Paper Size and Direction
Exposure glass A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 13"L
Document feeder A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 81/2"
× 13"L, 8KL, 16KKL

❖ Inch version
Where Original Is Placed Paper Size and Direction
Exposure glass 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
Document feeder A3L, A4KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL, 10" × 14"L, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 71/4" × 101/2"L

❒ Only the paper trays set to "No Display" or "Recycled Paper" in "Paper Type"
and also set to "Yes" in "Apply Auto Paper Select" can be selected in Auto Pa-
per Select mode.⇒ "Paper Size Settings" in the General Settings Guide

27
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 28 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Auto Paper Select

A Make sure that the [Auto Paper Select] key is selected.

Note
❒ Trays with a key mark will not be automatically selected. ⇒ "Paper Size
Settings" in the General Settings Guide

Manual Paper Select

A Select the paper tray, bypass tray or large capacity tray (LCT).
The indicator corresponding to the selected paper tray is highlighted.

Reference
⇒ p.22 “Copying from the Bypass Tray”

When the paper type keys are not displayed

A Press the [Auto Paper Select] key.
B Select the type of paper.

28
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 29 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

- Rotated copy
If the direction in which your original is placed (L or K) is different from that
of the paper you are copying onto, this function rotates the original image by 90°
and fits it on the copy paper. This function works when Auto Paper Select or
Auto Reduce/Enlarge is selected. ⇒ p.27 “Auto Paper Select”
2
R
R

Note
❒ The default setting for "Auto Tray Switching" is "With image rotation ". You
cannot use the Rotated Copy function if this setting is changed to "Without
image rotation" or "Off". ⇒ p.97 “Auto Tray Switching”
❒ You cannot use the Rotated Copy function when enlarging onto B4 or A3 size
paper. In this case, place your original in the L direction.
Original Size and Direction Copy Paper Size and
Direction
You cannot A4, When enlarg- B4, A3
rotate: B5, or ing to →
R

A5
K
GCROTA1E
R
GCROTA2E

However, you A4, When enlarg- B4, A3

can use: B5, or ing to →
A5
L
R GCROTA3E
R GCROTA4E

❒ Depending on the settings for the Staple or Punch function, you cannot use
the Rotated Copy function. ⇒ p.37 “Staple”, ⇒ p.41 “Punch”

29
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 30 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Preset Reduce/Enlarge A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

You can select a preset ratio for copy-
ing.

Note
❒ To select a preset ratio on the in-
itial display, press the shortcut
reduce/enlarge key and go to
❖ Base Point step D.
The base point of Enlarge/Reduce
differs depending on how the orig- B Press the [Enlarge] or [Reduce] key.
inal is scanned. When the original
is set on the exposure glass, the up-
C Select a ratio, and then press the
[OK] key.
per left corner will be the base
point. When it is set to the docu- D Place your originals, and then
ment feeder, the bottom left corner press the {Start}
} key.
of the original will be the base
point.

1. Base point when setting on the ex-

posure glass.
2. Base point when setting on the
document feeder.
Reference
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.99 “Copy Function Key: F1–
F5”
⇒ p.100 “R/E Priority”

30
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 31 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Zoom
- Create Margin Mode
Use "Create Margin" to reduce the im- You can change the reproduction ra-
age to 93% of its original size with the tio in 1% steps.
center as reference. By combining it
with the Reduce/Enlarge function,
you can also provide the Reduce/En-
large copy with a margin. 2
Reference
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.99 “Copy Function Key: F1–
F5”
⇒ p.100 “Ratio for Create Margin”
Note
A Press the [Create Margin] key dis- ❒ You can select a preset ratio which
played on the initial display. is near the desired ratio, then ad-
n] or [o
just the ratio with the [n o]
keys.

A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

B If you do not wish to combine it

with the Reduce/Enlarge function,
place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
B Enter the ratio.
n] and
To select a ratio with the [n
o] keys
[o
A Select a preset ratio which is
close to the desired ratio using
[Reduce] or [Enlarge].
B Adjust the ratios with the [nn]
o] keys.
or [o

31
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 32 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Note ❖ Metric version

❒ To change the ratio in 1% Where Original Is Original Size and
steps, just press the {n} or Placed Direction
{o} keys. To change the ra- Exposure glass A3L, B4L,
tio in 10% steps, press and A4KL, B5KL,
hold down the {n} or {o} 81/2" × 13"L
keys.
Document feeder A3L, B4L,
2 ❒ If you have incorrectly en- A4KL, B5KL,
tered the ratio, readjust the A5KL, B6KL,
ratio with the [nn ] or [o
o] 81/2" × 13"L
keys.
❖ Inch version
To enter a ratio with the number Where Original Is Original Size and
keys Placed Direction
Exposure glass 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
A Press the [Mag. Ratio] key. 14"L, 81/2" ×
B Enter the desired ratio with the 11"KL
number keys. Document feeder A3L, A4KL, 11"
C Press the [#] key. × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"
L, 81/2" × 11"K
D Press the [OK] key. L, 10" × 14"L,
51/2" × 81/2"KL,
C Place your originals, and then 71/4" × 101/2"L
press the {Start}
} key.
Reference
Auto Reduce/Enlarge ⇒ p.9 “Sizes difficult to detect”

The machine can choose an appropri-

A Press the [Auto Reduce/Enlarge] key.
ate reproduction ratio based on the
paper and original sizes you select.

B Select the paper tray.

C Set the original, then press the
{Start}
} key.
Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
❒ When using Auto Reduce/En-
large, see the following table for
the original sizes and directions
you can use.
32
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 33 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Size Magnification E Enter the length of the copy with

the number keys, and then press
the [#] key.
This function calculates an enlarge-
ment or reduction ratio based upon Note
the lengths of the original and copy. ❒ To change the length after
pressing the [#] key, select [Orig-
inal] or [Copy] and enter the de-
sired length. 2
A mm a mm F Press the [OK] key.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Place your original, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
Note
❒ Measure and specify the lengths of Directional Magnification (%)
the original and copy by compar-
ing "A" with "a." Copies can be reduced or enlarged at
different reproduction ratios, hori-
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key. zontally and vertically.

B Press the [Specifd. Ratio] key.

a: Horizontal ratio
C Make sure the [Size Magnification] b: Vertical ratio
key is highlighted.

D Enter the length of the original

Note
❒ You can also select a preset ratio
with the number keys, and then
that is close to the desired ratio us-
press the [#] key.
ing [Reduce] or [Enlarge], then ad-
Note just the ratio with the [nn] or [oo]
❒ You can enter sizes within the keys.
following ranges.
Metric 1 – 999 mm (in 1 mm steps)
version
Inch 0.1" – 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)
version

33
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 34 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key. D Press the [Vertical] key.

E Adjust the ratio with the [n
n]
o] keys.
or [o
F Press the [OK] key.

D Press the [OK] key.

E Place your originals, and then
2 press the {Start}
} key.

B Press the [Specifd. Ratio] key. Directional Size Magnification

C Press the [Direct. Mag.%] key. (mm)
Suitable reproduction ratios will be
To enter a ratio with the number automatically selected when you en-
keys ter the horizontal and vertical lengths
of the original and copy image you re-
A Press the [Horizontal] key. quire.
B Enter the desired ratio with the
number keys, followed by the
[#] key.
C Press the [Vertical] key.
D Enter the desired ratio with the
number keys, followed by the
[#] keys.
E Press the [OK] key.

n]
To specify a ratio with the [n 1. Horizontal original size
o] keys
and [o 2. Vertical original size
A Press the [With no] key. 3. Horizontal copy size
B Press the [Horizontal] key. 4. Vertical copy size
C Adjust the ratio using the [n
n] Note
o] keys.
or [o
❒ Specify the vertical and horizontal
Note sizes of the original and those of
❒ Pressing the [n
n] or [oo] keys the copy, as shown in the illustra-
changes the ratio in 1% steps. tion.
Pressing and holding down
the [nn] or [o
o] keys changes
it in 10% steps.
❒ If you have incorrectly en-
tered the ratio, readjust the
ratio with the [nn ] or [o
o]
keys.
34
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 35 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

❒ You can enter sizes within the fol-

lowing ranges.
J Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
Metric Vertical: 1 – 999 mm (in 1 mm
version steps)
Horizontal: 1 – 9999 mm (in 1 Sort
mm steps)
The machine can scan your originals
Inch Vertical: 0.1” – 99.9” (in 0.1”
into memory and automatically sort
version steps)
the copies. 2
Horizontal: 0.1” – 99.9” (in
0.1” steps) Reference
Related Initial Settings
A Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key. ⇒ p.107 “Select Stack Function”
⇒ p.106 “Memory Full Auto Scan
Restart”
⇒ p.106 “Rotate Sort: Auto Paper
Continue”
⇒ p.97 “Auto Tray Switching”

❖ Sort
Copies are assembled as sets in se-
B Press the [Specifd. Ratio] key. quential order.

C Press the ["Dir. Size Mag mm"] key.

D Enter the horizontal size of the 3 3 3 3
original with the number keys, 1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

and then press the [#] key.

E Enter the horizontal size of the

copy with the number keys, and ❖ Rotate Sort
then press the [#] key. Every other copy set is rotated by
90°(KL) and delivered to the
F Enter the vertical size of the origi- copy tray.
nal with the number keys, and
then press the [#] key.

G Enter the vertical size of the copy

1

with the number keys, and then 2

3
2
3 3
2

2
1 1 1
3

press the [#] key.

Note
❒ To change a length, press the Note
key you wish to change and en- ❒ To use the Rotate Sort function,
ter the new value. two paper trays with paper
identical in size but different in
H Press the [OK] key. direction (KL) are required.
I Press the [OK] key.
35
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 36 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

❖ Shift Sort ❖ When the Booklet Finisher is

• The optional Finisher 3000B installed
(100–sheet staples), Finisher
3000M(50–sheet staples) or
Booklet finisher is required to
use this function.
Each time the copies of one set
or those of a different job are de-
2 livered, the next copy set is
shifted when delivered, so that
you can separate sets or jobs.
B Enter the number of copy sets
with the number keys.

2
3 Note
123 123

❒ The maximum number of sets is

123

999.
A Press the [Sort] or [Rotate Sort] key. ❒ To confirm the type of finishing,
press the {Sample Copy} } key. ⇒
❖ When a finisher is not installed p.40 “Sample Copy”

C Place your originals.

Note
❒ When placing an original on the
exposure glass, start with the
first page to be copied. When
placing an original in the docu-
ment feeder (ADF), set so that
the last page is on the bottom.
❖ When the Finisher 3000B(100–sheet ❒ When placing an original on the
staples) or the Finisher 3000M(50– exposure glass or in the docu-
sheet staples) is installed ment feeder (ADF) using batch
mode, press the {#} } key after all
the originals have been
scanned.

D Press the {Start}} key.

Reference
⇒ p.40 “Sample Copy”
⇒ p.40 “Changing the Number
of Sets”

36
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 37 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Stack Staple
This function collates copies of pages An optional finisher is required to use
from a multi-page original. Stacks of this function.
each page's copies are shifted for ease
of separation. Each copy set can be stapled together.

2
3
111 333

2
1
222

A Press the [Stack] key.

Important
❒ If you staple copies without the
stapler cartridge for Saddle Stitch
when using the Booklet Finisher, a
paper misfeed may occur.
Note
B Enter the number of copies with ❒ You cannot use the Bypass Tray
with this function.
the number keys.

C Place your originals, then press Reference

the {Start}
} key. Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.106 “Select Stapling Position
Note (Top Left)”
❒ When placing originals on the
⇒ p.107 “Select Stapling Position
exposure glass, start with the
(Bottom Left)”
first page to be copied. When
placing originals in the docu- ⇒ p.107 “Select Stapling Position
ment feeder (ADF), set so that (Top Right)”
the last page is on the bottom. ⇒ p.107 “Select Stapling Position
❒ When placing originals on the (Bottom Right)”
exposure glass or in the docu-
ment feeder (ADF) using batch
mode, press the {#}
} key after all
have been scanned.

37
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 38 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

❖ Finisher 3000M(50–sheet staples)

Stapling position and original setting
Original logation
Stapling
Place all the originals in the automatic Exposure Document
position
glass Feeder
document feeder (ADF) in the orien-
tation in which they can be read nor-

Top
mally. When placing the original on
the exposure glass, keep the same ori-
2 entation, but set the original facing

Top slant
downwards. When there is copy pa-
per that is identical in size and orien-
tation to your original, the staple
positions are as follows.

Bottom
❖ Finisher 3000B(100–sheet staples)
Original logation
Stapling

Left 2
position
Exposure Document
glass Feeder
Top

Top 2

ZGVX090E
Top slant

*1
This table shows staple positioning.
The orientation of the paper does not
indicate direction of delivery.
*2
You cannot staple at this position
Bottom

when copying onto A3 or A4 size pa-

per.
*3
If you want to staple at this position
on A3 or A4 size paper, select [Rotate]
Left 2

and then select "Top 2".

Top 2

*1
This table shows staple positioning.
The orientation of the paper does not
indicate direction of delivery.
*2
You cannot staple at this position
when copying onto A3 or A4 size pa-
per.
*3
If you want to staple at this position
on A3 or A4 size paper, select [Rotate]
and then select "Top 2".

38
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 39 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

❖ Booklet Finisher A Select one of the stapling posi-

Original logation
Stapling
tions.
position
Exposure Document
glass Feeder
❖ Finisher 3000B(100–sheet
staples), Finisher 3000M(50–sheet
Top

staples)

2
Top slant
Bottom
Left 2

Note
❒ The stapling position will be
fixed to “Top”.
Top 2

❖ Booklet Finisher
Saddle stitch

ZGVX100E

*1
This table shows staple positioning.
The orientation of the paper does not
indicate direction of delivery.
*2
You cannot staple at this position
when copying onto A3 or A4 size pa-
per. Note
*3 If you want to staple at this position ❒ When you select the stapling
on A3 or A4 size paper, select [Rotate]
and then select "Top 2". position, Sort mode is automati-
cally selected.
Reference
⇒ p.38 “Stapling position and
original setting”

B Enter the number of copy sets

with the number keys.

C Place your originals, then press

the {Start}
} key.

39
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 40 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Note Note
❒ When placing originals on the ❒ If you press the [Suspend] key
exposure glass, start with the after checking the results, re-
first page to be copied. When turn to step A to adjust copy set-
placing originals in the docu- tings as necessary. You can
ment feeder (ADF), set so that change the settings for Staple,
the last page is on the bottom. Punch, Duplex, Copy Orienta-
2 ❒ When placing original on the tion, Stamp, Margin Adjust,
Cover/Slip Sheet and Desig-
exposure glass or in the docu-
ment feeder (ADF) using batch nate. However, depending on
mode, press the {#} } key after all the combination of functions,
have been scanned. you may not be able to change
some settings.

Sample Copy
Changing the Number of Sets
Use this function to check copy set-
tings before making a long copy run. You can change the number of copy
sets during copying.
Note
Note
❒ This function can be used only
when the Sort function has been ❒ This function can only be used
turned on. when the Sort function has been
turned on.
A Select Sort and any other required
functions, and then place the orig- A While "Copying" is displayed,
inals. press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.

B Press the {Sample Copy}} key. B Press the [Change Quantity] key.

C Enter the number of copy sets

ZGVS070E
with the number keys, and then
One copy set is delivered as a sam- press the {#}
} key.
ple. Note
C If the sample is acceptable, press ❒ The number of sets you can en-
the [Print] key. ter depends on when the
{Clear/Stop}
} key is pressed.
The number of copies made is the
number specified, minus one for D Press the [Continue] key.
the proof copy.
Copying starts again.
40
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 41 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Punch
The optional finisher and punch unit are required to use this function.
This function is used to make punch holes in copies.

❖ 2 holes

❖ 3 holes

❖ 4 holes

Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray with this function.
❒ The 4 – hole punch type is only capable of punching in the 4 – hole format.

41
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 42 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Punch hole positions

Direction in which Original is Set Punch Hole Positions *1

Exposure glass Document feeder
2 holes K

2
L

3 holes K
Standard

4 holes K

2 holes K

3 holes K
90º Turn

4 holes K

*1
This table shows the punch hole positions. The orientation of the paper does not in-
42 dicate direction of delivery.
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 43 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

A Select the punch position.

B Place your originals, then press the {Start}} key.

Duplex Originals and Copy Direction

There are two types of duplex. You can select the orientation.
• Top to Top
❖ 1 Sided → 2 Sided
Copies two 1–side pages onto one
2–sided page.

Duplex1

1 2 1 • Top to Bottom

Duplex2

Note
❖ 2 Sided → 2 Sided
Copies one 2–sided page onto one ❒ You can change the default orien-
2–sided page. tation with the User Tools. ⇒ p.99
“Copy Orientation in Duplex
Mode”, ⇒ p.99 “Original Orienta-
tion in Duplex Mode”
1 1 A Press the [Orientation] key and the
select orientation (Original/Copy).
2 2 Then press the [OK] key.

43
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 44 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Original Direction and Completed Copies A Press the {Dup./Combine/Series}

}
key.
The resulting copy image will differ
according to the direction in which
you place your original (widthwise
K or lengthwise L).

B Select the ([1 Sided]/[2 Sided]) key

for "Original", and then press the
([1 Sided]/[2 Sided]) key for "Copy".

Note
❒ To change the copy orientation,
press the [Orientation] key. ⇒
p.43 “Originals and Copy Direc-
*1
The table shows the orientation of im- tion”
ages on the front and back of copies,
not the direction of delivery. C Press the [OK] key.
Reference
Related Initial Settings
D Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
⇒ p.62 “Margin Adjustment”
Note
⇒ p.101 “Back Margins :
❒ When placing originals on the
Left/Right”
exposure glass, start with the
⇒ p.101 “Back Margin : Top/Bot- first page to be copied. When
tom” placing originals in the docu-
ment feeder (ADF), set so that
the last page should be on the
bottom.
❒ When placing originals on the
exposure glass or in the docu-
ment feeder (ADF) using batch
mode, press the {#}
} key after all
have been scanned.
44
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 45 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

❖ 2 Sided, 1 Page → Combine 1 Side

1 Sided Combine Copies one 2-sided original to one
side of a sheet.
Combine several pages onto one side
of a sheet.

❖ 1 Sided, 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side 1

Copies two 1-sided originals to
1 2
one side of a sheet. 2 2

GCSHVYOE

1 2 1 2
❖ 2 Sided, 2 Pages → Combine 1 Side
Copies two 2-sided originals to
one side of a sheet.

❖ 1 Sided, 4 Pages → Combine 1 Side 1

3
Copies four 1-sided originals to 1 2
one side of a sheet. 2
3 4
4

1
2
GCSHVYBE
3 1 2
4

3 4 ❖ 2 Sided, 4 Pages → Combine 1 Side

Copies four 2–sided originals to
one side of a sheet.
GCSHVY8E

❖ 1 Sided, 8 Pages → Combine 1 Side 1

3
Copies eight 1-sided originals to 1 2 3 4
5
2
one side of a sheet. 4
7
5 6 7 8
6
1 8
2

GCSHVY4E
1 2 3 4
7 5 6 7 8
8

GCSHVY3E

45
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 46 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

❖ Orientation of the Original and Image A Press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key.

Position of Combine
Open to Left R Originals

2
Open to Top S Originals
B Press the ([1 Sided]/[2 Sided]) key
for "Original", and then press the
[Combine 1 Side] key for "Copy".

❖ Placing Originals (Originals Placed in

the Document Feeder)
• Originals read from left to right

1 2 1 2 Reference
3 4 3
⇒ p.43 “Originals and Copy Di-
4

rection”

C Select the number of originals to

Combine5

• Originals read from top to bot- combine.

tom
D Select the paper.
2
E Press the [OK] key.
2 1 1

F Place your originals,

4 3
4 3
and then
press the {Start}
} key.
Combine6

Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
Reference
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.101 “Erase Original Shadow
in Combine”
⇒ p.103 “Copy Order in Combine”
⇒ p.103 “Separation Line in Com-
bine”
46
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 47 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

❖ 1 Sided, 16 Pages → Combine 2 Side

2 Sided Combine Copies sixteen 1-sided originals to
one sheet with eight pages per
Combines various pages of originals side.
onto one sheet with two sides.
1
❖ 1 Sided, 4 Pages → Combine 2 Side 2 1 2 3 4
Copies four 1-sided originals to 5 6 7 8
one sheet with two pages per side.
1 2
15
16 9 10 11 12
1
2 1 2
13 14 15 16
3 2
4 GCSHVY5E
4 3

1. Front
2. Back
❖ 2 Sided, 4 Pages → Combine 2 Side
Copies two 2-sided originals to
❖ 1 Sided, 8 Pages → Combine 2 Side one sheet with two pages per side.
Copies eight 1-sided originals to
one sheet with four pages per side.

1 1
1 2
2 3

2
4 3
1 2 5 6 4

7 3 4 7 8
8
1 2

GCSHVYAE
❖ 2 Sided, 8 Pages → Combine 2 Side
Copies four 2-sided originals to
1. Front
one sheet with four pages per side.
2. Back

1
3
5
1 2 5 6
2 7
4 3 4 7 8
6
1 2
8

GCSHVY2E

1. Front
2. Back

47
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 48 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

❖ 2 Sided, 16 Pages → Combine 2 Side B Press the ([1 Sided]/[2 Sided]) key
Copies eight 2-sided originals to for "Original", and then press the
one sheet with eight pages per [Combine 2 Side] key for "Copy".
side.

1
3 1 2 3 4
2 5 6 7 8
2 4
1
13
15 9 10 11 12
14
13 14 15 16
16
2
GCSHVY6E Reference
⇒ p.43 “Originals and Copy Di-
1. Front rection”
2. Back
C Select the number of originals to
Note combine.
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function. D Select the paper.
Reference E Press the [OK] key.
⇒ p.46 “Orientation of the Orig-
inal and Image Position of Com-
F Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
bine”
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.101 “Erase Original Shad- Series Copies
ow in Combine”
Separately copies the front and back
⇒ p.103 “Copy Order in Com- of a 2–sided original or the two facing
bine” pages of a bound original onto two
⇒ p.103 “Separation Line in sheets.
Combine”
❖ Book → 1 Sided
A Press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key. You can make one-sided copies
from two facing pages of a bound
original (book).

1 2 1 2

48
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 49 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

❖ Book → 2 Sided ❖ Inch version

Copies a two-page spread original
Paper for 1–
onto one sheet with one page per
Original sided copy
side.
11" × 17"L 81/2" × 11"K × 2
sheets
81/2" × 11"L 51/2" × 81/2"K ×
1 2 1 2 sheets

❒ See the following table for orig-

2
2
inal and copy paper sizes when
making 1 sided copies using a
100% ratio.

❖ Metric version
❖ Front & Back → 2 Sided
Original Copy paper
Copies each two-page spread orig-
inal as it is onto both sides of a A3L A4K 2 sided
sheet. B4L B5K 2 sided
A4L A5K 2 sided

❖ Inch version
1 2 1 2
Original Copy pager
3 3
11" × 17"L 81/2" × 11"K 2
sided
81/2" × 11"L 51/2" × 81/2"K 2
sided

Note
❒ See the following table for orig-
A Press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key.
inal and copy paper sizes when
making 2 sided copies using a
100% ratio.

❖ Metric version
Original Copy paper
A3L A4K × 2 sheets
B4L B5K × 2 sheets
A4L A5K × 2 sheets B Press the [Series/Book] key.
C Select a series type ([Book → 1 Sid-
ed] / [Book → 2 Sided] / [Front&Back
→ 2 Sided]), then press the [OK]
key.

D Press the [OK] key.

49
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 50 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

E Make sure that the [Auto Paper Se- B Press the [2 Sided] key for the orig-
lect] key is selected. inal, then press the [1 Sided] key
for the copy.
F Place your originals on the expo-
sure glass, and then press the
{Start}
} key.
Note
2 ❒ Press the {#}
} key after all origi-
nals have been scanned.

→1 Sided
2 Sided→
Reference
You can make one-sided copies from
⇒ p.43 “Originals and Copy Di-
two-sided originals.
rection”

C Press the [OK] key

D Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
1 1 2

2
Copying Book Originals
You can copy multiple originals in
page order when they are folded or
folded and stacked.
A Press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key.
❖ 1 Sided → Booklet
Make copies in page order for a
folded booklet as shown in the fol-
lowing illustrations:
• Open to Left

1
2
3 2 3
4

1 4

GCBOOK0E

50
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 51 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

• Open to Right ❖ 1 Sided → Magazine

Copies two or more originals to
make page ordered copies when
1 they are folded and stacked.
2
3 3 2
• Open to Left
4
1
4 1 2

2
2 7 4 5

GCBOOK1E 7
1 8 3 6
8

❖ 2 Sided → Booklet
Make 2 sided originals into page
ordered copies for a folded book- GCBOOK3E

let, as shown in the following illus- • Open to Right

trations:
• Open to Left 1
2

7 2 5 4

7 8 1 6 3
8

GCBOOK4E

❖ 2 Sided → Magazine
• Open to Right Copies two or more originals of 2
sided into page ordered copies
when they are folded and stacked.
• Open to Left

51
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 52 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

• Open to Right ❖ Open to Right

5 7 5
3 1 3 1

2
GCBOOK6E

Note
How to fold copies to make a booklet ❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
Fold the copy so that a crease is in the with these functions.
center and open as shown in the fol- ❒ The machine automatically selects
lowing illustration: the reproduction ratio automati-
cally to the paper size.
1 2 Reference
3 3
Related Initial Settings
1 1
⇒ p.101 “Erase Original Shadow
in Combine”

A Select “Open to Left” or “Open to

Right” with User Tools.
GCBOOK2E

B Press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key.

1. Open to Left
2. Open to Right

How to fold and stack copies to make a

magazine
Fold and stack copies to make a mag-
azine, and open as shown in the fol-
lowing illustrations:
C Press the [Series/Book] key.
❖ Open to Left
D Press the [Book] key.
E Select a book type from [1 Sided →
Booklet], [2 Sided → Booklet], [1 Sided
1
7
3
5
1 3
5 → Magazine] and [2 Sided → Maga-
zine], and then press the [OK] key.

F Press the [OK] key.

GCBOOK5E
G Select the paper.
52
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 53 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

H Place your originals, and then ❖ Original: A5KK/Copy paper: A4L

L
L/Copy paper A4K
or Original: A5L K
press the {Start}
} key.
2 repeats 8 repeats 32 repeats
Note
(100%) (50%) (25%)
❒ When placing individual origi-
nals on the exposure glass or in
the document feeder in Batch
mode, press the {#}
} key after all
are scanned. 2
Repeat 5
Repeat 3 Repeat 4

Image Repeat
Reference
The original image is copied repeat- Related Initial Settings
edly. ⇒ p.102 “Image Repeat Separation
Line”

A Select the size of the copy paper

and the reproduction ratio.

B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

Note
❒ The number of repeated images
depends on original size, copy pa-
per size, and reproduction ratio.
See the following table.
C Press the [Edit Image] key.
❖ Original: A5KK/Copy paper: A4K
K
L/Copy paper A4L
or Original: A5L L D Press the [Image Repeat] key.
4 repeats (71%) 16 repeats (35%) E Press the [OK] key.
F Press the [OK] key.
G Place your original, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
Repeat 1 Repeat 2

53
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 54 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

❒ Originals of size A5L and B6KL

Double Copies (51/2" × 81/2"L) cannot be detect-
ed properly on the exposure glass.
One original image is copied twice Be sure to select such copy paper
onto one copy, as shown in the illus- manually, or set the originals in the
tration. document feeder.
Reference
2 Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.102 “Double Copies Separa-
tion Line”

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
❒ See the following table for original B Press the [Edit Image] key.
and copy paper sizes when using a
100% ratio. C Press the [Double Copies] key.
❖ Metric version D Press the [OK] key.
Original Size and Copy Paper Size E Press the [OK] key.
Direction and Direction
A5L A4K
F Select the paper.
B6L B5K G Place your originals, and then
A4K A3L
press the {Start}
} key.
A5K A4L
B6K B5L

❖ Inch version
Original Size and Copy Paper Size
Direction and Direction
51/2" × 81/2"L 81/2" × 11"K
51/2" × 81/2"K 81/2" × 11"L
8 /2" × 11"K
1
11" × 17"L

54
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 55 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Centering A Select the paper.

You can make copies with the image
B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.
moved to the center of the paper.

C Press the [Edit Image] key.

D Press the [Centring] key.
Note E Press the [OK] key.
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function. F Press the [OK] key.
❒ Original sizes and directions for G Place your originals, and then
centering are listed below. press the {Start}
} key.
❖ Metric version
Original Original size and direction Scanning Position
placed on:
You can move the scanned position of
Exposure A3L, B4L, A4KL, originals.
glass B5KL, 81/2" × 13"L
Document A3L, B4L, A4KL,
feeder B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 1
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"KL,
81/2" × 13"L

❖ Inch version
Original Original size and direction
placed on:
Exposure 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
glass 81/2" × 11"KL 1. Point where the machine starts
Document 11" × 17"L, 8 /2" × 14"L,
1 scanning.
feeder 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" ×
81/2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L,
11" × 15"L, 8" × 10"L, 10" ×
14"L

55
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 56 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Note E Set the scanned position for the

❒ You can move the scanned posi- back of the original. Press the [↑↑]
tion up to 30 mm (in 1mm steps) ↓] key to set the top or bottom
or [↓
upward, downward, to left and to position. Press the [←←] or [→
→] key
right. to set the left or right position.
Then press the [OK] key.
1
Note
2 ❒ The scanned position for the
4 2
back set here is valid when you
copy 2-sided originals.
3 F Press the [OK] key.
1. Top: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2" G Press the [OK] key.
2. Right: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2" H Place your originals, and then
3. Bottom: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2" press the {Start}
} key.
4. Left: 0 – 30 mm, 0" – 1.2"
A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key. Erase
This func tion erase s the c enter
and/or all four sides of the original
image. This function also erases the
inside or outside of a specified area.
This function has the following three
types:

❖ Border
This mode erases edge margin of
B Press the [Edit Image] key. the original image.

C Press the [Scan Position] key.

D Set the scanned position for the
face of the original. Press the [↑ ↑]
↓] key to set the top or bottom
or [↓
position. Press the [←←] or [→→] key
to set the left or right position.
Note
❒ If you have incorrectly set the
↑],
position, readjust with the [↑
↓], [←
[↓ ←] or [→
→] key.
❒ If you don't need to set the
scanned position of the back of
the original, go to step F.

56
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 57 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

❖ Center Reference
This mode erases center margin of
The erase width in the Border,
the original image.
Ce nt er and C en te r/ Bo r d er
modes is set to 10 mm (0.4”) at
default settings. You can change
this settings w ith the User
Tools. ⇒ p.101 “Erase Center
Width”, ⇒ p.101 “Erase Border 2
Width”
Note
❒ The relation between the original's
orientation and the erased part is
as follows:
❖ Center/Border L original K original
This mode erases both center and
edge margins of the original im-
age.

1 2
1

1. Erased part
2. 2 – 99 mm, 0.1" – 3.9"

Border Erase
❖ Inside
This mode blanks out a designated A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.
area of the copy image.

❖ Outside
This mode blanks out all areas of
the copy image except the area you B Press the [Erase] key.
choose.
C Press the [Erase Center/Border] key.
D Set an erase border width.

57
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 58 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Selecting [Same Width] F Set the border to be erased from

of the back.
A Press the [Same Width] key.
Note
❒ Erasing the border of the back is
valid only when you copy 2-sid-
ed originals.
2 G Press the [OK] key.
H Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.

B Set an erase border width with

n] and [o
the [n o] keys.
Center Erase

Note A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

❒ To change the value entered,
press the [nn] and [o
o] keys
to set the new value.
C Press the [OK] key.

Selecting [Diff. Width]

A Press the [Diff. Width] key.

B Press the [Erase] key.

C Press the [Erase Center/Border] key.
D Press the [Center] key.
E Set the erase center width with
n] and [o
the [n o] keys, and then
press the [OK] key.
B Press the key for the border
you wish to change, and set an F Press the [2-sided Setting] key and
erase border width with the the [Back Side] key.
n] and [o
[n o] keys.
Note
C Press the [OK] key.
❒ If you don't erase the center of
E Press the [2-sided Setting] key and the back of the original, go to
the [Back Side] key. step H.

Note G Set the center to be erased from of

❒ If you don't need to erase the the back.
border of the back of the origi- Note
nal, go to step G.
❒ Erasing the center of the back is
valid only when you copy 2-sid-
58 ed originals.
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 59 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

H Press the [OK] key. Selecting [Diff. Width]

I Place your originals, and then A Press the [Diff. Width] key.
press the {Start}
} key.

Center/Border Erase

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key. 2

B Press the key for the part you

wish to change, and then set an
erase margin width with the
n] and [o
[n o] keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
B Press the [Erase] key. F Press the [2-sided Setting] key and
C Press the [Erase Center/Border] key. the [Back Side] key.

D Press the [Center/Border] key. Note

❒ If you don't need to erase the
E Set the border to be erased. center or border from the back
of the original, go to step H.

Selecting [Same Width] G Set the center or border to be

erased from the back.
A Press the [Same Width] key.
Note
❒ Erasing the center or border
from the back is valid only
when you copy 2-sided origi-
nals.

H Press the [OK] key.

I Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
B Press the [Center] key, and then
set the erase center width with
n] and [o
the [n o] keys.
C Press the [Border] key, and then
set the erase border width with
n] and [o
the [n o] keys.
D Press the [OK] key.

59
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 60 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Inside Erase I Press the [2-sided Setting] key and

the [Back Side] key.
A Decide where the machine starts Note
scanning (X1, Y1) and where it ❒ If you don't need to erase the
stops scanning (X2, Y2). image on the back, go to step K.
Note J Enter the values of [X1], [Y1], [X2]
2 ❒ You can input lengths of 0 – 432 and [Y2] for the back.
mm, 0 – 17".
Note
B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key. ❒ Erasing the image on the back is
valid when you copy 2-sided
originals.

K Press the [OK] key.

L Press the [OK] key.
M Press the [OK] key.
N Place your originals, and then
C Press the [Erase] key. press the {Start}
} key.

D Press the [Erase Inside 1] or [Erase Outside Erase

Inside 2] key.

E Enter the value of [X1] with the A Decide where the machine starts
number keys, and then press the scanning (X1, Y1) and where it
[#] key. stops scanning (X2, Y2).
Note
❒ You can input lengths of 0 – 432
mm, 0 – 17".

B Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

F Enter the value of [Y1] with the

number keys, and then press the
[#] key.

G Enter the value of [X2] with the

number keys, and then press the
[#] key. C Press the [Erase] key.
H Enter the value of [Y2] with the D Press the [Erase Outside] key.
number keys, and then press the
[#] key.
60
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 61 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

E Enter the value of [X1] with the 3 Edges Full Bleed

number keys, and then press the
[#] key.
You can make full image copy by cut-
ting down the margin of top, bottom,
and right sides. This function is useful
for originals full of image.

F Enter the value of [Y1] with the

number keys, and then press the
[#] key.

G Enter the value of [X2] with the

number keys, and then press the
Preparation
[#] key.
Before using this function, select [3
H Enter the value of [Y2] with the Edges Full Bleed] for a Copy Func-
number keys, and then press the tion Key. ⇒ p.99 “Copy Function
[#] key. Key: F1–F5”

I Press the [2-sided Setting] key and A Press the [3 Edges Full Bleed] key.
the [Back Side] key.
Note
❒ If you don't need to erase the
image on the back, go to step K.

J Enter the values of [X1], [Y1], [X2]

and [Y2] for the back.
Note
❒ Erasing the image on the back is B Place your originals, and then
valid when you copy 2-sided press the {Start}
} key.
originals.

K Press the [OK] key.

L Press the [OK] key.
M Press the [OK] key.
N Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.

61
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 62 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Margin Adjustment A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

You can shift the image to the left,
right, top or bottom to make a bind-
ing margin.

2
A A
B Press the [Erase/Margin Adj.] key.
C Press the [Margin Adjustment] key.
D Set a binding margin for a front
Reference ←] and [→
page. Press the [← →] keys
when setting the left and right
Related Initial Settings
↓] and [↑
margins, and the [↓ ↑] keys
⇒ p.101 “Front Margin : when setting the top and bottom
Left/Right” margins.
⇒ p.101 “Back Margins :
Note
Left/Right”
❒ To change the value entered,
⇒ p.101 “Front Margin : Top/Bot- press the [←←], [→
→], [↓
↓], [↑
↑] keys
tom” to set the new value.
⇒ p.101 “Back Margin : Top/Bot- ❒ If you do not need to specify the
tom” margins for the back side pages,
⇒ p.101 “1 sided→2 sided Auto press the [OK] key and go to step
Margins:T to T” F.
Note E Set a binding margin for the back
❒ You can change the width of the ←] and [→
side pages. Press the [← →]
binding margin as follows. keys when setting the left and right
margins, and the [↓↓] and [↑↑] keys
Metric 0 – 30 mm (in 1 mm incre-
version ments)
when setting the top and bottom
margins. Then press the [OK] key.
Inch 0" – 1.2" (in 0.1" increments)
version Note
❒ Margin on the back side of the
page is available only when [Du-
plex] or [Duplex] of Combine is
selected.

F Press the [OK] key.

G Press the [OK] key.
H Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.
62
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 63 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Background Numbering G Press the [OK] key.

Use this function to have numbers
H Set your originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.
printed on the background of copies.

Preset Stamp
Messages you use frequently can be 2
stored in memory and stamped on
copies.

GCSTMP2E

Reference
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.104 “Size” and “Density” in
“Background Numbering”.

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

One of the following eight messages
can be stamped on copies with a
frame around it: "COPY", "URGENT",
"PRIORITY", "For Your Info.", "Pre-
liminary", "For internal use", "CONFI-
DENTIAL", "DRAFT".

B Press the [Stamp] key.

C Press the [Background Numbering]
key.

D Enter the number to start count-

ing from with the number keys.
Note
❒ To change the entered number,
press the [Clear] or {Clear/Stop}
}
key and enter the new number.

E Press the [OK] key.

F Press the [OK] key.

63
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 64 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Stamp Position and Original Direction C Press the [Preset Stamp] key.
D Select the desired message.
E Press the [All Pages] or [1st Page on-
ly] key to select the print page.
Note
2 ❒ You can change the position,
size, and density of the stamp.
⇒ p.64 “Changing stamp posi-
tion, size and density”

F After you specify all the desired

settings, press the [OK] key.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Place your originals, and then
press the {Start}
} key.

Changing stamp position, size and

GCSTMP5E
density
Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
A Press the [Change] key.
with this function. B Select the position for print, size
❒ Only one message can be stamped and density, then press the [OK]
at a time. key.
Reference
⇒ p.104 “Stamp Language”
⇒ p.104 “Stamp Position”
⇒ p.104 “Stamp Format”

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

B Press the [Stamp] key.

64
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 65 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Reference
User Stamp Related Initial Settings
Copies with the registered stamp. ⇒ p.104 “Stamp Position”
⇒ p.104 “Stamp Format”

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

2

Preparation
Before using this function, you
have to program a user stamp. B Press the [Stamp] key.
⇒ p.66 “To program the user C Press the [User Stamp] key.
stamp”
D Select the stamp you require.
Stamp position and original orientation E Press the [All Pages] or [1st Page on-
ly] key to select the print page.

Note
❒ You can change the stamp posi-
tion. ⇒ p.66 “To change the
stamp position”

F After making all settings, press

the [OK] key.

G Press the [OK] key.

H Place the original, then press the
GCSTMP6E

Note {Start}
} key.
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
❒ Only one message can be stamped
at a time.
65
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 66 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

T h e m ai n m e n u o f t h e C o p i-
To change the stamp position er/Document Server features ap-
pears.
A Press the [Change] key.
D Press the [Stamp] key.
B Select the desired position, and
then press the [OK] key. E Press the [User Stamp] key.
2 F Press the [Program/Delete Stamp]
To program the user stamp key.

Note G Press the [Program] key and press

the stamp number (1–4) you want
❒ The range of stamp images for
to program.
readability is 10 – 297 mm high
(0.4" – 11.7") and 10 – 432 mm (0.4" Note
– 17") wide. ❒ Stamp numbers with m already
have settings in them.
❒ If the stamp number is already
being used, the machine will
ask you if you wish to overwrite
it — Press the [Yes] or [No] key.
1

ZGVX040E
H Enter the user stamp name with
the letter keys on the display pan-
1. Placing the original on the expo- el. You can register up to 10 char-
sure glass acters.
❒ Up to four messages that you use Reference
frequently can be stored in memo- ⇒“Entering Text Characters” in
ry. the General Settings Guide
A Make sure the machine is in Copy I Enter the horizontal size of the
mode. stamp with the number keys, and
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. then press the [#] key.

J Press the [Vertical] key, and then

enter the vertical size in the same
way as step I.

K Place the user stamp on the expo-

sure glass, and then press the
["Start Scanning"] key.
The original will be scanned, and
the stamp will be registered.
ZGVS010E

C Press the [Copier/Document Server

Features] key.

66
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 67 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

Note E Press the [User Stamp] key.

❒ Originals cannot be scanned
from the document feeder when F Press the [Program/Delete Stamp]
programming the user stamp. key.

L Press the [Exit] key. G Press the [Delete] key, then press
the stamp number (1–4) you want
M Press the [Exit] key. to delete.
2
The display returns to the main
menu of the Copier/Document
H Select the [Delete] key, then press
the [OK] key.
Server features.

N Press the [Exit] key. I Press the [Exit] key.

The display returns to the main
Exits the settings and prepares to menu of the Copier/Document
copy. Server features.

To delete the user stamp J Press the [Exit] key.

Exits the settings and prepares to
Important copy.
❒ You cannot restore a deleted
stamp.
Date Stamp
A Make sure the machine is in Copy Use this function to print a date on
mode.
copies.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

ZGVS010E

C Press the [Copier/Document Server You can select from the following
Features] key. date formats.
• MM/DD/YYYY
• MM.DD.YYYY
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• YYYY.MM.DD
D Press the [Stamp] key. • DD.MMM.YYYY

67
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 68 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Stamp position and original orientation B Press the [Stamp] key.

C Press the [Date Stamp] key.
D Press the [All Pages] or [1st Page on-
ly] key to select the print page.

Note
❒ You can change the font and po-
sition of the date to be stamped.
⇒ p.68 “To change the date for-
mat”
GCSTMP7E
E After all settings are complete,
press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray F Press the [OK] key.
with this function.
G Place the original, then press the
Reference {Start}
} key.
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.105 “Font” To change the date format
⇒ p.105 “Size”
⇒ p.105 “Superimpose” A Press the [Change Format] key.
⇒ p.105 “Stamp Position”
⇒ “Set Date”in the General Set-
tings Guide

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key.

B Select the desired date format,

and then press the [OK] key.

68
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 69 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

To change the stamp position Stamp position and orientation of

originals
A Press the left bottom [Change] key.

B Select the desired Date Stamp po-

sition, and then press the [OK]
key.

Page Numbering
Use this function to print page num-
bers on your copies.
GCSTMP8E

Note
❒ You cannot use the bypass tray
with this function.
Reference
Related Initial Settings
⇒ p.105 “Font”
⇒ p.105 “Size”
There are six types of Page Number-
ing (n is the total number of pages in ⇒ p.105 “Superimpose”
your original): ⇒ p.105 “Stamp Format”
• P1,P2,…Pn ⇒ p . 1 0 5 “ D u p l e x B a c k P ag e
• 1/n,2/n,...n/n Stamping Position”
• -1-,-2-,...-n- ⇒ p.105 “Stamp Position”
• P.1,P.2,...P.n ⇒ p.105 “Stamp on Designated
Slip Sheet”
• 1, 2…n
• 1–1,1–2,..1–n

69
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 70 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

A Press the [Edit/Stamp] key. Changing the stamp position

A Press the left bottom [Change] key.

B Press the [Stamp] key.

C Press the [Page Numbering] key.
B Select the desired position, and
D Select the format. then press the [OK] key.

Specify the first printing page and start

number

If you selected (P1,P2…, -1-,-2-…,

P.1, P.2…, 1, 2…, )

Note
Note ❒ Below gives an example based on
❒ You can specify the stamp posi- when (P1, P2...) is selected. The
tion, pages to be stamped, and steps are the same for other cases.
numbering. ⇒ p.70 “Changing
the stamp position”⇒ p.70 A Press the right bottom [Change] key.
“Specify the first printing page
and start number” B Press the [First Printing Page] key,
and then use the number keys to
E After you have made all desired enter the original sheet number to
settings, press the [OK] key. start numbering from.

F Press the [OK] key.

G Set the originals, then press the
{Start}
} key.

Note
❒ To change the number entered,
press the [Print Inquiry List] or
{Clear/Stop}
} key, and then enter
70 a new number.
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 71 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

C Press the {#}} key. B Press the [First Printing Page] key,
and then use the number keys to
D Press the [Numbering from/to] key, enter the original sheet number to
and then use the number keys to start numbering from.
enter the number to start number-
ing from, then press the {#}
} key.
Note
❒ The following gives an example 2
based on when the first printing
page is “2” and the first page
number is “3”.

Note
❒ To change the number entered,
press the [Print Inquiry List] or
{Clear/Stop}
} key, and then enter
GCANPE2-2E
a new number.
E Press the [Last Number] key, and C Press the {#}} key.
then use the number keys to enter
the page number at which to stop D Press the [Numbering from/to] key,
numbering, then press the { #} } and then use the number keys to
key. enter the page number to start
numbering from, and then press
the {#}
} key.

E Press the [Last Number] key, and

then use the number keys to enter
the page number at which to stop
numbering, then press the { #} }
key.
Proceed to step F when not chang-
ing.
Note
❒ If you wish to print until the last Note
page, press the [to the end] key. ❒ If you wish to print until the last
page, press [To the end] key.
F When page designation is com-
❒ The last number is the last page
plete, press the [OK] key.
printed on. For example, if the
G Press the [OK] key. [Total Pages] is 10, and you wish
to print up to 7 but do not wish
to print from page 8 on, enter [7]
If you selected (1/5, 2/5…) as [Last Number]. Normally, you
do not need to enter a last page
A Press the right bottom [Change] number.
key.

71
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 72 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

F Press the [Total Pages] key, and E Press the [Numbering from/to] key,
then use the number keys to enter and then use the number keys to
the total number of original pag- enter the page number to start
es, then press the {#}
} key. numbering from, then press the
{#}
} key.
G Press the [OK] key.
F Press the [OK] key.
Note
2 ❒ To change settings after press- G If page designation is complete,
ing the [OK] key, press the right press the [OK] key.
bottom [Change] key, and then
enter the numbers again.
Covers
If you selected (1–1, 1–2,…) Using this function, you can add cov-
er sheets or designate certain pages to
A Press the right bottom [Change] be copied on slip sheets.
key.
Preparation
B Press the [First Printing Page] key, Before selecting this function, set
and then use the number keys to the tray for the front cover paper.
enter the original sheet number to ⇒“Cover Sheet Tray” in the Gen-
start numbering from. eral Settings Guide
Note
❒ The cover sheet should be the same
size and direction as the copy pa-
per.
❒ You cannot set copy paper in the
bypass tray. Only set cover sheets
in the bypass tray.
❒ When selecting [Copy], select
Note whether the front and back covers
❒ To change the number entered, are copied 1-sided or 2-sided.
press the [Print Inquiry List] or ⇒“Cover Sheet Tray” in the Gen-
{Clear/Stop}
} key, and then enter eral Settings Guide
a new number. Reference
C Press the {#}} key. To set paper when using the inter-
poser, see “Loading Paper in the
D Press the [First Chapter No.] key, Interposer” in the General Settings
and then use the number keys to Guide.
enter the chapter number to start
numbering from, then press the ❖ Front Cover
{#}
} key. The first page of your originals is
copied on a special cover paper, or
a cover sheet is inserted before the
first copy.

72
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 73 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

• Copy
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.

3 3
2 2
1 1

• Blank
2

B Press the (["Front Cover"] / [Front/Back

Cover]) key.

C Select [Copy] or [Blank] for the cov-

3 3
2 2
1 1
er sheet.

❖ Front/Back Covers
D Select the paper tray containing
non-cover sheet paper, and then
The first and last pages of your press the [OK] key.
original are copied on separate pa-
per for cover use. E Place your originals in the docu-
• Copy ment feeder, and then press the
{Start}
} key.

Designate
Use this function to have certain pag-
GCCOVE0E
es of your original copied onto slip
sheets.
• Blank

Reference
⇒ p.103 “Front Cover Copy in
Combine” Preparation
Before using this function, set the
special paper tray for slip sheets.
⇒ “Slip Sheet 1”, “Slip Sheet 2” in
the General Settings Guide.

73
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 74 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Note I When you wish to finish specify-

❒ The paper for slip sheets should be ing pages, press the [OK] key.
the same size as the copy paper
and should be set in the same di- J Press the [OK] key.
rection.
K Select the paper tray that contains
❒ If you have selected "Interposer" paper for copying originals onto.
for "Slip Sheet 2 Tray" in System
2 Settings, you cannot copy on the L Set originals, then press the
slip sheets if you select "Slip Sheet {Start}
} key.
2".
❒ You cannot select the bypass tray Chapter
for sheet paper to copy the origi-
nals. The pages you specify with this func-
❒ You can specify up to 20 pages. tion will appear on the front of copy
sheets.
A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.

GCSHOWOE

B Press the [Desig./Chapter] key. Preparation

C Press the key to select the chapter Before selecting this function,
press the [Dup./Combine/Series] key
number.
and select Duplex (1 Sided → 2
D Use the number keys to enter the Sided) mode or Combine mode.
page number of the originals you Note
want to copy onto a slip sheet.
❒ You can specify up to 20 pages.
Then, press the {#}
} key.
❒ This function can be used only
E Select the paper tray for slip w h e n y o u us e t h e D u p l e x ( 1
sheets. Sided→2 Sided) or Combine func-
tion.
F Press the [Copy] key to copy onto
the slip sheets. Press the [Blank]
key not to copy onto them.

G Press the [Next Chapter] key.

H To specify another page, repeat
steps D to G.

74
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 75 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key. Blank Slip Sheets

You can insert a blank slip sheet (or
sheets) before or after a specified
page.

2
1 1

B Press the [Desig./Chapter] key.

5 5

C Press the key to select a chapter

9 9

number.

D Press the [Chapter] key. Preparation

E Enter the number of the first page Before using this function, select a
tray for slip sheets. ⇒“Slip Sheet 1
of the first chapter using the
Tray”, “Slip Sheet 2 Tray” in the
number keys. Then, press the {#}
}
General Settings Guide
key.

F Press the [Next Chapter] key. Note

❒ The paper for slip sheets should be
G To specify another page, repeat the same size as the copy paper
steps D to F. and be set in the same direction.
❒ You can specify up to 20 pages
H When you finish specifying the (chapters).
pages, press the [OK] key.
Reference
I Press the [OK] key. For how to set paper when using
J Set originals, and then press the the interposer, see ⇒“Loading Pa-
per in the Interposer” in the Gener-
{Start}
} key.
al Settings Guide.

A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.

B Press the [Desig./Chapter] key.

75
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 76 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

C Press the key to select the chapter Slip Sheets

number.

D Press the [Insert Sheet] key. Every time an original page changes,
a slip sheet is inserted. This function
E Select the paper tray for slip can be used to insert a slip sheet auto-
sheets. matically between each OHP trans-
parency copied or used as a stack
2 F Select [Before] to insert slip sheets function. You can also copy onto the
before the page you specify. Se- inserted slip sheets.
lect [After] to insert slip sheets af-
ter the page you specify. Enter the
page number with the number
keys. 1

G Press the [Insert Quantity] key, and 1

2
3
2

enter the number of sheets you 3

wish to insert with the number

keys.

H Press the [Next Chapter] key. Preparation

I To specify another location where Before selecting this function,
to insert sheets, repeat steps D to specify the paper tray for slip
H. sheets. ⇒ "Slip Sheet Tray" in the
General Settings Guide
J When you have finished specify- If “1 Sided → 2 Sided”is selected,
ing all settings, press the [OK] key. change it to “1 Sided → 1 Sided”.
K Press the [OK] key. Note
L Select the paper tray that contains ❒ Load slip sheets of the same size
and in the same orientation as the
paper for copying originals.
copy paper or OHP transparency.
M Place originals, and then press the ❖ When using OHP transparencies set
{Start}
} key.
on the bypass tray
• Copy

2 122
1 1

76
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 77 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copy Functions

• Blank

2
1 12
Note
2
❒ OHP ship sheet(s) cannot be
copied when using the interpos-
er.

A Press the [Cover/Slip Sheet] key.

B Press the [Slip Sheet] key.

C Select [Copy] or [Blank], and then
press the [OK] key.

D Select the paper tray that contains

paper for copying originals.

E Place originals, and then press the

{Start}
} key.

77
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 78 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying

Storing Originals in the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to
save documents in memory and print
B Enter a file name, user name, or
password if neccessary.
them as required.
Important
2 ❒ Data stored in the machine might
be lost if some kind of failure oc-
curs. The supplier shall not be re-
sponsible for any damage that
might result from loss of data.
Note
❒ Data stored in the Document Serv-
er is deleted after 3 days (72 hours)
C Press the [OK] key.
the default setting. You can set D Place your originals.
stored data not to be deleted auto-
matically, or specify a period after Reference
which the stored data is deleted For more information on types
automatically. ⇒ “Auto Delete of originals that can be placed
File” in the General Settings Guide and how to place them, see p.12
“Placing Originals”.
Reference
Refer to the General Settings E Make scanning settings for the
Guide. For information on func- original.
tions you can use with the Docu-
ment Server, see p.109
“Combination Chart”.

A Press the [Stored File] key.

F Press the {Start}} key.

Copies are delivered and scanned
data is stored in the hard disk.

Note images and cancel a job, press

the [Cancel] key.
❒ To stop scanning, press the
{ Clear/Stop}
} key. To resume a ❒ To check a document has been
paused scanning job, press the stored, press the { Document
[Resume] key in the confirma- } key to display the docu-
Server}
tion dialog box. To delete saved ment selection screen.

78
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 79 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

3. Program

Programs
You can store frequently used copy
job settings in memory and recall Storing a Program
them for future use.
Note A Edit the copy settings so that all
functions you want to store in this
❒ You can store up to 10 programs.
program are selected.
❒ You can select standard mode or
program No. 10 as the mode to be B Press the {Program}} key.
set when modes are cleared or re-
set, or immediately after the opera-
tion switch is turned on. ⇒ p.99
“Change Initial Mode”
❒ Paper settings are stored based on
size. So, if paper of the same size is
set for more than one tray, the pa-
per tray prioritized with User
Tools (System Settings) will be se-
lected first. ⇒“Paper Settings”
General Settings Guide
ZGVS080E

❒ Programs are not cleared by turn-

ing the power off or by pressing C Press the [Register] key.
the { Clear Modes} } key. They are
canceled only when you delete or
overwrite them with another pro-
gram.

D Press the program number you

want to store.
Note
❒ Program numbers with m
against them already have set-
tings in them.
Reference
⇒ p.80 “Changing a stored pro-
gram”
79
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 80 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Program

E Enter the program name with the C Press the [Register] key.
letter keys on the display panel. Repeat steps E, F of ”Storing a Pro-
You can enter up to 40 characters. gram”.
Note
❒ This overwrites the previous
program.

Deleting a Program
3 A Press the {Program}} key.
Reference B Press the [Delete] key.
For details on entering charac-
ters, see “Entering Text Charac-
ters” in the General Settings
Guide.
Note
❒ If you do not wish to enter the
program name, go to step F.

F Press the [OK] key.

When the settings are successfully C Press the program number you
stored, the m indicator before the want to delete.
program number goes on, fol-
lowed by the program name. The
D Press the [Yes] key.
screen returns to the initial copy The program is deleted, and the
display after a short time. screen returns to the initial copy
display.
Changing a stored program
Recalling a Program
A Check the program settings.
Note
A Press the {Program}} key.
❒ When you want to check the B Press the [Recall] key.
contents of a program, recall the
program. ⇒ p.80 “Recalling a
Program”

B Repeat steps A to D of “Storing a

Program”.

80
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 81 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Programs

C Press the program number you

want to recall.
Stored settings are displayed.
Note
❒ Only programs with m against
them contain a program.

D Place your originals, and then

press the {Start}
} key.

81
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 82 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Program

82
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 83 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

4. Troubleshooting

If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You

Want

When a Message is Displayed

The following chart contains explanations of common messages. If other mes-
sages appear, follow the instructions as they are displayed.
Messege Cause Action
Cannot detect original size. The size of the originals Place the original on the exposure
placed is difficult to detect. glass. ⇒ p.13 “Placing Originals on
⇒ p.9 “Sizes difficult to de- the Exposure Glass”
tect”
If the original size is difficult to de-
tect, select the size manually.
Do not use Auto Reduce/Enlarge
mode.
Original is not placed. Place your originals.
Check original orientation. There is no copy paper in Place the original in the same direc-
the same direction as the tion as the copy paper.
originals.
Check paper size. In correct paper size is set. If you press the {Start}
} key, copy
will start onto the selected paper.
Rotate Sort is not available A size of paper for which Select the correct paper size. ⇒ p.35
with this paper size. Rotate Sort is not available “Sort”
is selected.
It is over stapling capacity. The number of sheets per Check the stapler capacity. ⇒ p.37
set is over the staple capac- “Staple”
ity.
Cannot staple paper of this The Staple function cannot Select a paper size that can be used
size. be used with the paper size in Staple mode. ⇒ p.37 “Staple”
selected.
Duplex is not avilable with A paper size not available Select the proper paper size.
this paper size. in Duplex mode has been
selected.
Maximum number of sets The number of copies ex- You can change the maximum copy
is . ceeds the maximum copy quantity. ⇒ p.99 “Max. Copy Quan-
quantity. tity”
Cannot copy. Original is The Document Server func- To cancel the job in process, press the
being scanned by other tion is in use. [Exit] key, and then press the {Docu-
functions. ment Server}} key. Next, press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key. When the message
” [Stop] key was pressed. Stop stor-
ing?” appears, press the [Stop] key. 83
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 84 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Troubleshooting

If You Cannot Make Clear Copies

Problem Cause Action
Copies appear dirty. The image density is too Adjust the copy density. ⇒ p.25
dark. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”
Auto Image Density is not Adjust the auto density. ⇒ p.25
selected. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”
The reverse side of an orig- The image density is too Adjust the copy density. ⇒ p.25
inal image is copied. dark. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”
Auto Image Density is not Adjust the auto density. ⇒ p.25
selected. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”
A shadow appears on cop- The image density is too Adjust the copy density. ⇒ p.25
4 ies if you use pasted origi- dark. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”
nals. Change the direction of the original.
Put mending tape on the pasted
part.
The same copy area is dirty The exposure glass or doc- Clean them. ⇒ “Maintainging Your
whenever making copies. ument feeder is dirty. Machine” in the General Settings
Guide
Copies are too light. The image density is too Adjust the copy density. ⇒ p.25
light. “Adjusting Copy Image Density”
The paper size is not ap- Use the recommended paper. ⇒
propriate. General Settings Guide

Note
❒ A light copy may result when
you use damp or rough grain pa-
per.
Toner cartridge is almost Add toner. ⇒ “D Adding Toner” in
empty. the General Settings Guide
Parts of the image are not The original is not set cor- Set originals correctly. ⇒ p.12 “Plac-
copied. rectly. ing Originals”
An improper paper size is Select the proper paper size.
selected.
Copies are blank. The original is not set cor- When using the exposure glass, face
rectly. the originals down. When using the
document feeder, face them up. ⇒
p.12 “Placing Originals”
A moiré pattern is pro- Your original has a dot pat- Place the original on the exposure
duced on copies. tern image or many lines. glass at a slight angle.
y;
;yy;y;y;y;y;y;
R y;y;y;y;y;

84
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 85 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want

If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want

This section explains causes and remedies when copy results are not as expect-
ed.
Problem Cause Action
Copies are not stapled. There are jammed staples Remove jammed staples. ⇒ ” e Re-
in the stapler. moving Jammed Staple” in the Gen-
eral Settings Guide

Note
❒ After removing jammed staples,
staples might not be ejected the
first few times you try to use the
stapler.
4
The number of copies ex- Check the stapler capacity. ⇒ p.37
ceeds the capacity of the “Staple”
stapler.
Copy paper is curled. Turn the copy paper over in the
tray.
Staples are wrongly posi- Originals are not set cor- Check the correct position to place
tioned. rectly. the originals. ⇒ p.37 “Staple”
Paper jams occur frequent- The paper size is not cor- Set the correct paper size. ⇒
ly. rect. “Changing the Paper Size”in the
General Settings Guide
You cannot combine sever- Selected functions cannot Check the combination of functions
al functions. be used together. and make the settings again.

Reference
⇒ p.109 “Combination Chart”
When sorting, the pages The memory became full in You can interrupt copying when the
are divided into two the middle of sorting and memory becomes full. ⇒ p.106
blocks. the pages were delivered in “Memory Full Auto Scan Restart”
two blocks.
In Double Copies mode, Combination of original Select A3L for A4 K originals and
parts of the original image and copy paper is not cor- A4 for A5 originals (when using a
are not copied. rect. 100% ratio).
In Border, Center, or Cent- You set a wide erased mar- Make the margin width narrower.
er/Border mode, parts of gin. You can adjust it between 2–99mm.
the original image are not ⇒ p.101 “Erase Border Width” and
copied. ⇒ p.101 “Erase Center Width”
Originals are not scanned Set the originals correctly.
correctly.
In Margin Adjustment You set a wide erased mar- Set a narrower margin with the User
mode, parts of the original gin. Tools. ⇒ p.101 “Front Margin :
image are not copied. Left/Right”, ⇒ p.101 “Front Margin
There is a lack of margin
: Top/Bottom”, ⇒ p.101 “Back Mar-
space on the opposite side
gins : Left/Right”, ⇒ p.101 “Back
of the binding position.
Margin : Top/Bottom”
85
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 86 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Action

In Image Repeat mode, the You selected copy paper Select copy paper larger than the
original image is not cop- the same size as the origi- originals.
ied repeatedly. nals, or you did not select
Select the proper reproduction ratio.
the proper reproduction
ratio.
The stamp position is The paper orientation is Check the paper orientation and
wrong. wrong. stamp position.
When using Combine, You specified a reproduc- When you specify a reproduction
parts of the image are not tion ratio that does not ratio using Manual Paper Select
copied. match the sizes of your mode, make sure the ratio matches
originals and copy paper. your originals and the copy paper.

Note
❒ Select the correct reproduction
4 ratio before using Combine
mode.
Order of copies is not cor- You placed originals in in- When placing a stack of originals in
rect. correct order. the document feeder, the last page
should be on the bottom.
If you place an original on the expo-
sure glass, start with the first page to
be copied.
When using Duplex, copy You placed originals in the Place originals in the correct orien-
is made Top/Bottom even wrong direction. tation. ⇒ p.12 “Original Orienta-
though Left/Right is se- tion”
lected, or copy is made
Left/Right even though
Top/Bottom is selected.
Paper does not output dur- If you stop printing while Press the {Reset}} key and cancel
ing printing with stapling. using the staple function, copy settings, including stapling.
papers not stapled during
printing may be left in the
staple unit.

86
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 87 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want

When Memory Is Full

Note
❒ If you set "Memory Full Auto Scan Restart" in User Tools (⇒ p.106) to "Yes",
the memory overflow message will not be displayed, but Connect Copy con-
tinues to scan originals automatically. Connect Copy continues scanning and
copying until the job is finished. Note that copy sets will be printed separately
at this time.
Message Cause Solution & Reference
Memory is full. ## originals The scanned original exceeds Press the [Output] key to copy
have been scanned. the number of pages that can scanned originals and clear
Press [Print] to copy scanned be stored in memory. the scanning data. Press the
originals. [Print Inquiry List] key to clear
the scanning data and not 4
Do not remove remaining
copy.
originals.

Note
❒ Copying will stop and this
message will be displayed
when memory is full.
Press [Continue] to continue The machine checks if the re- To continue copying, remove
printing. maining original should be all copies then press the [Con-
[Stop] [Continue] copied, after the scanned orig- tinue] key. To stop copying,
inal has been printed. press the [Stop] key.

87
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 88 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Troubleshooting

88
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 89 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

5. User Tools (Copy/Document

Server Features)
User Tools Menu (Copier/Document
Server Features)
User Tools Item Names Default Settings
General Features 1/5 ⇒ p.97 “General Features /5” 1

Auto Paper Select Priority ON

Auto Tray Switching With image rotation
Paper Display Display
Original Type Priority Text
Original Type Display Display
Auto Image Density Priority Text: On
Text/Photo: On
Photo: Off
Pale: On
Generation Copy: On
Copy Quality Text: Normal
Text/Photo: Normal
Photo: Print Photo
Pale: Normal
Generation Copy: Normal
Image Density Text: Normal
Text/Photo: Normal
Photo: Normal
Pale: Normal
Generation Copy: Normal
General Features 2/5 ⇒ p.99 “General Features /5” 2

Duplex Mode Priority 1 Sided → 1 Sided

Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode Top to Top
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode Top to Top
Change Initial Mode Standard
Max. Copy Quantity 999 Sheets
Tone: Original remains ON
Job End Call ON
General Features 3/5 ⇒ p.99 “General Features 3/5”

89
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 90 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

User Tools Item Names Default Settings

Copy Function Key: F1–F5 • F1: 1 Sided → 2 Sided: T to
T
• F2: 2 Sided: T to T → 2 Sid-
ed: T to T
• F3: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com-
bine
• F4: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com-
bine: 4 originals
• F5: Create Margin
General Features 4/5 ⇒ p.99 “General Features /5” 4

Document Server Storage Key: F1–F5 • F1: 2 Sided Original Top to

Top
• F2: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com-
bine
• F3: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com-
bine: 4 originals
5 • F4: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Com-
bine: 8 originals
• F5: Create Margin
General Features 5/5 ⇒ p.100 “General Features /5” 5

Document Server Print Key: F1–F5 • F1: 2 Sided Top to Top

• F2: 2 Sided Top to Bottom
• F3: Booklet
• F4: Magazine
• F5: Off
Reproduction Ratio 1/2 ⇒ p.100 “Reproduction Ratio /2” 1

Shortcut R/E 1–3 Metric version

• Shortcut R/E 1: 71%
• Shortcut R/E 2: 141%
• Shortcut R/E 3: 93%
Inch version
• Shortcut R/E 1: 73%
• Shortcut R/E 2: 155%
• Shortcut R/E 3: 93%

90
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 91 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)

User Tools Item Names Default Settings

Enlarge 1–5 Metric version
• Enlarge 1: 115%
• Enlarge 2: 122%
• Enlarge 3: 141%
• Enlarge 4: 200%
• Enlarge 5: 400%
Inch version
• Enlarge 1: 121%
• Enlarge 2: 129%
• Enlarge 3: 155%
• Enlarge 4: 200%
• Enlarge 5: 400%
Priority Setting: Enlarge Metric version 141%
Inch version 155%
Reproduction Ratio 2/2 ⇒ p.100 “Reproduction Ratio 2/2” 5
Reduce 1–6 Metric version
• Reduce 1: 25%
• Reduce 2: 50%
• Reduce 3: 65%
• Reduce 4: 71%
• Reduce 5: 75%
• Reduce 6: 82%
Inch version
• Reduce 1: 25%
• Reduce 2: 50%
• Reduce 3: 65%
• Reduce 4: 73%
• Reduce 5: 78%
• Reduce 6: 85%
Priority Setting: Reduce Metric version: 71%
Inch version: 73%
Ratio for Create Margin 93%
R/E Priority Reduce
Edit 1/2 ⇒ p.101 “Edit 1/2”
Front Margin: Left/Right Metric version: Left 5 mm
Inch version: Left 0.2”
Back Margin: Left/Right Metric version: Right 5 mm
Inch version: Right 0.2”
Front Margin: Top/Bottom Metric version: T/B 0 mm
Inch version: T/B 0”

91
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 92 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

User Tools Item Names Default Settings

Back Margin: Top/Bottom Metric version: T/B 0 mm
Inch version: T/B 0”
1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: T to T Metric version: Right 5 mm
Inch version: Right 0.2”
1 Sided → 2 Sided Auto Margin: T to B Metric version: T/B 0 mm
Inch version: T/B 0”
Erase Border Width Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4”
Erase Original Shadow in Combine Yes
Erase Center Width Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4”
Edit 2/2 ⇒ p.102 “Edit 2/2”
Image Repeat Separation Line None
5 Double Copies Separation Line None
Separation Line in Combine None
Copy Back Cover Outside
Front Cover Copy in Combine Combine
Copy on Designating Page in Combine Combine
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine Open to left
Copy Order in Combine From left to right
Stamp ⇒ p.104 “Stamp”
Background Numbering Size Normal
Density Normal
Preset Stamp Stamp Priority Copy
Stamp Language English
Stamp Position Metric version
• Position: Top right
• Top Margin: 24 mm
• Right Margin: 24 mm
Inch version
• Position: Top right
• Top Margin: 1.0"
• Right Margin: 1.0"
Stamp Format Size: 1×
Density: Normal
All pages

92
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 93 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)

User Tools Item Names Default Settings

User Stamp Program/Delete Stamp
Stamp Position: 1~4 Metric version
• Position: Top right
• Top Margin: 24 mm
• Right Margin: 24 mm
Inch version
• Position: Top right
• Top Margin: 1.0"
• Right Margin: 1.0"
Stamp Format : 1~4 All pages
Date Stamp Format DD/MM/YYYY
Font Font 1
Stamp Position Metric version
• Position: Top left
• Top Margin: 8 mm
5
• Right Margin: 32 mm
Inch version
• Position: Top left
• Top Margin: 0.3"
• Right Margin: 0.8"
Stamp Setting All pages
Size Auto
Superimpose No

93
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 94 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

User Tools Item Names Default Settings

Page Numbering Stamp Format P1, P2...
Font Font 1
Size Auto
Duplex Back Page Stamping Opposite position
Position
Page Numbering in Combine Per original
Stamp on Designated Slip No
Sheet
Stamp Position Metric version
• Position
P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: Top right
-1-, 1–1: Bottom center
• Top/Bottom Margin
P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: 12 mm
-1-, 1–1: 8 mm
5 • Left/Right Margin
P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: 12 mm
-1-, 1–1: 0 mm
Inch version
• Position
P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: Top right
-1-, 1–1: Bottom center
• Top/Bottom Margin
P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: 0.5"
-1-, 1–1: 0.3"
• Left/Right Margin
P1, 1/5, P.1, 1: 0.5"
-1-, 1–1: 0.0"
Superimpose No
Input/Output /2 ⇒ p.106 “Input/Output /2”
1 1

Switch to Batch Batch

SADF Auto Reset 5 seconds
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue No
Auto Sort No
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart No
Select Stapling Position (Top Left) Top
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Left) Finisher 3000B(100-sheet sta-
ples): Top Slant
Finisher 3000M(50-sheet sta-
ples): Top Slant
Booklet Finisher: Saddle
Stitch

94
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 95 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools Menu (Copier/Document Server Features)

User Tools Item Names Default Settings

Select Stapling Position (Top Right) Top 2
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Right) Left 2
Input/Output 2/2 ⇒ p.107 “Input/Output2/2”
Select Stack Function Stack
Select Punch Type 2 Holes *1
Letterhead Setting No
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Glass Mode Face up
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Bypass Mode Face up
*1
The 4–hole punch type is only capable of punching in the 4–hole format.

95
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 96 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document

Server Features)
This section is for key operators in
charge of this machine. You can
B Press the [Copier/Document Server
Features] key.
change default settings.
The Copier/Document Server Fea-
Note tures menu appears.
❒ Be sure to exit from User Tools af-
ter all settings are finished. C Select the menu you want to set.
❒ Selected keys are highlighted. Setting screens for each menu will
be displayed.
❒ Any changes you make with User
Tools remain in effect even if the Reference
main power switch or operation ⇒ p.89 “User Tools Menu (Cop-
switch is turned off, or the {Clear ier/Document Server Fea-
Modes} } key is pressed.
5 tures)”
Reference D Change settings by following the
For details, see "User Tools (Sys- instructions on the display panel,
tem Settings)" in the General Set- and then press the [OK] key.
tings Guide.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. Exiting From User Tools

User Tools Main Menu appears.
A After changing User Tools set-
tings, press the [Exit] key on the
User Tools Main Menu.
User Tool changes are complete,
and the machine is ready to copy.

ZGVS010E

Note
Note
❒ When the access code is set, the
access code input screen is dis- ❒ You can also exit from User
played when changing the ini- Tools by pressing the { User
tial settings. Operate by } key.
Tools/Counter}
entering the registered access
code beforehand. For access
code, see “Key Operator Tools”
in the General Settings Guide.

96
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 97 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❒ [Without image rotation] Only cop-

General Features 1/5 ies with Auto Tray Switching if
you load paper of the same size
❖ Auto Paper Select Priority and in the same direction in two
You can choose to have“Auto Pa- or more trays. If the paper is not
per Select” selected when the ma- the same size or in the same di-
chine is turned on or reset, or rection, copying is interrupted
modes are cleared. ⇒ p.27 “Select- and the message "Load paper."
ing Copy Paper” is displayed.

❖ Auto Tray Switching 3

If you load paper of the same size
in two or more trays, the machine
automatically shifts to the other
tray when the tray in use runs out
(when Auto Paper Select is select- 4
1 2
ed.) This function is called "Auto
Tray Switching". This setting spec-
ifies whether to use "Auto Tray 5
Switching" or not. ZGVX030E

Note
1. Original
❒ [With image rotation] Use this to 2. Paper (Tray 1)
copy with Auto Tray Switching. 3. Paper (Tray 2)
4. Paper (Tray 3)
❒ [OFF] When a paper tray runs
out, copying is interrupted and
the message "Load paper." is
3 displayed.

1 2

4
ZGVX020E

1. Original
2. Paper (Tray 1)
3. Paper (Tray 2)
4. Paper (Tray 3)

97
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 98 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Paper Display ❖ Auto Image Density Priority

You can choose to have available You can turn the Auto Image Den-
paper trays/sizes shown on the in- sity on or off for each original type
itial display. (Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Pale,
and Generation Copy).
Note
❒ If you choose "Hide", the dis- ❖ Copy Quality
play is shown as below. When You can adjust the quality level for
the [Auto Paper Select] key is each original type (Text, Text/Pho-
pressed, paper sizes appear on to, Photo, Pale, Generation Copy).
the display. • Text
Adjust sharpness.
• Text/Photo
When there are photo(s) and
text on the original, determine
which takes priority.
• Photo
5 For a photo original, adjust the
finish quality level to match the
photo original.
❖ Original Type Priority
• Pale
You can select the type of originals
Adjust the quality level for a
effective when the machine is
pale original with normal densi-
turned on or reset, or when modes
ty.
are cleared.
• Generation Copy
❖ Original Type Display Adjust the quality level so as
You can choose to have original not to thicken the lines of the
types shown on the initial display. finish image.

Note ❖ Image Density

❒ If you choose "Hide", the dis- You can select one of seven origi-
play is shown as below. nal image density levels for each
original type (Text, Text/Photo,
Photo, Pale, Generation Copy).

98
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 99 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Job End Call

General Features 2/5 You can choose to have the beeper
sound when copying is complete.
❖ Duplex Mode Priority
Note
You can select the type of Duplex
❒ If the "Panel Tone" in the User
function effective when the ma-
Tools (System Settings) is "On",
chine is turned on or reset, or when
the machine beeps to notify you
modes are cleared.
if it did not complete a job, for
❖ Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode reasons such as: copying was in-
You can set copy orientation when terrupted, the paper tray ran
making two-sided copies. out of paper or a paper jam oc-
curred.
❖ Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
You can set original orientation
when making two-sided copies. General Features 3/5
❖ Change Initial Mode ❖ Copy Function Key: F1–F5
You can select the initial mode or You can register frequently used 5
Program No. 10 as the mode effec- functions in function keys F1 to F5.
tive when the machine is turned on You can also change registered
o r r e se t , o r w h e n m o d e s a re functions.
cleared.

❖ Max. Copy Quantity

The maximum copy quantity can
be between 1 and 999.

❖ Tone: Original remains

The beeper (key tone) sounds
when you forget to remove origi-
nals after copying.
Note
General Features 4/5
❒ If the "Panel Tone" in User Tools
(System Settings) is "Off", the
beeper does not sound irrespec- ❖ Document Server Storage Key: F1–F5
tive of the "Tone: Original re- You can register frequently used
mains" setting. ⇒"Panel Tone" functions in function keys F1 to F5.
in the General Settings Guide You can also change registered
functions.

99
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 100 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

General Features 5/5 Reproduction Ratio 2/2

❖ Document Server Print Key: F1–F5 ❖ Reduce 1–6
You can register frequently used You can customize available re-
functions in function keys F1 to F5. duction ratios when you press the
You can also change registered [Reduce/Enlarge] key followed by
functions. the [Reduce] key.

Reduce1 Reduce2 Reduce3 Reduce4 Reduce5 Reduce6

❖ Priority Setting: Reduce

You can set the priority ratio when
the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed,
followed by the [Reduce] key.
5
Reproduction Ratio 1/2 ❖ Ratio for Create Margin
You can set a Reduce/Enlarge ra-
tio when registering "Create Mar-
❖ Shortcut R/E 1–3 gin" in a Shortcut Key.
You can register up to three fre-
quently used Reduce/Enlarge ra- Note
tios other than the fixed ❒ You can enter a ratio between 90
Reduce/Enlarge ratio and have and 99 (in increments of 1%)
them shown on the initial display. with the number keys.
You can also change the registered
Reduce/Enlarge ratios. ❖ R/E Priority
Specifies the tab given priority on
❖ Enlarge 1–5 the display panel when the [Re-
You can customize available en- duce/Enlarge] key is pressed.
largement ratios when you press
the [Reduce/Enlarge] key followed
by the [Enlarge] key.

Enlarge1 Enlarge2 Enlarge3 Enlarge4 Enlarge5

❖ Priority Setting: Enlarge

You can set the priority ratio when
the [Reduce/Enlarge] key is pressed,
followed by the [Enlarge] key.

100
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 101 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ 1 sided→→2 sided Auto Margins:T to T

Edit 1/2 In 1 sided → 2 sided Duplex mode,
you can specify the margins on the
❖ Front Margin : Left/Right back side.
You can specify left and right mar- Note
gins on the front side of copies in
❒ You can enter a margin width of
Margin Adjust mode.
between 0 and 30 mm in 1 mm
Note increments (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
❒ You can enter a margin width of steps) with the number keys.
between 0 and 30 mm in 1 mm
❖ 1 sided→→2 sided Auto Margins :T to B
increments (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
In 1 sided → 2 sided Duplex mode,
steps) with the number keys.
you can specify the margins on the
❖ Back Margins : Left/Right back side.
You can specify left and right mar- Note
gins on the back side of copies in
❒ You can enter a margins depth
Margin Adjust mode.
of between 0 and 30 mm in 1 5
Note mm increments (0” and 1.2” in
❒ You can enter a margin width of 0.1” steps) with the number
between 0 and 30 mm in 1 mm keys.
increments (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
❖ Erase Border Width
steps) with the number keys.
Specify the width of erased border
❖ Front Margin : Top/Bottom margins using this function.
You can specify top and bottom Note
margins on the front side of copies
❒ You can enter a width of be-
in Margin Adjust mode.
tween 2 and 99 mm in 1 mm in-
Note crements (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
❒ You can enter a margin depth of steps) with the number keys.
between 0 and 30 mm in 1 mm
❖ Erase Original Shadow in Combine
increments (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
steps) with the number keys. In Combine Copy mode, you can
erase a 3 mm, 0.1" boundary mar-
❖ Back Margin : Top/Bottom gin around all four edges of origi-
You can specify top and bottom nals.
margins on the back side of copies
❖ Erase Center Width
in Margin Adjust mode.
You can specify the width of the
Note erased center area using this func-
❒ You can enter a margin depth of tion.
between 0 and 30 mm in 1 mm Note
increments (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
❒ You can enter a width of be-
steps) with the number keys.
tween 2 and 99 mm in 1 mm in-
crements (0” and 1.2” in 0.1”
steps) with the number keys.

101
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 102 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Double Copies Separation Line

Edit 2/2 You can select a separation line in
Double Copy mode: None, Solid,
❖ Image Repeat Separation Line B ro k e n A , B r o k e n B o r C r o p
You can select a separation line in Marks.
Image Repeat mode: None, Solid, • None
Broken A, Broken B or Crop
Marks.
• None
• Solid

• Solid
• Broken A

5 • Broken A
• Broken B

• Broken B
• Crop Marks

• Crop Marks
Note
❒ An image of approximately 1.5
mm (0.06”) will not be copied as
Note the width of the separation line,
❒ An image of approximately 1.5 when specifying solid or broken
mm (0.06”) will not be copied as lines.
the width of the separation line,
when specifying solid or broken
lines.

102
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 103 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Separation Line in Combine ❖ Front Cover Copy in Combine

You can select a separation line in You can make a combined copy on
Combine mode: None, Solid, Bro- the front cover sheet when you se-
ken A, Broken B or Crop Marks. ⇒ lect Front Cover copy mode.
p.45 “1 Sided Combine”, ⇒ p.47 “2
Combine Not Combined
Sided Combine”
• None
GCST019E

❖ Copy on Designating Page in Com-

• Solid bine
You can make a combined copy on
a designated paper.

• Broken A ❖ Orientation: Booklet, Magazine

You can select the type of originals
for Booklet or Magazine mode.
5
❖ Copy Order in Combine
• Broken B You can set the copy order in Com-
bine mode to "Left to Right" or
"Top to Bottom".

• Crop Marks

Note
❒ An image of approximately 1.5
mm (0.06”) will not be copied as
the width of the separation line,
when specifying solid or broken
lines.

❖ Copy Back Cover

When copying the back cover, you
can specify whether to have the
back cover outside (outside page)
or inside (inside page).

103
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 104 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❒ Lighter: The image can be

Stamp seen through the stamp.
❒ Light: You can see the image
ev e n c le are r t h an i n t h e
Background Numbering "Lighter" setting.
• Print Page
❖ Size You can select whether the
You can set the size of the num- stamp is printed on the first
bers. page or all pages.
❖ Density
You can set the density of the num- User Stamp 1/2-2/2
bers.
❖ Program/Delete Stamp
Preset Stamp 1/4-4/4 You can register/change/delete
designs you like as user stamps.
❖ Stamp Priority Note
5 You can select the priority stamp ❒ You can register up to 4 custom
type when the [Preset Stamp] key is stamps with your favorite de-
pressed. ⇒ p.63 “Preset Stamp” signs. ⇒ p.66 “To program the
user stamp”
❖ Stamp Language
You can select the language of the Reference
message that is printed in Stamp For how to delete stamps, see
mode. p.67 “To delete the user stamp”
❖ Stamp Position ❖ Stamp Position
You can set the position at which You can set the position at which
the stamp is printed. the stamp is printed.
Press the arrow keys to adjust the Press the arrow keys to adjust the
position. position.
❖ Stamp Format ❖ Stamp Format
You can adjust the size, density You can adjust the print page for
and print page for the stamp. User Stamps 1 to 4 that you regis-
• Size tered.
You can set the size of the • Stamp Page
stamp. Sets whether to print the stamp
• Density on all pages or only the first
You can set the pattern used to page.
print the stamp.
Note
❒ Normal: The stamp is print-
ed on the image. You cannot
confirm which parts overlap
the image.

104
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 105 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Duplex Back Page Stamping Position

Date Stamp You can set the position of the du-
plex back page number printed in
❖ Format Duplex mode.
You can select the date format for
Date Stamp mode. ❖ Page Numbering in Combine
You can set how pages are num-
❖ Font bered when you use the Combine
You can select the Date Stamp font. function and Page Numbering
function together.
❖ Stamp Position
You can set the position at which ❖ Stamp on Designated Slip Sheet
the stamp is printed. You can print the page number on
Press the arrow keys to adjust the slip sheets when you use the Des-
position. ignate function set to "Copy" and
Page Numbering function togeth-
❖ Stamp Setting er.
You can select whether the date is
printed on the first page or all pag-
es.
❖ Stamp Position 5
P1, P2...Stamp Position: 1/5,
2/5...Stamp Position: —1–, —2–
❖ Size ...Stamp Position: P.1, P.2...Stamp
You can set the Date Stamp size. Position: 1, 2...Stamp Position: 1–1,
1–2...
❖ Superimpose
You can set the position at which
You can select whether the Date the stamp is printed.
Stamp is printed as a negative Press the arrow keys to adjust the
when it overlaps black parts of the position.
image.
❖ Superimpose
Page Numbering 1/3-2/3 You can select whether page num-
bers are printed as a negative
❖ Stamp Format when they overlap black parts of
the image.
You can select the priority page
number format when the [Page
Numbering] key is pressed.

❖ Font
You can select the font of the page
number printed in Page Number-
ing mode.

❖ Size
You can set the size of the stamp
printed in Page Numbering mode.

105
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 106 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart

Input/Output 1/2 If memory becomes full while
scanning originals, the machine
❖ Switch to Batch (SADF) can make copies of those already
You can have Batch mode or SADF scanned, and then automatically
mode have displayed when you resume scanning the remaining
press the Special Original key. ⇒ originals.
p.14 “Batch mode” You can enable or disable this
function.
❖ SADF Auto Reset
Note
When you set one original at a time
in the document feeder, the Auto ❒ If you select [No]:
Feed indicator lights for a selected • When memory becomes full,
time after an original is fed, to the machine stops operation
show is ready for another original. allowing you to remove cop-
ies delivered to the output
Note tray.
❒ You can adjust this time from 3
5 seconds to 99, in 1 second incre-
❒ If you select [Yes]:
ments. • You can leave the machine
unattended to make all the
❖ Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue copies, but the resulting pag-
You can specify to continue copy- es will not be sequentially or-
ing when paper of the required ori- dered.
entation has run out during rotate-
sorting. ⇒ p.35 “Rotate Sort” ❖ Select Stapling Position (Top Left)
You can register a type of stapling
Note used frequently in the top left sta-
❒ If you select [No]: ple key on the initial display. You
• When paper of the required can also change the registered
orientation runs out, the ma- type.
chine stops copying and
prompts you to supply copy
paper. When you load paper,
the machine will continue
copying.
❒ If you select [Yes]: Note
• Copying continues using pa- ❒ The Finisher 3000B(100–sheet
per of a different orientation. staples), Finisher 3000M(50–
sheet staples) or Booklet Finish-
The copy job will finish even
if you have left the machine. er is required to use this func-
tion.
❖ Auto Sort
You can have Sort mode selected
when the machine is turned on or
reset, or if the mode is cleared.

106
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 107 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Accessing User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Select Stapling Position (Bottom Left) ❖ Select Stapling Position (Bottom

You can register a type of stapling Right)
used frequently in the bottom left You can register a type of stapling
staple key on the initial display. used frequently in the bottom right
You can also change the registered staple key on the initial display.
type. You can also change the registered
type.

Note
❒ The Finisher 3000B(100–sheet Note
staples), Finisher 3000M(50– ❒ The Finisher 3000B(100–sheet
sheet staples) or Booklet Finish- staples), Finisher 3000M(50–
er is required to use this func- sheet staples) or Booklet Finish-
tion. er is required to use this func-
❖ Select Stapling Position (Top Right)
tion. 5
You can register a type of stapling
used frequently in the top right Input/Output2/2
staple key on the initial display.
You can also change the registered ❖ Select Stack Function
type. Specify whether Stack or Rotate
Sort has priority on the initial dis-
play.
Note
❒ An optional finisher is required
Note to use this function.
❒ The Finisher 3000B(100–sheet
❖ Select Punch Type
staples), Finisher 3000M(50–
You can select the type of the
sheet staples) or Booklet Finish-
punch.
er is required to use this func-
tion. Note
❒ The Finisher 3000B(100–sheet
staples), Finisher 3000M(50–
sheet staples) or Booklet Finish-
er is required to use this func-
tion.
❒ The 4–hole punch type is only
capable of punching in the 4–
hole format.

107
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 108 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

User Tools (Copy/Document Server Features)

❖ Letterhead Setting
If you select "Yes" in this function,
the machine rotates the image cor-
rectly.
Note
❒ Direction-fixed (top to bottom)
or 2-sided paper might not be
printed correctly depending on
how the originals and paper are
placed.
Reference
When using letterhead paper,
pay attention to the paper orien-
tation. ⇒ p.11 “Direction-fixed
paper or 2-sided paper”

5 ❖ Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Glass

You can specify the way in which
copies are delivered when copying
an original placed on the exposure
glass.

❖ Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Bypass

Mode
You can specify the way in which
copies are delivered when copying
in Bypass mode.
Note
❒ If you have selected OHP trans-
parencies or thick paper in "Spe-
cial paper", you cannot have
copies delivered face down.

108
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 109 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

6. Specifications

Combination Chart
The combination chart given below shows modes that can be used together.
When using the chart, note the explanations of the symbols, as given in the fol-
lowing table.
❍ These modes can be used together.
$ These modes cannot be used together. The second mode selected
will be the mode you're working in.
× These modes cannot be used together. The first mode selected will
be the mode you're working in.

The following shows the combinations of functions.

Function selected after

1 Sided 2 Sided/2 Sided 2 Sided

Directional Magnification(%)

2 Sided
Function

( Standard Orientation)

Manual Image Density

Custom Size Originals

Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Original Type Setting

Manual Paper Select

Auto Image Density

Magazine
Magazine
Original Orientation

Size Magnification
Auto Paper Select

Magnification(mm)

1 Sided
Booklet
Booklet
1 Sided Combine
2 Sided Combine
Reduce/Enlarge

Book 1 Sided
Book 2 Sided
Directional Size
Create Margin

Front & Back

Bypass Tray
Mixed Sizes
Batch Mode

Rotate Sort
Face Up

1 Sided
2 Sided
2 Sided

1 Sided
2 Sided
Staple
Punch
Zoom

Stack
Sort

Function
Original Orientation
(Standard Orientation)
Batch Mode
Mixed Sizes
Custom Size Originals
Face Up
Bypass Tray
Auto Image Density
Manual Image Density
Original Type Setting
Auto Paper Select
Manual Paper Select
Reduce/Enlarge
Create Margin
Zoom
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Size Magnification
Directional Magnification(%)
Directional Size Magnification (mm)
Sort
Rotate Sort
Stack
Staple
Punch
Function selected first

1 Sided 2 Sided/2 Sided 2 Sided

1 Sided Combine
2 Sided Combine
Book 1 Sided
Book 2 Sided
Front & Back 2 Sided
2 Sided 1 Sided
1 Sided Booklet
2 Sided Booklet
1 Sided Magazine
2 Sided Magazine
Repeat
Double Copy
Centering
Scanning Position
Border Erase
Center Erase
Center/Border Erase
3 Edges Full Bleed
Inside Erase
Outside Erase
Margin Adjustment
Background Numbering
Preset Stamp
User Stamp
Date Stamp
Page Numbering
Covers
Designate
Chapter
Blank Slip Sheets
Slip Sheets
Document Server

*1 You cannot use Top 2 of Staple position together with Standard ZGVX120E
Punch position. You cannot use Top, Top Sland or Bottom together
with 90 turn Punch position.

109
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 110 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

Function selected after

Background Numbering
Function

Center/Border Erase
3 Edges Full Bleed

Margin Adjustment
Scanning Position

Blank Slip Sheets

Document Server
Page Numbering
Outside Erase

Preset Stamp
Border Erase
Center Erase
Double Copy

Inside Erase

User Stamp
Date Stamp

Slip Sheets
Designate
Centering

Chapter
Repeat

Covers
Function
Original Orientation
(Standard Orientation)
Batch Mode
Mixed Sizes
Custom Size Originals
Face Up
Bypass Tray
Auto Image Density
Manual Image Density
Original Type Setting
Auto Paper Select
Manual Paper Select
Reduce/Enlarge
Create Margin
Zoom
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Size Magnification
Directional Magnification(%)
Directional Size Magnification (mm)
Sort
Rotate Sort
Stack
Staple

6
Punch
Function selected first

1 Sided 2 Sided/2 Sided 2 Sided

1 Sided Combine
2 Sided Combine
Book 1 Sided
Book 2 Sided
Front & Back 2 Sided
2 Sided 1 Sided
1 Sided Booklet
2 Sided Booklet
1 Sided Magazine
2 Sided Magazine
Repeat
Double Copy
Centering
Scanning Position
Border Erase
Center Erase
Center/Border Erase
3 Edges Full Bleed
Inside Erase
Outside Erase
Margin Adjustment
Background Numbering
Preset Stamp
User Stamp
Date Stamp
Page Numbering
Covers
Designate
Chapter
Blank Slip Sheets
Slip Sheets
Document Server

ZGVX110E

110
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 111 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

Supplementary Specifications
❖ Batch Mode
In Batch mode, you cannot switch between 1–sided originals and 2–sided
originals in the middle of copying.

❖ Mixed Size mode

• Copy speed and scanning speed may be reduced.

❖ Bypass Tray Copy

• The following paper sizes can be selected:
A3L, A4KL, A5KL, A6L, B4L, B5KL, B6L, 11” × 17”L, Legal(81/2”
× 14”)L, Letter(81/ 2” × 11”)KL, 51/ 2” × 81/ 2”KL, Executive(71/4” ×
101/2”)KL, 8” × 13”L, 81/2” × 13”L, 81/4” × 13”K, 11” × 14”L, 11” ×
15”L, 10” × 14”L, 10” × 15”L, 81/4” × 14”L, 8” × 101/2”KL, 8 “× 10”KL,
12” × 18”L, Postcards (100 × 148mm)
• The number of sheets you can set in the bypass tray depends on the paper
type. If the number set exceeds that in the table below, paper misfeeds may
occur or copies may be skewed.
Paper type Number 6
Thick paper (105/157g/m2) 30 sheets
Thick paper (157/216g/m2) 20 sheets
Translucent paper 50 sheets
OHP transparencies 50 sheets

❖ Preset Enlarge/Reduce
Note
❒ You can select one of 12 preset ratios (5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ra-
tios).
❒ You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper.
With some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will
appear.
❒ Copies can be reduced or enlarged as follows.

111
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 112 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

❖ Metric version
Ratio (%) Original → Copy paper size
400 (enlarge area by 16) --
200 (enlarge area by 4) A5→A3, A6→A4, B6→B4
141 (enlarge area by 2) A4→A3, A5→A4, A6→A5, B5→B4, B6→B5
122 F→A3, A4→B4
115 B4→A3
93 --
82 F→A4, B4→A4
75 B4→F4, B4→F
71 (reduce area by 1/2) A3→A4, A4→A5
65 A3→F
50 (reduce area by 1/4) A3→A5, F→A5
25 --

❖ Inch version
6 Ratio (%) Original → Copy paper size
400 (enlarge area by 16) --
200 (enlarge area by 4) 51/2" × 81/2"→11" × 17"
155 (enlarge area by 2) 51/2" × 81/2"→81/2" × 14"
129 81/2" × 11"→11" × 17"
121 81/2" × 14"→11" × 17"
93 --
85 F→81/2" × 11"
78 81/2" × 14"→81/2" × 11"
73 11" × 15"→81/2" × 11"
65 11" × 17"→81/2" × 11"
50 (reduce area by 1/4) 11" × 17"→51/2" × 81/2"
25 --

❖ Zoom
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25 – 400%.
• You can select a ratio regardless of the size of an original or copy paper.
With some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will
appear.

112
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 113 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

❖ Auto Reduce/Enlarge
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25 – 400%.

❖ Size Magnification
• If the calculated ratio is over maximum or under the minimum ratio, it is
adjusted to within available range automatically. However, with some ra-
tios, parts of the image might not be copied or margins will appear on.
• The reproduction ratio that you can specify are 25 – 400%.

❖ Directional Size Magnification

• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25 – 400%.
• When entering a percentage ratio, you can specify any value in the permit-
ted range, regardless of the size of originals or copy paper. However, de-
pending on settings and other conditions, part of the image may not be
copied, or margins will appear.
• When entering a size in mm, if the calculated ratio is over maximum or un-
der minimum ratio, it is adjusted to within available range automatically.
However, with some ratios, parts of the image might not be copied or mar-
gins will appear.

❖ Sort 6
The number of copies that can be placed on the tray is as follows. When the
number exceeds capacity, remove copies from the tray.
Paper Size and Direction Number of
Copies
B4 or smaller, A4 or larger 500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
Copy tray

A3, B5 or smaller 250 sheets

(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)

113
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 114 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

Paper Size and Direction Number of

Copies
Finisher Upper Tray 500 sheets
A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × (80 g/m2)
81/2"KL (20 lb.)

A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L 250 sheets
(80 g/m2)
Finisher 3000B(100– sheet staples)

(20 lb.)
Finisher Shift Tray 3, 000
A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 11"K sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 12" 1, 500
× 18"L sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K 500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A5L, 51/2" × 81/2"L 100 sheets
6 (80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
Finisher Upper Tray 250 sheets
A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × (80 g/m2)
81/2"KL (20 lb.)

A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L 50 sheets

(80 g/m2)
Finisher 3000M(50– sheet staples)

(20 lb.)
Finisher Shift Tray 3, 000
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"L, 1, 500
12" × 18"L sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A5K 500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A5L, B6L, 51/2" × 81/2"L 100 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)

114
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 115 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

Paper Size and Direction Number of

Copies
Finisher Upper tray 250 sheets
A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × (80 g/m2)
81/2"KL (20 lb.)

A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L 50 sheets

(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
Finisher shift tray 1 500 sheets
A4KL, B5KL, A5K, 81/2" × 11"KL (80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L 250 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
Booklet Finisher

A5L, B6L, 51/2" × 81/2"L 100 sheets

(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
Finisher Shift Tray 2 2, 500
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.) 6
A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 8 /2" × 14"L, 8 /2" × 11"L,
1 1
1, 250
12" × 18"L sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A5K 500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
A5L, B6L or 51/2" × 81/2"L 100 sheets
(80 g/m2)
(20 lb.)
*1
Place paper in the bypass tray.
Note
❒ When using Rotate Sort or Staple functions, tray capacity may be reduced.
• Paper sizes and orientations that can be used with the Sort function are
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL and 51/2" × 81/2"KL.
• Paper sizes and orientations that can be used with the Rotate Sort function
are A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL and 51/2" × 81/2"KL.
• Paper sizes and orientations that can be used with the Shift Sort function
are as follows:

115
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 116 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

Paper Size and Orientation

Finisher 3000B(100–sheet A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
staples) 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L
Finisher 3000M(50–sheet A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
staples) 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL
Booklet Finisher A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL

❖ Stack
• Paper sizes and orientations that can be used with the Stack function are as
follows:
Paper Size and Orientation
Finisher 3000B(100–sheet A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
staples) 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L
Finisher 3000M(50–sheet A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
staples) 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL
Booklet Finisher A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL

6 ❖ Staple
The following types of paper cannot be stapled:
• Postcards
• Translucent paper
• OHP transparencies
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• Thick paper
• Thin paper
• Curled paper
• Paper of low stiffness
• Paper of mixed sizes (Differing horizontal dimensions, such as A4 L and
A3 L)
In the following cases, the copies will be delivered to the shift tray without
stapling:
• When the number of sheets for one set is above stapler capacity.
• When memory reaches 0% during copying.
• When using Double copies, or "1 Sided → 1 Sided", "1 Sided → 2 Sided", "2
Sided → 1 Sided" or "2 Sided → 2 Sided" in Combine mode, select K orig-
inal for L copy and L original for K copy.
• When using Double copies, or "1 Sided 2 Pages→ 1 Sided Combine" and "1
Sided 4 Pages→ 2 Sided Combine" in Combine mode, select K original for
L copy and L original for K copy.

116
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 117 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

• When using "Left 2" or "Top 2" with Double copies, or "1 Sided → 1 Sided",
"1 Sided → 2 Sided", "2 Sided → 1 Sided", or "2 Sided → 2 Sided" in Com-
bine mode, select K original for L copy and L originals for K copy.
• If you use the Auto Paper Select function in the Mixed Size mode, the ma-
chine selects the proper size of paper and staples it even if you place dif-
ferent sizes of originals. Set the size of paper you want to use in the paper
tray beforehand. The sizes of the paper you can staple in the Mixed Size
mode are as follows.
• A3L and A4 K
• B4 L and B5 K
• 11” × 17”L and Letter (8”1/2 × 11”)K
The sizes and orientations of the paper you can staple and the stapler ca-
pacity are as follows.

❖ Finisher 3000B(100–sheet staples)

Paper Sizes and Orientations Stapler Capacity
A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL 100 sheets
A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 8 /2" × 14"L
1
50 sheets

❖ Finisher 3000M(50–sheet staples) 6

Paper Sizes and Orientations Stapler Capacity
A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL 50 sheets
A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 8 /2" × 14"L
1
30 sheets
A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K, 11" 30 sheets
× 17"L

❖ Booklet Finisher
Paper Sizes and Orientation Stapler Capacity
A4KL, B5KL, 8 /2" × 11"KL
1
50 sheets
A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L 30 sheets
A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K, 11" 30 sheets
× 17"L
Saddle stitch 15 sheets
A3L, B4L, A4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" ×
11"L

• When the number of copies exceeds tray capacity, copying stops. In this
case, remove copies from the tray, and then resume copying.
The finisher capacities after stapling are as follows.

117
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 118 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

❖ Finisher 3000B(100–sheet staples)

Paper Sizes and Number of the Stapled
Orientation Number of the Sheets Copies
A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 10∼100 sheets 200∼30 sets
11"KL
2∼9 sheets 150 sets
A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 10∼50 sheets 150∼30 sets
81/2" × 14"L
2∼9 sheets 150 sets

❖ Finisher 3000M(50–sheet staples)

Paper Sizes and Maximum Number of the Maximum Number of the
Orientation Sheets Stapled Copies
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K 10∼50 sheets 300∼60 sets
2∼9 sheets 300 sets
A4K, B5KL, 8 /2" × 11"L 10∼50 sheets
1
150∼30 sets
2∼9 sheets 150 sets
Other size paper 10∼30 sheets 150∼50 sets

6 2∼9 sheets 150 sets

In the Mixed Size mode 2∼30 sheets 50 sets

❖ Booklet Finisher
Maximum Number Maximum Number of
Paper Sizes and Orientation of the Sheets the Stapled Copies
Finisher Tray 1
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K 10∼50 sheets 50∼10 sets
2∼9 sheets 50 sets
Other paper size 10∼30 sheets 25∼16 sets
2∼9 sheets 25 sets
In the Mixed Size Mode 2∼30 sheets 16 sets
Finisher Tray 2
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K 10∼50 sheets 250∼50 sets
2∼9 sheets 250 sets
A4L, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"L 10∼50 sheets 125∼25 sets
2∼9 sheets 125 sets
Other paper size 10∼30 sheets 125∼40 sets
2∼9 sheets 125 sets
In the Mixed Size Mode 2∼30 sheets 50 sets

118
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 119 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

Maximum Number Maximum Number of

Paper Sizes and Orientation of the Sheets the Stapled Copies
A4L, 81/2" × 11"L 2∼5 sheets 25 sets
6∼10 sheets 15 sets
11∼15 sheets 10 sets
Saddle Stitch

Other paper size 2∼5 sheets 30 sets

6∼10 sheets 20 sets
11∼15 sheets 10 sets

You cannot change the stapling positions during copying.

When the original image is rotated, the stapling direction turns by 90°.
When “Top” or “Bottom” is selected and the paper with the same orienta-
tion as the original is not loaded, the image is rotated and the paper with
the same size and the different orientation is selected.
With certain stapling settings, you cannot use the Rotate function.
When “Saddle Stitch” is selected, the copies are stapled with the saddle
stitch stapler, folded in half and then delivered.
When “Saddle Stitch” is selected with the “Magazine” function, the copies
are stapled with the saddle stitch stapler, folded like a magazine and then 6
delivered.

❖ Punch
• With certain Punch function settings, the Rotate function cannot be used.
• Since punch holes are made in each copy, positions vary slightly.
• Punchable paper sizes are as follows:

❖ Booklet Finisher, Finisher 3000M(50–sheet staples)

Punch unit type
2 & 4 holes type 2 holes L A3–A5, 11" × 17"–51/2" × 81/2"
K A4–A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
4 holes L A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"
4 holes type 4 holes L A3–A5, 11" × 17"–51/2" × 81/2"
K A4–A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
2 & 3 holes type 2 holes L A3–A5, 11" × 17"–51/2" × 81/2"
K A4–A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
3 holes L A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"

119
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 120 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

❖ Finisher 3000B(100–sheet staples)

Punch unit type
2 & 4 holes type 2 holes L A3–A5, 11" × 17"–51/2" × 81/2"
K A4–A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
4 holes L A3, 11" × 17"
K A4, 81/2" × 11"
4 holes type 4 holes L A3–B5, 11" × 17"–81/2" × 11"
K A4–A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
2 & 3 holes type 2 holes L A3–A5, 11" × 17"–51/2" × 81/2"
K A4–A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
3 holes L A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"

❖ Duplex
You cannot use the following copy paper with this function:
• Paper smaller than A5, 51/2" × 81/2"
6 • Paper thicker than 127.9 g/m2, 34 lb.
• Paper thinner than 64 g/m2, 17 lb.
• Translucent paper
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• OHP transparencies
• Postcards
When an odd number of originals is set in the optional document feeder, the
back of the last page is blank. During copying, the image is shifted to allow
for the binding margin.The image quality of the front and back of copies
might be different.

❖ Combine
• If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is adjusted to within
available range automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the im-
age might not be copied.
• You cannot use custom size paper.
• In this mode, the machine selects the ratio automatically. This ratio de-
pends on copy paper size and the number of originals.
• The reproduction ratios you can specify are 25 – 400%.
• If the direction of originals is different from that of the copy paper, the ma-
chine will automatically rotate the image by 90° to make copies properly.

120
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 121 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

• If the number of originals placed is less than the number specified for com-
bining, the last page is left blank, as shown in the illustration.

❖ Copying Book Originals

• The machine sets the reproduction ratio automatically to meet paper size
and copies originals together onto the paper.
• The machine uses ratios in the range of 25 to 400%
• If the calculated ratio is under the available minimum, it will be adjusted
to minimum ratio. However, with some ratios, parts of the image might
not be copied.
• Even if the direction of originals is different from that of the copy paper,
the machine will automatically rotate the image by 90°to make copies
properly.
• If you mix originals of different sizes or place originals in different orien- 6
tations, you cannot use this function.
• Four originals are copied onto each sheet of copy paper with this function.
If the number of originals scanned is less than a multiple of 4, the last page
will be blank.
• Copying to make a magazine may take some time after scanning originals.
• If the Booklet Finisher is installed and you select "Magazine" and "Staple
(Saddle Stitch)", copies are stacked, stapled at the center, folded in half au-
tomatically, and then delivered.

❖ Repeat
Depending on paper size, ratio, and orientation, parts of repeated images
may not be copied.
• If you use this function with "Custom Size Original", you can copy repeat-
edly the image in the area you want by specifying the vertical and horizon-
tal lengths from the base point. In this case, place your original on the
exposure glass. ⇒ p.16 “Placing Custom Size Originals”

1. Base point 3. Vertical length

2. Horizontal length
121
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 122 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

❖ Centering
Although the original is set at a different orientation to the paper, the machine
will not rotate the image by 90° (Rotate copy).

❖ Erase
The width of the erased margin varies depending on the reproduction ratio.
If the size of the original is different to sizes listed in the following chart, the
erased margin might be shifted.
• Metric version
Where Original Is Set Paper Size and Orientation
Exposure glass A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 13"L
Document feeder A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 81/2" × 13"L

• Inch version
Where Original Is Set Paper Size and Orientation
Exposure glass 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 10" ×
14"L, 8" × 10"L

6 Document feeder 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 10" ×

14"L, 51/2" × 81/2"L

You can erase two parts using “Erase Inside 1” together with “Erase Inside
2”

❖ Margin Adjustment
If you set a binding margin too wide, part of the image may not be copied.
When making copies in Combine mode, the binding margin is added to cop-
ies after the combination is finished.

❖ Background Numbering
If the numbers overlap the copied image, the parts overlapped may look like
some pattern.

❖ Preset Stamp
You can change the size and density of the stamp with User Tools.
Depending on paper size, if you change the stamp size, parts of the stamp
might not be printed.
When you use this function with the Magazine or Booklet function, you can
print the stamp only on the first page.

122
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 123 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Supplementary Specifications

❖ Date Stamp
• When using Combine mode, the date stamp is printed as follows:

• When using Magazine or Booklet function, the date stamp is printed as fol-
lows:

❖ Page Numbering
When page numbering is used with Combine mode, page numbers are print-
ed as follows:
• Page Numbering per original:
Combined with 1 Sided/2 Sided in the Combine function
6

Combined with Magazine or Booklet function

• Page Numbering per copy:

Combined with 1 Sided/2 Sided in the Combine function

123
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 124 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Specifications

If you combine this function with the Duplex (Top to Top) function and select
the "P1, P2" or "1/n, 2/n" format, the page numbers on the back of are printed
as follows:

1 2

GCSTMPBE

1. Front
2. Back
❖ Front Cover, Front/Back Cover
• In "Cover Sheet Tray" of User Tools (System Settings), if you selected "At
Mode Selected" for "Display Time", the machine refers to the settings in
"Cover Sheet Tray" to ascertain whether the front and back covers are cop-
ied 1-sided or 2-sided. If you selected "Full Time" for "Display Time", the
machine refers to the settings in "Paper Type" to ascertain whether the
front and back covers are copied 1-sided or 2-sided. ⇒ "Paper Type" and
6 "Cover Sheet Tray" in the General Settings Guide
• If Blank mode is selected, the cover is not counted as a copy.

❖ Designate
When "Combine (1 Sided→2 Sided)" has been selected, specified pages will
always be copied on the front of copies in the same way as in Chapters mode.

❖ Slip Sheets
When not copying onto slip sheets, the sheets are not counted as copies.

124
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 125 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

INDEX
C
1 sided → 2 sided, 43 Center/border erase, 59
1 sided combine Center erase, 58
1 sided 2 pages → combine 1 side, 45 Change
1 sided 4 pages → combine 1 side, 45 date format, 68
1 sided 8 pages → combine 1 side, 45 stamp position, 66, 69
2 sided 1 page → combine 1 side, 45 Changing
2 sided 2 pages → combine 1 side, 45 number of sets, 40
2 sided 4 pages → combine 1 side, 45 stamp density, 64
2 sided → 2 sided, 43 stamp position, 70
2 sided combine stamp position, size and density, 64
1 sided 16 pages → combine 2 side, 47 stamp size, 64
1 sided 4 Pages → combine 2 side, 47 stored program, 80
1 sided 8 pages → combine 2 side, 47 Check Modes key, 4
2 sided 16 pages → combine 2 side, 48 Clear Modes key, 4
2 sided 4 pages → combine 2 side, 47 Clear/Stop key, 5
2 sided 8 pages → combine 2 side, 47 Colour
2-sided paper, 11 adjustment/program, 79
Combination chart, 109
A Combined auto and manual image
density, 25
Accessing user tools Control panel, 4
copy/document server features, 96 Copy/document server features, 89
Adjusting Copy functions, 25
copy image density, 25 1 sided combine, 45
Auto 2 sided combine, 47
image density, 25 adjusting copy image density, 25
paper select, 27 auto reduce/enlarge, 32
paper select priority, 89 centering, 55
reduce/enlarge, 32 covers, 72
start, 18 date stamp, 67
tray switching, 97 directional magnification (%), 33
Auto paper select, 28 directional magnification (mm), 34
double copies, 54
B duplex, 43
Basic procedure, 17 image repeat, 53
Batch mode, 14 margin adjustment, 62
Border erase, 57 page numbering, 69
Bypass tray, 22 preset reduce/enlarge, 30
preset stamp, 63
selecting copy paper, 27
selecting original type setting, 26
series copies, 48
size magnification, 33
slip sheets, 76
sort, 35
stack, 37
Staple, 37
user stamp, 65
zoom, 31
125
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 126 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

Copying, 17 Erase, 56
auto start, 18 border, 56
interrupt copy, 18 border width, 101
job preset, 19 center, 57
original beeper, 18 center/border, 57
Copying from the bypass tray center width, 101
onto custom size paper, 22, 23 original shadow in combine, 101
onto special paper, 24 Exiting from user tools, 96
onto standard size paper, 23
Covers F
Front, 72
front/back, 73 Font, 105
Create margin mode, 31 Format, 105
Function keys, 5
D Function Status indicator, 5

Date stamp, 105 G

change position, 69
change style, 68 General features, 89, 90, 97, 99, 100
font, 105 auto paper select priority, 97
position, 105 auto tray switching, 97
position and original orientation, 68 change initial mode, 99
size, 105 copy function key, 99
stamp format, 105 copy orientation in duplex mode, 99
superimpose, 105 document server storage key, 99
Deleting duplex mode priority, 99
program, 80 job end call, 99
user stamp, 67 max. copy quantity, 99
Direction-fixed paper, 11 original orientation in duplex mode, 99
Display panel, 4 original type display, 98
Document server, 78 original type priority, 98
paper display, 98
E tone − original remains, 99
Generation copy, 26
Edit, 91, 100
1 sided→2 sided auto margins − T to B, 101 I
1 sided→2 sided auto margins − T to T, 101
back margin − left/right, 101 Indicators, 4
back margin − top/bottom, 101 Input/Output, 94
copy order in combine, 103 auto sort, 106
double copies separation line, 102 letterhead setting, 108
erase border width, 101 memory full auto scan restart, 106
erase center width, 101 rotate sort − auto paper continue, 106
erase original shadow in combine, 101 SADF auto reset, 106
front cover copy in combine, 103 select stack function, 107
front margin − left/right, 100 switch to batch (SADF), 106
front margin − top/bottom, 101 Input/Output 1/2, 106
image repeat separation line, 102 Interrupt key, 4
separation line in combine, 103
Energy Saver key, 4

126
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 127 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

K P
Key Page numbering, 105
check modes, 4 duplex back page stamping position, 105
clear modes, 4 first printing page, 70
clear/stop, 5 font, 105
energy saver, 4 page numbering in combine, 105
interrupt, 4 position, 70
program, 4 position and original orientation, 65
sample copy, 5 size, 105
# (sharp), 5 stamp format, 105
start, 5 stamp on designated slip sheet, 105
user tools/counter, 4 stamp position, 105
start number, 70
M superimpose, 105
Pale, 26
Main power indicator, 4
Photo, 26
Manual image density, 25
Placing
Manual paper select, 28
custom size originals, 16
Messages, 83
originals, 7, 12, 13, 16
Missing image area, 10 originals in document feeder, 13
Mixed size mode, 15
originals on exposure glass, 13
Preset stamp, 104
N
changing density, 64
Non-recommended originals for changing position, 64
document feeder, 7 changing size, 64
Number keys, 5 format, 104
language, 104
O position, 104
position and original direction, 64
OHP transparencies, 76 priority, 104
Operation switch, 5 Program key, 4
Original Programs, 79
beeper, 18 Punching copies, 41
combine, 46
copy direction, 43 R
direction and completed copies, 44
orientation, 12 Recalling a program, 80
orientation in duplex mode, 99 Reproduction ratio, 90, 91, 100
type display, 98 enlarge, 100
type priority, 98 priority setting − enlarge, 100
Originals, 7 priority setting − reduce, 100
ratio for create margin, 100
reduce, 100
R/E priority, 100
shortcut R/E, 100
Rotated copy, 29

127
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 128 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

S Supplementary specifications, 111

auto reduce/enlarge, 113
SADF mode, 15 bypass tray copy, 111
Sample copy, 40 centering, 122
Sample copy key, 5 combine, 120
Screen contrast knob, 4 date stamp, 123
Selecting duplex, 120
copy paper, 27 eirectional size magnification, 113
original type setting, 26 erase, 122
Series copies front/back cover, 124
book → 1 sided, 48 front cover, 124
book → 2 sided, 49 margin adjustment, 122
front & back → 2 sided, 49 page numbering, 123
Sharp (#) key, 5 preset enlarge/reduce, 111
Size, 105 preset stamp, 122
Sizes repeat, 121
detectable by auto paper select, 8 size magnification, 113
difficult to detect, 9 sort, 113
of recommended originals, 7 staple, 116
Sort, 35 zoom, 112
rotate sort, 35
shift sort, 36 T
Specifications, 109
Stack, 37 Text, 26
Stamp, 104 Tone − original remains, 99
date stamp, 67 Troubleshooting, 83
format, 104, 105 memory is full, 87
language, 104 you cannot make clear copies, 84
page numbering, 69 you cannot make copies as you want, 85
position, 104, 105 your machine does not operate as you
position and orientation of originals, 69 want, 83
position and original orientation, 65, 68 Types of duplex copies, i
preset stamp, 63
priority, 104 U
setting, 105
User stamp, 104
user stamp, 65
changing position, 66
Stapling position and original setting, 38
delete, 67
Start key, 5
format, 104
Storing
position, 104
originals, 78
position and original orientation, 65
program, 79
program, 66
Superimpose, 105
program/delete, 104
User tools, 89
User Tools/Counter key, 4

W
Weights of recommended originals, 7
What you can do with this machine, i

128
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 129 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

MEMO

129
MartiniC1_GBcopy4_FM.book Page 130 Tuesday, April 23, 2002 6:23 PM

MEMO

130 EE GB B064
 Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=192 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 9.600000 mm

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-3479-3111

1060/1075 Operating Instructions General Settings Guide

1060/1075

1060/1075 Operating Instructions General Settings Guide

Operating Instructions
General Settings Guide

Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A. Spain
RICOH CORPORATION RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
5 Dedrick Place Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 08005 Barcelona
Phone: +1-973-882-2000 Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
The Netherlands Italy
RICOH EUROPE B.V. RICOH ITALIA SpA
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen Via della Metallurgia 12,
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111 37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500 What You Can Do With This Machine
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD. Hong Kong Basics
Ricoh House, RICOH HONG KONG LTD.
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, 21/F., Tai Yau Building, Combined Function Operations
Middlesex, TW13 7HG 181, Johnston Road,
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000 Wan Chai, Hong Kong Document Server
Phone: +852-2862-2888
Germany User Tools (System Settings)
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Singapore
Mergenthalerallee 38-40, RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD. Troubleshooting
65760 Eschborn 260 Orchard Road,
Phone: +49-(0)6196-9060 #15-01/02 The Heeren, REMARKS
Singapore 238855
France Phone: +65-830-5888 Specification
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26

Printed in The Netherlands For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information be-
EE GB B064-7200 fore you use it.
 Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=192 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 9.600000 mm

Introduction
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC.”
Notes:
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.
a means POWER ON.
Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
c means STAND BY.

Laser Safety:
This machine is considered a class 1 laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains four
AlGalnp laser diodes, 10-milliwatt, 770-810 nanometer wavelength for each emitter. Direct (or indirect
reflected ) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and
interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the opera-
tor.
The following label is attached on the back side of the machine.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notes:
The model names of the machines do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your ma-
chine before reading this manual. (For details, see P.15 “Machine Types”.)
• Type 1: Aficio 1060
• Type 2: Aficio 1075
Certain types might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.

Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts with your Ricoh office products.

Power Source
220 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 10A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see P.152 “Power Connection”.

Copyright © 2002 Ricoh Co., Ltd.

MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page i Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notice ......................................................................................................................1
Copyrights and Trademarks .................................................................................2
Trademarks ................................................................................................................2
Information about Installed Software.......................................................................... 3
How to Read this Manual ......................................................................................6
Safety Information .................................................................................................8
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................8
Positions of Labels and Hallmarks for RWARNING and RCAUTION............ 10
ENERGY STAR Program ..................................................................................... 12
Manuals for this Machine .................................................................................... 14
Machine Types ..................................................................................................... 15

1. What You Can Do With This Machine

Available Functions ............................................................................................. 17
Copy Mode............................................................................................................... 17
Printer Mode............................................................................................................. 17
Scanner Mode .......................................................................................................... 17
Document Server Mode ........................................................................................... 18
User Management.................................................................................................... 20

2. Basics
Guide To Components ........................................................................................ 21
External Options .................................................................................................. 23
Control Panel........................................................................................................ 24
Display Panel ........................................................................................................... 26
Connecting the Machine (Network Connections) ............................................. 27
Requirements........................................................................................................... 28
When the Wireless LAN Board (option) is installed ................................................. 29
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network ........................................................ 30
Turning On the Power ......................................................................................... 32
Turning On the Main Power ..................................................................................... 32
Turning On the Power .............................................................................................. 32
Turning Off the Power .............................................................................................. 33
Turning Off the Main Power ..................................................................................... 33
Configuring the Network ..................................................................................... 34
Configuring the Network........................................................................................... 34
Configuring the Network with the Display Panel ...................................................... 36

3. Combined Function Operations

Changing Modes .................................................................................................. 47
Saving Energy .......................................................................................................... 48
Job List..................................................................................................................... 49
Multi-Access......................................................................................................... 51

i
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page ii Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

4. Document Server
Relationship between Document Server and Other Functions ....................... 57
Document Server Display ........................................................................................ 57
Using the Document Server................................................................................ 58
Scanning and Saving Originals ................................................................................ 58
Changing a File Name, User Name, or Password ................................................... 61
Selecting a Document .............................................................................................. 61
Searching Saved Documents................................................................................... 62
Printing Saved Documents....................................................................................... 63
Deleting Saved Documents...................................................................................... 66
Settings for the Document Server...................................................................... 67

5. User Tools (System Settings)

User Tools Menu (System Settings)................................................................... 69
Accessing User Tools (System Settings) .......................................................... 74
Changing Settings.................................................................................................... 74
Exiting from User Tools............................................................................................ 74
Settings You Can Change with User Tools ....................................................... 75
General Features ..................................................................................................... 75
Tray Paper Settings ................................................................................................. 79
Timer Setting............................................................................................................ 82
Interface Settings/Network ....................................................................................... 84
Interface Settings/Parallel Interface ......................................................................... 86
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 (option)...................................................................... 87
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b (option)................................................................. 88
File Transfer ............................................................................................................. 89
Key Operator Tools .................................................................................................. 90
User Codes ........................................................................................................... 96
To Register a New User Code ................................................................................. 97
Changing a User Code............................................................................................. 98
Clearing a User Code............................................................................................... 99
Displaying the Counter for Each User Code ..........................................................100
Printing the Counter for Each User Code...............................................................100
Clearing the Counter ..............................................................................................101
E-mail Destination.............................................................................................. 102
Registering an E-mail Destination ..........................................................................102
Changing a Registered E-mail Destination ............................................................ 104
Clearing a Registered E-mail Destination ..............................................................105
Registering E-mail Destinations to a Group.................................................... 106
Registering a New Group .......................................................................................106
Registering E-mail Destinations to a Group ...........................................................107
Deleting an E-mail Destination from a Group.........................................................107
Displaying an E-mail Destination ...........................................................................108
Deleting a Group .................................................................................................... 108
Changing a Group Name .......................................................................................109
Entering Text ...................................................................................................... 110
Available Characters ..............................................................................................110
Keys .......................................................................................................................110
Entering Text..........................................................................................................111

ii
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page iii Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

6. Troubleshooting
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want ............................................ 113
General ..................................................................................................................113
Document Server ...................................................................................................115
B Loading Paper ............................................................................................... 116
Loading Paper in Tray 1 (Tandem Tray) ................................................................116
Loading Paper in Tray 2 and 3...............................................................................117
Loading Paper in the Large Capacity Tray (LCT) .................................................. 117
Loading Paper in the Interposer.............................................................................118
Suspend Copy when using Finisher 3000B (100–Sheet Staples) ................. 119
D Adding Toner................................................................................................. 120
Replacing Toner................................................................................................. 121
x Clearing Misfeeds ......................................................................................... 122
Changing the Paper Size................................................................................... 132
Changing the Paper Size in Tray 2 or 3 .................................................................132
d Adding Staples.............................................................................................. 134
Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Booklet Finisher............................................134
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch).............................................................................136
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) ...................................................................... 138
e Removing Jammed Staples ......................................................................... 140
Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Booklet Finisher............................................140
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch).............................................................................142
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) ...................................................................... 144
y Removing Punch Waste ............................................................................... 146
Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Booklet Finisher............................................146
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) ...................................................................... 147

7. REMARKS
Do's And Don'ts ................................................................................................. 149
Toner ................................................................................................................... 150
Handling Toner.......................................................................................................150
Toner Storage ........................................................................................................150
Used Toner ............................................................................................................150
Where to Put Your Machine .............................................................................. 151
Machine Environment ............................................................................................151
Moving....................................................................................................................152
Power Connection..................................................................................................152
Access to the Machine ...........................................................................................153
Maintaining Your Machine ................................................................................ 154
Cleaning the Exposure Glass.................................................................................154
Cleaning the Document Feeder .............................................................................154
Other Functions ................................................................................................. 155
Inquiry ....................................................................................................................155
Changing the Display Language ............................................................................155
Counter ..................................................................................................................156

iii
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page iv Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

8. Specification
Mainframe ........................................................................................................... 157
Document Server ...................................................................................................161
Document Feeder ..................................................................................................162
Mailbox (option) ................................................................................................. 163
Booklet Finisher (option) .................................................................................. 164
Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples) (option) .................................................... 167
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) (option)................................................... 169
Copy Tray (option) ............................................................................................. 171
Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (option).................................................................. 172
Interposer (option) ............................................................................................. 173
Punch Unit (option)............................................................................................ 174
Others ................................................................................................................. 176
Copy Paper ......................................................................................................... 177
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types.................................................................177
Non-recommended Paper......................................................................................180
Paper Storage ........................................................................................................181

INDEX....................................................................................................... 182

iv
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 1 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Notice

Important
Do not make copies of any item for which copying is prohibited by law.
Copying the following items is normally prohibited by local law:
Bank bills, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, pass-
ports, driver's licenses.
This machine is equipped with a function that prevents making counterfeit bank
bills. Due to this function the original images similar to bank bills may not be
copied properly.

Notice To Wireless LAN Interface (option) Users

Notice to Users in EEA Countries
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Direc-
tive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999
on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mu-
tual recognition of their conformity.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use
of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohib-
ited.

1
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 2 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Copyrights and Trademarks

Trademarks
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Novell, NetWare and NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in
those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edi-
tion (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0

2
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 3 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Information about Installed Software

expat
• The software including controller, etc. (hereinafter “software”) installed on
this product uses the expat Version 1.95.2 (hereinafter “expat”) under the con-
ditions mentioned below.
• The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of
the product including the expat, and the product manufacturer makes the in-
itial developer and copyright holder of the expat, free from these obligations.
• Information relating to the expat is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark
Cooper.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, sub-
ject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AU-
THORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAG-
ES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFT-
WARE.

3
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 4 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

NetBSD
Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,
the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contribu-
tors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS-
CLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT-
ED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTH-
ERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

4
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 5 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Authors Name List

All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software
that we have mentioned in this document:
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetB-
SD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Han-
num.
• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for
the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD
Project.
• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the
NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank
van der Linden.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.
Thorpe.
• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the Univer-
sity of California, Berkeley, and contributors.

5
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 6 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

How to Read this Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are in-
cluded in the Safety Information section .
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfeed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation or actions to take after misoper-
ation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's control panel.

6
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 7 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Notice
• B4 JISKL, B5 JISKL, B6 JISL are referred to as B4KL, B5KL, B6L in
this manual.
• The image of the display panel may be different depending on the installed
options.

7
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 8 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be fol-
lowed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

R WARNING:

• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-
tension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not
remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this man-
ual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
• You spill something into the machine.
• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust might ignite
when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.
• Dispose of the used toner bottle in accordance with the local regula-
tions.
• Do not remove the toner bottle, fuser unit, duplex unit and paper tray
all at once. The machine might fall and cause injury. Make sure to first
return each component back to its original position before checking
other components.

8
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 9 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

R CAUTION:

• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the machine.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner bottle out of the reach of children.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer.
• The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a
label indicating the “hot surface”. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies availa-
ble at an authorized dealer.

9
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 10 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Positions of Labels and Hallmarks for

RWARNING and RCAUTION
This machine has labels and hallmarks for RWARNING,RCAUTION at the
positions shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the
machine as indicated.

10
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 11 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

11
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 12 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

ENERGY STAR Program

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined
that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR
Guidelines for energy efficiency.

The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental is-
sues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equip-
ment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.

• Low Power Mode

This product automatically lowers its power consumption 15 minutes after
the last copy or print job has finished. Printing is still possible in Low Power
Mode, but if you wish to make copies press the {Energy Saver} } key first.
Reference
For details about how to change the default interval, see p.82 “Energy Sav-
er Timer”.
• Off Mode (Copier only)
To conserve energy, this product automatically turns off 90 minutes after the
last copying or printing job has been completed. Printing is still possible in
Off Mode, but if you wish to make copies press the operation switch first.
Reference
For details about how to change the default interval, see p.82 “Auto Off
Timer”.
• Sleep Mode (Printer, Scanner installed)
If the printer features are installed, this product automatically lowers its pow-
er consumption even further 90 minutes after the last copy or print job has fin-
ished. Printing is still possible in Sleep Mode, but if you wish to make copies
press the operation switch first.
Reference
For details about how to change the default interval, see p.82 “Auto Off
Timer”.

12
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 13 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

• Duplex Priority
The ENERGY STAR Program recommends use of the Duplex function. By
conserving paper this function helps the environment. For applicable ma-
chines, duplex function (one-sided original → two-sided copies) can be select-
ed when the operation switch or the main power switch is turned on, the
{Energy Saver}
} key is pressed, or when the machine resets automatically.
Reference
To change the settings of the Duplex Priority mode, see “Duplex Mode Pri-
ority” in the Copy Reference.

Specification

Copying function only Multiple function printer

with copying, printing,
scanning functions
Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 2
Low Power Power 220 W or less 240 W or less
Mode consumption
Default 15 minutes 15 minutes
interval
Recovery 30 sec. or less 30 sec. or less
Time
Off Mode Power 4 W or less --
consumption
Default 90 minutes --
interval
Recovery 300 sec. or less --
Time
Sleep Mode Power -- 15 W or less
consumption
Default -- 90 minutes
interval
Recovery -- 300 sec. or less
Time

Duplex Priority 1 Sided → 1 Sided

❖ Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recy-
cled paper which is environmentally friendly. Please contact your sales rep-
resentative for recommended paper.

13
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 14 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Manuals for this Machine

This is a multi-functional machine combining copier, printer and scanner func-
tions. This manual describes procedures common to these functions. Each func-
tion's reference describes the operational procedures for that functions. Please
consult the relevant parts of the manual.

❖ General Settings Guide (this manual)

Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions
of the machine. It also introduces the options that allow you to use additional
functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the ma-
chine easier to use.

❖ Copy Reference
Describes the procedures and functions for using the machine as a copier.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 1

Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a printer.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 2

Describes procedures and provides information about using the machine as
a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Op-
erating Instructions”.

❖ Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions

Describes procedures and provides information about setting up and using
the machine as a printer in a network environment. We recommend you read
this manual first. It is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Oper-
ating Instructions”.

❖ PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement

Describes menus and features you can set using the PostScript 3 printer driv-
er. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating
Instructions”.
Note
❒ Printing with the PostScript 3 printer driver is available when the Post-
Script 3 board option is installed on your machine.

❖ UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the machine as a printer in
a UNIX environment. For UNIX printing information, please visit our web
site or consult your authorized dealer.

❖ Scanner Reference
Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a scanner.
Note
❒ Scanner function is available when the Printer/Scanner option is installed
on your machine.
14
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 15 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Machine Types
This machine comes in two models which vary in copy speed. To ascertain
which model you have, see the inside front cover.
Type 1 Type 2
Copy speed 60 copies/minute 75 copies/minute
(A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

15
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 16 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

16
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 17 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

1. What You Can Do With This

Machine
Available Functions
You can use this machine as a copier, printer or scanner. This machine also has
a Document Server function which has a File Merge Printing and On Demand
Printing features.

Copy Mode
In copy mode you can make basic copies and also copy using more sophisticated
techniques, such as reduction/enlargement or combining several originals onto
one copy. You can install several options for using sort, staple and saddle stitch
functions.

Printer Mode
You can print documents under various environments.

Scanner Mode
You can use this machine as a network scanner.
It is also possible to e-mail the scanned image as an attached file via the LAN, or
Internet.

17
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 18 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

What You Can Do With This Machine

Document Server Mode

You can save the documents from copy and printer functions to the hard disk.
Documents can be printed later, or the machine can be controlled from the PC.
1 Scanned documents can be stored on the hard disk, or you can see the docu-
ment's thumbnails on the PC.
*1 To see the document's thumbnails on a PC, DeskTopBinder V2 Professional/Lite
must be installed. ⇒ p.19 “Operation from a Computer”

Note
❒ You can save the following:
• Data from documents scanned using the document feeder
• Data from documents scanned using the exposure glass
• Data sent from a computer
• Data from documents scanned using the scanner function

18
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 19 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Available Functions

Important
❒ Do not turn off the main power switch when the On indicator is lit or blink-
ing. If you turn it off during an operation, the memory or hard disk might be
damaged.
❒ Avoid any strong shocks to the machine. This could damage the hard disk or 1
delete stored files. For precautionary reasons, files should be copied to anoth-
er local computer.
❒ Unauthorized access to the Document Server is possible when the network is
connected to the Internet. To prevent access to stored confidential documents,
set a firewall between the network and the Internet.

❖ On Demand Printing
If you save your document in the Document Server, you can print it out at any
time with print settings such as duplex and stapling.

❖ File Merge Printing

You can merge documents, such as those stored on the Document Server, sent
from the printer or scanned paper originals.
You can merge documents that were created with different applications or
separately on different computers.

❖ Operation from a Computer

If you install DeskTopBinder V2 Professional or DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on
your computer, you can check the contents of stored documents, print copies
for confirmation and perform other operations.
You can also perform tasks on data stored in the Document Server from your
computer, rather than from the machine.
Reference
For more detailed information, refer to DeskTopBinder V2 Profession-
al/Lite manuals.

19
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 20 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

What You Can Do With This Machine

User Management
You can limit the users of the machine, and restrict their use of certain functions
using user codes.
1
Using the User Code
The user is requested to enter a registered user code to operate the machine. You
can check the use of the machine by each user.

❖ Managing items
• You can set allowed functions for each user as shown below.
• You can output list of usage amounts for each user.
The functions you can limit are as follows:
Function Mode Limitation Usage amount man-
agement
Copy -- ❍ ❍
Printer -- ❍ ❍/Auto program
Scanner -- ❍ ❍(manages the
number of scannes)
Document Server Document Server ❍ (depending on the
mode mode to store the doc-
ument) *1
*1
When you print the documents by pressing the {Document Server} } key, the copy
counter shows the number of copies for the documents stored in copy mode, and the
print counter shows the number of documents stored in printer mode.
Reference
⇒ p.90 “User Code Management”, p.96 “User Codes”

20
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 21 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

2. Basics

Guide To Components

1. Document feeder (ADF) 4. Copy tray guide

Load a stack of originals here. They will When copying onto OHP transparencies
be fed automatically one by one. and translucent paper, raise the guide.
The front and back side of 2-Sided origi- This prevents copies from curling when
nals are scanned simultaneously. delivered.

2. Exposure glass 5. Main power switch

Place originals face down here for copy- If the machine does not operate after
ing. turning on the operation switch, check if
the main power switch is turned on. ⇒
3. Copy tray (option) p.32 “Turning On the Power”
Copied paper is delivered here.

21
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 22 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

6. Operation switch 7. Control panel

Press this switch to turn the power on ⇒ p.24 “Control Panel”
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
8. Front cover
indicator goes off). ⇒ p.32 “Turning On Open to access the inside of the machine.
the Power” 9. Paper tray (tray 1-3)
Load paper here.

1. Ventilation holes
Prevent overheating. Do not obstruct the
ventilation holes by placing an object
near it or leaning things against it. If the
machine overheats, a fault might occur.
2. Bypass tray
Use when copying onto OHP transparen-
cies, label paper (adhesive labels), trans-
lucent paper, postcards and non-
standard size paper.
3. Interface for network connections
⇒ p.27 “Connecting the Machine (Net-
work Connections)”

22
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 23 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

External Options

External Options

1. Mailbox 4. Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples)

Sorts printed papers. Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.
*Mailbox tray 1-9 *4: Finisher upper tray
2. Copy tray *5: Finisher shift tray
Copied paper is delivered here. 5. Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Sta-
ples)
3. Booklet Finisher
Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.
Sorts, stacks, staples and punches copies.
*6: Finisher upper tray
The saddle stitch function is also availa-
ble. *7: Finisher shift tray
*1: Finisher upper tray 6. Interposer
*2: Finisher shift tray 1 Inserts cover or slip sheets into the cop-
*3: Finisher shift tray 2 ies.
7. Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Holds 4000 sheets of paper.

23
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 24 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Control Panel

1. Screen contrast knob 4. {Job List}} key

Adjusts the brightness of the display pan- Shows the job list.
el.
5. Display panel
2. Indicators Shows the operation status, error mes-
Show errors and machine status. sages, and function menus.
B:Data In indicator⇒ p.51 “Multi-Ac- 6. {Check Modes}} key
cess”
Press this key to check settings.
L: Service Call indicator
x: Misfeed indicator⇒ p.122 “x Clear- 7. {Program}} key (Copy mode)
ing Misfeeds” Press to register frequently used settings,
M: Open Cover indicator or to recall registered settings.
d: Add Staple indicator⇒ p.134 “d 8. {Clear Modes}} key
Adding Staples” Press to clear previously entered copy job
D: Add Toner indicator⇒ p.120 “D settings.
Adding Toner”
9. {Energy Saver}} key
3. {User Tools/Counter}} key Press to switch to and from Low Power
• User Tools mode.
Press to change the default settings
and conditions to meet your require- 10. {Interrupt}} key (Copy mode)
ments. ⇒ p.74 “Accessing User Tools Press to make interrupt copies during a
(System Settings)” copy run.
• Counter
Press to check or print the total
number of copies made.⇒ p.156
“Counter”
• Inquiry
Press to check where to contact for
machine repairs and ordering toner.⇒
p.155 “Inquiry”

24
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 25 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Control Panel

11. Main power indicator and On 19. Function Status indicator

indicator These show the status of the above func-
The main power indicator lights up when tions:
the main power switch is turned on. • Yellow: the function is selected.
The On indicator lights up when the • Green: the function is active.
power is turned on. • Red: the function has been interrupt-
ed.
Important
❒ Do not turn off the power while 2
the On indicator is blinking. Doing
so may damage the hard disk.
12. Operation switch
Press this switch to turn the power on
(the On indicator lights up). To turn the
power off, press this switch again (the On
indicator goes off).
13. {Sample Copy}} key
Press to make a single set of copies or
prints to check for poor copying or print-
ing before making multiple sets.
14. {Start}} key
Press to start copying, scanning, or print-
ing documents stored on the Document
Server.
15. {Clear/Stop}} key
• Clear
Press to delete a number entered.
• Stop
Press to stop a job such as scanning
originals, or printing in progress.
16. {#}} key
Press to enter a value.
17. Number keys
Use to enter the desired number of cop-
ies.
18. Function keys
Press to select the following functions:
• Copy
• Document Server
• Printer
• Scanner

25
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 26 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Display Panel
The display panel shows machine status, error messages and function menus.
Important
❒ A force or impact of more than 30 N (about 3 kgf) will damage the display
panel.
2 The default setting is to display the screen for copying when you turn the power
on.

The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify an
item by lightly pressing them.
When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it is highlighted like
. Keys appearing as OK cannot be used.

Common Key Operations

The following keys are common to all screens.

❖ Key list
[OK] Acknowledges a selected function or entered values, and then returns
to the previous screen.
[Cancel] Deletes a selected function or entered values, and then returns to the
previous screen.
UPrev.], [T
[U TNext] Moves to the previous page or the next page when all functions cannot
be displayed on one page.
[OK] [Yes] Closes message screens.
[Clear] Clears entered values and does not change the screen.
[Exit] Returns to the previous screen.

26
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 27 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Connecting the Machine (Network Connections)

Connecting the Machine (Network

Connections)

1. Parallel port 3. IEEE 1394 ports (option)

Port for connecting the parallel interface Port for connecting the IEEE 1394 inter-
cable. face cable.
⇒ “Connecting the Machine” in the 4. Wireless LAN port (option)
Printer Reference 1
Port for using the wireless LAN.
2. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port 5. USB port (option)
Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or
Port for connecting the USB 2.0 interface
100BASE-TX cable.
cable.
⇒ “Connecting the Machine” in the
Printer Reference 1

27
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 28 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Requirements

Requirements
Before using this machine, make sure all environmental and electrical require-
ments have been met. Connect the machine to the host computer using the par-
2 allel port, network interface board, or both.
Make sure you have all the cables, connectors, and electrical outlets necessary to
attach the machine to the host computer or network.
Important
❒ The interface cable is not supplied. The user is required to provide the inter-
face cable appropriate for the computer being used.

Network cable requirements

The network interface board can be installed to allow direct connection to an
Ethernet network.
The network interface board supports 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX connections.
The IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option) supports the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
You can use the machine in the following network environments:
• Using the appropriate network management software and printer drivers
• Attaching the machine to a network computer set up as a server
Client Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0 *1 , Mac
OS *2 (optional PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 is required), UNIX *3
Driver PCL 6/5e, RPCS™, PostScript 3
File Server NetWare 3.x, NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI *3 , AppleTalk
*1
Under Windows NT 4.0, only × 86 CPUs are supported.
*2
For information about usable versions of the Mac OS, see the Printer Reference 1.
*3
Connecting UNIX printing information, please visit our web site or consult your au-
thorized dealer.
*4
Under Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP and Windows NT 4.0 only. Only for
Peer-Peer Printing. SmartnetMonitor for Client is required to use the NetBEUI pro-
tocol.
In a mixed network environment, protocols switch automatically.
Reference
For more information about network connection settings, see p.69 “User
Tools (System Settings)”.

28
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 29 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Connecting the Machine (Network Connections)

Note
❒ Consult your network administrator before connecting the machine to a net-
work.
❒ Make sure to use a properly shielded and grounded cable (UTP, STP, Catego-
ry/Type5) for the connection to the host computer (and/or HUB) in order to
meet FCC and EMC Directive 89/336/EEC emission guidelines.

When the Wireless LAN Board (option) is installed

2
When using the Wireless LAN Interface on the network, keep the following
points in mind:

❖ Attach both antennas as a unit.

❖ When moving the machine

Detach the antennas when relocating the machine locally.
After moving the machine, reattach the antennas, ensuring that:
• The antennas are positioned clear of obstacles.
• There is 40 to 60 mm between the antennas, so that they do not touch.
• The exposure glass cover and Document Feeder (ADF) do not knock the
antennas.

❖ If the network area provides poor radio environment

Where radio wave conditions are bad, the network may not function due to
interrupted or failed connections. When checking the Wireless LAN Signal
and the access point, follow these steps to improve the situation:
• Position the access point nearer to the machine.
• Clear the space between access point and machine of obstructions.
• Move radio wave generating appliances, such as microwaves, away from
the machine and access point.
Reference
To check the machine's radio wave status, press [Wireless LAN Signal] in Sys-
tem Settings.⇒ p.88 “Wireless LAN Signal”
For more information about access point radio wave conditions, refer to the
access point manual.

29
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 30 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Connecting the Network Cable to the Network

Limitation
❒ The IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option), the Wireless LAN Board (option) or
USB 2.0 Interface Board (option) cannot be installed at the same time.
Note
2 ❒ Connect the machine to the computer. Set the network connection settings,
and then install any necessary software such as printer drivers. For details,
see the Printer Reference 1.

Connecting to the Ethernet Interface

Note
❒ Rating voltage of the interface connector: Max. DC 5V

A Turn off the main power switch.

B Attach the Ethernet interface cable to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port.

C Turn on the main power switch.

❖ Indicators on Network Interface Board

1. Indicator (green) 2. Indicator (yellow)

Remains green when the machine Turns yellow when 100 BASE-TX is
is connected to the network cor- operating.
rectly. Turns off when 10 BASE-T is oper-
ating.

30
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 31 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Connecting the Machine (Network Connections)

Connecting to the IEEE 1394 Interface (option)

Important
❒ Before making the connection, touch the metallic part to dissipate static elec-
tricity.
Note
❒ Use the interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option). 2
❒ The interface cable should not be looped.

A Attach the IEEE 1394 interface cable to the IEEE 1394 ports.

Note
❒ Two interface ports are available for attaching the IEEE 1394 interface ca-
ble.

Connecting to the USB 2.0 Interface (option)

A Attach the USB 2.0 interface cable to the USB port.

Important
❒ The interface cable is not supplied. It is your responsibility to provide the
interface cable appropriate for the computer that you are using.
Reference
For more information about the USB interface cable, see the Printer Refer-
ence 1.
31
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 32 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Turning On the Power

This machine has two power switch- Important
es.
❒ Do not turn off the main power
❖ Operation switch (right side of the immediately after it has been
control panel) turned on. Failure to observe
2 Press this switch to activate the this may result in damage to the
hard disk or memory, leading to
machine. When the machine has
warmed up, you can make copies. malfunction.

❖ Main power switch (left side of the ma-

chine)
Turning On the Power
When the machine is not to be used
for an extended period of time, A Press the operation switch to
turn off the main power switch. make the On indicator light up.

Note
❒ This machine automatically enters
Low Power mode or turns itself off
if you do not use it for a certain pe-
riod. ⇒ p.82 “Auto Off Timer” ,
p.82 “Energy Saver Timer”

Turning On the Main Power

A Make sure that the power cord is Note
firmly plugged into the wall out-
❒ If the power is not turned on
let.
when the operation switch is
B Open the switch cover and turn pressed, check if the main pow-
on the main power switch (make er switch is on. If off, turn it on.
sure that the Main Power indica-
tor lights up).

32
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 33 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Turning On the Power

Turning Off the Power Turning Off the Main Power

A Press the operation switch to Important
make the On indicator go off. ❒ Do not turn off the main power
switch when the On indicator is on
or blinking. Failure to observe this
may result in damage to the hard
disk or memory, leading to mal-
2
function.
❒ Pull out the power cord after you
turn off the main power switch.
Failure to observe this may result
in damage to the hard disk or
memory, leading to malfunction.

Note A Make sure the On indicator is off.

❒ Even if you press the operation B Open the switch cover, and turn
switch, the indicator does not off the main power switch to
go off and blinks in the follow- make the main power indicator
ing cases: goes off.
• When communication is in
progress with external
equipment.
• When the hard disk is oper-
ating.

33
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 34 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Configuring the Network

Configuring the Network

Preparation
2 This section describes the network settings using the System Settings menu.
Required setting items depend on the mode to be used.
Mode Network Network Settings Reference
Environment
Scanner TCP/IP IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
(Network Gateway Address, Network p.38 “Acquiring the IP Ad-
Twain Scan- Boot, Effective Protocol, Inter- dress from the DHCP Server”
ner) face Select , “Making E-mail Settings”,
Mail Trans- (The settings must be made Scanner Reference
fer from the PC. Make the SMTP
server name, SMTP port
number and DNS server set-
tings using a Web browser.)
IEEE 1394 *3 IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
Gateway Address, Effective p.39 “When using the IEEE
Protocol (TCP/IP), IP over 1394 Interface (option)”
1394 , “Making E-mail Settings”,
(The settings must be made Scanner Reference
from the PC. Make the SMTP
server name, SMTP port
number and DNS server set-
tings using a Web browser.)
Wireless IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
LAN *4 Gateway Address, Network p.41 “When using the Wireless
Boot, Effective Protocol, Inter- LAN Interface (option) in Ad
face Select, Communication hoc Mode”, p.42 “When using
Mode, Channel, WEP, SSID the Wireless LAN Interface
(The settings must be made (option) in Infrastructure
from the PC. Make the SMTP Mode”
server name, SMTP port , “Making E-mail Settings”,
number and DNS server set- Scanner Reference
tings using a Web browser.)
Scanner TCP/IP IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
(Network Gateway Address, Network p.38 “Acquiring the IP Ad-
Delivery Boot, Effective Protocol, Inter- dress from the DHCP Server”
Scanner) face Select, Delivery Option
IEEE 1394 *3 IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
Gateway Address, Effective p.39 “When using the IEEE
Protocol (TCP/IP), IP over 1394 Interface (option)”
1394, Delivery Option

34
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 35 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Configuring the Network

Mode Network Network Settings Reference

Environment
Scanner Wireless IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
(Network LAN *4 Gateway Address, Network p.41 “When using the Wireless
Delivery Boot, Effective Protocol, Inter- LAN Interface (option) in Ad
Scanner) face Select, Communication hoc Mode”, p.42 “When using
Mode, Channel *5 , WEP, SSID the Wireless LAN Interface
*6
, Delivery Option (option) in Infrastructure
Mode” 2
Printer TCP/IP *1 IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
Gateway Address, Network p.38 “Acquiring the IP Ad-
Boot, Effective Protocol, Inter- dress from the DHCP Server”
face Select
NetWare *1 *2
Effective Protocol, NW Frame ⇒ p.38 “When using Net-
Type Ware”
IEEE 1394 *3 IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
Gateway Address, Effective p.39 “When using the IEEE
Protocol (TCP/IP), IP over 1394 1394 Interface (option)”
Wireless IP Address, Subnet Mask, ⇒ p.37 “When using TCP/IP”,
LAN *4 Gateway Address, Network p.41 “When using the Wireless
Boot, Effective Protocol, Inter- LAN Interface (option) in Ad
face Select, Communication hoc Mode”, p.40 “When using
Mode, Channel *5 , WEP, SSID the Wireless LAN Interface
*6
(option) in 802.11 Ad hoc
Mode”, p.42 “When using the
Wireless LAN Interface (op-
tion) in Infrastructure Mode”
*1 Make necessary settings for your network environment. For details about settings,
see the Network Printing Guide.
*2
Configure TCP/IP when you use pure IP of NetWare 5/5.1.
*3
You will need the IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option).
*4
You will need the IEEE 802.11b Interface kit (option).
*5
Make necessary settings when the communication mode is Ad hoc Mode.
*6 Make necessary settings when the communication mode is 802.11 Ad hoc Mode.
Note
❒ In a network environment using TCP/IP, you can use SmartNetMonitor to
configure IP addresses for Admin and the web browser packaged with Print-
er Controller or Printer/Scanner Controller. For details about Smart Net
Monitor, see the Network Printing Guide.
❒ For details on setting values, see p.75 “Settings You Can Change with User
Tools”.

35
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 36 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Configuring the Network with the Display Panel

This section describes basic procedures. Please make the settings appropriate for
the functions and network you are using.
Important
❒ These settings should be made by the systems administrator or after consult-
2 ing with the systems administrator.
Note
❒ In this manual, minimum settings for network connections are described. For
more details, see the Network Printing Guide.
For default settings, see p.75 “Settings You Can Change with User Tools”.

❖ “Interface Settings/Network” ⇒ p.84

❖ “Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 (option)” ⇒ p.87
❖ “Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b (option)” ⇒ p.88
❖ “File Transfer” ⇒ p.89

Network Settings
The following describes the settings required to use the machine in a network.
For more information about the settings, see p.84 “Interface Settings/Network”.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

B Press the [System Settings] key.

36
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 37 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Configuring the Network

C Press the [Interface Settings] key.

D Make the [Effective Protocol] settings.
Note
❒ You must configure IP address for using TCP/IP protocol. Consult the net-
work administrator for help with the address. You don't have to configure
it if Network Boot is DHCP.
❒ Press the [Invalid] key for redundant protocols. 2
❒ Press the [Effective] key for TCP/IP protocol when you use pure IP of Net-
Ware 5/5.1.
A Make sure that the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [Effective
Protocol] key.

B Press the [Effective] or [Invalid] key for each protocol.

C Press the [OK] key.
The following operation will be different, according to each protocol.

When using TCP/IP

A Make sure that the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [IP Ad-
dress] key.

B Use the number keys to enter the IP address.

Note
❒ Press the [←
←] or [→→] key to move in 3-digit increments.
❒ Press the [Clear] key if the wrong address is entered.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Make the [Sub-net Mask] and [Gateway Address] settings. For each item,
press the corresponding button on the screen shown in step A, and then
perform the same procedure as described in steps B and C.

37
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 38 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

Acquiring the IP Address from the DHCP Server

To use the DHCP server to acquire the IP address, select [DHCP] from [Network
Boot].
Note
❒ You need to make settings when you use DHCP. See “Using DHCP” in the
Network Printing Guide.
2 ❒ To always assign the same IP address to the machine, reserve the IP ad-
dress for the machine on the DHCP server. See “Using DHCP” in the Net-
work Printing Guide.
❒ Use the default IP address.
A Make sure that the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [Network
Boot] key.

B Press the [DHCP] key, and then press the [OK] key.

When using NetWare

To use the machine on NetWare, be sure to select the type of [NW Frame Type].
You can select the following frame types:
• Auto Select (Default)
• Ethernet II
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
Note
❒ Make sure to select the frame type same as the file server.
❒ When you select “Auto Select”, the frame type detected upon startup is au-
tomatically set. Therefore, your desired frame type may not be selected by
the system, which supports multiple frame types. Select the desired frame
type.
❒ To use the machine in a pure IP environment on NetWare 5/5.1, select [Ef-
fective] for TCP/IP in step D.

38
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 39 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Configuring the Network

A Make sure that the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [NW Frame
Type] key.

B Select the Frame Type, and then press the [OK] key. 2
When using the IEEE 1394 Interface (option)

Note
❒ When you use the IEEE 1394 Interface, you cannot use the DHCP. You
must set the fixed IP address.
❒ Be sure to set the IP over 1394 to “Effective”. The default is set to “Effec-
tive”.
Reference
When you use parallel printing, see the Printer Reference.
A Make sure that the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [IEEE 1394]
key.

B Press the [IP Address] key.

C Use the number keys to enter the IP address, and then press the [OK] key.
D Press the [Sub-net Mask] key.
E Use the number keys to enter the Subnet Mask, and then press the [OK]
key.
F Press the [IP over 1394] key.
G Make sure that [Active] is selected, and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ If [Active] is not selected, press the [Active] key, and then press the [OK]
key.

39
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 40 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

When using the Wireless LAN Interface (option) in 802.11 Ad hoc Mode
Make sure to set 802.11 Ad hoc Mode, when SSID is necessary in Ad hoc
Mode. If encrypted transmission is used, make sure to set WEP after SSID.
Note
❒ You can set the 802.11 Ad hoc Mode from your computer when setting
SSID (Network Name).
2 ❒ The network administrator must check the environment and set the Com-
munication mode, WEP key and SSID correctly. For details on settings, see
“Using the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)” in the Network Printing Guide.
❒ Characters used for setting SSID are <ASCII 0x20 to 0x7e> which are case-
sensitive. You can enter up to 32 characters.
❒ You can also set 802.11 Ad hoc mode from the Web browser. For details on
settings, see the Network Printing Guide.
A Make sure that [Network] is selected, and then press [LAN Type] key.

B Press the [IEEE 802.11b] key, and then press the [OK] key.
C Press the [IEEE 802.11b] key.

D Press the [Communication Mode] key.

E Press the [802.11 Ad hoc] key, and then press the [OK] key.
F Press the [Channel] key.
G Use the number keys to enter the channel to be used, and then press the
[OK] key.
H Press the [SSID Setting] key.
I Press [Enter SSID] and enter the SSID, and then press the [OK] key.
J Press the [OK] key.

40
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 41 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Configuring the Network

When using the Wireless LAN Interface (option) in Ad hoc Mode

Note
❒ You can set Ad hoc Mode when you do not set SSID (Network Name) from
your computer. In this case, setting SSID from this machine is ineffective.
❒ The network administrator must check the environment and set the Com-
munication mode and Channel correctly. For details on settings, see “Us-
ing the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)” in the Network Printing Guide. 2
❒ Characters used for setting SSID are <ASCII 0x20 to 0x7e> which are case-
sensitive. You can enter up to 32 characters.
❒ You can set the Ad hoc mode from the Web browser. For details on set-
tings, see the Network Printing Guide.
A Make sure that the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [LAN Type]
key.

B Press the [IEEE 802.11b] key, and then press the [OK] key.
C Press the [IEEE 802.11b] key.

D Press the [Communication Mode] key.

E Press the [Ad hoc] key, and then press the [OK] key.
F Press the [Channel] key.
G Use the number keys to enter the channel to be used, and then press the
[OK] key.

41
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 42 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

When using the Wireless LAN Interface (option) in Infrastructure Mode

Note
❒ The network administrator must check the environment and set the Com-
munication mode, WEP key, and SSID correctly. For details on settings, see
“Using the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)” in the Network Printing Guide.
❒ Enter the WEP key in hexadecimal. You can enter 10-digits for 64-bit data
2 or 26-digits for 128-bit data.
❒ Characters used for setting SSID are <ASCII 0×20 to 0×7e> which are case-
sensitive. You can enter up to 32 characters.
❒ You can also set the Infrastructure mode from the Web browser. For details
on settings, see the Network Printing Guide.
A Make sure the [Network] key is selected, and then press the [LAN Type] key.

B Press the [IEEE 802.11b] key, and then press the [OK] key.
C Press the [IEEE 802.11b] key.

D Press the [Communication Mode] key.

E Press the [Infrastructure] key, and then press the [OK] key.
F Press the [SSID Setting] key.
G Press the [Enter SSID] key.
H Enter the SSID, and then press the [OK] key.
I Press the [OK] key.
J Press the [WEP (Encryption) Setting] key if setting is required.
K Press [Enter WEP key] and enter the WEP key, and then press the [OK] key.
L Press the [Active] key.
M Press the [OK] key.
42
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 43 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Configuring the Network

E Press the [Exit] key.

F Print the list of entered settings if necessary.
Note
❒ It will take up to 20 seconds for SSID to become active after it has been set.
Reference
For details about List/Test Print, see “Printer Features Menu” in the Print- 2
er Reference 2.
A Press the [Printer Features] key.

B Press the [Config. Page] key.

The system settings list is printed.

G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

The new settings become effective and the display returns to the main func-
tion menu.

File Transfer Settings

The following describes the file transfer settings required for the scanner func-
tion. For more information about the settings, see p.89 “File Transfer”.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

43
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 44 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

B Press the [System Settings] key.

2 C Press the [File Transfer] key.

Assigning a Delivery Option
A Press the [Delivery Option] key.

B Press the [ON] key.

C Press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ You must set the delivery server IP address through ScanRouter V2
Lite/Professional. You cannot set the address from the machine.
❒ The delivery server IP address set through ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profes-
sional will be displayed on the machine.

Setting the Recall Interval Time

A Press the [Scanner Recall Interval Time] key.

B Use the number keys to enter the recall interval time, and then press the
[OK] key.

44
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 45 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Configuring the Network

Setting the Number of Recalls

A Press the [Number of Scanner Recalls] key.

2
B To resend files to the delivery server, press the [ON] key.
C Use the number keys to enter the number of recalls, and then press the
[OK] key.

D Press the [Exit] key.

E Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
The new settings become effective and the display returns to the main func-
tion menu.

45
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 46 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Basics

46
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 47 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

3. Combined Function
Operations
Changing Modes
Note
❒ You cannot switch modes in any of the following situations:
• When accessing user tools
• During interrupt copying
❒ The default setting is to display the screen for copying when you turn the
power on. You can change the setting. For details about settings, see p.75
“Function Priority”

47
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 48 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Combined Function Operations

Saving Energy

- Low Power Mode

If you do not operate the machine for a certain period after an operation or when
you press the {Energy Saver}
} key, the display disappears and the machine enters
Low Power mode. When you press the {Energy Saver} } key again, the machine re-
turns to the “Ready” status. In Low Power mode, the machine uses less electric-
ity.
3
Note
❒ You can change the setting of the Panel Off timer. ⇒ p.83 “Panel Off Timer”

- System Reset
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically when your job is fin-
ished, after a certain period of time. This function is called “System Reset”.
Note
❒ You can change the System Reset time. ⇒ p.83 “System Auto Reset Timer”

- Auto Off
The machine turns itself off automatically after your job is finished, after a cer-
tain period of time. This function is called “Auto Off”.
Note
❒ You can change the Auto Off time. ⇒ p.82 “Auto Off Timer”
❒ Auto Off Timer function will not operate in the following cases:
• When a warning message is displayed
• When the service call message is displayed
• When paper is jammed
• When the cover is open
• When “Adding Toner” message is displayed
• When toner is being added
• When the User Tools/Counter screen is displayed
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When printer or other functions are operating

48
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 49 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Changing Modes

• When operations have been suspended during printing

• When the Data In indicator is on or blinking
• When the sample print or confidential print screen is displayed

Job List
In the Job List, you can check and delete the contents of jobs in printing order
and jobs being printed.
Note 3
❒ In the Job List, jobs reserved using copy mode and Document Server mode
are displayed. When [Print Priority] in the system settings is set to [Job order],
jobs reserved using copy mode, printer mode, Document Server mode or Net-
file mode are displayed.
• The Netfile mode
This function allows printing from a PC, documents stored in Document
Server of the machine using DeskTopBinder V2 Professional /Lite.

Checking the List

A Press the {Job List}} key.

B Select the job number of the list you want to check.

The job list is displayed.

49
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 50 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Combined Function Operations

The icons below show the operation mode of stored documents.

Job printed using Job printed using Job printed using Job printed using
copy mode. printer mode. Document Server Netfile mode.
mode.

Note
❒ If more than six jobs are registered, press the [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] key to
scroll the screen.
3 C Press the [Detail] key.
D Check the contents of the list.
E Press the [OK] key.
The display returns to the job list menu.

Deleting Jobs

A Press the {Job List}} key.

B Select the job number to be deleted.

C Press the [Delete Job] key.

D Press the [Yes] key.
The display returns to the job list menu.

50
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 51 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Multi-Access

Multi-Access
You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is
being performed. Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is
called “Multi-Access”.
This allows you to handle your jobs efficiently, regardless of how the machine is
being used. For example:
• While making copies, you can scan documents to store in the Document Serv-
er.
• While printing documents saved in the Document Server, the machine can re-
ceive print data.
3
• While printing print data, you can make operations for copying.
Note
❒ You can set the priority of functions on p.75 “Print Priority”. As default set-
ting, the “Display Mode” is set to first priority.
❒ When the optional Booklet Finisher, Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples) or Fin-
isher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) is installed on the machine, you can specify
the output tray to which documents are to be delivered. For more information
about how to specify the output tray for each function, see the following de-
scriptions:
• p.77 “Output: Copier”
• p.77 “Output: Document Server”
• p.78 “Output: Printer”

❖ What you can do with the Multi-Access Function

The multi-access function enables you to do the operations below.
• Receiving printer data while printing a document saved in the Document
Server
The machine can receive printer data while copying or printing a docu-
ment saved in the Document Server. The received data will be printed
when the printer function is enabled.
A Select the document to be printed on the Document Server screen, and
then press the {Start}
} key.
B When the machine receives the printer data, the Data In indicator
blinks.
When printing is finished, the machine starts printing printer data.

51
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 52 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Combined Function Operations

- Sample operations
The chart below shows sample operations of when “Print Priority” is set to “In-
terleave”. ⇒ p.75 “Print Priority”
|: Simultaneous operations are available.
$: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and remote
switching (of the scanner) is done.
❍: Operation is enabled when the {Interrupt}} key is pressed to interrupt the pre-
ceding operation.
3 →: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
×: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultane-
ous operations are not available.)
Mode after you select Printer

DeskTopBinder V2 Professional/Lite
Interrupt Copying

Document Server
Scanner
Copy

Print

Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server

Operations for Document Server

Printing from Document Server

Printing from Document Server
Operations for Scanning
Operations for Copying

Operations for Copying

Data Reception

Scanning
Copying
Stapling

Stapling
Printing
Sort

Mode before you select

Operations for Copying × × × ❍ ❍ | | | $ $ $ $ $ |
Stapling | → → ❍ ❍ | | → $ $ $ $ | |
*1 *1 *1 *4 *2 *2 *3 *3

| → → ❍ ❍ | | | $ $ $ $ | |
Copy

Sort
*1 *1 *1 *2 *2
52
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 53 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Multi-Access

Mode after you select Printer

DeskTopBinder V2 Professional/Lite
Interrupt Copying

Document Server
Scanner
Copy 3

Print

Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server

Operations for Document Server

Printing from Document Server

Printing from Document Server
Operations for Scanning
Operations for Copying

Operations for Copying

Data Reception

Scanning
Copying
Stapling

Stapling
Printing
Sort

Mode before you select

Operations for Copying ❍ ❍ ❍ × × | | | × × × × × |
Interrupt Copying

Copying ❍ ❍ ❍ × × | → → × × × × × →

Data Reception | | | | | → → → | | | | | |
Sort Print | | | ❍ ❍ | → → | | | | | |
Document Server Scanner Printer

Stapling | → | ❍ ❍ | → → | | | | | |
Print

*4 *3 *3

Operations for Scanning $ $ $ ❍ ❍ | | | × × $ $ $ |

Scanning × × × × × | | | × × × × × |

Operations for Document Server $ $ $ ❍ ❍ | | | $ $ × × × |

Scanning a Document to Store in $ × × ❍ ❍ | | | $ × × × × |
Document Server
Printing from Document Server $ | | ❍ ❍ | | | | | | | | |
*3 *5 *5 *5

53
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 54 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Combined Function Operations

Mode after you select Printer

DeskTopBinder V2 Professional/Lite
Interrupt Copying

Document Server
Scanner
3 Copy

Print

Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server

Operations for Document Server

Printing from Document Server

Printing from Document Server
Operations for Scanning
Operations for Copying

Operations for Copying

Data Reception

Scanning
Copying
Stapling

Stapling
Printing
Sort

Mode before you select

Printing from Document Server | | | | | | | | | | | | | ×
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional/Lite

*3

*1 Simultaneous operations are only available after the preceding job documents are all
scanned and the [New Job] key appears.
*2
You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
*3 During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
*4
Stapling is not available.
*5
Simultaneous operations are possible once you press the [New Job] key.

54
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 55 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Multi-Access

Limitation
❒ Stapling cannot be used at the same time for multiple functions.
Note
❒ While printing is in progress, scanning a document using another function
may take more time.

55
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 56 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Combined Function Operations

56
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 57 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

4. Document Server

Relationship between Document Server

and Other Functions
The following table describes the relationship between the Document Server
and other machine functions.
Where to store
Function name Displaying a list Printing documents
documents
Copy/Document
Copy Enabled Enabled
Server
Printer Personal computer Enabled Enabled
Scanner Scanner Disabled Disabled

Document Server Display

❖ Document Server Main Display

1. Operating status and messages 3. The numbers of originals, copies,

are displayed. and printed pages are displayed.
2. The title of the currently selected 4. The operation keys are displayed.
screen is displayed.
5. The stored operation mode is dis-
played.

The icons below show the operation mode when documents have been stored
in the Document Server.
Function Copier Printer Scanner
Icon --

57
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 58 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Document Server

Using the Document Server

Note
Scanning and Saving Originals ❒ Data stored in the Document Serv-
er is set to be deleted after 3 days
❖ File Name (72 hours) by the factory default
The saved documents will automat- setting. You can specify the period
ically be named as “COPY0001”, after which the stored data is delet-
“COPY0002”. You can change as- ed automatically. ⇒ p.94 “Auto
signed file names. Delete File”
❖ User Name A Press the {Document Server}} key.
You can register a user name to dis-
4 tinguish the person or department
that saved the documents. To as-
sign a user name, you can register it
by using the name assigned to the
user code or by entering the name.
Reference
For more information about the
use r cod es, see p.96 “User
Codes”.

❖ Password B Press the [Scan Original] key.

You can set a password for saved
documents, and use it to prevent
others printing them. When a pass-
word is set for the documents, is
added to the documents.
Reference
To store documents in a mode oth- C Enter a file name, user name, or
er than Document Server mode, password if necessary.
see References for the respective
Note
functions.
❒ If you do not register a file
Important name, one is automatically as-
❒ Data stored in the machine might be signed.
lost if some kind of failure occurs.
Reference
The supplier shall not be responsible
for any damage that might result ⇒ p.59 “To register or change a
from the loss of data. For long-term user name”
storage of data, we recommend the ⇒ p.60 “To change a file name”
use of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite or ⇒ p.60 “To set or change a pass-
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional word”
(option). For more information,
please contact your local dealer.
58
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 59 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Using the Document Server

D Place your originals. To register or change a user name

Reference
For more information about A Display the “Scan Original” dis-
how to place the types of origi- play.
nals that can be placed, see the
Copy Reference.
B Press the [User Name] key.
E Make any desired settings.

If user names have already been

registered, the “User Name” dis-
play appears. When pressing [Non- 4
Reference programmed Name], unregistered
For details, see the Copy Refer- names can also be used.
ence.
If no user names are registered in
F Press the {Start}} key. “Address Book Management”, the
user name entry dialog box is dis-
The document is saved in the Doc- played.
ument Server.
Reference
Note
⇒ p.96 “User Codes”
❒ To stop scanning, press the
{ Clear/Stop}} key. To resume
paused scanning job, press the If registered user names are used
[Continue] key in the confirma-
tion dialog box. To delete saved A Select a registered user name
images and cancel the job, press from the list, and then press
the [Stop] key. the [OK] key.
❒ When a password has been set,
appears on the left side of the
file name.
❒ The saved documents are dis-
played on the “Select Files to
Print” display. If not displayed, To change your user name to an
press the [Scanning Finished] key. unregistered user name, go to
the next step.
Reference
⇒ p.97 “To Register a New
User Code”

59
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 60 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Document Server

If unregistered user names are C Press the [Delete All] key to delete
used the old file name.
Note
A Press the [Non-programed Name]
key. ❒ You can also use the [Backspace]
key to delete unnecessary char-
B Enter the new user name, and acters.
then press the [OK] key.
D Enter a new file name, and then
press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ A string of up to 10 characters
can be entered as a file name.
Note that only eight characters
4 Reference
of each file name are displayed
⇒ p.110 “Entering Text” in the document list.
Reference
If user names have not been
registered ⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”

A Enter the new user name, and To set or change a password

then press the [OK] key.
A Bring up the “Scan Original” dis-
play.

B Press the [Password] key.

Reference
⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”.

To change a file name

C Enter the password using the
A Bring up the “Scan Original” dis- number keys (4-digits), and then
press the [OK] or {#}
} key.
play.

B Press the [File Name] key.

The “File Name” display appears.

60
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 61 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Using the Document Server

Changing a File Name, User Selecting a Document

Name, or Password
A Press the {Document Server}} key.
A Press the {Document Server}} key. B Select a document to be printed.
B Select the document for which the
user name, file name, or password
is to be changed.

Note
❒ If a password has been set for
the document, enter it, and then 4
Note press the [OK] key.
❒ If a password has already been ❒ You can search for a desired
set for the document, enter the document by using the [Search
password, and then press the by User Name] or [Search by File
[OK] key. Name] key. ⇒ p.62 “Searching
Saved Documents”
C Press the [File Management] key. ❒ You can sort document names
D Press the [Change File Name], in the list by user name, file
[Change User Name], or [Change name or date. To sort docu-
Password] key. ments, press the [User Name],
[File Name] or [Date] key.
❒ If you cannot determine the
contents of a document by its
file name, you can print the first
page of the document to check
its contents. ⇒ p.65 “Print First
E Enter the new file name, user
Page”
❒ To cancel a document selection,
name, or password, and then
press the [OK] key. press the highlighted document
again.
Reference
⇒ p.59 “To register or change a C To print multiple documents, re-
user name” peat step B in the order to be
printed.
⇒ p.60 “To change a file name”
⇒ p.60 “To set or change a pass- Note
word” ❒ You can select up to 30 docu-
ments.
F Press the [OK] key. ❒ If sizes or resolutions of selected
documents are not the same, the
documents may not be printed.

61
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 62 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Document Server

❒ If you wish to change the order

for printing, cancel the selec- Searching Saved Documents
tion, and select documents in
the desired order. You can use either the [Search by File
❒ If you press the {Clear Modes} } Name] or [Search by User Name] key to
key, selection of all documents search for documents stored on the
will be canceled. Document Server. You can also list
stored documents in the order you
❒ If you press the [Printg Odr] key, prefer.
the do cuments w ill be dis-
played in the order of printing. Note
❒ If you install DeskTopBinder V2
To Check Details of Stored Documents Professional or DeskTopBinder V2
Lite on your computer, you can

4 A Select the document that you

search and rearrange documents
from your computer.
want to display detailed informa-
tion for. Reference
For more detailed information re-
fer to DeskTopBinder V2 Profes-
sional/Lite manuals.

To Search by File Name

Note A Press the {Document Server}} key.

❒ If a password has been set for
the document, enter it, and then B Press the [Search by File Name] key.
press the [OK] key.

B Press the [Detail] key.

Detailed information about the
document is displayed.

C Enter the file name, and then

press the [OK] key.
Only files beginning with the
name entered appear in the “Select
Files to Print” display.
Note
❒ If you have selected several doc- Reference
uments, use the [U U ] and [T
T] ⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”.
keys to view the details of each.
Note
❒ Press the [OK] key. The “Select
❒ To display all files saved in the
Files to Print” display appears.
Document Server, press the [File
List] key.

62
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 63 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Using the Document Server

To Search by User Name Printing Saved Documents

A Press the {Document Server}} key. A Select the document to be printed.
B Press the [Search by User Name] key.

Note
C To specify a registered user name, ❒ If a password has been set for
the document, enter it, and then
select the user name from the dis-
played list, and then press the press the [OK] key. 4
[OK] key. ❒ You can print multiple docu-
ments. ⇒ p.61 “Selecting a Doc-
Note ument”
❒ To specify an unregistered user
name, go to the next step. B If you need to change any print
settings, press the [Print Settings]
D To specify an unregistered user key.
name, press the [Non-programed
The “Print Settings” display ap-
Name] key and enter the name,
pears. User names, file names, and
and then press the [OK] key.
print order of documents appear.

Reference
Note
⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”
❒ The print settings made for
E Press the [OK] key. printing in copier or printer
mode are stored after printing
Only files beginning with the and applied to the next printing.
name entered appear in the “Select
Files to Print” display. ❒ When multiple documents are
printed at the same time, print
Note settings made for the document
❒ To display all files saved in the printed first are applied to all
Document Server, press the [File other documents.
List] key. ❒ Print setting items are listed be-
lo w. For more informatio n
about print results according to
each setting, see the Copy Refer-
ence.

63
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 64 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Document Server

❖ Binding format D Press the {Start}} key.

• 2-Sided Copy Top to Top The machine starts printing.
• 2-Sided Copy Top to Bot-
tom
Stopping printing
• Booklet
• Magazine A Press the {Clear/Stop}
} key.
B Press the [Stop] key.
❖ Cover handling
• Cover/Slip Sheet Changing the number of copies
• Edit/Stamp during printing
❖ Finish
Limitation
• Sort
4 • Stack
❒ The number of copies can only
be changed when the Sort func-
• Staple tion is selected in print settings.
• Punch A Press the {Clear/Stop}} key.
❒ If you print more than one set B Press the [Change Quantity] key.
using the Sort function, you can C Use the number keys to enter a
check the print result by print- new number of copies.
ing out only the first set. ⇒ p.65 D Press the {#} } key.
“Sample Copy”.
E Press the [Continue] key.
❒ If you select multiple files, you
can confirm file names or print Printing restarts.
order you selected in step A by
scrolling through the list with
T] and [U
the [T U] keys.
❒ Press the [Select File] key to re-
turn to the “Select Files to Print”
display.

C Enter the required number of cop-

ies using the number keys.

Note
❒ Up to 999 can be entered.

64
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 65 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Using the Document Server

Sample Copy Print First Page

If you print multiple sets using the You can print the first page of the doc-
Sort function, you can check if the ument selected in the “Select Files to
print order or the print settings are Print” display to check content.
correct by printing out only the first If more than one document is select-
set using the {Sample Copy}
} key. ed, the first page of each is printed.
Limitation A Select the document to be printed.
❒ This function can be used only
when the Sort function is selected. Note
❒ If a password has been set for
A Select the document to be printed. the document, enter it, and then
press the [OK] key.
Note
4
❒ You can search for a document
using the [Search by User Name]
or [Search by File Name] keys. ⇒
Note
p.62 “Searching Saved Docu-
ments”
❒ If a password has been set for the
document, enter the password, ❒ You can sort document names
and then press the [OK] key. in the list by user name, file
name, or date. To sort docu-
❒ You can search for a document
ments, press the [User Name],
using the [Search by User Name] [File Name], or [Date] key.
or [Search by File Name] key. ⇒
p.62 “Searching Saved Docu- ❒ To cancel a document selection,
ments” press the highlighted document
again.
❒ You can sort document names
in the list by user name, file B Press the [Print 1st Page] key.
name, or date. To sort the docu-
ments, press the [User Name],
[File Name] or [Date] key.
❒ To cancel a document selection,
press the highlighted document
again.

B Press the {Sample Copy}} key. C Press the {Start}} key.

The first set is printed.

C Press the [Print] key.

Printing restarts.
Note
❒ Press the [Suspend] key to cancel
printing and return to the “Print
Settings” menu to change the
settings. 65
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 66 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Document Server

Deleting Saved Documents C Press the [Delete File] key.

Important
❒ You can save up to 3,000 docu-
ments in the Document Server. No
more documents can be saved
when there are 3,000 documents in
the Document Server. You should D Press the [Delete] key to delete the
delete unnecessary documents. document.

Note
❒ You can delete all saved docu-
ments at once with User Tools. ⇒
4 p.94 “Delete All Files”

A Press the {Document Server}} key.

B Select the document to be deleted.
Note
❒ If a password has been set for
the document, enter it, and then
press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ You can delete multiple docu-
ments at once. ⇒ p.61 “Select-
ing a Document”
❒ You can search for a document
using the [Search by User Name]
or [Search by File Name] keys. ⇒
p.62 “Searching Saved Docu-
ments”
❒ You can sort document names
in the list by user name, file
name, or date. To sort docu-
ments, press the [User Name],
[File Name] or [Date] key.
❒ If you cannot find a desired doc-
ument using the file names, you
can print the first page of a doc-
ument to check its contents. ⇒
p.65 “Print First Page”
❒ To cancel a document selection,
press the highlighted document
again.

66
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 67 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings for the Document Server

Settings for the Document Server

❖ Copier/Document Server Features ⇒ “General Features” in the Copy Reference
Items Default settings
General Features 4 /5 Document Server Storage Key: 2 Sided Original Top to top
F1
Document Server Storage Key: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine
F2
Document Server Storage Key: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine:
F3 4 originals
Document Server Storage Key: 1 Sided → 1 Sided Combine:
F4 8 originals
Document Server Storage Key: Create Margin
4
F5
General Features 5 /5 Document Server Print Key: F1 2 Sided Top to Top
Document Server Print Key: F2 2 Sided Top to bottom
Document Server Print Key: F3 Booklet
Document Server Print Key: F4 Magazine
Document Server Print Key: F5 Off

❖ System Settings ⇒ p.75 “General Features”, p.79 “Tray Paper Settings”, p.82
“Timer Setting”, p.90 “Key Operator Tools”
Items Default settings
General Features Warm Up Notice ON
Copy Count Display Up
Output: Document Server OFF
Tray Paper Settings Paper Tray Priority: Docu- Tray 1
ment Server
Cover Sheet Tray Off
Slip Sheet Tray Off
Timer Setting Copier/Document Server 60 seconds
Auto Reset Timer
Key Operator Tools Auto Delete File After 3 days
Delete All Files --
Display Password with Stored OFF
File

67
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 68 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Document Server

68
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 69 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

5. User Tools (System Settings)

User Tools Menu (System Settings)

$ These items must be set to use the function. Be sure to set them before using
the corresponding function.
❍ These items must be set if required.

❖ General Features ⇒ p.75 “General Features”

Default settings Copier/Docu- Printer Scanner
ment Server
Panel Tone ON ❍ ❍ ❍
Warm Up Notice ON ❍
Copy Count Up ❍
Display
Function Priority Copier ❍ ❍ ❍
Print Priority Display mode ❍ ❍
Function Reset 3 seconds ❍ ❍
Timer
Interleave Print 10 sheet(s)
Output Tray According to ❍
Setting Function Setting
Output: Copier Copy Tray *1 ❍
*1
Output: Docu- Copy Tray
ment Server
Output: Printer Copy Tray *1 *2 ❍
ADF Original When original is ❍
Table Elevation set
Job List Display 15 seconds ❍
Time
*1
The default tray switches to “Finisher Upper Tray” if the optional finisher is in-
stalled.
*2
The default tray switches to “Mailbox Tray” if the optional mailbox is installed.

❖ Tray Paper Settings ⇒ p.79 “Tray Paper Settings”

Default settings Copier Printer Scanner
Paper Tray Tray 1 ❍
Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Tray 1 ❍
Priority: Printer

69
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 70 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Default settings Copier Printer Scanner

Tray Paper Size: A4K ❍ ❍
Tray 2
Tray Paper Size: A4K ❍ ❍
Tray 3
Paper Type: No display ❍ ❍
Bypass tray
Paper Type: No display:2 Sid- ❍ ❍
Tray 1 ed Copy:Auto
Paper Select on
Paper Type: No display:2 Sid- ❍ ❍
Tray 2 ed Copy:Auto
Paper Select on
Paper Type: No display:2 Sid- ❍ ❍
Tray 3 ed Copy:Auto
Paper Select on

5 Paper Type:
LCT
No display:2 Sid- ❍
ed Copy:Auto
❍

Paper Select on
Cover Sheet Off ❍
Tray
Slip Sheet Tray Off ❍
Slip Sheet 1 Tray Off ❍
Slip Sheet 2 Tray Off ❍

❖ Timer Setting ⇒ p.82 “Timer Setting”

Default settings Copier Printer Scanner
Auto Off Timer 1 minute(s) ❍
Energy Saver 15 minute(s) ❍
Timer
Panel Off Timer 1 minutes ❍ ❍ ❍
System Reset 60 seconds ❍ ❍ ❍
Timer
Copier/ 60 seconds ❍
Document
Server Auto
Reset Timer
Scanner Auto 60 seconds ❍
Reset Timer
Set Date -- $ ❍
Set Time -- $ ❍

70
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 71 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools Menu (System Settings)

Default settings Copier Printer Scanner

Weekly Timer Off ❍
Code
Weekly Timer: -- ❍ ❍ ❍
Monday – Sun-
day

❖ Interface Settings ⇒ p.84 “Interface Settings/Network”, p.86 “Interface Settings/Par-

allel Interface”, p.87 “Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 (option)”, p.88 “Interface Set-
tings/IEEE 802.11b (option)”
Default Copier Printer Scanner
settings
Network IP Address 011.022.033.0 ❍ ❍ *3
44
Sub-net 000.000.000.0 ❍ ❍ *3
Mask 00
Gateway 000.000.000.0 ❍ ❍ *3 5
Address 00
Network NONE ❍ ❍ *3
Boot
Effective blank ❍ ❍ *3
Protocol (all effective)
NW Frame Auto select ❍ ❍ *3
Type
LAN Type Ethernet ❍ ❍ *3
Ethernet Auto select ❍ ❍ *3
Speed
Parallel inter- Parallel ACK outside ❍
face Timing
Parallel High speed ❍
Communica-
tion Speed
Selection High ❍
Signal Status
Input Prime Invalid ❍
Bidirectional ON ❍
Communica-
tion
Signal Job accept- ❍
Control ance priority

71
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 72 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Default Copier Printer Scanner

settings
IEEE 1394 *1 IP Address 000.000.000.0 ❍ ❍ *3
00
Sub-net 000.000.000.0 ❍ ❍ *3
Mask 00
IP over 1394 Active ❍ ❍ *3
SCSI print Active ❍
(SBP-2)
Bidirectional ON ❍
SCSI print
IEEE 802.11b Communica- 802.11 Ad ❍ ❍ *3
*3
tion Mode hoc
SSID Setting blank ❍ ❍ *3
(ASSID)
Channel 11 ❍ ❍ *3
5 WEP Inactive ❍ ❍ *3
(Encryption)
Setting
Wireless --
LAN Signal
Transmis- Auto ❍ ❍ *3
sion Speed
Return to --
Defaults
*1
Displayed when the IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option) is installed.
*2
Displayed when the Wireless LAN board (option) is installed.
*3
Make sure to set when using delivery, TWAIN, document storage, or mail deliv-
ery.

❖ File Transfer ⇒ p.89 “File Transfer”

Default Copier Printer Scanner
Delivery Option OFF ❍ *1
Scanner Recall 300 seconds ❍
Interval Time
Number of 3 time(s) ❍
Scanner Recalls
*1
Make sure to set when using the machine as a delivery scanner.

72
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 73 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools Menu (System Settings)

❖ Key Operator Tools ⇒ p.90 “Key Operator Tools”

Default settings Copier Printer Scanner
User Code OFF ( [Auto Pro- ❍ ❍ ❍
Management gram] for printer
mode only)
Key Counter OFF ❍ ❍ ❍
Management
Key Operator OFF ❍ ❍ ❍
Code
Display/Print -- ❍ ❍ ❍
Counter
Display/Clear/ -- ❍ ❍
Print Counter
per User Code
Address Book -- ❍ ❍ ❍
Management
Address Book: -- ❍ 5
Program/
Change/Delete
Group
Address Book: -- ❍
Change Order
Address Book: -- ❍ ❍ ❍
Edit Title
Address Book: Title 1 ❍ ❍ ❍
Select Title
Auto Delete File After 3 day(s) ❍ ❍ ❍
Delete All Files -- ❍ ❍ ❍
Display Password OFF ❍ ❍ ❍
with Stored File
Key Operator's -- ❍
E-mail Address
AOF ON
(Always ON)

73
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 74 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Accessing User Tools (System Settings)

This section is for key operators in
charge of this machine. You can
B Press the [System Settings] key.
change or set the machine's default
settings.
Note
❒ Operations for system settings are
different from normal operations.
After using User Tools, be sure to C Select the desired menu, and then
exit. ⇒ p.74 “Exiting from User press the desired key.
Tools”
❒ Any changes you make with User
Tools remain in effect even if the
main power switch or operation
switch is turned off, or the {Energy
5 Saver}} or { Clear Modes} } key is
pressed.
D Change settings by following in-
structions on the display panel,
Changing Settings and then press the [OK] key.
Note
Note ❒ To cancel changes made to set-
❒ If a key operator code has been set, tings and return to the normal
the key operator code entry dialog function display, press the {User
box appears. Enter the code, and } key.
Tools/Counter}
then press the [OK] key. ⇒ p.90
“Key Operator Code”
Exiting from User Tools
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Changing system settings is fin-
ished, and the machine returns to
Copy or Print mode.

Note
❒ You can also exit from User
Tools by pressing the [Exit] key.

74
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 75 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

Reference
To access User Tools, see p.74 “Changing Settings”.

General Features
❖ Panel Tone
The beeper (key tone) sounds when a key is pressed.
Note
❒ Default setting: ON

❖ Warm Up Notice (Copier/Document Server)

Specify whether or not the beeper sounds when the machine becomes ready
for copying after Low Power mode is deactivated, or the power is turned on. 5
Note
❒ Default setting: ON
❒ If the “Panel Tone” setting is “OFF”, the beeper does not sound, whatever
the “Warm Up Notice” setting.

❖ Copy Count Display (Copier/Document Server)

The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies made (count up) or
the number of copies remaining (count down).
Note
❒ Default setting: Up (count up)

❖ Function Priority
You can specify the mode to be displayed immediately after the operation
switch or System Reset mode is turned on.
Note
❒ Default setting: Copier

❖ Print Priority
Print priority is given to the mode selected.
Reference
⇒ p.51 “Multi-Access”

75
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 76 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Note
❒ Default setting: Display mode
❒ When the optional Booklet Finisher, Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), or
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) is installed, you can specify an output
tray to which documents are delivered. For more information about how
to specify an output tray for each function, see the following descriptions:
• p.77 “Output: Copier”
• p.77 “Output: Document Server”
• p.78 “Output: Printer”

❖ Function Reset Timer

You can set the length of time the machine waits before changing modes
when using the multi-access function (⇒ p.51 “Multi-Access”). This is useful
if you make many copies and you have to change the settings for each copy.
If you set a large value, you can prevent jobs from other functions interrupt-
ing the copy job.
5 Note
❒ Default setting: 3 seconds
❒ The Function Reset Timer setting is ignored if “Interleave” is set for “Print
Priority” (⇒ p.75).
❒ When you select “Set Time”, enter the time (3–30 seconds in one second in-
crements) using the number keys.

❖ Interleave Print
You can set the timing for functions to switch when [Print Priority] has been set
to [Interleave].
Note
❒ Default setting: 10 sheet(s)
❒ Depending on printing time, set values may change.
❒ The timing for functions can be set from 1 to 20 sheets.

❖ Output Tray Setting

You can set the way or timing for switching the output tray.
• Output Tray
You can set the way for switching the output tray from “According to
Function Setting” or “Auto Change”.
Note
❒ Default setting: According to Function Setting
❒ “Auto Change” can be used when “Print Priority” is set to “Job Or-
der”.⇒ p.75 “Print Priority”

76
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 77 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

• Change Output Tray

You can set the timing for switching the output tray, when the “Output
Tray” has been set to “Auto Change”, from “When Tray is Full” or “Per
Job”.
Note
❒ Default setting: When Tray is Full

❖ Output: Copier
You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered.

Note
❒ Default setting: Copy Tray, Finisher Upper Tray
❒ The default settings of the tray set as output tray may vary depending on
the installed optional finisher.

❖ Output: Document Server

You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered.
Note
❒ Default setting: Copy Tray, Finisher Upper Tray
❒ For details about output trays, see p.77 “Output: Copier”.
❒ The default settings of the output tray may vary depending on the in-
stalled optional finisher.

77
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 78 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

❖ Output: Printer
You can specify a tray to which documents are delivered.

Note
❒ Default setting: Copy Tray, Finisher Upper Tray
❒ The output trays set on the Printer Driver have priority over the output
tray specified above.
❒ The default settings of the output tray may vary depending on the in-
stalled optional finisher.

❖ ADF Original Table Elevation

You can set the timing for elevating the document feeder (ADF) original table.
Note
❒ Default setting: When original is set

❖ Job List Display Time

You can set the length of time the job list screen is displayed before returning
automatically to the default screen.
Note
❒ Default setting: 15 seconds
❒ When you select “On”, enter the time from 10 to 999 seconds in one second
increments using the number keys.

78
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 79 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

Output tray settings

Limitation
❒ You cannot interrupt the current stapling job even when a stapling job is spec-
ified with a different function.
❒ When the Booklet Finisher, Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples) or Finisher
3000B (100-Sheet Staples) is installed and stapling or shift-sorting is specified,
the job will be delivered to the finisher shift tray regardless of the output tray
specified.

Tray Paper Settings

❖ Paper Tray Priority:Copier (Copier/Document Server)
You can specify the paper tray for delivery.
Note
❒ Default setting: Tray 1
5
❖ Paper Tray Priority:Printer (Printer)
You can specify the paper tray for delivery.
Note
❒ Default setting: Tray 1, LCT
❒ The default tray switches to “LCT” if the optional large capacity tray (LCT)
is installed.

❖ Tray Paper Size: (Tray 2,3)

Select the size of the copy paper loaded in the paper tray.
• The paper sizes you can load for trays, when the paper size selector knob
is set to the p mark, are as follows:
• A3L, B4L, A4K, A4L, B5K, B5L, A5K, A5L, 210 × 340 mmL, 210
× 182 mmK, 210 × 170 mmK
• 11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L, 81/2"×13"L, 81/2"×11"K, 81/2"×11"L, 81/4"×13"L,
8"×13"L, 71/4"×101/2"L, 51/2"×81/2"K, 51/2"×81/2"L, 11"×15"L,
11"×14"L, 10"×15"L, 81/4"×14"L, 8"×101/2"L, custom size (139.7-297
mm(5.5"-11.7") wide × 139.7-431.8 mm(5.5"-17") long)
• 8K(267 × 390 mm)L, 16K(195 × 267 mm)KL
Important
❒ If the specified paper size differs from the size of paper actually set in the
paper tray, a paper misfeed might occur because the paper size is not de-
tected correctly.

79
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 80 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Note
❒ Default setting: A4K
❒ The tray fence for the optional large capacity tray (LCT) is fixed. If you
need to change the paper size, contact your service representative.
❒ The optional tab sheet holder is required when using tab stock in tray 2 or 3.
Reference
⇒ p.132 “Changing the Paper Size”

❖ Paper Type: Bypass tray

Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in the bypass tray.
• Paper types you can set for the bypass tray are as follows:
• Plain paper (No Display), Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Colour Paper
1, Colour Paper 2, Translucent Paper, Letterhead, Thick Paper, Label
Paper, OHP, Cardstock, Bond Paper, Punched Paper, Preprinted Paper
Note
5 ❒ Default setting: No display

❖ Paper Type: (Tray1-3, LCT)

Sets the display so you can see what type of paper is loaded in each of the
trays. This information is used by the print function to automatically select
the paper tray.
• Paper types you can set for trays are as follows:
• Plain paper (No Display), Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Translucent
Paper, Letterhead, Thick Paper, Colour Paper 1, Colour Paper 2, Tab
stock (2-3 tray), Bond Paper, Punched Paper, Preprinted Paper
Note
❒ Default settings:
• Paper Type: No display
• Copying Method: 2 Sided Copy
• Apply Auto Paper Select: Yes
❒ A is displayed next to the paper tray if “No” is selected.
❒ The optional tab sheet holder is required when using tab stock in tray 2 or
3.
❒ The number of tab stock shifts can be set to millimeters, when [Tab Stock]
has been selected.
❒ Set the tab stock shift number in the “0 to 15 mm(0" to 0.6")” range in 1 mil-
limeter (1 inch) units. The default setting is “13 mm(0.5")”.
❒ “Thick Paper” and “Tab Stock” can be set simultaneously.

80
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 81 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

Limitation
❒ Auto paper select can only be selected for the Copy function if “No Dis-
play” and “Recycled Paper” are selected. However, auto paper select is not
used if “No” is selected.

❖ Cover Sheet Tray

Allows you to specify and display the paper tray to set cover sheets. After se-
lecting the paper tray, you can also specify the display timing and copy meth-
od for two-sided copying.
Note
❒ Default setting:
• Tray to program: Off
❒ The functions that use the Cover Sheet Tray setting are front cover function
and front/back cover function.
❒ When “At Mode Selected” is selected, the cover settings options are only
displayed when the cover function or slip sheet function is selected.
❒ You can set Copying Method in Duplex setting only when “At Mode Se-
5
lected” is selected.
Reference
⇒ “Cover” in the Copy Reference

❖ Slip Sheet Tray, Slip Sheet Tray 1/2

Allows you to specify and display the paper tray to set slip sheets. After se-
lecting, you can also specify the display timing and copy method for two-sid-
ed copying.
Note
❒ Default setting:
• Tray to program: Off
❒ When “At Mode Selected” is selected, the cover settings options are only
displayed when the cover function or slip sheet function is selected.
❒ When “Interposer Tray” has been selected in the slip sheet 2 tray settings,
“Copying Method in Duplex” will not be displayed.
❒ OHP slip sheets cannot be copied when using the interposer.
Reference
⇒“Slip Sheets” in the Copy Reference

81
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 82 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Timer Setting
❖ Auto Off Timer
The machine turns off automatically to conserve energy after a specified
amount of time has passed following job completion. This function is called
“Auto Off”.
The machine status after Auto Off operation is called “Off mode” or “Sleep
mode”. For Auto Off Timer, specify the time to elapse before the Auto Off
function is activated.
Note
❒ Default setting: 1 minutes
❒ When in “Off mode” or “Sleep mode”, the machine can be ready for use
within 25 seconds.
❒ Auto Off Timer function will not operate in the following cases.
• When a warning message is displayed
5 • When the service call message is displayed
• When the paper is jammed
• When the cover is open
• When “Adding Toner” message is displayed
• When the toner is being replenished
• When the User Tools/Counter screen is displayed
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When the printer or other functions are operating
• When operations have been suspended during printing
• When the Data In indicator is on or blinking
• When the sample print or confidential print screen is displayed
❒ The time can be set from 1 minute to 240 minutes using the number keys.

❖ Energy Saver Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching to Low Power
mode after copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
The time can be set from 1 minute to 240 minutes using the number keys.
Note
❒ Default setting: 15 minutes

82
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 83 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

❖ Panel Off Timer

Set the amount of time the machine waits before switching the panel off after
copying has finished or the last operation is performed.
Note
❒ Default setting: 1 minutes
❒ The warm up time for making a copy from standby mode is 0 seconds.
❒ The interval time can be set from 10 seconds to 240 minutes using the
number keys.

❖ System Auto Reset Timer

The System Reset setting automatically switches to the screen of the function
set in Function Priority. This happens if no operations are performed or when
an interrupted job is cleared. This setting sets the system reset interval. ⇒ p.75
“Function Priority”
Note
❒ Default setting: 60 seconds
❒ The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds in one second increments using
5
the number keys.

❖ Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer (Copier/Document Server)

Specifies the time to elapse before copier and Document Server functions are
reset.
Note
❒ Default setting: 60 seconds
❒ If “OFF” is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user
code entry screen, and you will not be able to limit who uses the machine.
❒ The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds in one second increments using
the number keys.

❖ Scanner Auto Reset Timer (Scanner)

Specifies the time to elapse before the scanner function is reset.
Note
❒ Default setting: 60 seconds
❒ If “OFF” is selected, the machine will not automatically switch to the user
code entry screen, and you will not be able to limit who uses the machine.
❒ The time can be set from 10 to 999 seconds in one second increments using
the number keys.

❖ Set Date
Set the date for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
Note
❒ To change between year, month and day, press the [←
←] and [→
→] keys.

83
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 84 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

❖ Set Time
Set the time for the copier's internal clock using the number keys.
Note
❒ To change between hours, minutes and seconds, press the [←
←] and [→
→] keys.

❖ Weekly Timer Code

Sets an 8-digit code to turn on the main power during a time frame in “Week-
ly Timer”.
Note
❒ Default setting: OFF
❒ If “ON” is selected, enter the timer code.
❒ If “ON” is selected without entering the timer code, the machine cannot be
used, even if the power is turned on. If “Off” is selected, the machine can
be used without entering a timer code, when it is turned on.

❖ Weekly Timer: (Monday-Sunday)

5 Set the power on timer using the number keys.

Interface Settings/Network
❖ IP Address
Before using this machine with the network environment, you must config-
ure the IP address.
Note
❒ Default setting: 011.022.033.044
❒ Do not use an IP address that is used for another machine. To get the ad-
dresses, contact your network administrator.
❒ If you install the IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option) and use the IEEE 1394
interface, you must set the address of the domain, different from the IP ad-
dress of [IEEE 1394]. If you intend to set the address for the same domain,
set a different value for the Sub-net Mask.
❒ Press the [←←] or [→→] key to move in 3-digit increments.
❒ Press the [Clear] key when the wrong address is entered.

❖ Sub-net Mask
This is a number used to mathematically “mask” or hide an IP address on the
network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all ma-
chines on the network.
Note
❒ Default setting: 000.000.000.000
❒ Press the [←
←] or [→→] key to move in 3-digit increments.
❒ Press the [Clear] key when the wrong address is entered.
84
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 85 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

❖ Gateway Address
A gateway is a connection or interchange point connecting two networks.
Configure the gateway address for the router or host computer used as a gate-
way.
Note
❒ Default setting: 000.000.000.000
❒ Press the [←
←] or [→→] key to move in 3-digit increments.
❒ Press the [Clear] key when the wrong address is entered.

❖ Network Boot
Select how to set an IP address from a client.
Note
❒ Default setting: NONE
❒ For details about settings, consult your network administrator.
Reference
For details, see the Network Printing Guide.
5
❖ Effective Protocol
Select the protocol to use in the network.
Note
❒ Default settings: TCP/IP:Effective, NetWare:Effective, NetBEUI:Effective, Ap-
pleTalk: Effective

❖ NW Frame Type
Select the frame type when you use NetWare.
Note
❒ Default setting: Auto select

❖ LAN Type
When you have installed the Wireless LAN board (option), select interface,
Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b) or Ethernet.
Note
❒ Default setting: Ethernet

❖ Ethernet Speed
Set the access speed for networks.
Select a speed that matches your network environment. “Auto Select” should
usually be specified.
Note
❒ Default setting: Auto select

85
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 86 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Interface Settings/Parallel Interface

❖ Parallel Timing
Specifies the timing setting for the parallel interface. Under normal circum-
stances, you will not need to change this setting.
Note
❒ Default setting: ACK outside

❖ Parallel Communication Speed

Specifies the communication speed of the parallel interface. If the communi-
cation speed is set too fast, data transfer may not flow smoothly. If this occurs,
change the setting to “Standard”.
Note
❒ Default setting: High speed

5 ❖ Selection Signal Status

Specifies the signal setting of the parallel interface.
Note
❒ Default setting: High

❖ Input Prime
Specifies whether the prime signal is active or inactive when an input prime
signal is sent. Under normal circumstances, you will not need to change this
setting.
Note
❒ Default setting: Invalid

❖ Bidirectional Communication
Specifies the printer's response mode and so forth for a status request when
using the parallel interface. If you experience problems when using other
manufacturers, printers, set this to “OFF”.
Limitation
❒ If this is set to “OFF”, bidirectional communication functions will not
work.
Note
❒ Default setting: ON

❖ Signal Control
Specifies the error processing settings for when an error occurs when printing
from a computer. Under normal circumstances, you will not need to change
this setting.
Note
❒ Default setting: Job acceptance priority
86
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 87 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 (option)

Preparation
You must install the IEEE 1394 Interface Board (option) into the machine.

❖ IP Address
When you connect this machine to a network using the IEEE 1394 Interface
Board (option), you must configure the IP address.
Note
❒ Default setting: 000.000.000.000
❒ When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the
Ethernet interface in the same domain. To use in the same domain, set a
different value for the Sub-net Mask.

❖ Sub-net Mask
This is a number used to mathematically “mask” or hide an IP address on the
network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all ma-
5
chines on the network.
Note
❒ Default setting: 000.000.000.000
❒ When you use the IEEE 1394 interface on a network, you cannot use the
IEEE 1394 interface in the same domain. To use in the same domain, set a
different value for the Sub-net Mask.
❒ Press the [←
←] or [→→] key to move in 3-digit increments.
❒ Press the [Clear] key when the wrong address is entered.

❖ IP over 1394
When you use the IP over 1394 function of the IEEE 1394 interface to connect
the machine to the network, or you print using a personal computer with the
IP over 1394 driver, you must set IP over 1394.
Note
❒ Default setting: Active
Reference
For details, see the Printer Reference 1.

❖ SCSI print (SBP-2)

When you print using the SCSI Print client function supported by Windows
2000 or Windows XP, you must set SCSI Print.
Note
❒ Default setting: Active

87
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 88 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

❖ Bidirectional SCSI print

Specifies the printer's response mode and so forth for a status request when
using the IEEE 1394 interface.
Note
❒ Default setting: ON
❒ If this is set to “OFF”, bidirectional communication functions will not
work.

Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b (option)

Preparation
You must install the Wireless LAN board (option) into the machine.
Note
❒ Be sure to make all settings simultaneously.
5 ❖ Communication Mode
Specifies the communication mode of the Wireless LAN.
Note
❒ Default setting: 802.11 Ad hoc

❖ SSID Setting
Specifies SSID to distinguish the access point in the Infrastructure mode.
Note
❒ Default setting: blank (ASSID)
❒ If blank is specified in 802.11b Ad hoc mode or Ad hoc mode, “ASSID” ap-
pears.

❖ Channel
Specifies a channel when you select 802.11b Ad hoc mode or Ad hoc mode.
Note
❒ Default setting: 11
❒ The channel can be set from 1 - 13.

❖ Wireless LAN Signal

Shows the radio-wave conditions of the access point connected in Infrastruc-
ture mode.
Note
❒ Radio wave status is shown when you press the [Wireless LAN Signal] key.

88
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 89 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

❖ WEP (Encryption) Setting

Specifies the encryption of the Wireless LAN. If this is set to “Effective”, you
must enter the WEP key.
Note
❒ Default setting: Inactive

❖ Transmission Speed
Specifies the communication speed of the Wireless LAN.
Note
❒ Default setting: Auto

❖ Return to Defaults
You can return the Wireless LAN settings to the default setting.

File Transfer
❖ Delivery Option
5
Enables or disables the function for sending documents stored in this ma-
chine or scanned documents via the ScanRouter V2 Professional/Lite deliv-
ery server.
Note
❒ Default setting: OFF
❒ Set this option when you specify whether or not to use ScanRouter V2 Pro-
fessional/Lite. If you use, you will have to reregister the I/O devices in the
ScanRouter V2 Professional/Lite.

❖ Scanner Recall Interval Time

Specifies the interval the machine waits before resending data or a document,
if it could not be sent to ScanRouter V2 Professional.
Note
❒ Default setting: 300 Seconds
❒ The interval time can be set from 60 to 999 seconds in one second incre-
ments using the number keys.
❒ This setting is for the Scanner function.

❖ Number of Scanner Recalls

Sets a maximum number of resend documents or data in the machine to the
delivery server.
Note
❒ Default setting: 3 times
❒ The number of times can be set from 1 to 99 using the number keys.
❒ This setting is for the Scanner function.

89
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 90 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Key Operator Tools

The key operator must set the following items. For settings or more information,
contact the key operator.

❖ User Code Management

Allows you to control who uses the machine by setting codes for users.
User codes must be registered for user code management. ⇒ p.96 “User
Codes”.
Note
❒ Default settings: Copier/OFF, Document Server/OFF, Printer/Auto Program,
Scanner/OFF
❒ By using “Auto Program” for the printer, you can keep a print log for each
user code entered from the driver.

❖ Key Counter Management

5 Use the key counter to specify whether users are limited or not.
Note
❒ Default settings: Copier/OFF, Document Server/OFF, Printer/OFF, Scan-
ner/OFF

❖ Key Operator Code

This specifies whether or not to use passwords (max. 8-digits) to control use
of the “Key Operator Tools” settings for the key operator code.
Note
❒ Default setting: OFF
❒ If you select “ON”, enter the key operator code (max. 8-digits) using the
number keys, and then select “Partial” or “All Initial Settings” to set the ac-
cess limit.
• If you selected “Partial”
An access code is only required for the “Timer Setting”, “Key Operator
T o o l s ” i n i t i a l s e t t i n g s . “M E N U P R O T E C T ” w i l l b e s e t f o r
“CHANGE/CONTROL” in the printer initial settings. If you set
“MENU PROTECT”, you can set the key operator code in a part of the
printer initial settings. ⇒ “Printer Features Parameters” in the Printer
Reference 2
• If you selected “All Initial Settings”
An access code will be required to access all the items in the System Set-
tings, Copier/Document Server Features, Printer Features, and Scanner
Features.
❒ If you set the key operator code, you will need to enter it to access the Key
Operator Code screen.

90
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 91 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

❖ Display/Print Counter
Allows you to view and print the various counters.
• Display/Print Counter
Displays counters for each functions (Total, Copier, Printer, A3/DLT, Du-
plex, Staple).
• Print Counter List
Prints out a list of counters for each functions.
• To print the counter list
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} } key.
B Press the [System Settings] key.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
D Press the [Display/Print Counter] key.
E Press the [Print Counter List] key.

F Press the {Start}} key.

G Press the [Exit] key.

❖ Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code

Allows you to view and print the various counters accessed with user codes
and to set the values to 0.
Note
❒ Press the [U
UPrev.] and [T
TNext] keys to show all counters.
• Print Counter for All User Codes
Prints the counter values for all of the user codes.
• Clear Counter for All User Codes
Sets the counter value for all of the user codes to 0.
• Print Counter per User Code
Prints the counter values for each of the user codes.
• Clear Counter per User Code
Sets the counter value for each of the user codes to 0.
Note
❒ Print List for Each User Code ⇒ p.100 “Printing the Counter for Each User
Code”.

91
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 92 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

❖ Address Book Management

Adds, changes or deletes user codes (max 8-digits). For details on operations,
see p.96 “User Codes”.
Note
❒ You can register up to 1,500 user names.
❒ You can register up to 500 user codes.
❒ You can also register user codes from SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
❒ Even if you change the user codes, the counter values are not cleared.
❒ If you clear a user code, the counter values associated with it are also auto-
matically cleared.
• [Program/Change]
This registers new user codes. You can register and change user codes
and user names.
• Name
User (destination) name, key display, registration number, title selec-
5 tion
• User Code
User code, available functions
• E-mail Address
E-mail address, register as a sender, sender's password, enter password
• Group
Switch title, registration number
• [Delete]
Deletes a user.

❖ Address Book: Program/Change/Delete Group

You can register multiple e-mail addresses in a group.
Then you can easily control the registered e-mail address for each group.
• [Program/Change]
This registers new groups, or changes a group name, key display, title se-
lection, registration number.
• [Delete]
Deletes a group.

❖ Address Book: Change Order

Changes the order of registered users (destination).
Note
❒ You can rearrange the order of items on the same page, but you cannot
move the items to another page. For example, you cannot move an item
from “PLANNING” ([OPQ]) to “DAILY” ([CD]).
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
B Press the [System Settings] key.

92
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 93 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

D Press the [Address Book:Change Order] key.

E Press the user (destination) key to be moved.

Note
❒ You can select a user using the number keys.
F Press the user (destination) key in the place you want to move to.
5

The user (destination) selected in step E moves to the place selected in

step F, and the keys for other users will shift.

Note
❒ You can select a user using the number keys.

❖ Address Book: Edit Title

You can edit the title to search for a desired user easily.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} } key.
B Press the [System Settings] key.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
D Press the [Address Book: Edit Title] key.

93
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 94 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

E Press the title key to be changed.

F Enter the new name, and then press the [OK] key.
G Press the [OK] key.

❖ Address Book: Select Title

Specifies the title to select a user.
Note
❒ Default setting: Title 1

❖ Auto Delete File

Specifies whether documents stored in the Document Server are deleted or
5 not after a specified period of time.
Note
❒ Default setting: Yes After 3 day (s)
❒ If you select “Yes”, documents stored after this setting will be deleted.
❒ If you select “No”, documents will not be deleted automatically.
❒ If you select “Yes”, enter a number of days in the range of 1 - 180.
❒ The default setting is 3 days, which means documents will be deleted 3
days (72 hours) after they are stored.

❖ Delete All Files

All documents stored in Document Server will be deleted.
Note
❒ Even if a password has been set, all documents will be deleted.
❒ A confirmation dialog box will appear. To delete all documents, select
[Yes].

❖ Display Password with Stored File

Specifies whether the password for the documents stored in the Document
Server is temporarily displayed or not.
Note
❒ Default setting: OFF
❒ Only when you forget the password, set to [ON]. After you confirm the
password, be sure to return the setting to [OFF].
❒ If you set to “ON”, set the “Key Operator Code” to “ON”.

94
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 95 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Settings You Can Change with User Tools

❖ Key Operator's E-mail Address

By registering the operator's e-mail Address, you can send an e-mail in case
of difficulty. Specify whether or not to use this function.
Note
❒ Default setting: blank

❖ AOF (Always ON)

Specify whether or not to use Auto Off function.
Note
❒ Default setting: ON
❒ For details about this function, contact your service representative.

95
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 96 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

User Codes
By registering user codes, you can ❖ Printer
limit the users to particular functions When you set User Code Manage-
and check their use of each function. ment, you can print documents
from the printer driver using the
Reference user code registered.
User codes can also be registered The number of printed documents
using SmartNetMonitor for Ad- is counted for each user code. You
min (printer option required). ⇒ can check the usage of each user.
Network Printing Guide
The management and control items Note
for each function are as follows: ❒ To register the printer driver
automatically, select “Auto Pro-
❖ Copier gram” for the printer in User
When you set User Code Manage- Code Management. If you use
ment, entering the user code is re- the user code set in User Tools,
5 quested before using the Copy select “Not Auto Program”. Set
function. This enables you to limit the user codes registered in
user copying. User Tools for the printer driv-
The number of copies is counted er.
for each user code, so you can
check usage of each user. Reference
Select the Printer function in
Reference User Code Management. ⇒
Select the Copier function in p.90 “User Code Management”
User Code Management. ⇒
p.90 “User Code Management” ❖ Scanner
Limits who can use the Scanner
❖ Document Server function and manages use of each
When you set User Code Manage- user code.
ment, the user code is requested
before using the Document Server Reference
function. This enables you to limit Select the Scanner function in
users of the Document Server. User Code Management set-
The number of copies in Document tings. ⇒ p.90 “User Code Man-
Server mode is counted for each agement”
user code as an accumulated fig-
Important
ure.
❒ The functions associated with
Reference each user code are the same. If
Select the Document Server you change or delete user codes,
function in User Code Manage- management data and limits as-
ment. ⇒ p.90 “User Code Man- sociated with that code will be-
agement” come invalid.

96
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 97 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Codes

To Register a New User Code To Register a User Name and

Key Name
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. A Press the [Change] key on the
right of the user name or key
name.
The user name or key name en-
try dialog box appears.
B Enter the user name or key name,
and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ You can use the user name as
the user name assigned to the
doc uments in Do cument
B Press the [System Settings] key. Server mode. In this case, en-
try of the user code is not re-
quired. ⇒ p.57 “Document 5
Server”
Reference
⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key. To Select the Title

D Press the [Address Book Manage-
ment] key. A Press the key for the classifica-
tion you want to use from “Se-
E Press the [New Program] key. lect Title”.
Note
❒ To register a user code to a reg-
istered user, press the user key
where the user code is to be reg-
istered, or enter the number us-
ing the number keys.
Note
F Set the user information. ❒ The keys you can select are as
follows.
Note
• [Freq.]… Added to the
❒ To register a user code to a reg-
page that is displayed
istered user, skip to step G.
first.
• [AB],[CD],[EF],[GH],[IJK],[
LMN],[OPQ],[RST],[UV
W],[XYZ]… Added to the
list of items in the title se-
lected.
❒ You can only select one page
for “Select Title”. 97
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 98 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

G Press the [User Code] key. Changing a User Code

H Enter the user code using the
number keys, and then press the A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
[#] key.
B Press the [System Settings] key.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
D Press the [Address Book Manage-
ment] key.

Note E Selectthe registered user code

you want to change, or enter the
❒ If you make a mistake, press the
registered number using the
[Clear] or {Clear/Stop}
} key, and
number keys.
then enter the user code again.

I Select the functions to be used

F Enter the new information for the
item you want to change.
5 with the user code from “Availa-
ble Functions”.
Changing a User (Destination)
J To continue registering user Name or Key Name
codes, press the [Continue to Pro-
gram] key, and then repeat the A Press the [Change] key to the
procedures from step F. right of the user (destination)
name or key name.
B Enter the user (destination)
name, and then press the [OK]
key.
Reference
K Press the [OK] key. ⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”

L Press the [Exit] key. Changing a Title

M Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. A Press the key for the classifica-
tion you want to use from “Se-
lect Title”.

Changing a User Code

A Press the [User Code] key.

98
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 99 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Codes

B Press the [Change] key, and

then enter the new user code Clearing a User Code
using the number keys.
Important
❒ This operation also deletes user
codes registered for multiple func-
tions. User control with the deleted
user code will be disabled.
C Press the [#] key. A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
To change Available Functions
B Press the [System Settings] key.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
A Press the [User Code] key.
B Press the key to select the func- D Press the [Address Book Management]
tions to be enabled. key.

Note
To clear a User (destination) 5
❒ Press the key to make it high-
lighted, and the key will be A Press the [Delete] key.
enabled.
B Select the user (destination)
G Press the [OK] key. you want to delete.
Press the user (destination) key,
H Press the [Exit] key. or enter the registered number
I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. using the number keys.
C Press the [Yes] key in the con-
firmation screen.

To delete the User Code

A Select a user (destination) whose
user code is to be deleted.
Press the user (destination) key
to be deleted, or enter the regis-
tered number using the number
key.
B Press the [User Code] key.

99
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 100 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

C Press the [Change] key to delete

the user code, and then press Printing the Counter for Each
the [#] key. User Code
You can print out the counter for each
user code using [Print Counter] or
[Scanner Counter]. Also, you can print
out using both of them together.

D Press [OK] key. A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

E Press the [Exit] key. B Press the [System Settings] key.
F Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
D Press the [Display/Clear/Print Counter
Displaying the Counter for per User Code] key.
Each User Code
5 To print the number of copies
You can check the counter for each (counter) for each user code
function's user code.
A Select a user code from the left
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. side of the display.
B Press the [System Settings] key.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
D Press the [Display/Clear/Print Counter
per User Code] key.

E Press the [Print Counter] key. Note

❒ Press the [Select all on the
The individual function counters
page] key if you want to se-
for each user code are displayed.
lect all user codes on the
page.
B Press the [Print Counter List] key
of “Per User Code”.

Note
❒ Enter the user code, and then
press the [#] key if the user
code is registered.

100
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 101 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Codes

To print the number of copies Note

(counter) for all user codes ❒ Press the [Select all on the
page] key if you want to se-
A Press the [Print Counter List] key lect all user codes on the
of “All User Codes”. page.
B Press the [Clear] key for “Per
User Code”.

Note
❒ Enter the user code, and then
press the [#] key if the user
code is registered. To clear the number of copies
(counter) for all user codes
E Press the [Print Counter] key.
A Press the [Clear] key for “All 5
F Press the [Print] key. User Codes”.

Clearing the Counter

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
B Press the [System Settings] key.
F Press the [Print Counter] key.
C Press the [Key operator Tools] key.
G Press the [Print] key.
D Press the [Display/Clear/Print Counter
per User Code] key.

E Select the user code to clear.

To clear the number of copies
(counter) for each user code
A Select a user code from the left
side of the display.

101
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 102 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

E-mail Destination
By registering an e-mail destination,
you can send scanned documents by
B Press the [System Settings] key.
e-mail.
• It is easy to select an e-mail desti-
nation if you register “User (desti-
nation) name” and “Key name” for
the e-mail destination.
• You can register an e-mail destina-
tion as a group.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
• You can use the e-mail destination D Press the [Address Book Manage-
as the Sender's address. In this ment] key.
case, you can set a password in or-
der to prevent its use by other peo- E Press the [New Program] key.
ple.
5 Note
Reference ❒ To register an e-mail destina-
E-mail destination can also be reg- tion to a registered user, press
istered using SmartNetMonitor for the user key you want to regis-
Admin (printer option required). ter, or enter the registered
⇒ Network Printing Guide number using the number keys.

F Set the user's information.

Registering an E-mail
Destination
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Note
❒ To register an e-mail destina-
tion to a registered user, skip to
step G.

To register the user (destination)

name and key name
A Press the [Change] key on the
right of “User (Destination)
Name” or “Key Display”.
The user (destination) name or
key name entry dialog box ap-
pears.

102
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 103 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

E-mail Destination

B Enter the user (destination)

name or key name, and then
I Enter the e-mail address.
press the [OK] key. Note
Note ❒ You can use the e-mail address
as the Sender's address. In this
❒ You can use the user name
case, you can set a password in
when selecting an address to
order to prevent its use by other
send an e-mail to.
people.
❒ You can register the user
code following the user Reference
name. For more details, see ⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”
p.96 “User Codes”.
Reference Using as a Sender
⇒ p.110 “Entering Text” A Press the [ON] key on the right
of the [Register as Sender].
To select the title
A To classify the user with the ti- Setting a password 5
tle, press the title key from “Se- A Press the [ON] key on the right
lect Title”. of the [Sender's Password].
Note B Press the [Change] key on the
❒ The keys you can select are as right of the “Enter Password”.
follows. C Enter the password using the
• [Freq.]… Added to the number keys and then press
page that is displayed the [#] key.
first.
• [AB], [CD], [EF], [GH],
J Press the [OK] key.
[IJK], [LMN], [OPQ], Note
[RST], [UVW], [XYZ],… ❒ When a group is registered, oth-
Added to the list of items er e-mail destinations can be
in the title selected. added to the group. ⇒ p.107
❒ You can only select one page “Registering E-mail Destina-
for “Select Title”. tions to a Group”

G Press the [E-mail Address] key.

H Press the [Change] key on the right
of the “E-mail Address”.

The e-mail address entry dialog

box appears.
103
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 104 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Changing a Registered E-mail G Enter the items.

Destination To change the e-mail address
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. A Press the [Change] key on the
right of the e-mail address.

B Enter the e-mail address, and

then press the [OK] key.
Reference
⇒ p.110 “Entering Text”
5 B Press the [System Settings] key.
To change the password
A Press the [Change] key on the
right of the password.

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

D Press the [Address Book Management]
key.
The registered user list appears. B Enter the new password using
E Select the user of the registered e- the number keys, and then
press the [#] key.
mail address you want to change.
Press the user key you want to H Press the [OK] key.
change or enter the registered
Note
number using the number keys.
❒ To change the user name, see
p.98 “Changing a User (Desti-
nation) Name or Key Name”.
❒ To clear the user name, see p.99
“To clear a User (destination)”

F Press the [E-mail Address] key.

104
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 105 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

E-mail Destination

Clearing a Registered E-mail To clear all the informations for

the user
Destination
A Press the [Delete] key.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. B Select the user you want to
clear.
Press the user key you want to
clear or enter the registered
number using the number keys.
C Press the [Yes] key.

E Press the [Exit] key.

B Press the [System Settings] key. 5

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

D Press the [Address Book Management]
key.

To clear only the e-mail address

A Select the user of the e-mail ad-
dress you want to clear.
Press the user key you want to
clear or enter the registered
number using the number keys.
B Press the [E-mail Address] key.
C Press the [Change] key on the
right of the “E-mail Address”.
D Press the [Delete All] key, and
then press the [OK] key.

105
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 106 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Registering E-mail Destinations to a Group

By registering groups, you can use
them as follows;
D Press the [Address Book: Pro-
gram/Change/Delete Group] key.
• You can easily control the regis-
tered e-mail destinations for each E Press the [New Program] key.
group.
• You can send the same messages to
F Press the [Change] key on the right
of the group name.
multiple addresses in a group in
bulk.
To divide e-mail destinations into
groups, the groups must be registered
beforehand.
Reference
E-mail destination can also be reg- G Enter the group name, and then
5 istered into groups using Smart- press the [OK] key.
NetMonitor for Admin (printer
option required). ⇒ Network H When you want to change the key
Printing Guide name, and then press the [Change]
key on the right of the key display
n ame. En ter the k ey dis play
Registering a New Group name, and then press the [OK]
key.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. For entering the group name, the
key display name is automatically
set.

I Press the [Select Title] key to sort

the group. Go to step J if you do
not sort the group.

J Press the [OK] key.

B Press the [System Settings] key.

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

106
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 107 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Registering E-mail Destinations to a Group

Registering E-mail G Select a group to which you want

to register the e-mail destinations.
Destinations to a Group
You can register the e-mail destina-
tion to a group.
Note
❒ When newly registering an e-mail
destination, you can also register H Press the [OK] key.
groups at the same time.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. Deleting an E-mail Destination

from a Group
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
5

B Press the [System Settings] key.

B Press the [System Settings] key.

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

D Press the [Address Book Manage-
ment] key.
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.
E Press the user (destination) key
that you want to register in a D Press the [Address Book Manage-
group. ment] key.

F Press the [Group] key. E Select the user (destination) key

to delete from a group.
Press the user (destination) key
which you want to delete, or enter
the registered number using the
number keys.

F Press the [Group] key.

107
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 108 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

G Press the highlighted group key. F Press the [Programed Users] key.
All the user names (e-mail destina-
tions) are displayed.

The user is deleted.

H Press the [OK] key.

G Press the [OK] key.
Displaying an E-mail
Destination Deleting a Group
You can confirm the user (destina- A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
tion) of each group.
5 A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

B Press the [System Settings] key.

B Press the [System Settings] key.

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

D Press the [Address Book: Pro-
C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key. gram/Change/Delete Group] key.
D Press the [Address book: Pro- E Press the [Delete] key.
gram/Change/Delete Group] key.
F Press the group key you want to
E Select a group where the data you delete.
want to confirm is registered.
G Press the [Yes] key.

108
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 109 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Registering E-mail Destinations to a Group

B Reenter the group name or key

Changing a Group Name display, and then press the[OK]
key.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
To change a title
A Press the title key in “Select Ti-
tle” of the group you want to
sort.

To change a registration number

A Press the [Change] key in “Reg-
istration No.”.
B Enter the registration number
B Press the [System Settings] key. using the number keys.
C Press the [#] key.
5
G Press the [OK] key.

C Press the [Key Operator Tools] key.

D Press the [Address Book: Pro-
gram/Change/Delete Group] key.

E Press the group key you want to

change.

F Reenter the item you want to

change.

To change a group name or the

key display
A Press the [Change] key in
“Group Name” or “Key Dis-
play”.

109
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 110 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters. When you enter a character, it is
shown at the position of the cursor. If there is a character at the cursor position,
the entered character is shown before that character.

Available Characters
• Alphabetic characters
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
• Symbols
• Numerals
0123456789

5 Keys

ZGVS838E

Note
❒ When entering uppercase or lowercase letters continuously, use the [Shift
Lock] key to lock the case.

110
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 111 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Entering Text

Entering Text

Entering letters

A Press the [Shift] key to switch between uppercase and lowercase.

B Press the letters you want to enter.
Deleting characters

A Press the [Backspace] or [Delete All] key to delete characters.

111
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 112 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

User Tools (System Settings)

112
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 113 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

6. Troubleshooting

If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You

Want

General
Machine Status Problem/Cause Action
Please wait. This message appears Wait for the machine.
when you turn on the oper-
ation switch or change the
toner bottle.
The display panel is off. The screen contrast knob is Set the screen contrast knob to the
turned to the dark position. light position for proper viewing of
the display panel.
The machine is in Low Press the {Energy Saver}
} key to can-
Power mode. cel Low Power mode.
The operation switch is Turn on the operation switch.
turned off.
Nothing happens when the The main power switch is Turn on the main power switch.
operation switch is turned turned off.
on.
Memory is full. The number of scanned Press the [Delete File] key to delete
pages exceeds the capacity unnecessary documents.
of the hard disk. ⇒ p.66 “Deleting Saved Docu-
ments”
The function status indica- The function associated Press the function key correspond-
tor is red. with the red indicator has ing to the indicator. Follow the in-
been interrupted. structions displayed in the display
panel.
The operation switch con- This occurs in the follow- Check that the computer does not
tinues blinking and does ing cases: control the machine when you turn
not turn off when pressed. • The machine is in com- off the main power switch.
munication with exter-
nal equipment.
• The hard disk is in op-
eration.
The original images are You may have loaded the Load paper into the large capacity
printed on the reverse side paper incorrectly. tray (LCT) and a bypass tray with
of the paper. the print side up, or into a paper
tray with the print side down. ⇒
p.116 “B Loading Paper”

113
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 114 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

Machine Status Problem/Cause Action

Misfeeds occur frequently. The side guides of the pa- Check the side guides are locked. ⇒
per tray may not be locked. p.132 “Changing the Paper Size”
The end guide of the paper Check that the end guide is locked.
tray may not be locked. ⇒ p.132 “Changing the Paper Size”
You may have loaded pa- When you use paper of a size that
per whose size cannot be cannot be detected automatically,
detected automatically. set the paper size. ⇒ p.79 “Tray Pa-
per Size: (Tray 2,3)”, p.177 “Copy
Paper”
The saddle stitching staple Reset the saddle stitching staple car-
cartridge for the Booklet tridge. ⇒ p.134 “d Adding Staples”
Finisher has been removed.
An error message remains, When a misfeed message Clear misfed paper and open and
even if misfed paper is re- appears, it remains until close the front cover. ⇒ p.122 “x
moved. you open and close the cov- Clearing Misfeeds”
er, as required.
Cannot duplex print You cannot use the paper For duplex printing, select Tray 1-3
in the bypass tray for du- in Copier mode or with the printer
plex printing. driver.
6 The setting for the Paper Select “2 Sided Copy” for Paper
Type: Tray 1-3 is “1 Side Type: Tray 1-3⇒ p.80 “Paper Type:
Copy”. (Tray1-3, LCT)”
During saddle stitching, Depending on the type of Select a paper type with low re-
paper comes out open and paper, the paper opens as it bound.
not neatly stacked. rebounds when it is folded.
The user code entry dialog Users are restricted by user Enter the user code (up to 8-digits),
box is displayed. management. and then press the [#] key.

114
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 115 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You Want

Document Server
Problem Action
“Scanned pages exceeded max. number. Do The number of scanned pages exceeds the ca-
you want to store the scanned pages as a file?” pacity per file of the Document Server.
appears. If you want to store scanned originals as a file,
press the [Yes] key. The originals are stored as
a file in the Document Server.
If you don't want scanned originals to be
stored, press the [No] key. The scanning data
will be cleared.
You forgot your password. You can confirm your password.
Press the [ON] key temporarily for “Display
Password with Stored File” in the User Tools.
You can check the password when you have
selected the file.
You can delete all the saved documents at
once with the User Tools.
Make sure that no important documents are
saved in the Document Server before deleting
all saved documents. 6
⇒ p.94 “Delete All Files”
You cannot find out what is saved in a file. Check the date or time column in the “Docu-
ment Server: Files” display.
Check the contents of the document by print-
ing the first page of it. Press the desired docu-
ment in the “Document Server: Files” display,
and press the [Print 1st Page] key followed by
the {Start}
} key.
Memory becomes full frequently. Press the [Delete File] key to delete selected
documents, thereby increasing available
memory.
You want to check print before making a large Check print quality by printing out only the
print run. first set using the {Sample Copy}
} key.
You want to save a document so it will not be Turn “Auto Delete File” off, and then save the
deleted automatically. document in the Document Server. ⇒ p.94
“Auto Delete File”
If you later turn on “Auto Delete File”, the
function is only applied to documents saved
after turning the function on.
“Cannot copy. Original is being scanned by The Copy function is in use. To cancel the job
other functions.” appears. in process, first press the [Exit] key, and then
press the {Copy} } key. Next press the
{Clear/Stop}
} key. When the message “[Stop]
key was pressed. Stop printing?” appears,
press the [Stop] key.

115
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 116 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

B Loading Paper
Note B Square the paper, and then load it
❒ You can change the paper size in in the tray.
tray 2 and 3.⇒ p.132 “Changing
the Paper Size” When the whole tray is pulled out
Reference
A Load the paper.
For details about paper types and
sizes, see p.177 “Copy Paper”.

Loading Paper in Tray 1

(Tandem Tray)
Important
❒ When paper on the right side in
tray 1 runs out, paper on the left
will automatically move to the
6 right. While the paper is moving, Important
the machine instructs you to wait.
❒ Align the right edge of the
At this time, do not pull out the
right copy paper stack to the
tray.
right edge of the tray, or the
Note left edge of the left copy pa-
❒ You can load paper even while per stack to the left edge of
making copies using paper in tray the tray.
1. During copying, you can pull
out the left half of the tray. When the left half of the tray is
A Pull out the paper tray until it
pulled out
stops. A Load the paper in the left tray.

116
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 117 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

B Loading Paper

Important Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the ❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
stack is no higher than the is not higher than the limit mark
limit mark inside the tray. inside the tray.
❒ Align the left edge of the pa- ❒ Align the left edge of the copy
per stack to the left edge of paper stack to the left edge of
the tray. the tray.
Note Note
❒ Shuffle the paper before ❒ Shuffle the paper before load-
loading. ing.
❒ Straighten curled or warped ❒ Straighten curled or warped pa-
paper before loading. per before loading.

C Gently push the paper tray in un- C Gently push the paper tray in un-
til it stops. til it stops.

Loading Paper in Tray 2 and 3 Loading Paper in the Large

Capacity Tray (LCT)
A Pull out the paper tray until it 6
stops. A Open the top cover of the large ca-
pacity tray (LCT).

B Square the paper, and then load it

in the tray.
B Load the paper in the tray along
the edge on the left.

117
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 118 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

C Press the {Down}} key. A Load the paper.

The key blinks while the bottom
plate is moving down.

Important
❒ Confirm the top of the stack is
D Load paper by repeating steps B not higher than the limit mark
and C. inside the tray.
Note Note
❒ The tray can hold up to 4,000 ❒ Shuffle paper before loading.
sheets. ❒ Straighten curled or warped pa-
6
E Close the top cover of the large ca- per before loading.
pacity tray (LCT). B Adjust the paper guides to the pa-
Important per size.
❒ Align the left edge of the copy
paper stack to the left edge of
the tray.

Loading Paper in the Interposer

Important
❒ Load paper on the side already
printed (the side you want as
front).
❒ Load paper in the interposer in the
same orientation as paper in the
paper tray.
❒ The staple or punching location
will be on the left side of the paper,
when you are facing the machine.
❒ Do not place anything on top of or
leave documents on the sensor. This
may lead to the paper size not being
correctly scanned or paper jams.

118
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 119 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Suspend Copy when using Finisher 3000B (100–Sheet Staples)

Suspend Copy when using Finisher 3000B

(100–Sheet Staples)
You can suspend a large volume of
copies when using Finisher 3000B
(100–Sheet Staples).
Note
❒ You can suspend copy only when
the output tray is specified as the
finisher shift tray. ⇒ p.77 “Output:
Copier”

A Press the {Suspend/Resume}} key.

The key lights up.

B Remove the stack of paper from

the finisher shift tray.

C Press the {Start}} key.

The key turns off, and then copy-
ing restarts.

119
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 120 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

D Adding Toner
When D is displayed, it is time to add toner.
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-
nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations.

R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.

R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies availa-
ble at an authorized dealer.

Important
❒ If you use toner other than that recommended, an error might occur.
❒ When adding toner, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your set-
6 tings will be cleared and D will appear again because the machine will not
recognize that toner has been added.
❒ Always add toner after the machine instructs you.
Note
❒ You can still make about 1000 copies after the messages “D Toner is almost
empty.”and “Change Toner Cartridge.” appear cyclically, but replace toner
early to prevent poor copy quality.
❒ When the toner runs out, “D Add Toner” will be displayed on the screen and
printing will be disabled.
Reference
For details about toner storage, see p.150 “Toner Storage”.

120
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 121 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Replacing Toner

Replacing Toner

• Open the front cover of the machine.

• Pull out the lever under the toner bottle to-
ward you 90°.

• Raise the green lever, and then gently pull

out the toner bottle.

• Hold the new bottle horizontally, and then 6

shake it five or six times without removing
the outer cap.

• Remove the outer cap.

Note
❒ Do not remove the inner cap.

• Place the toner bottle in position, then

push it in until the green lever clicks.

Note
❒ If you cannot get it to click in, pull out
the toner bottle a little, slightly rotate it
to the right by 10 – 20°, then try again.

• Return the lever under the toner bottle to

its original position.
• Close the front cover of the machine.

121
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 122 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

x Clearing Misfeeds
R CAUTION:
• The fusing section of this machine might be very hot. Caution should be tak-
en when removing misfed paper.

Important
❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the operation switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper within the ma-
chine.
❒ If misfeeds occur repeatedly, contact your service representative.
Note
❒ More than one misfeed location may be indicated. In such a case, check every
applicable area. See the following charts: A, B, C, D, E, F, P, Q, R, U, W
❒ You can find a sticker explaining how to remove misfed paper inside the front
cover or finisher.
6

122
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 123 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

x Clearing Misfeeds

123
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 124 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

124
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 125 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

x Clearing Misfeeds

125
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 126 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

126
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 127 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

x Clearing Misfeeds

127
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 128 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

128
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 129 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

x Clearing Misfeeds

129
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 130 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

130
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 131 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

x Clearing Misfeeds

131
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 132 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

Changing the Paper Size

Preparation B Press the lock button, and then
Be sure to select the paper size adjust the side fences and back
with User Tools. Otherwise, mis- fence to the new paper size while
feeds might occur. ⇒ p.79 “Tray pushing the release lever.
Paper Size: (Tray 2,3)”
Important
❒ If you wish to change the paper
size set in the paper tray 1 or the
optional large capacity tray (LCT),
contact your service representa-
tive.
Reference
For details about paper sizes, and
types see ⇒ p.177 “Copy Paper”.
C Square the paper and load it in
the paper tray, and then press the
6 Changing the Paper Size in lock button.
Tray 2 or 3
A Make sure the paper tray is not
being used. Then fully pull out
the paper tray.
Remove the paper in the tray.

Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
inside the tray.
❒ Align the right edge of the copy
paper stack to the right edge of
the tray.
Note
❒ Shuffle the paper before loading
it in the tray.
❒ Straighten curled or warped pa-
per before loading it in the tray.

132
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 133 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Changing the Paper Size

D Set the paper size selector knob F Check the paper size displayed
inside the tray to the new size. on the display panel.

Important
❒ Problems might occur if the size
of the paper set does not match
the paper size selector, such as:
• Misfeeds
• Parts of the image are not
copied 6
To adjust the paper size to one
not available on the paper size
selector
A Set the paper size selector
knob to the p mark on the left.
B Press the {User Tools/Counter} }
key.
C Press the [System Settings] key.
D Press the [Tray Paper Setting] key.
E Press the [Tray Paper Size] key.
F Select the size, and then press
the [OK] key.
G Press the [Exit] key or press the
{User Tools/Counter}} key to exit
the User Tools.
Reference
For details, see p.79 “Tray
Paper Settings”.

E Gently push the paper tray until it

stops.

133
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 134 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

d Adding Staples
Note
❒ When removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.
Important
❒ If you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended, staple failure or
staple jams might occur.
❒ A paper jam will occur if the machine staples using the Booklet Finisher with-
out the saddle stitch stapler cartridge. Make sure the cartridge is set.
Reference
For details about the type of finisher, see p.23 “External Options”.

Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Booklet Finisher

6
• Open the finisher front cover.
• Pull out the staple unit.

• Pull out the cartridge gently.

• Pull up the upper unit of the cartridge

while holding both sides of the cartridge.

134
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 135 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

d Adding Staples

• Take out the empty refill in the direction of

the arrow.

• Align the arrows on the new refill and the

cartridge, and then push in the refill until it
clicks.

• Push down the upper unit gently into the

cartridge.

• Pull out the ribbon.

• Push the cartridge down until it clicks.

• Return the staple unit to its original posi-

tion.
• Close the finisher front cover.

135
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 136 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)

• Open the finisher front cover.

• Pull out the staple unit.

• Pull lever S2.

6 • Pull out the cartridge gently.

• Pull up the upper unit of the cartridge

while holding both sides of the cartridge.

• Take out the empty refill in the direction of

the arrow.

136
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 137 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

d Adding Staples

• Align the arrows on the new refill and the

cartridge, and then push in the refill until it
clicks.

• Push down the upper unit gently into the

cartridge.

• Pull out the ribbon.

• Push the cartridge down until it clicks.

• Return lever S2 to its original position.

• Return the staple unit to its original posi-

tion.
• Close the finisher front cover.

137
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 138 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples)

• Open the finisher front cover.

• Pull out the cartridge lever.

6 • Pull out the cartridge.

• Put the cartridge down on a level surface.

• Raise the cover up.

• Set the new refill.

138
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 139 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

d Adding Staples

• Lower the cover until it clicks.

• Pull out the ribbon.

• Turn the cartridge around.

• Reinstall the cartridge.

• Push the cartridge until it clicks.

• Close the finisher front cover.

139
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 140 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

e Removing Jammed Staples

Important
❒ A paper jam will occur if the machine staples using the Booklet Finisher with-
out the saddle stitch stapler cartridge. Make sure the cartridge is set.
Note
❒ Staples might jam due to curled copy paper. In this case, try turning the paper
over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change to paper with less curl.
❒ When removing jammed staples, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.
Reference
For details about the type of finisher, see p.23 “External Options”.

Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Booklet Finisher

6
• Open the finisher front cover.
• Pull out the staple unit.

• Pull out the cartridge gently.

• Open the face plate.

140
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 141 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

e Removing Jammed Staples

• Remove jammed staples.

• Pull down the face plate of the cartridge

until it clicks.

• Push the cartridge down until it clicks.

• Return the staple unit to its original posi-

tion.
• Close the finisher front cover.

141
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 142 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch)

• Open the finisher front cover.

• Pull out the staple unit.

• Pull lever S2.

6 • Pull out the cartridge gently.

• Open the face plate of the cartridge.

• Remove jammed staples.

142
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 143 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

e Removing Jammed Staples

• Pull the face plate of the cartridge down

until it clicks.

• Push the cartridge down until it clicks.

• Return lever S2 to its original position.

• Return the staple unit to its original posi-

tion.
• Close the front cover of the finisher.

143
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 144 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples)

• Open the finisher front cover.

• Turn knob R9 until the marks are aligned.
• Pull lever R8 and pull out the staple unit
completely.

• Turn knob R9 to rotate the staple unit.

6 • Pull out the cartridge lever.

• Pull out the cartridge.

• Push the buttons on the both sides of the

cartridge and open the face plate.

144
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 145 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

e Removing Jammed Staples

• Remove jammed staples.

• Lower the face plate until it clicks.

• Reinstall the cartridge.

• Push the cartridge until it clicks.

• Close the finisher front cover.

145
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 146 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

y Removing Punch Waste

Note
❒ When “Hole punch receptacle is full.” is displayed, you cannot use the Punch
function.

Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Booklet Finisher

A Open the finisher front cover.

6
B Pull out the punch waste box, and then remove punch waste.

C Reinstall the punch waste box.

146
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 147 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

y Removing Punch Waste

Note
❒ If you do not, “Hole punch receptacle is full.” is still displayed.

D Close the front cover of the finisher.

“Hole punch receptacle is full.” disappears.
Note
❒ If the message is still displayed, reinstall the punch waste box.

Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples)

A Open the finisher front cover.

B Pull out the punch waste box, and then remove punch waste.

147
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 148 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Troubleshooting

C Reinstall the punch waste box.

Note
❒ If you do not, “Hole punch receptacle is full.” is still displayed.

D Close the front cover of the finisher.

“Hole punch receptacle is full.” disappears.
Note
❒ If the message is still displayed, reinstall the punch waste box.
6

148
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 149 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

7. REMARKS

Do's And Don'ts

R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
• Do not turn off the main power switch while the On indicator is lit or blink-
ing. This may cause damage to the hard disk or memory.
• Do not touch areas on or around the fusing unit. These areas get hot.
• After making copies continuously, the exposure glass may become warm—
this is not a malfunction.
• When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good
ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace comfortable,
we recommend that you keep it well ventilated.
• The area around the ventilation hole may become warm. This is caused by ex-
haust air and is not a malfunction.
• Do not turn off the operation switch while copying or printing. Make sure all
copying or printing has finished.
• The machine might fail to produce good copy images if condensation forms
inside due to rapid temperature change.
• Do not open the covers of the machine while copying or printing. If you do,
misfeeds might occur.
• Do not move the machine while copying or printing.
• If you operate the machine improperly or a failure occurs, settings might be
lost. Be sure to make a note of your machine settings.
• The supplier shall not be liable for any loss or damage resulting from a failure
of the machine, loss of settings, or use of the machine.

149
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 150 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

REMARKS

Toner

Handling Toner
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ig-
nite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner containers
in accordance with local regulations.

R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children.

R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies availa-
ble at an authorized dealer.

Important
❒ If you use toner other than the recommended type, an error might occur.
Reference
If you want to add toner. ⇒ p.120 “D Adding Toner”
7
Toner Storage
When storing toner, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Store toner containers in a cool, dry place free from direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.

Used Toner
Note
❒ Toner cannot be re-used.

150
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 151 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Where to Put Your Machine

Where to Put Your Machine

Machine Environment
Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-
ditions greatly affect its performance.

Optimum environmental conditions

R CAUTION:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an elec-
tric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,
an injury might occur.

R CAUTION:
• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a continuous
air turnover.
• Temperature: 10 – 32°C (50 – 89.6°F)(humidity to be 54% at 32°C, 89.6°F)
• Humidity: 15 – 80% (temperature to be 27°C, 80.6°F at 80%)
• A strong and level base. 7
• The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to
right.
• To avoid possible buildup of ozone, be sure to locate this machine in a large
well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person.

Environments to avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation with-
in the machine.)
• Locations close to machines generating ammonia such as a diazo copy ma-
chine.
• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.

151
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 152 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

REMARKS

Moving
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.

Important
❒ When moving the machine, the following precautions should always be fol-
lowed:
• Turn off the main power. ⇒ p.33 “Turning Off the Main Power”
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. When you do, grip the plug
to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.
• Close all covers and trays including the front cover and bypass tray.
Limitation
❒ Carefully move the machine. If you do not, the machine might be damaged
or a stored file might be deleted.
❒ Avoid any strong shock to the machine. This could damage the hard disk and
cause stored files to be deleted. For precautionary reasons, files should be
copied to another local computer.

7
Power Connection
R WARNING:
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.

R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.

R CAUTION:
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).

152
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 153 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Where to Put Your Machine

• When the main power switch is in the Stand-by position, the optional anti-
condensation heaters are on. In case of emergency, unplug the machine's
power cord.
• When you unplug the power cord, the anti-condensation heaters turn off.
• Make sure that the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
• Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10%.
• The socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily
accessible.

Access to the Machine

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

7
1. Rear: more than 5 cm (2") 3. Front: more than 70 cm (27.5")
2. Right: more than 4 cm (1.6") 4. Left: more than 5 cm (2")
Note
❒ For required space when options are installed, contact your service represent-
ative.

153
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 154 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

REMARKS

Maintaining Your Machine

If the exposure glass or document
feeder is dirty, you might not be able Cleaning the Document Feeder
to make clear copies. Clean these
parts when you find them dirty. A Clean the white sheet of the docu-
❖ Cleaning the machine ment feeder.
Wipe the machine with a soft,
damp cloth. Then, wipe it with a
dry cloth to remove the water.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or or-
ganic solvents, such as thinner or
benzene. If they get into the ma-
chine or melt plastic parts, a failure
might occur.
❒ Do not clean parts other than those
specified in this manual. Such B Pull the lever.
parts should be cleaned by your
service representative.

7 Cleaning the Exposure Glass

A Clean 1 and 2.

C Wipe the scanning glass.

154
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 155 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Other Functions

Other Functions

Inquiry Printing inquiry information

The inquiry functions lets you con- A Press the [Print Inquiry List] key.
firm the telephone numbers to con-
tact for repairs or to order toner. Be
sure to contact your service engineer
to verify the following:

❖ Machine Maintenance/Repair
• Telephone No. B Press the {Start}
} key.
• Serial No. of the machine Inquiry information is printed.

❖ Sales Representative C Press the [Exit] key.

• Telephone No. D Press the [Exit] key.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Changing the Display Language
You can change the language used on
the display. English is set as default
setting. 7
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

B Press the [Inquiry] key.

Inquiry information is displayed.

B Press the [Français] key.

The display language is changed to

French.

155
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 156 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

REMARKS

C Press the [Exit] key.

The menu appears in French.
Note
❒ If you want to return the display
language to “English”, repeat
step A and press the [English]
key.

Counter

Displaying the Total Counter

You can display the total number of
sheets used for all functions and the
total number of sheets used for copy-
ing.
You can also print the counter list.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

B Press the [Counter] key.
7

C To print a counter list, press the

[Print Counter List] key.

D Press the {Start}} key.

A counter list is printed.

156
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 157 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

8. Specification

Mainframe
❖ Configuration:
Console

❖ Photosensitivity type:
OPC drum (Φ100)

❖ Original scanning:
CCD-CIS

❖ Copy process:
Dry electrostatic transfer system

❖ Development:
Dry two-component magnetic brush development system

❖ Fusing:
Heating roll pressure system

❖ Resolution:
1200 dpi

❖ Exposure glass:
Stationary original exposure type

❖ Original reference position:

Rear left corner

❖ Warm-up time:
Operation Switch: Less than 300 seconds (23°C, 73°F)
Low Power Mode: Less than 25 seconds

❖ Originals:
Sheet/book/objects

❖ Maximum original size:

A3L, 11" × 17"L, Long length: 1260 mm

❖ Minimum original size:

B6,
51/2" × 81/2" (when using document feeder)

157
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 158 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

❖ Copy paper size:

• Trays: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 8K(267 × 390
mm)L, 16K(195 × 267 mm)KL
• Bypass: A3L – A6L, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"L
• Bypass (non-standard size):
Vertical: 100 – 305 mm, 4" – 12"
Horizontal: 139.7 – 600 mm, 5.5" – 23.6"
• Duplex: A3L – A5KL, 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL

❖ Copy paper weight:

• Paper tray: 52.3 – 127.9 g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Bond
• Bypass tray: 52.3 – 105 g/m2, 14 – 28 lb. Bond
105 – 216 g/m2, 28 – 57.6 lb. Bond (Thick Paper)
• Duplex: 64 – 127.9 g/m2, 17 – 34 lb. Bond

❖ Non-reproduction area:
• Leading edge: Less than 4 ± 2 mm
• Trailing edge: More than 1 mm
• Left edge: More than 2 ± 1.5 mm
• Right edge: More than 0.5 mm

❖ First copy time:

• 3.5 seconds or less
(face up feed, A4K, 81/2" × 11"K, 100%, feeding from tray 1, on the expo-
8 sure glass)
• 5.3 seconds or less
(face down feed, A4K, 81/2" × 11"K, 100%, feeding from tray 1, on the ex-
posure glass)

❖ Copying speed: (Type 1)

• 34 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)
• 60 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

❖ Copying speed: (Type 2)

• 38 copies/minute (A3L, 11" × 17"L)
• 75 copies/minute (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)

158
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 159 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Mainframe

❖ Reproduction ratio:
Preset reproduction ratios:
Metric version Inch version
Enlargement 400% 400%
200% 200%
141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
Reduction 93% 93%
82% 85%
75% 78%
71% 73%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%

Zoom: From 25 to 400% in 1% steps.

❖ Maximum continuous copy run:

999 sets

❖ Copy paper capacity:

• Tray 1 (Tandem tray) : 3,100 sheets (1,550 sheets × 2) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) 8
• Tray 2 (550-sheet tray) : 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• Tray 3 (550-sheet tray) : 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• Bypass tray: 100 sheets (69 g/m2, 18 lb. Bond)

❖ Power consumption:
• Mainframe only
Type 1 Type 2
Warm-up about 1.20 kw about 1.20 kw
Stand-by about 0.30 kw about 0.30 kw
During printing about 1.55 kw about 1.55 kw
Maximum less than 1.60 kw less than 1.60 kw

159
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 160 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

• Complete system *1
Type 1 Type 2
Warm-up about 1.25 kw about 1.25 kw
Stand-by about 0.32 kw about 0.32 kw
During printing about 1.65 kw about 1.65 kw
Maximum less than 1.70 kw less than 1.70 kw
*1
The Complete System consists of the mainframe, finisher, large capacity tray
(LCT) and mailbox.

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H up to exposure glass):

Type 1,2: 690 × 750 × 985(1165 *1 ) mm, 27.2" × 29.6" × 38.8"(45.9" *1 )
*1
The height include the document feeder.

❖ Space for mainframe (W × D):

Type 1,2: 1,175 × 794 mm, 46.3" × 31.3"

❖ Noise Emission *1 :
Sound Power Level:
• Mainframe only
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by Less than 48 dB (A) Less than 48 dB (A)
Copying Less than 70 dB (A) Less than 71 dB (A)

• Complete system *3
Type 1 Type 2
8 Stand-by Less than 49 dB (A) Less than 49 dB (A)
Copying Less than 74 dB (A) Less than 74 dB (A)
*2
Sound Pressure Level :
• Mainframe only
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by Less than 37 dB (A) Less than 37 dB (A)
Copying Less than 56 dB (A) Less than 57 dB (A)

• Complete system *3
Type 1 Type 2
Stand-by Less than 38 dB (A) Less than 38 dB (A)
Copying Less than 63 dB (A) Less than 63 dB (A)
*1
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.
*2
It is measured at the position of the bystander.
*3
The Complete System consists of the mainframe, finisher, large capacity tray
(LCT) and mailbox.

❖ Weight:
Type 1, 2: Approx. 200 kg, 440.9 lb
160
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 161 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Mainframe

Document Server
❖ HDD:
40 GB

❖ HDD (Document Server):

23.45 GB

❖ Capacity:
• Copy: Approx. 2,000 (ITUT-No.4 chart)
• Batch mode: Approx. 2,000 (ITUT-No.4 chart)
• Printer: Approx. 10,000 (600 dpi)
• Scanner: Approx. 2,000 (200 dpi/Text) (ITUT-No.4 chart) *1

❖ Maximum number of stored documents:

3,000 documents

❖ Maximum pages of stored documents:

10,000 pages

❖ Maximum number of pages per document:

2,000 pages

❖ Capacity (Memory Sorting):

4,5 GB (A4/81/2" × 11" : Approx. 333 sheets-2000 sheets at maximum) *2

❖ Capacity (Others): 8
6,62 GB
*1
Scanning Condition: ITUT-No. 4 chart/200 dpi/Text/A4/MMR
*2
The capacity will change when the multiple functions are used.

161
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 162 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Document Feeder
❖ Mode:
Batch (SADF) mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Paper Orientation mode

❖ Original size:
Metric version:
• A3L – B6KL (1-sided originals)
• A3L – A5KL (2-sided originals)
Inch version:
• 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL (1-sided originals)
• 11" × 17"L – 51/2" × 81/2"KL (2-sided originals)

❖ Original weight:
• 1-sided originals: 40 – 128 g/m2 (11 – 34 lb. Bond)
• 2-sided originals: 52 – 128 g/m2 (14 – 34 lb. Bond) (Duplex)

❖ Number of originals to be set:

100 sheets (81.4 g/m2, 22 lb. Bond) or less than 12 mm, 0.4"

❖ Maximum power consumption:

Less than 110 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W××D××H)
680 × 560 × 180 mm, 26.8" × 22" × 7.1"

8 ❖ Weight:
Approx. 18 kg, 39.7 lb.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

162
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 163 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Mailbox (option)

Mailbox (option)
❖ Number of trays:
9 trays

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL *1 , 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL *1

❖ Paper capacity:
100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Paper weight:
60 – 128 g/m2, 16 – 34 lb. Bond

❖ Power consumption:
Approx. 48 W(power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
540 × 600 × 660 mm, 21.3" × 23.6" × 26"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 15 kg, 33 lb.
*1
These sizes cannot be detected automatically.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
8

163
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 164 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Booklet Finisher (option)

Finisher Upper Tray:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 163 g/m2, 14 – 43 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
• 250 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" ×
81/2"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 50 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20
lb. Bond)
Finisher Shift Tray 1:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 216 g/m2, 14 – 58 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
8 • 500 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5K, 81/2" × 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 250 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20
lb. Bond)
• 100 sheets (A5L, B6L, 51/2" × 81/2"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL

❖ Staple paper weight:

64 – 90 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb. Bond

❖ Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size mode:
• 50 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 30 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
With Mixed Size mode:
• 30 sheets (A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K/11" × 17"L) (80 g/m2,
20 lb. Bond)

164
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 165 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Booklet Finisher (option)

❖ Stack capacity after stapling

Without Mixed Size mode:
• 50–10 sets (10–50 sheets) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 50 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 25–16 sets (10–30 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 25 sets (2–9 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
With Mixed Size mode:
• 16 sets (2–30 sheets) (A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K/11" × 17"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple position:
4 position (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Finisher Shift Tray 2:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 216 g/m2, 14 – 58 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
• 2,500 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 1,250 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 500 sheets (A5K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) 8
• 100 sheets (A5L, B6L or 51/2" × 81/2"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L,81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL

❖ Staple paper weight:

64 – 90 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb. Bond

❖ Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size mode:
• 50 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 30 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
With Mixed Size mode:
• 30 sheets (A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K/11" × 17"L) (80 g/m2,
20 lb. Bond)

165
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 166 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

❖ Stack capacity after stapling

Without Mixed Size mode:
• 250–50 sets (10–50 sheets) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 250 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 125–25 sets (10–50 sheets) (A4L, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 125 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4L, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 125–40 sets (10–30 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 125 sets (2–9 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
With Mixed Size mode:
• 50 sets (2–30 sheets) (A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K/11" × 17"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple position:
4 position (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)

❖ Saddle stitch paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 11"L

❖ Saddle stitch paper weight:

64 – 90 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb. Bond

❖ Saddle stitch capacity:

1 set (15 sheets)

❖ Stack capacity after Saddle stitching

• 25 sets (2–5 sheets) (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
8 • 15 sets (6–10 sheets) (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 10 sets (11–15 sheets) (A4L, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 30 sets (2–5 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 20 sets (6–10 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 10 sets (11–15 sheets) (other paper size)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Saddle stitch position:

Center 2 position

❖ Power consumption:
Approx. 72 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
700 × 620 × 960 mm, 27.6" × 24.5" × 37.8"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 62 kg, 136.7 lb.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
166
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 167 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples) (option)

Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples) (option)

Finisher Upper Tray:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 163 g/m2, 14 – 43 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
• 250 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6KL, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" ×
81/2"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 50 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20
lb. Bond)
Finisher Shift Tray:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 216 g/m2, 14 – 58 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
• 3,000 sheets (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) 8
• 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 500 sheets (A5K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 100 sheets (A5L, B6L, 51/2" × 81/2"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL

❖ Staple paper weight:

64 – 90 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb. Bond

❖ Staple capacity:
Without Mixed Size mode:
• 50 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 30 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
With Mixed Size mode:
• 30 sheets (A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K/11" × 17"L) (80 g/m2,
20 lb. Bond)

167
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 168 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

❖ Stack capacity after stapling

Without Mixed Size mode:
• 300–60 sets (10–50 sheets) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 300 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4K, 81/2" × 11"K)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 150–30 sets (10–50 sheets) (A4L, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb.
Bond)
• 150 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4L, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 150–50 sets (10–30 sheets) (other size paper)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 150 sets (2–9 sheets) (other size paper)(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
With Mixed Size mode:
• 50 sets (2–30 sheets) (A4K/A3L, B5K/B4L, 81/2" × 11"K/11" × 17"L)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple position:
4 position (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)

❖ Power consumption:
Approx. 72 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
700 × 620 × 960 mm, 27.6" × 24.5" × 37.8"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 51 kg, 112.4 lb.
Note
8 ❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

168
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 169 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) (option)

Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples) (option)

Finisher Upper Tray:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L,
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 216 g/m2, 14 – 58 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
• 500 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, B6L, A6L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" ×
81/2"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 250 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20
lb. Bond)
Finisher Shift Tray:

❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"KL, 51/2" × 81/2"KL, 12" × 18"L

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 216 g/m2, 14 – 58 lb. Bond

❖ Stack capacity:
• 3,000 sheets (A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 11"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) 8
• 1,500 sheets (A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" ×
11"L, 12" × 18"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 500 sheets (A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 100 sheets (A5L, 51/2" × 81/2"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Staple paper size:

A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, 11" × 17"L,81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL

❖ Staple paper weight:

64 – 80 g/m2, 17 – 20 lb. Bond

❖ Staple capacity:
• 100 sheets (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
• 50 sheets (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L) (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

169
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 170 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

❖ Stack capacity after stapling

• 200–30 sets (10–100 sheets) (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL)(80 g/m2, 20
lb. Bond)
• 150 sets (2–9 sheets) (A4KL, B5KL, 81/2" × 11"KL)(80 g/m2, 20 lb.
Bond)
• 150–30 sets (10–50 sheets) (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L)(80 g/m2,
20 lb. Bond)
• 150 sets (2–9 sheets) (A3L, B4L, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L)(80 g/m2, 20 lb.
Bond)

❖ Staple position:
4 position (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)

❖ Power consumption:
Approx. 100 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
800 × 730 × 980 mm, 31.5" × 28.7" × 38.6"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 65 kg, 143.3 lb.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

170
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 171 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Copy Tray (option)

Copy Tray (option)

❖ Paper capacity:
• A3, 11" × 17" : 250 sheets
• B4, 81/2" × 14" : 500 sheets
• A4, 81/2" × 11" : 500 sheets
• B5, 51/2" × 81/2" : 250 sheets

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
390 × 330 × 130 mm, 15.4" × 13" × 5.1"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 650 g, 1.4 lb
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

171
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 172 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Large Capacity Tray (LCT) (option)

❖ Paper size:
A4K, B5K, 81/2" × 11"K

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 128 g/m2, 14 – 34 lb. Bond

❖ Paper capacity:
4,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Power consumption
Maximum. 50 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H, option unit):

314 × 458 × 659 mm, 12.4" × 18" × 25.9"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 20 kg, 44 lb.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

172
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 173 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Interposer (option)

Interposer (option)
❖ Paper size:
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL, A5KL, 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 8 1/2" ×
11"KL, 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"KL

❖ Paper weight:
64 – 216 g/m2, 20 – 58 lb. Bond

❖ Paper Capacity:
200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

❖ Power consumption (Max):

Approx. 48 W (power is supplied from the mainframe)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
500 × 620 × 200 mm, 19.7" × 24.4" × 7.9"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 12 kg, 26.5 lb.
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

173
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 174 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Punch Unit (option)

Booklet Finisher, Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples)

❖ Paper size:
Punch unit type
2 & 4 holes type 2 holes L A3-A5, 11" × 17"-51/2" × 81/2"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
4 holes L A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"
4 holes type 4 holes L A3-A5, 11" × 17"-51/2" × 81/2"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
2 & 3 holes type 2 holes L A3-A5, 11" × 17"-51/2" × 81/2"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
3 holes L A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"

❖ Paper weight:
52 – 163 g/m2, 14 lb. – 43 lb. Bond

❖ Power consumption:
26.4 W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)

8 ❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
142 × 456 × 92 mm, 55.9" × 179.5" × 36.2"

❖ Weight:
Approx. 2.9 kg, 6.4 lb
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples)

174
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 175 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Punch Unit (option)

❖ Paper size:
Punch unit type
2 & 4 holes type 2 holes L A3-A5, 11" × 17"-51/2" × 81/2"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
4 holes L A3, 11" × 17"
K A4, 81/2" × 11"
4 holes type 4 holes L A3-B5, 11" × 17"-81/2" × 11"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
2 & 3 holes type 2 holes L A3-A5, 11" × 17"-51/2" × 81/2"
K A4-A5, 81/2" × 11", 51/2" × 81/2"
3 holes L A3, B4, 11" × 17"
K A4, B5, 81/2" × 11"

❖ Paper weight:
• 4 holes: 52 – 128 g/m2, 14 lb. – 34 lb. Bond
• 2 & 3 holes: 52 – 163 g/m2, 14 lb. – 43 lb. Bond

❖ Power consumption:
60 W (power is supplied from the mainframe.)

❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
• 4 holes: 92 × 463 × 100 mm, 3.6" × 18.2" × 3.9"
• 2 & 3 holes, 2 & 4 holes: 105 × 463 × 100 mm, 4.1" × 18.2" × 3.9"
8
❖ Weight:
• 4 holes: Approx. 2.4 kg, 5.3 lb
• 2 & 3 holes, 2 & 4 holes: Approx. 2.6 kg, 5.7 lb
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

175
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 176 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Others
❖ A3/11" × 17" Tray Unit (option)
You can load A3L or 11" × 17"L paper in the tray 1 using this unit.

❖ B4/81/2" × 14" Tray Unit (option)

You can load B4L/A4L or 81/2" × 14"L paper in the large capacity tray
(LCT) using this unit.

❖ Tab Sheet Holder (option)

You can use tab sheets with this holder.

❖ Output Jogger (option)

You can tidy the printout with Finisher 3000B (100–Sheet Staples).

176
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 177 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Copy Paper

Copy Paper

Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The following limitations apply to each tray:
Tray Paper Type and Metric Version Inch Version Paper
Type Weight Capacity *9
Tray 1 52.3-127.9 g/m2 A4K, 81/2" × 11"K 1,550
*1
(14-34 lb. Bond) sheets × 2
Tray 1 A3L, B4L, A4KL, 11" ×17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" 1,000
*1 × 11"KL sheets
(A3/11
" × 17"
Tray
Unit
(op-
tion))
Tray 2, 52.3-127.9 g/m2 *3
A3L, A4KL, *3
11" ×17"L, 81/2" × 550 sheets
3 (14-34 lb. Bond) A5KL, 81/2" × 13"L, 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL,
81/4" × 13"L 81/2" × 51/2"KL, 8" ×
13"L, 71/4" × 101/2"L,
8" × 101/2"L
*4
B4L, B5KL, 11" × *4
A3L, B4L, A4KL,
17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, B5KL, A5KL, 81/2" ×
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 11"
81/2"KL, 8" × 13"L, × 15"L, 10" × 15"L,
71/4" × 101/2"L, 11" × 81/4" × 14"L, 210 × 340 8
15"L, 10" × 15"L, 81/4" mmL, 210 × 182 mmK,
× 14"L, 8" ×101/2, 210 × 210 × 170 mmK, 8K(267
340 mmL, 210 × 182 × 390 mm)L, 16K(195 ×
mmK, 210 × 170 mmK, 267 mm)KL
8K(267 × 390 mm)L,
16K(195 × 267 mm)KL
Custom size Custom size
Vertical: 139.7-297 mm Vertical: 5.5"-11.7"
Horizontal: 139.7-431.8 Horizontal: 5.5"-17.0"
mm
Tab sheets A4K, 81/2" × 11"K, 81/2" × 14"L(90 lb. Index only) 500 sheets
2 2
163 g/m , 199 g/m
(90 lb. Index, 110 lb.
Index) *2

177
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 178 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Tray Paper Type and Metric Version Inch Version Paper

Type Weight Capacity *9
Bypass 52.3-216 g/m2 *3 *3 A3L, 100 sheets
Tray (14-57.6 lb. Bond) A3L, A4L, A5L 11" × 17"L, 81/2" × (52.3-105
14"L, 51/2" × 81/2"L, g/m2(14–
*5 *5 28 lb.
B4L, A4K, B5KL, B4L, A4KL,
Bond))
A5K, B6L, A6L, 11" × B5KL, A5KL, B6L,
17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, A6L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 30 sheets
81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2" × 51/2" × 81/2"K, 81/2" × (105-157
81/2"KL, 81/2" × 13"L, 13"L, 81/4" × 13"L, 8" × g/m2(28–
81/4" × 13"L, 8" × 13"L, 13"L, 71/4" × 41.7 lb.
71/4" × 101/2"KL, 11" × 101/2"KL, 11" × 15"L, Bond))
15"L, 11" × 14"L, 10" × 11" × 14"L, 10" × 15"L, 20 sheets
15"L, 10" × 14"L, 81/4" 10" × 14"L, 81/4" ×
(157-216
× 14"L, 8" ×101/2"KL, 14"L,8" ×101/2"KL, 8"
g/m2(41.7
8" ×10"KL ×10"KL
-57.6 lb.
Bond))
*6 *6

Custom size Custom size

Vertical: 100-305 mm Vertical: 4"-12"
Horizontal: 139.7-600 Horizontal: 5.5"-23.6"
mm
Translucent paper A3L, B4L, A4L, B5L, A4K *5 , B5K *5 50 sheets
*11 *10

OHP transparencies A4L, 81/2" × 11"L, A4K *5 , 81/2" × 11"K *5 50 sheets

*7 *10

8 Postcards *3 *7
100 × 148 mmL 30 sheets
*10

Label paper B4L, A4L, A4K *5 1 sheet

(adhesive labels)
Large 52.3-127.9 g/m2 B4L *8 , A4L *8 , 81/2" × 14"L *8 , A4K, B5K, 81/2" 4,000
Capaci- (14-34 lb. Bond) × 11"K sheets
ty Tray
(LCT)
(op-
tion) *1
*1
The paper tray fence is fixed. If you wish to change the size of paper placed in this
tray, contact your service representative.
*2
The optional tab sheet holder is required.
*3 The paper size is detected automatically.
*4
Select the paper size in System Settings. ⇒ p.79 “Tray Paper Size: (Tray 2,3)”
*5
Press the [Bypass] key, and the {#}} key, and then select the paper size.
*6
Press the [Bypass] key, and the {#} } key, and then enter the paper size using the
number keys.
*7
If you wish to copy onto OHP transparencies or thick paper, select “OHP” or “Thick
Paper”. ⇒ “When copying onto OHP transparencies or Thick Paper” in the Copy
Reference

178
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 179 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Copy Paper

*8
The optional B4/81/2" × 14" tray unit is required to load B4/81/2" × 14" size paper.
(2,500 sheets can be loaded in this tray.)
*9 When loading paper, make sure the stack height does not exceed the lower limit
mark of the paper tray. The amount of paper that can be set is 10 mm/100 sheets ap-
proximately.⇒ p.116 “B Loading Paper”
*10
It is recommended to place one sheet at a time.
*11 When loading translucent papers, set the paper direction according to fiber flow.

Important
❒ If you use damp or curled paper, a misfeed may occur.
Note
❒ When loading paper in the paper trays 1-3, place the copy side face down.
❒ When loading paper in the large capacity tray (LCT), place the copy side face
down.
❒ When loading paper in the bypass tray, place the copy side face up.
❒ When you use the bypass tray, it is recommended to set the copy paper direc-
tion to L.
❒ Do not use paper for inkjet printers.
❒ When you load OHP transparencies, check the front and back of the sheets,
and place them correctly, or a misfeed might occur. Set the paper direction to
L. ⇒“Copying from the Bypass Tray” in the Copy Reference.
8
❒ When you use OHP transparencies, shuffle them for each use.
❒ If multiple sheet feeding occurs, load sheets one by one.
❒ When you load label paper, set the paper direction to K.
❒ If you load paper of the same size in the same direction in two or more trays,
the machine automatically shifts to the other tray when the first tray in use
runs out of paper. This function is called Auto Tray Switching. (However, if
the Paper Type of one tray is recycled or special paper, the settings of the oth-
er trays must be the same for the Auto Tray Switching function to work.) This
saves interrupting a copy run to replenish paper when making a large
number of copies. ⇒ “General Features 1/5 - Auto Tray Switching” in the
Copy Reference, p.79 “Tray Paper Size: (Tray 2,3)”

179
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 180 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Specification

Non-recommended Paper
R CAUTION:
• Do not use aluminum foil, carbon paper, or similar conductive paper to avoid
a fire or machine failure.

Important
❒ Do not use any of the following kinds of paper or a fault might occur.
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal fax paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper
• Paper with perforated lines
• Hemmed paper
• Envelopes
❒ Do not copy on the side of paper that has been already copied onto or a fault
might occur.
Note
❒ Do not use the following kinds of paper or a misfeed might occur.
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
8 • Torn paper
• Slippery paper
• Perforated paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with low stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
❒ If you copy onto rough grain paper, the image might be blurred.

180
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 181 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Copy Paper

Paper Storage
Note
❒ When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:
• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
❒ Do not store paper vertically.
❒ In high temperature/high humidity conditions or low temperature/ low hu-
midity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.

181
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 182 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

INDEX
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, 27 C
A Changing
Display Language, 155
A3/11" × 17" Tray Unit, 176 E-mail Destination, 104
Access to the Machine, 153 File Name, 60, 61
Acquiring Group Name, 109
IP Address, 38 Modes, 47
Adding Paper Size, 132
Staples, 134 Password, 61
Toner, 120 User Code, 98
Adding Staples User Name, 61
Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch), 136 User Tools, 74
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples), 138 Changing the Paper Size
Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Tray 2, 132
Booklet Finisher, 134 Tray 3, 132
Address Book Channel, 88
Change Order, 92 Checking
Edit Title, 93 Job List, 49
Program/Change/Delete Group, 92 Stored Documents, 62
Select Title, 94 {Check Modes} } key, 24
Address Book Management, 92 Cleaning
ADF Original Table Elevation, 78 Document feeder, 154
AOF (Always ON), 95 Exposure glass, 154
Assigning Clearing
Delivery Option, 44 Counter, 101
Auto Delete File, 94 E-mail Destination, 105
Auto Off, 48 Misfeeds, 122
Auto Off Timer, 82 User Code, 99
Available Functions, 17 {Clear Modes}} key, 24
Copy Mode, 17 {Clear/Stop}
} key, 25
Document Server Mode, 18 Combined Function Operations, 47
Printer Mode, 17 Common key operations, 26
Scanner Mode, 17 Communication Mode, 88
Configuring
B Network, 34
Connecting
B4/81/2" × 14" Tray Unit, 176
Ethernet Interface, 30
Bidirectional Communication, 86
IEEE 1394 Interface, 31
Bidirectional SCSI print, 88
Machine (Network Connections), 27
Bypass tray, 22
Network Cable, 30
USB 2.0 Interface, 31
Control panel, 22, 24
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer, 83
Copy Count Display
(Copier/Document Server), 75
Copy Paper, 177
Copy tray, 21, 23, 171
Copy tray guide, 21

182
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 183 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Counter E
Clearing, 101
Displaying, 156 Effective Protocol, 85
Counter for Each User Code E-mail Destination, 102
Displaying, 100 Changing, 104
Printing, 100 Clearing, 105
Cover Sheet Tray, 81 Displaying, 108
Registering, 102
D {Energy Saver}} key, 24
Energy Saver Timer, 82
Delete All Files, 94 ENERGY STAR Program, 12
Deleting Entering Text, 110
E-mail Destination from a Group, 107 Ethernet Interface
Group, 108 Connecting, 30
Job List, 50 Ethernet Speed, 85
Saved Documents, 66 Exiting
Delivery Option, 89 User Tools, 74
Assigning, 44 Exposure glass, 21
Display/Clear/Print Counter per User Code, 91 External Options, 23
Displaying
Counter, 156 F
Counter for Each User Code, 100
E-mail Destination, 108 File Name
Display Language Changing, 60, 61
Changing, 155 File Transfer, 89
Display panel, 24, 26 File Transfer Settings, 43
Display Password with Stored File, 94 Finisher
Display/Print Counter, 91 Booklet Finisher, 23, 164
Document Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples), 23, 169
Selecting, 61 Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), 23, 167
Document feeder, 21, 162 Front cover, 22
Document Server, 57, 161 Function keys, 25
Settings, 67 Function Priority, 75
Using, 58 Function Reset Timer, 76
Document Server Mode Function Status indicator, 25
File Merge Printing, 19
On Demand Printing, 19 G
Operation from a Computer, 19
Gateway Address, 85
Do's And Don'ts, 149
General Features, 75
Duplex Priority, 13
Group
Deleting, 108
Group Name
Changing, 109
Guide To Components, 21

183
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 184 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

I M
IEEE 1394 Interface Machine Environment, 151
Connecting, 31 Machine (Network Connections)
IEEE 1394 ports, 27 Connecting, 27
Indicators, 24 Machine Types, 15
Input Prime, 86 Mailbox, 23, 163
Inquiry, 155 Mainframe, 157
Interface, 22 Main Power
Interface Settings/IEEE 1394, 87 Turning Off, 33
Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b, 88 Turning On, 32
Interface Settings/Network, 84 Main power indicator, 25
Interface Settings/Parallel Interface, 86 Main power switch, 21, 32
Interleave Print, 76 Maintaining Your Machine, 154
Interposer, 23, 173 Manuals for this Machine, 14
{Interrupt}
} key, 24 Misfeeds
IP Address, 84, 87 Clearing, 122
Acquiring, 38 Moving, 152
IP over 1394, 87 Multi-Access, 51

J N
Jammed Staples Network
Removing, 140 Configuring, 34
Job List, 49 Network Boot, 85
Checking, 49 Network Cable
Deleting, 50 Connecting, 30
Job List Display Time, 78 Network Settings, 36
{Job List}
} key, 24 IEEE 1394 Interface, 39
NetWare, 38
K TCP/IP, 37
Wireless LAN Interface in 802.11
{#}
} key, 25 Ad hoc Mode, 40
Key Counter Management, 90 Wireless LAN Interface in Ad hoc Mode, 41
Key Operator Code, 90 Wireless LAN Interface in
Key Operator's E-mail Address, 95 Infrastructure Mode, 42
Key Operator Tools, 90 Non-recommended Paper, 180
Number keys, 25
L Number of Recalls
Setting, 45
LAN Type, 85
Number of Scanner Recalls, 89
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 23, 172
NW Frame Type, 85
Loading Paper, 116
Interposer, 118
O
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 117
Tray 1 (Tandem Tray), 116 Off Mode, 12
Tray 2, 117 On indicator, 25
Tray 3, 117 Operation switch, 22, 25, 32
Low Power Mode, 48 Output
Copier, 77
Document Server, 77
Printer, 78
Output Jogger, 176
Output Tray Setting, 76

184
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 185 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

P R
Panel Off Timer, 83 Recall Interval Time
Panel Tone, 75 Setting, 44
Paper Storage, 181 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types, 177
Paper tray, 22 Registering
tray 1, 22 E-mail Destination, 102
tray 2, 22 E-mail Destinations to a Group, 107
tray 3, 22 New Group, 106
Paper Tray Priority User Code, 97
Copier, 79 Registering or changing
Printer, 79 User Name, 59
Paper Type Remarks, 149
Bypass tray, 80 Removing
LCT, 80 Jammed Staples, 140
Tray 1, 80 Punch Waste, 146
Tray 2, 80 Removing Jammed Staples
Tray 3, 80 Booklet Finisher (Saddle Stitch), 142
Parallel Communication Speed, 86 Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples), 144
Parallel port, 27 Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples),
Parallel Timing, 86 Booklet Finisher, 140
Password Removing Punch Waste
Changing, 61 Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples), 147
Setting or changing, 60 Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples),
Power Booklet Finisher, 146
Turning Off, 33 Replacing
Turning On, 32 Toner, 121
Power Connection, 152 Return to Defaults, 89
Print First Page, 65
Printing S
Counter for Each User Code, 100
Safety information, 8
Saved Documents, 63
Sample Copy, 65
Printing Saved Documents
{Sample Copy} } key, 25
Changing, 64
Saved Documents
Stopping, 64
Deleting, 66
Print Priority, 75
Printing, 63
{Program}} key, 24
Searching, 62
Punch Unit, 174
Saving Energy, 48
Punch Waste
Auto Off, 48
Removing, 146
Low Power Mode, 48
System Reset, 48
Scanner Auto Reset Timer, 83
Scanner Recall Interval Time, 89
Scanning and Saving Originals, 58
Screen contrast knob, 24
SCSI print (SBP-2), 87
Searching
by File Name, 62
by User Name, 63
Saved Documents, 62
Selecting
Document, 61

185
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 186 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

Selection Signal Status, 86 T

Set Date, 83
Set Time, 84 Tab Sheet Holder, 176
Setting Text
Number of Recalls, 45 Deleting, 111
Recall Interval Time, 44 Entering, 111
Setting or changing Timer Setting, 82
Password, 60 Toner, 150
Settings Adding, 120
Document Server, 67 Handling, 150
Signal Control, 86 Replacing, 121
Sleep Mode, 12 Storing, 150
Slip Sheet Tray, 81 Transmission Speed, 89
Slip Sheet Tray 1, 81 Tray Paper Settings, 79
Slip Sheet Tray 2, 81 Tray Paper Size
Specification, 157 Tray 2, 79
Booklet Finisher, 164 Tray 3, 79
Copy tray, 171 Troubleshooting, 113
Document feeder, 162 Turning Off
Document Server, 161 Main Power, 33
Finisher 3000B (100-Sheet Staples), 169 Power, 33
Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), 167 Turning On
Interposer, 173 Main Power, 32
Large Capacity Tray (LCT), 172 Power, 32
Mailbox, 163
Mainframe, 157 U
Punch Unit, 174 USB 2.0 Interface
SSID Setting, 88 Connecting, 31
Staples USB port, 27
Adding, 134 User Code
{Start}
} key, 25 Changing, 98
Stored Documents Clearing, 99
Checking, 62 Registering, 97
Sub-net Mask, 84, 87 User Code Management, 90
Suspend Copy User Codes, 96
Finisher 3000B (100–Sheet Staples), 119
User Management, 20
System Auto Reset Timer, 83
Using, 20
System Reset, 48 User Name
Changing, 61
Registering or changing, 59
User Tools
Changing, 74
Exiting, 74
{User Tools/Counter}
} key, 24
User Tools Menu (System Settings), 69
User Tools (System Settings), 69
Using
Document Server, 58
User Management, 20

186
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 187 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

V
Ventilation holes, 22

W
Warm Up Notice
(Copier/Document Server), 75
Weekly Timer, 84
Weekly Timer Code, 84
WEP (Encryption) Setting, 89
Where to Put Your Machine, 151
Wireless LAN port, 27
Wireless LAN Signal, 88

187
MartiniC1_GBzen2_FM.book Page 188 Friday, April 19, 2002 2:18 PM

MEMO

188 EE GB B064
 Printer Kit Type 1075
Operating Instructions
Printer Reference 1

1 Getting Started
2 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the
“General Settings Guide” before you use it.
Printer Kit Type 1075 Operating Instructions Printer Reference 1

UE USA G339-8607
Printed in Japan
Introduction
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®, PostScript®, Acrobat® and PageMaker® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor-
porated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Apple, Macintosh, Mac and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incor-
porated.
IPS-PRINT™ Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 2000, Oak Technology, Inc., All Rights Re-
served.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product name of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product name of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product name of Windows® NT are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0

Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Note to users in the United States of America

Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-
ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equip-
ment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turn-
ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution (in case of IEEE1284 environment) :

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host computer
(and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits.

Caution (in case of 100BaseTX environment):

Network interface cable with ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression.

Declaration of Conformity
Product Name: Printer Controller
Model Number: Printer Kit Type 1075, Printer/Scanner Kit Type 1075
Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation
Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
Telephone number: 973-882-2000
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note to users in Canada

Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Copyright © 2002
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine .....................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2

1. Getting Started
Features of This Machine...................................................................................... 3
Printer Drivers for This Machine ..........................................................................4
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ................................................. 6
Guide to This Machine........................................................................................... 8
Control Panel ............................................................................................................. 8
Display Panel ............................................................................................................. 9
Connecting the Machine .....................................................................................12
Requirements........................................................................................................... 12
Connecting the Machine to the Host Using the Parallel Cable ................................ 12
Connecting the Machine to the Host Using the USB Cable .....................................13
Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray......................................................................14
Setting the Paper Size on the Display Panel ...........................................................16

2. Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Installation Method ..............................................................................................21
Quick Install.......................................................................................................... 24
Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver...........................................27
Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver .................................................27
Setting Up Options ...................................................................................................29
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver...........................................................31
Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver.................................31
Windows 2000/XP - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver..................................33
Windows NT 4.0 - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver.....................................35
Mac OS - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and Utilities...............................39
Mac OS X - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver............................................... 42
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................43
Windows 98SE/Me - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB................................... 43
Windows 2000/XP - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB....................................44
Macintosh - Creating a Desktop Printer Icon ...........................................................45
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394....................................................46
Printing with SCSI Print............................................................................................46
Printing with IP over 1394 ........................................................................................ 48
Installing the SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin..............................................51
Installing the Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 ............................................ 52
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5 or 7.0 ............................................... 53
INDEX......................................................................................................... 54

i
ii
Manuals for This Machine
The following manuals describe the operational procedures and maintenance of
this machine.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of this machine, all users should read
and follow the instructions carefully.

❖ General Settings Guide

Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions
of the machine. It also introduces the options that allow you to use additional
functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the ma-
chine easier to use.

❖ Copy Reference
Describes the procedures and functions for using the machine as a copier.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 1 (this manual)

Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a printer.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 2

Describes procedures and provides information about using the machine as
a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Op-
erating Instructions”.

❖ Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions

Describes procedures and provides information about setting up and using
the machine as a printer in a network environment. We recommend you read
this manual first. It is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Oper-
ating Instructions” .

❖ PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement

Describes menus and features you can set using the PostScript 3 printer driv-
er. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating
Instructions”.
Note
❒ Printing with the PostScript 3 printer driver is available when the Post-
Script 3 board option is installed on your machine.

❖ UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the machine as a printer in
a UNIX environment. For UNIX printing information, please visit our web
site or consult your authorized dealer.

❖ Scanner Reference
Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a scanner.
Note
❒ Scanner function is available when the Printer/Scanner option is installed
on your machine.
1
 How to Read This Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.

R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-
eration.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.

2
 1. Getting Started

Features of This Machine

This machine is designed especially for office workgroups, both for shared us-
age within a network environment, and for one-to-one usage connected directly
to a computer.

❖ Standard compatibility with Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP and

Windows NT 4.0
As the printer drivers for the above operating systems are included, it is pos-
sible to print to maximum capacity by using the special features of this ma-
chine.

❖ Network Connectivity
This machine can be used as a network printer.
It can print from any environment as it supports at the same time NetWare
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX), Windows 95/98/Me (TCP/IP, NetBEUI), Windows 2000
(TCP/IP, NetBEUI), Windows XP (TCP/IP), Windows NT 4.0 (TCP/IP, Net-
BEUI), UNIX (TCP/IP), and Macintosh (AppleTalk).
If you register the user code by using the client, you can keep track of printing
jobs done under each code.

❖ Use the Network Utilities included at your own convenience.

When you use “SmartNetMonitor for Client” and “SmartNetMonitor for Ad-
min” network utilities, you can parallel print, allowing you to scatter large
amounts of print sets across multiple printers; or alternative print, which al-
lows you to use another printer when you can not access the network printer
you are trying to use. Also, while at your workstation, the machine will notify
you when the print job is completed.

❖ Complete Paper Handling Option

With the optional finisher installed, you can collate, staple and punch. Also
with the optional mailbox tray installed, you can print and separate output
destinations.

❖ Using the Document Server

The document server stores files sent from the computer on the hard disk of
the machine. Later, the printer settings can be configured and the files print-
ed. Even when this machine is used as a network printer, passwords can be
assigned to each file, providing a high level of security. Also, you can com-
bine and print files scanned by this machine.

3
 Getting Started

Printer Drivers for This Machine

Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The
following drivers are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
1 Utilities” that comes with the printer option or printer/scanner option of this
machine.
Printer Language PCL 6 PCL 5e RPCS™ PostScript 3
Operating system
Windows 95 *1 √ √ √ √ *11
Windows 98 *2 √ √ √ √ *11
Windows Me *3 √ √ √ √ *11
Windows 2000 *4 √ √ √ √ *12
Windows XP *5 √ √ √ √ *12
Windows NT 4.0 *6 √ *9 √ *9 √ *9 √ *10 *11

Mac OS *7 √ *11
Mac OS X *8 √ *13
*1 Microsoft Windows 95 operating system
*2
Microsoft Windows 98 operating system
*3
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
*4
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
*5 Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
*6
Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT
Workstation operating system version 4.0 in a computer using x86 processors.
*7 Versions 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS (Mac OS X Classic mode is supported.)
*8
Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
*9
Requires Service Pack 4 or later.
*10
Requires Service Pack 6 or later.
*11
The Adobe PostScript 3 printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
*12
The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled
“Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
*13 The Adobe PostScript Printer Description (PPD) installer is included on the CD-
ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.

❖ PCL printer drivers

Two kinds of PCL printer drivers: PCL 6 and PCL 5e, are included on the CD-
ROM that comes with this machine. These drivers allow the computer to com-
municate with the machine via a printer language. We recommend PCL 6 as
your first choice.
Note
❒ Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In
this case, you can install PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
⇒ p.27 “Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver”
4
 Printer Drivers for This Machine

❖ RPCS™ printer driver

The RPCS™ printer drivers are included on the CD-ROM that comes with
this machine. This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with
the machine via a printer language. The preset type user interface is provided
in addition to the conventional one.
⇒ p.27 “Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver” 1
❖ Adobe PostScript 3 Printer Drivers and PPD files
The Adobe PostScript 3 printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the
CD-ROM that comes with this machine. This printer driver allows the com-
puter to communicate with the printer via a printer language. The PPD files
allow the printer driver to enable the printer specific functions.
⇒ p.31 “Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver”

5
 Getting Started

Software and Utilities Included on the CD-

ROM
1 There are three CD-ROMs that come with the printer option or printer/scanner
option of this machine. These are labeled differently according to the option.
Note
❒ The Printer Kit Type 1075 package contains the following CD-ROMs:
• Printer Drivers and Utilities
• Document Management Utility
• Operating Instructions
❒ The Printer/Scanner Kit Type 1075 package contains the following CD-
ROMs:
• Printer Drivers and Utilities
• Scanner Driver and Document Management Utilities
• Operating Instructions
The CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities” is mainly used for machine
printer functions. In this manual, “CD-ROM” refers to the “Printer Drivers and
Utilities” CD-ROM unless specified otherwise.

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Admin

This utility is for the system administrator to manage printers on the network.
Reference
See SmartNetMonitor for Admin online Help for more information about
using the SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Client

This utility is for users to manage their own print status on the network.
Reference
See SmartNetMonitor for Client online Help for more information about
using the SmartNetMonitor for Client.

❖ Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000

This utility helps you to install new screen fonts, or organize and manage
fonts already installed on the system.

❖ 1394 Utility
This utility is for the IEEE 1394 Interface Board. For more information, see the
Readme file or the manual that comes with the IEEE 1394 Interface Board op-
tion.

6
 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM

❖ USB Printing Support

This utility is for the USB2.0 Interface Board. Install this utility to use the USB
connection on computers running Windows 98SE/Me. For information about
installing, see p.43 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”.

❖ Acrobat Reader 1
This utility allows you to read PDF (Portable Document Format).
Note
❒ Documentation about using the machine is included on the CD-ROM in
PDF format. See Acrobat Reader online Help for more information about
using Acrobat Reader.

❖ Printer Utility for Mac

This utility allows users to download and manage a variety of fonts as well as
to manage their printers. For more information about this utility, see the Post-
Script 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement which is provided
as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating Instructions”.
Important
❒ Software and utilities must be uninstalled before installing newer versions of
Windows. Reinstall software and utilities after upgrading Windows.

7
 Getting Started

Guide to This Machine

1 Control Panel

ZGXS301N

1. Shows errors and machine status. 3. {Job List}} key

m: Data In indicator Shows the job list. See “Job List”, General
The Data In indicator shows the status of Settings Guide.
data reception from a computer. 4. Display panel
• This indicator blinks when data is be- Shows operation status, error messages,
ing received. and function menus. ⇒ p.9 “Display Pan-
• This indicator goes on when there is el”
data remaining to be printed.
L: Service call indicator
5. {Energy Saver}} key
Press to switch to and from the Energy
x: Misfeed indicator
Saver mode. See “ENERGY STAR Pro-
M: Cover indicator gram”, General Settings Guide .
d: Staple indicator
D: Toner indicator Note
❒ This key is ineffective during system
2. {User Tools/Counter}} key setting (User Tools) operations.
• User Tools
Press to change the default settings 6. Main power indicator
and conditions to meet your require- This indicator goes on when the main
ments. power switch is turned on.
• Counter
Important
Press to display or print the total num-
ber of copies made. ❒ Do not turn off the main power
• Inquiry while the On indicator is blinking.
Press to check where to contact to Doing so may damage the hard
have the machine repaired or to order disk.
toner.
7. On indicator
This indicator goes on when the opera-
tion switch is turned on.

8
 Guide to This Machine

8. Operation switch 12. Function keys

Press this switch to turn the power on Press the appropriate key to choose any
(the On indicator goes on). To turn the of the following functions:
power off, press this switch again (the On • Copy
indicator goes off).
• Document Server 1
9. {Clear/Stop}} key • Printer
• Clear • Scanner
Deletes one character or digit.
• Stop
13. Function status indicator
Interrupts the current print job in These show the status of the above func-
progress. tions:
10. {#}} key • Yellow: the function is selected.
Press to enter a value. • Green: the function is active.
• Red: the function has been interrupt-
11. Number keys ed.
Use to enter the desired number of copies
and data for selected modes.

Display Panel
The display panel shows the status of the machine, error messages and function
menus.
Important
❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30 N *1 (about 3 kgf *2 ) or more
to the display panel. Otherwise, the display can get damaged.
*1
N = Newton
*2
kgf = Kilogram force (1kgf 9.8N)
Note
❒ The function items displayed serve as selector keys. You can select or specify
an item by lightly pressing on it.
❒ When you select or specify an item on the display panel, it becomes highlight-
ed.
❒ Keys dimmed (ex. OK ) cannot be used.

9
 Getting Started

Displays and Key Operations

Note
❒ The screen displayed when the power is turned on is the copier screen which
1 is the factory set default. This initial setting can be changed. See “User Tools
(System Settings)”, General Settings Guide.
❒ The following illustrations are examples for the machine with the options in-
stalled. See “External Options”, General Settings Guide.

❖ Initial print display

1. Operational status or messages

2. The current settings as well as the
functions which can be selected are
displayed.
Note
❒ The item which is currently selected
or specified is highlighted.

Common Key Operation

The following keys can be used in all screens.

❖ Key explanations
[OK] Acknowledges a selected function or entered values, and then re-
turns to the previous screen.
[Cancel] Deletes a selected function or entered values, and then returns to
the previous screen.
UPrev.] [T
[U TNext] Moves to the previous page or the next page when all the func-
tions cannot be displayed on one page.
[OK] [Yes] Closes message screens.
[Clear] Clears entered values and does not change the screen.
[Exit] Returns to the previous screen.

10
 Guide to This Machine

Online
When the machine is online, it can receive data from the computer.

1. [Online] key 2. [Job Reset] key

Press this key to switch the machine on- Press this key to cancel the current print
line. The preceding illustration shows the job.
online status.

Offline
When the machine is offline, it cannot receive data from the computer.

1. [Offline] key
Press this key to switch the machine of-
fline. The preceding illustration shows
the offline status.

Note
❒ If the machine cannot be switched to offline status, change the system setting
of [Signal Control] to “Printer priority”. For details about the setting, see “User
Tools (System Settings)”, General Settings Guide.
❒ When “Job acceptance priority” is set for the system setting of [Signal Control],
the machine accepts print jobs from computers even when the offline status
is indicated. For details about the setting, see “User Tools (System Settings)”,
General Settings Guide.

11
 Getting Started

Connecting the Machine

This section gives instructions for connecting the machine and computer using
the parallel port and the optional USB port.
1
Reference
For Ethernet and IEEE 1394 interface connections, see “Connecting the Ma-
chine (Network Connections)”, General Settings Guide.

Requirements
Before using this machine, make sure all environmental and electrical require-
ments met. Connect the machine to the host computer using the parallel port,
network interface unit, or both.
Make sure all cables, connectors, and electrical outlets necessary to attach the
machine to the host computer or network are present.

Connecting the Machine to the Host Using the Parallel Cable

Connect the machine to the host computer using the parallel port. This machine
does not come with a parallel cable to connect the machine to the host computer.
The machine's parallel interface is a standard bidirectional interface. It requires
a standard IEEE 1284 compliant 36-pin parallel cable and a parallel port on the
host computer. Make sure to purchase the appropriate cable for the machine and
your computer.
Note
❒ Do not use a parallel cable that is longer than 3 meters (10 feet).
❒ Rating voltage of the interface connector: Max. DC 5V
Follow the procedures below to connect the machine to the host computer using
a parallel cable.
Important
❒ Before connecting the machine and a computer using an interface cable, make
sure that the machine is not operating, and then turn off the main power
switches of the machine and computer.
❒ Be sure to use the designated interface cable. Other cables may cause radio in-
terference.

A Turn off the main power switch.

Important
❒ Before turning off the main power switch, see “Turning Off the Power”,
General Settings Guide.

12
 Connecting the Machine

B Plug the 36-pin end of the parallel cable into the parallel port at the right
side of the back cover of the machine.

ZGWH050E

C Squeeze the wire clips on each side of the connector together until they
snap into place. The clips hold the cable securely in place.

D Plug the other end of the parallel cable into the computer's parallel port.

Connecting the Machine to the Host Using the USB Cable

You can connect the machine to the host computer using a USB interface cable
when the optional USB2.0 Interface Board is installed in the machine.
This machine does not come with a USB interface cable. Make sure to purchase
the appropriate cable for the machine and your computer.
Follow the procedures below to connect the machine to the host computer using
a USB interface cable.

A Connect the USB2.0 interface cable to the USB2.0 port at the right side of
the back cover of the machine.

ZGUH493E

B Connect the other end to the USB port on the host computer.
Note
❒ The optional USB2.0 Interface Board is supported by Windows 98SE/Me,
Windows 2000/XP, Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS X Classic mode.
• For Windows 98SE/Me:
Make sure to install “USB Printing Support”. When USB2.0 is used with
Windows 98SE/Me, only a speed equal to that of USB1.1 is possible.
13
• Macintosh supports only the standard USB port.
 Getting Started

Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray

This section gives instructions for setting paper on the bypass tray. Use the by-
pass tray to print onto OHP transparencies, labels, thick paper, letterheads and
1 envelopes that cannot be loaded in the paper tray.
Reference
For setting paper into the regular paper tray, see the General Settings Guide.
Note
❒ Paper within the following dimensions can be set in the bypass tray:
• Vertical: 100.0 - 305.0 mm (3.93 in. - 12.00 in.)
• Horizontal: 139.7 - 600.0 mm (5.50 in. - 23.62 in.)
❒ Be sure to set the paper with the side you want to print facing up in L orien-
tation in the bypass tray.
❒ OHP transparencies, thick paper, labels, or envelopes fed from the bypass
tray are delivered face up onto the output tray.
Limitation
❒ The following functions are disabled when printing from the bypass tray:
• Duplex Printing
• Auto Tray Select
• Auto Tray Switching
• Staple (when the optional unit is installed)
• Punch (when the optional unit is installed)
Important
❒ When printing using the printer function, original images are always rotated
by 180 degrees (the orientation of images to be printed is opposite to that of
the copier function). When printing onto paper with specific orientation re-
quirements, such as envelopes and letterheads, make sure to rotate the paper
feed direction to 180 degrees.
❒ Make sure to set the paper size using the printer driver when printing data
from the computer. The paper size set using the printer driver has priority
over the one set using the display panel.

14
 Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray

A Open the bypass tray.

ZGUH030E

B Adjust the paper guides to the paper size.

Important
❒ If the paper guides are not flush against the paper, skewed images or paper
misfeeds might occur.

C Gently insert the paper face up in the bypass tray until the beeper sounds.

2 1
ZGWH071E

1. Extender
2. Paper guides
Note
❒ Be sure to set paper in L orientation as shown in the illustration above.
❒ The beeper will not sound if it is turned off. Gently insert the paper until it
stops.
❒ Do not stack paper over the limit mark, otherwise a skewed image or paper
misfeeds might occur.
❒ Open out the extender to support paper sizes larger than A4 L , 81/2"×11" L .
❒ Fan the paper to get air between the sheets to avoid a multi-sheet feed.
❒ When setting an OHP transparency, make sure that its front and back sides
are properly positioned.
❒ Select the paper type when printing on OHP transparencies or thick paper
(over 105g/m2). For details, see p.18 “Setting thick paper or OHP transpar-
encies”.
15
 Getting Started

D Select the paper size.

Note
❒ You can set paper size using the printer driver. The following procedures
1 are not necessary when setting paper size using the printer driver.
❒ The paper size set using the printer driver has priority over that set using
the display panel.
❒ When the printer driver is not used, make settings using the display panel.
Reference
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver's Help.
For setting custom sizes, see p.17 “Setting custom size paper”.
.

Setting the Paper Size on the Display Panel

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}
} key on the control panel.

ZGXS030N

B Press [Printer Features].

C Press the [Paper Input] tab.

D Press [Bypass Paper Size].

16
 Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray

E Select the paper size.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to scroll through the list.
❒ When printing onto thick paper or OHP transparencies, select the paper
type. For details, see p.18 “Setting thick paper or OHP transparencies”.

F Press [OK].
G Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
Setting custom size paper

Note
❒ Custom sizes can also be set using the printer driver. The following proce-
dures are not necessary when setting custom sizes using the printer driver.
❒ Custom size settings set using the printer driver have priority over those in
the display panel on the machine.
❒ When the printer driver is not used, make settings using the display panel.
Reference
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver's Help.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key on the control panel.

B Press [Printer Features].
C Press the [Paper Input] tab.
D Press [Bypass Paper Size].
E Press [Custom Size].

17
 Getting Started

F Enter the vertical size of the paper with the number keys, and then press [#].

G Enter the horizontal size of the paper with the number keys, and then press
[#].

H Press [OK].
The paper sizes you entered are displayed.

I Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

Setting thick paper or OHP transparencies

Note
❒ Paper settings can also be set using the printer driver. The following proce-
dures are not necessary when setting paper sizes using the printer driver.
❒ Paper size settings set using the printer driver have priority over those using
the display panel on the machine.
❒ When the printer driver is not used, make settings using the display panel.
Reference
For printer driver settings, see the printer driver's Help.

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key on the control panel.

B Press [System Settings].

C Press the [Tray Paper Settings] tab.

D Press [TTNext] to scroll the list.
E Press [Paper Type : Bypass tray].

18
 Setting Paper on the Bypass Tray

F Select [OHP] or [Thick Paper.]

G Press [OK].
The paper type you selected is displayed.

H Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. 1

Note
❒ The settings made will remain valid until they are reset again. After print-
ing on OHP transparencies or thick paper, make sure to reset the settings
for the next person.

19
 Getting Started

20
 2. Installing the Printer Driver
and Software
This manual assumes that you are familiar with general Windows procedures
and practices. If you are not, see the documentation that comes with Windows
for details.

Installation Method
❖ Installing using Auto Run
Inserting the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive starts the installer automati-
cally. The installer helps you install the following printer drivers and soft-
ware easily.
The following table shows the printer drivers and software that can be in-
stalled using Auto Run.
Auto Run *1
Quick Install Add Printer and
Utility Wizard
Network connection Parallel connection
with TCP/IP
PCL 6 printer driver ❍ ❍ ❍
PCL 5e printer driver ❍
RPCS™ printer driver ❍ ❍ ❍
PostScript 3 printer
❍
driver
Agfa Monotype Font
❍
Manager 2000
SmartNetMonitor for
❍
Admin
SmartNetMonitor for
❍ ❍
Client
*1
Available operating systems are as follows: Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0. Auto Run is unavailable with Macintosh.
Reference
When the machine is connected to the computer using the IEEE 1394 inter-
face or the USB2.0 interface, install the printer drivers separately.
⇒ p.43 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”
⇒ p.46 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394”

21
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

❖ Installing manually
The following printer drivers and software cannot be installed using Auto
Run.
For Macintosh
• PostScript 3 Printer Driver for Macintosh
⇒ p.39 “Mac OS - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and Utilities”
• PostScript Printer Descriptions Files (PPD)
2 The PPD files for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2, and Mac OS X are different.
⇒ p.39 “Mac OS - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and Utilities”
⇒ p.42 “Mac OS X - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver”
• Adobe Type Manager (ATM)
⇒ p.41 “Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM)”
• Screen Fonts
⇒ p.41 “Installing screen fonts”
• Printer Utility for Mac
For installing the software, see the PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating
Instructions Supplement.
For Windows
• 1394 Utility
For installing the utility, see the Readme file or the manual that comes with
the IEEE 1394 Interface Board option.
• USB Printing Support
For installing this utility, see p.43 “Installing the Printer Driver Using
USB”
Important
❒ Before starting the installation, close all documents and applications.
❒ After installing a printer driver, you must restart the computer.
Note
❒ If “plug and play” is started, click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware Found], [Device
Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, and then insert the
CD-ROM. The [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hard-
ware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the system version of the Win-
dows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP.

22
 Installation Method

- User Codes
User codes are eight digit codes that allow you to keep track of printing done un-
der each code. To use this feature, the network administrator should assign user
codes and inform users of them before they install the printer driver.
Use the following methods to enter a user code for registration:
• For the PCL 6/5e or PostScript 3 printer drivers, enter the user code on the 2
[Statistics] tab in the Printer Properties dialog box.
• For the RPCS™ printer driver, click the [Printer Configuration] button on the
[Print Settings] tab in the Printer Properties dialog box. A window opens. Click
the [User Code] button in the opened window. A dialog box appears. Enter the
user code in the dialog box.
Note
❒ When using the RPCS™ printer driver on Windows 95/98/Me, the user
code cannot be changed once entered. To change an entered user code, un-
install the printer driver, reinstall it, and then enter a new user code.
Reference
For more information about user codes, see “User Codes”, General Settings
Guide.

- Additional Drivers (Alternate Drivers)

If you want to share the machine on a Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0 plat-
form, install the printer drivers of other versions of Windows as additional driv-
ers, so that users running different versions of Windows can download them
automatically when they connect.
Note
❒ When using the “additional driver” function in the PostScript 3 printer driver
with the Windows NT 4.0, Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6 or later is required.
For the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ printer drivers with Windows NT 4.0, Service
Pack 4 or later is required.
For more information about installing the printer driver as an additional driver,
see p.27 “Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver”, p.33 “Windows
2000/XP - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver”, p.35 “Windows NT 4.0 - In-
stalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver”

23
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Quick Install
Auto Run will start the installer automatically when you load the CD-ROM into
the CD-ROM drive. By selecting Quick Install, you can easily install the PCL 6
printer driver and the RPCS™ printer driver. The SmartNetMonitor for Client
can also be installed provided the machine and the computer are connected via
the network.
2 The following conditions are required:
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0
For Ethernet connections:
• The machine must be connected to the network using an Ethernet cable.
• TCP/IP protocol must be configured.
• The IP address must be assigned to both machine and computer.
For parallel connections:
• The machine must be connected to the computer using a parallel cable.
• Bidirectional transmission must be enabled.
Limitation
❒ If your operating system is Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, installing
a printer driver using Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When
you install a printer driver using Auto Run, log on using an account that has
Administrators permission.
❒ When the machine is connected to the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface
or the USB2.0 interface, Quick Install cannot be used. See p.43 “Installing the
Printer Driver Using USB”, p.46 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE
1394”.
Important
❒ If your system is Windows NT 4.0, we recommend that you upgrade the Win-
dows NT 4.0 operating system to Service Pack 4 or later before installing the
PCL 6/5e or RPCS™ printer drivers. Contact your Windows retailer for more
information about the latest version available.
Note
❒ If you want to cancel Auto Run, hold down the {SHIFT}} key (when your op-
erating system is Windows 2000/XP, hold down the left {SHIFT} } key) while
inserting the CD-ROM. Keep the {SHIFT} } key held down until the computer
has finished accessing the CD-ROM.

A Close all applications that are running.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.

24
 Quick Install

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.
2
D Click [Quick Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.

E After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to
agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next].

F Click a model name of the machine you are using when the [Select Printer]
dialog box appears.
Note
❒ For a network connection with TCP/IP, select the machine whose IP ad-
dress is displayed in [Connect To].
❒ For parallel connection, select the machine whose printer port is displayed
in [Connect To].

G Click [Install].
H Follow the instructions on the screen.
Note
❒ During installation in Windows 2000, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog
box may appear. In this case, click [Yes] to continue the installation.
❒ During installation in Windows XP, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box
may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installa-
tion.
A message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. To complete
the installation, restart your computer.
Important
❒ If the machine is installed with the certain options, you should set the op-
tions using the printer driver. See p.29 “Setting Up Options”

25
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Note
❒ When you want to change the printer name, follow the procedure below.
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0
Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The Printer window appears. Right-click the machine icon, and then se-
lect [Rename].
• Windows XP Professional
2 Click [Start] on the taskbar, and then [Printers and Faxes]. The Printers
and Faxes window appears. Right-click the machine icon, and then se-
lect [Rename].
• Windows XP Home Edition
Click [Start] on the taskbar, and then [Control Panel]. Click [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes]. The Printers and Faxes
window appears. Right-click the machine icon, and then select [Re-
name].

26
 Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver

Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer

Driver
This section describes basic instructions for installing the PCL 6/5e printer driv-
er and RPCS™ printer driver without using Quick Install. Also, procedures are
described for setting up options installed on the machine using the printer driv-
er. Follow the procedures below as appropriate. 2
Reference
See p.24 “Quick Install” for installing the PCL 6 printer driver or RPCS™
printer driver using Quick Install.

Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver

Limitation
❒ If your system is Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, installing a printer
driver using Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When you install
a printer driver using Auto Run, log on using an account that has Adminis-
trators permission.
Important
❒ When updating to the latest version of the printer driver, you should unin-
stall any earlier versions. See “Uninstalling the Printer Driver”, Printer Refer-
ence 2.
❒ If your system is Windows NT 4.0, we recommend that you upgrade the Win-
dows NT 4.0 operating system to Service Pack 4 or later before installing the
printer drivers. Contact your Windows retailer for more information about
the latest version available.
Note
❒ If you want to share the machine on a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0
platform, use the [Sharing] tab in the Printer Properties to specify the addition-
al driver (alternate driver). For details, see the documentation that comes
with Windows 2000/XP, or Windows NT 4.0.
❒ When prompted for the additional driver (alternate driver) location, select the
following folders on the CD-ROM:
• Windows 95/98/Me
PCL 6: \DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\
PCL 5e: \DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\
RPCS™: \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\
• Windows 2000/XP
PCL 6: \DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1\
PCL 5e: \DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1\
RPCS™: \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1\

27
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

• Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6: \DRIVERS\PCL6\NT4\(Language)\DISK1\
PCL 5e: \DRIVERS\PCL5E\NT4\(Language)\DISK1\
RPCS™: \DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1\

A Close all applications that are running.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2 Auto Run will start the installer.

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.

D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].

The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.

E After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to
agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next].

F Select the printer drivers you want to install when the [Select Program] dia-
log box appears, and then click [Next].

G Select the model of the machine you are using.

To change the printer name, change it in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name']
box.

H Double-click the machine name to display the printer settings.

Note
❒ The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver:] and [Port:] vary depending on
the operating system being used, the model of machine selected, and the
port being used.
❒ Confirm that [LPT1:] is selected for [Port:].
❒ Check [Default Printer] if you want to set the machine as the default printer.
❒ Check [Shared] if you want to share the machine. See the Network Printing
Guide for information about setting up and using the machine in a network
environment.

I Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.

J Follow the instructions on the screen.

28
 Installing the PCL 6/5e and RPCS™ Printer Driver

Note
❒ During installation in Windows 2000, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog
box may appear. In this case, click [Yes] to continue the installation.
❒ During installation in Windows XP, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box
may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installa-
tion.

Setting Up Options
2
If the machine is installed with certain options, you should set the options using
the printer driver.
Limitation
❒ In Windows 2000/XP, changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers
permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have
Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on us-
ing an account that has Manage Printers permission.
❒ In Windows NT 4.0, changing the setting of the printer requires Full Control
permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Opera-
tors, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When
you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.
When setting up options, you should access the Printer Properties dialog box
from Windows. You cannot set up options by accessing the Printer Properties di-
alog box from an application.

PCL 6/5e Printer Driver

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Note
❒ In Windows XP Professional, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from
[Start] on the taskbar.
❒ In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window by
clicking [Start] on the taskbar. Then click [Control Panel], [Printers and Other
Hardware] and then [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the machine you want to use.

C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties window appears.

D Click the [Accessories] tab.

E Select the options you have installed from the [Options] group.
F Click [OK] .
29
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

RPCS™ Printer Driver

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Note
❒ In Windows XP Professional, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from
2 [Start] on the taskbar.
❒ In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window by
clicking [Start] on the taskbar. Then click [Control Panel], [Printers and Other
Hardware] and then [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the machine you want to use.

C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties window appears.
Note
❒ If the following message appears “Configure installed accessories in the
[Accessories] tab of [Printer Configuration], which will open next.”, click [OK]
and then go to step E.

D Click the [Change Accessories] tab.

Note
❒ In Windows 95/98/Me, click [Printer Configuration] on the [Print Settings] tab,
and then [Change Accessories].

E Select the options you have installed from the [Select printer options] group.
F Click [OK] .

30
 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

This section describes basic instructions for installing the PostScript 3 printer
driver. Actual procedures may differ depending on the operating system. Fol-
low the procedures below as appropriate.
Reference
To use the PostScript 3 printer driver, the optional PostScript 3 Board must be 2
installed on the machine. See the PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating In-
structions Supplement for details.
Important
❒ When updating to the latest version of the printer driver, you should unin-
stall any earlier versions. See “Uninstalling the Printer Driver”, Printer Refer-
ence 2.

Windows 95/98/Me - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Installing the printer driver

A Close all applications that are running.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed.
❒ The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following
languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues and Suomi.

D Select [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].

[Add Printer Wizard] starts.

E Click [Next].
F Check [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer appears.

31
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

G Select the model of the machine you are using, and then click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the name of the machine if you wish to, and then click [Next].
Note
❒ Check [Yes] if you want to set the machine as the default printer.
2 J Follow the instructions on the screen.
Setting up options
If the machine is installed with certain options, you should set the options using
the printer driver.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

B Click the icon of the machine you want to use.

C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties window appears.

D Click the [Accessories] tab.

E Select the options you have installed from the [Options] group.
F Click [OK].

32
 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Windows 2000/XP - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Installing the printer driver

Limitation
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. When you in-
stall a printer driver, log on using an account that has Administrators permis- 2
sion.
Note
❒ If you want to share the machine on a Windows 2000/XP platform, use the
[Sharing] tab in the Printer Properties to specify the additional driver (alter-
nate driver). For details, see the documentation that comes with Windows
2000/XP.
❒ When prompted for the additional driver (alternate driver) location, select the
following folders on the CD-ROM:
• Windows 95/98/Me: \DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\
• Windows NT 4.0: \DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1\

A Close all applications that are running.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed.
❒ The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following
languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues and Suomi.

D Select [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].

[Add Printer Wizard] starts.

E Click [Next].

33
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

F Check [Local Printer], and then click [Next].

Note
❒ In Windows XP, check [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click
[Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer port appears.

2 G Select the check box of the port you want to use, and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer appears.

H Select the model of the machine you are using, and then click [Next].
I Change the name of the machine if you wish to, and then click [Next].
Note
❒ Check [Yes] if you want to set the machine as the default printer.

J Select whether or not you want to share the machine, and then click [Next].
Reference
See the Network Printing Guide for information about setting up and using
the machine in a network environment.

K Follow the instructions on the screen.

Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear.
In this case, click [Yes] to continue the installation.
❒ During installation in Windows XP, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box
may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installa-
tion.

Setting up options
If the machine is installed with certain options, you should set the options using
the printer driver.
Limitation
❒ Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permis-
sion by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has
Manage Printers permission.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

34
 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Note
❒ In Windows XP Professional, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from
[Start] on the taskbar.
❒ In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window by
clicking [Start] on the taskbar. Then click [Control Panel], [Printers and Other
Hardware] and then [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the machine you want to use. 2

C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties window appears.

D Click the [Device Settings] tab.

E Select the options you have installed from the [Installable Options] group.
F Click [OK].

Windows NT 4.0 - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Installing the printer driver

Limitation
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. When you in-
stall a printer driver, log on using an account that has Administrators permis-
sion.
Important
❒ The CD-ROM containing the Windows NT Server operating system version
4.0, or the Windows NT Workstation operating system is required for install-
ing the printer driver.
❒ We recommend that you upgrade the Windows NT 4.0 operating system to
Service Pack 6 or later before installing the printer driver. Contact your Win-
dows retailer for more information about the latest version available.
Note
❒ If you want to share the machine on Windows NT 4.0, use the [Sharing] tab in
the Printer Properties to specify the additional driver (alternate driver). For
details, see the documentation that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
❒ When prompted for the additional driver (alternate driver) location, select the
following folders on the CD-ROM:
• Windows 95/98/Me: \DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\

A Close all applications that are running.

35
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

Auto Run will start the installer.

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
2 gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.
Note
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed.
❒ The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following
languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues and Suomi.

D Select [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].

[Add Printer Wizard] starts.

E After confirming that the [My Computer] option is selected, click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer port appears.

F Select the check box of the port you want to use, and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer appears.

G Select the model of the machine you are using, and then click [Next].
H Change the name of the machine if you wish to, and then click [Next].
Note
❒ Check [Yes] if you want to set the machine as the default printer.

I Select whether or not you want to share the machine, and then click [Next].
Reference
See the Network Printing Guide for information about setting up and using
the machine in a network environment.

J Follow the instructions on the screen.

36
 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Setting up options
If the machine is installed with certain options, you should set the options using
the printer driver.
Limitation
❒ Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permis-
sion by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has 2
Manage Printers permission.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

B Click the icon of the machine you want to use.

C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The Printer Properties window appears.

D Click the [Device Settings] tab.

E Select the options you have installed from the [Installable Options] group.
F Click [OK].

- Bidirectional transmission
When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information such as paper size and
feed direction is automatically sent to the computer. You can also check the ma-
chine's status from your computer.
• Bidirectional transmissions are supported by Windows 95/98/Me, Windows
2000/XP and Windows NT 4.0.
• When bidirectional transmission is running, the machine status and informa-
tion can be viewed by opening the printer driver screen.
To support bidirectional transmission, the following conditions are required:

❖ When connecting with a parallel cable

• The computer must support bidirectional transmission.
• The machine must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• The machine parallel port and computer parallel port are connected using
a parallel interface cable that supports bidirectional transmission.
Note
❒ In Windows 95/98/Me, [Enable bi-directional support for this printer] must be
selected in [Spool Settings] on the [Details] tab in RPCS™ printer driver.
❒ In Windows 2000/XP, or Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support]
must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the
[Port] tab in RPCS™ printer driver. 37
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

❖ When connecting with the network

• The machine must be set to bidirectional transmission.
• SmartNetMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed.
One of the following conditions must also be satisfied besides the two re-
quirements mentioned above.
• The port for SmartNetMonitor for Client and the TCP/IP protocol must be
used.
2 • The standard TCP/IP port is used without changing the port name (Win-
dows 2000/XP).
• The IP address specified in the Microsoft TCP/IP Print is used (Windows
NT 4.0).
• The IP address is included in port name when using IPP protocol.
Note
❒ In Windows 95/98/Me, [Enable bi-directional support for this printer] must be
selected in [Spool Settings] on the [Details] tab in RPCS™ printer driver.
❒ In Windows 2000/XP, or Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support]
must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the
[Port] tab in RPCS™ printer driver.

❖ When connecting with IEEE 1394

• The port on the optional IEEE 1394 Interface Board and the IEEE 1394 port
on the computer are connected using an interface cable (Windows Me,
Windows 2000/XP).
Note
❒ [SCSI print (SBP-2)] must be set to “Active” and [Bidirectional SCSI print] must
be set to “On” in [IEEE 1394] on the [Interface Settings] tab in the machine's
System Settings.
❒ In Windows Me, [Enable bi-directional support for this printer] must be selected
in [Spool Settings] on the [Details] tab in RPCS™ printer driver.
❒ In Windows 2000/XP, or Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support]
must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the
[Port] tab in RPCS™ printer driver.

❖ When connecting with USB2.0

• The port on the optional USB2.0 Interface Board and the USB port on the
computer are connected using a USB interface cable (Windows 98SE/Me,
Windows 2000/XP).
Note
❒ In Windows 98SE/Me, [Enable bi-directional support for this printer] must be
selected in [Spool Settings] on the [Details] tab in RPCS™ printer driver.
❒ In Windows 2000/XP, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Port] tab in RPCS™
printer driver.
38
 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Mac OS - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and Utilities

It is necessary to install a printer driver and a PPD file to print from a Macintosh.
Follow the procedures to install a printer driver and a PPD file on Macintosh
running OS 8.6 or later versions up to 9.2, and Mac OS X Classic mode.
Note
❒ For installing the PostScript 3 printer driver in Mac OS X, see p.42 “Mac OS X 2
- Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver”

A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
D Double-click the [PS Driver] folder.
E Double-click the folder of the language you use.
F Open [Disk 1] and double-click the installer icon.
The PostScript 3 printer driver installer window appears.

G Follow the instructions on the screen.

H Double-click [Extensions] in [System Folder].
I Double-click [Printer Descriptions].
J Double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop.
K Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder in the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
L Double-click [Disk 1] in the folder of the language you use.
M Drag the PPD file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions] in [System Folder].
N Drag the plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions] in [System Folder].
O Restart the Macintosh.

39
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Setting Up the PPD File

Preparation
Make sure that the machine is connected to an AppleTalk network before per-
forming the following procedure.

A On the Apple menu, select [Chooser].

2 B Click the [Adobe PS] icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the machine you want
to use.

D Click [Setup].
E Click the printer description file you want to use, and then click [Select].
The PPD file is set up, and the [Adobe PS] icon appears at the left of the ma-
chine name in the list. Next, follow the procedure on p.40 “Setting up op-
tions” to make the option settings, or close the [Chooser] dialog box.

Setting up options

A On the Apple menu, select [Chooser].

B Click the [Adobe PS] icon.
C In the [Select the PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the machine you
want to use, and then click [Setup].

D Click [Configure].
A list of options appears.

E Select the options you want to set up and select the appropriate setting for
it.
Note
❒ If the option you want to set up is not displayed, the PPD file might not be
set up correctly. Check the name of the PPD file shown in the dialog box.

F Click [OK].
The list of options closes.

G Click [OK].
The [Chooser] dialog box appears.

H Close the [Chooser] dialog box.

40
 Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM)

Note
❒ Close all applications that are running before installation. Install after restart-
ing.

A Start the Macintosh.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 2
C Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [ATM] folder.
F Double-click the [ATM 4.6.2 installer] icon.
G Follow the instructions on screen.
H Restart the Macintosh.
Note
❒ Make sure to restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only
after restarting.

I Select [Control Panel] from the Apple menu, and then select [ATM].
J Open the ATM control panel.
Note
❒ For more information about installation, see the User's Guide in the ATM
folder.

Installing screen fonts

A Start the Macintosh.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
C Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [Fonts] folder.
F Copy the fonts you want to install into the [System] folder.
A confirmation dialog box appears.

G Click [OK].
The fonts are installed.
41
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

H Restart the Macintosh.

Reference
For information about installing the Printer Utility for Mac, see the Post-
Script 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement.

Mac OS X - Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

2
It is necessary to install a PPD file to print from a Macintosh. Follow the proce-
dures to install a PPD file on Macintosh running Mac OS X.
Preparation
You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For more informa-
tion, consult your administrator.

A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

B Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
D Double-click the [PPD Installer] folder, and then double-click the installer
icon.

E Follow the instructions on screen.

Setting Up the PPD File

A Run Print Center.

B Click [Add Printer].
Note
❒ Select [AppleTalk] in the first pop-up menu.
❒ If the zone has been set, select the zone in the second pop-up menu.

C Select the PPD file for the model you are using from the “Printer Model:”
pop-up menu.

D Click [Add].
Setting Up Options

Limitation
❒ You cannot make printer option settings in Mac OS X. Do not make settings
for options that have not been installed.

42
 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

This section gives basic instructions for installing printer drivers using USB. The
printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM that comes with this machine.
Preparation
Be sure that all other applications are closed and the computer is not printing
before installation. 2
Windows 98SE/Me - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
The procedure below uses Windows 98 as an example. The procedure for Win-
dows Me may be slightly different.
When the USB interface cable is used for the first time, the “plug and play” func-
tion starts and [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hardware
Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the system used.
If printer drivers are already installed, the “plug and play” is displayed, and the
printer with its port directed to the USB interface cable is added to the “Printers”
folder.

A Click [Next].
B Select [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next].

C Check [Specify a location:], and then click [Browse...].

The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.

D Insert the CD-ROM provided into the CD-ROM drive.

Note
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ If you want to disable Auto Run, press {Shift}
} when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer completes transmis-
sion to the drive.

E Select the drive where the printer driver is located according to the operat-
ing system used, and then click [Next].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the folder will be “D:\DRIVERS\USB-
PRINT\WIN98ME”.

F Confirm the printer driver location, and then click [Next].

“USB Printing Support” will be installed.

G Click [Finish].

43
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

H Follow the “plug and play” on the screen to install the printer drivers.
Note
❒ Each printer driver is stored in the following folders on the CD-ROM:
• PCL 6: \DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e: \DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS™: \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
2 • PostScript 3: \DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1
When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “USB00n”
appears on the [Printers] folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.)

Windows 2000/XP - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

Limitation
❒ Installing a printer driver requires the Administrators permission. When you
install a printer driver, log on using an account that has the Administrators
permission.
When the USB interface cable is used for the first time, the [Found New Hardware
Wizard] dialog box appears, and Windows 2000/XP's “USB Printing Support”
will be installed automatically.
If the printer driver is already installed, the “plug and play” is displayed, and
the printer with its port directed to the USB interface cable is added to the [Print-
ers] *1 folder.
Note
❒ In Windows XP, even if the printer driver has already been installed, [Found
New Hardware Wizard] may start when connecting the printer and the computer
with the USB interface cable for the first time. In this case, install the printer
driver by following the procedure below.

A Install the printer driver by referring to the instructions for installing using
a Parallel/Ethernet connection.
Note
❒ Each printer driver is stored in the following folders on the CD-ROM:
• PCL 6: \DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e: \DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS™: \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3: \DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “USB00n”
appears on the [Printers] *1 folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.)
*1
In Windows XP, the folder is [Printers and Faxes].

44
 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB

Macintosh - Creating a Desktop Printer Icon

When you connect the machine and your computer using a USB2.0 connection,
create a Desktop Printer icon.
Limitation
❒ In Mac OS X Native mode, printing is disabled when connected to the ma-
chine using a USB connection. 2
A Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility] in the [AdobePS Components] folder.
B Select [AdobePS] in [With:] and [Printer (USB)] in [Create Desktop], and then
click [OK].

C Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection].

D Select the model of the machine you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and
then click [OK].

E Click [Auto Setup] in [PostScriptTM Printer Description (PPD) File].

F Click [Create].
G Enter the machine name, and then click [Save].
The printer icon appears on the desktop.

H Exit the Desktop Printer Utility.

45
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

This section gives basic instructions for installing printer drivers using IEEE
1394. SCSI Print and IP over 1394 are available when printing via IEEE 1394. The
printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM that comes with this machine.
Preparation
2 Be sure that all other applications are closed and the computer is not printing
before installation.
Important
❒ Do not connect new IEEE 1394 devices to the machine or turn on the machine
while installing the printer driver.
❒ Before uninstalling the printer driver, be sure to disconnect the IEEE 1394 in-
terface cable from the computer.
❒ The optional IEEE 1394 Interface Board is not supported by Windows 95/98
or Windows NT 4.0. If the “plug and play” function starts, click [Cancel] in the
[New Hardware Found] or [Device Driver Wizard] dialog box.

Printing with SCSI Print

Printing using a SCSI print device with the optional 1394 Interface Unit is possi-
ble under Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
Preparation
“SCSI print” must be enabled and “IP over 1394” must be disabled from the
machine's display panel. For more information about how to make machine
settings, see “Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 (Option)”, General Settings Guide.
Note
❒ If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the computer is started or
the cable is connected with Windows 2000 or Windows XP when the print
function that uses SCSI print is not installed, disable the device. See p.49 “Dis-
abling the Device” for more information.

Installing the Printer Driver

Note
❒ If you send data from your computer when data is being received from an-
other client computer, your data will be printed after completing the print job
from the other client computer.
❒ When the machine is connected to the computer properly via the 1394 Inter-
face, the appearance of the icon in the printer window changes.

46
 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

Windows 2000

Important
❒ In Windows 2000, the optional IEEE 1394 Interface Board can only be used
with Service Pack 1 or later. If the Service Pack is not installed, the connectable
number of devices in a IEEE 1394 bus is only one, and the client cannot access
the IEEE 1394 Interface Board without using an account that has Administra-
tors permission. 2
A Connect the machine and the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
The [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears.

B Click [Next].
The message [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown] appears.

C Select [Optional search locations:], and then click [Next].

D When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, check the [Optional search lo-
cations.] checkbox and the [Specify a location] checkbox, and then click [Next].

E Hold down the left {SHIFT}} key on the keyboard and insert the CD-ROM
into the CD-ROM drive.
Keep the left {SHIFT}
} key held down until the computer has finished access-
ing the CD-ROM.
If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].

F Click [Browse].
G Select the printer driver you want to install. Each printer driver is stored in
the following folders:
• PCL 6: \DRIVERS\PCL6\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PCL 5e: \DRIVERS\PCL5E\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• RPCS™: \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1
• PostScript 3: \DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1

H Click [Open].
I Click [OK].
A printer model selection dialog box appears.

J Follow the instructions on the screen.

Note
❒ During installation, the [Digital Signature Not Found] dialog box may appear.
In this case, click [Yes] to continue the installation.
❒ When the installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to
“1394_00n” appears on the [Printers] folder. (“n” is the number of printers
connected.)
47
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Windows XP

A Connect the machine and the computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
The [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears.

B Confirm that [This wizard helps you install software for: (printer name)] is dis-
played, and select [Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)], and then
2 click [Next].
The message [Please choose your search and installation option.] appears.

C Check the [Search for the best driver in these locations.] check box, and the [In-
clude this location in the search:] check box.

D Install the printer driver following the same procedures as steps E-J in
Windows 2000.
Note
❒ During installation in Windows XP, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box
may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installa-
tion.
❒ When the installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to
“1394_00n” appears on the [Printers and Faxes] folder. (“n” is the number of
printers connected.)

Printing with IP over 1394

You can print by setting the IP address for this machine and the computer on
which Windows Me (SmartNetMonitor for Client) or Windows XP (SmartNet-
Monitor for Client or Standard TCP/IP Port) is installed.
Preparation
“IP over 1394” must be enabled on the machine's display panel and an IP ad-
dress for the IEEE 1394 must be configured. For more information about how
to make machine settings, see“Interface Settings/IEEE 1394 (Option)”, Gener-
al Settings Guide.
Limitation
❒ When using the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface in a network, the Ethernet
interface cannot be used in the same network.
Note
❒ Make sure that the IEEE 1394 interface and Ethernet interface subnet mask
range does not overlap.
❒ In Windows Me, if [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the com-
puter is started or the cable is connected, disable the device. See p.49 “Dis-
abling the Device” for more information.

48
 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394

- Disabling the Device

❖ If [Add New Hardware Wizard] appears every time you restart the computer with an
operating system that does not support SCSI print, or plug in/take out the cable, dis-
able the device by the following procedures.
• Windows Me
A In the [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [Windows has
2
found the following new Hardware: IEEE SBP-2 Device] is displayed, and se-
lect [Recommended search for a better driver [Recommended]], and then click
[Next].
B When the [Windows was unable to locate the software for this device.] mes-
sage appears, click [Finish].

❖ If you do not want to install the printer when [Found New Hardware Wizard] starts
with an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by the follow-
ing procedures.
• Windows XP
A In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [This wizard
helps you install software for: Unknown] is displayed, and select [Install from
a list on specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next].
B When the [Please choose your search and installation option.] message ap-
pears, remove all the selections from [Search for the best driver in these lo-
cations.], and then click [Next].
C When the [The wizard could not find the software on your computer for..] mes-
sage appears, click [OK].
D When the [Cannot Install this Hardware] message appears, select the [Don't
prompt again to install the software] check box, and then click [Finish].
• Windows 2000
A In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Next].
B When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: Unknown]
message appears, select [Search for a suitable driver for my device [recom-
mended]], and then click [Next].
C When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, remove all the selections
from [Optional search locations.], and then click [Next].
D When the [Driver Files Search Results] message appears, select the [Disable
the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to
complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish].

49
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

❖ If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time you restart the computer with
an operating system that does not support IP over 1394 or plug in/take out the cable,
disable the device with the following procedure.
• Windows 2000
A In [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Next].
B When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device:] message
and “IP over 1394” appear, select [Search for a suitable driver for my device
2 [recommended]], and then click [Next].
C When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, remove all the selections
from [Optional search locations.], and then click [Next].
D When the [Driver Files Search Results] message appears, select the [Disable
the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the Control Panel can be able to
complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish].

50
 Installing the SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin

Installing the SmartNetMonitor for

Client/Admin
Limitation
❒ If your operating system is Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, installing
software using Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When you in-
stall a printer driver using Auto Run, log on using an account that has Admin- 2
istrators permission.

A Close all applications that are running.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.

D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin].

The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.

E After reading through all of the contents, click [I accept the agreement] to
agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next].

F Select the program you want to install when the [Select Program] dialog box
appears.

G Follow the instructions on the screen.

51
 Installing the Printer Driver and Software

Installing the Agfa Monotype Font

Manager 2000
Limitation
❒ If your operating system is Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, installing
software using Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When you in-
2 stall a printer driver using Auto Run, log on using an account that has Admin-
istrators permission.

A Close all applications that are running.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
Auto Run will start the installer.

C Select a language for the interface language, and then click [OK].
The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish),
Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French),
Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwe-
gian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska
(Swedish)
The default interface language is English.

D Select [Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000].

E Follow the instructions on the screen.

52
 Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5 or 7.0

Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5

or 7.0
If you use the machine under Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP or Win-
dows NT 4.0 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy the PPD file to the Page-
Maker folder.
The PPD file is the file with extension “.ppd” in the folder “DRIV- 2
ERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\” on the CD-ROM.
The “WIN9X_ME” folder, inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use
the folder at this level that is appropriate for the operating system you are cur-
rently using.
The third folder, “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language
name.
Copy the file with extension “.ppd” to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.
• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.

53
 INDEX
J
1394 Utility, 6, 22 Job List key, 8
Job Reset key, 11
A
M
Acrobat Reader, 7
Additional driver, 23 Macintosh
Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000, 6, 21 ATM, installing, 41
installing, 52 Screen fonts, installing, 41
Alternate Driver, 23 Mac OS
ATM, 22 PostScript 3, installing, 39
Macintosh, installing, 41 Mac OS X
Auto Run, 21 PostScript 3, installing, 42
Main power indicator, 8
B
N
Bidirectional transmission, 37
Bypass tray, 14 Number keys, 9

C O

CD-ROM, 6 Offline, 11
Clear/Stop key, 9 Offline key, 11
Connection OHP Transparencies
Ethernet board connection, 12 printing, bypass tray, 18
IEEE 1394 interface board connection, On indicator, 8
12 Online, 11
Parallel interface connection, 12 Online key, 11
USB connection, 12 Operation switch, 9
Control Panel, 8
Custom size paper, 17 P
printing, bypass tray, 14
PageMaker, 53
PCL, 4
D
PCL 5e
mData In indicator, 8 Windows 2000/XP, installing, 27
Display panel, 8, 9 Windows 95/98/Me, installing, 27
Windows NT 4.0, installing, 27
E PCL 6
Windows 2000/XP, installing, 27
Energy Saver key, 8 Windows 95/98/Me, installing, 27
Windows NT 4.0, installing, 27
F PostScript 3, 5
Mac OS, installing, 39
Function keys, 9
Mac OS X, installing, 42
Function status indicator, 9
Windows 2000/XP, installing, 33
I Windows 95/98/Me, installing, 31
Windows NT 4.0, installing, 35
IEEE 1394 connection
installing, printer driver, 46
IP over 1394, 46

54
Printer driver T
Installation method, 21
installing, IEEE 1394 connection, 46 Thick Paper
installing, USB connection, 43 printing, bypass tray, 18
PCL 5e, 4
PCL 6, 4 U
PostScript 3, 4 USB connection
Quick Install, 24 printer driver, installing, 43
RPCS, 4 USB Printing Support, 7, 22
Printer Utility for Mac, 7, 22 User Code, 23
User Tools/Counter, 8
Q
Quick Install, 24 W
Windows 2000/XP
R PCL 5e, installing, 27
RPCS, 5 PCL 6, installing, 27
Windows 2000/XP, installing, 27 PostScript 3, installing, 33
Windows 95/98/Me, installing, 27 RPCS, installing, 27
Windows NT 4.0, installing, 27 Windows 95/98/Me
PCL 5e, installing, 27
S PCL 6, installing, 27
PostScript 3, installing, 31
Screen fonts, 22 RPCS, installing, 27
Macintosh, installing, 41 Windows NT 4.0
SCSI print, 46 PCL 5e, installing, 27
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 6, 21, 51 PCL 6, installing, 27
SmartNetMonitor for Client, 6, 21, 51 PostScript 3, installing, 35
Software RPCS, installing, 27
Quick Install, 24

55
 MEMO

56
MEMO

57
 MEMO

58 UE USA G339
 Printer Kit Type 1075
Operating Instructions
Printer Reference 2

1 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver
3 Printing with the Control Panel
4 Troubleshooting
5 Using the Control Panel
6 Appendix

For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the
“General Settings Guide” before you use it.
Introduction
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe®, PostScript®, Acrobat® and PageMaker® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor-
porated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
AppleTalk, Apple, Macintosh, Mac and TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incor-
porated.
IPS-PRINT™ Printer Language Emulation Copyright©2000, Oak Technology, Inc., All Rights Re-
served.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft®Windows® 95
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft®Windows® 98
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft®Windows®Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product name of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft®Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft®Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product name of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product name of Windows® NT are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation operating system Version 4.0

Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine .....................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2

1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

Accessing the Printer Properties ......................................................................... 3
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties .............................................. 3
Windows 2000/XP - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................... 4
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................................................. 6
Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing ............................................................................ 8
Cancelling a Print Job ........................................................................................... 9
Windows - Cancelling a Print Job .............................................................................. 9
Macintosh - Cancelling a Print Job........................................................................... 10

2. Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Uninstalling the Printer Driver ............................................................................13
Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the Printer Driver.................................................13
Windows 2000/XP - Uninstalling the Printer Driver.................................................. 13
Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the Printer Driver..................................................... 14
Mac OS - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver ..............................................15
Mac OS X - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver ..........................................15

3. Printing with the Control Panel

Sample Print .........................................................................................................17
Printing a Sample Print File......................................................................................17
Deleting a Sample Print File..................................................................................... 20
Checking the Error Log ............................................................................................21
Locked Print .........................................................................................................22
Printing a Locked Print File ......................................................................................22
Deleting Locked Print Files ......................................................................................24
Checking the Error Log ............................................................................................25
Accessing the Document Server........................................................................27

4. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel ................................................29
Machine Status and Configuration ........................................................................... 31
Machine Does Not Print.......................................................................................36
Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................39

i
 5. Using the Control Panel
Adjusting Printer Features.................................................................................. 43
Printer Features Menu .............................................................................................43
Accessing the Printer Features ................................................................................45
Exiting from the Printer Features .............................................................................45
Printer Features Parameters...............................................................................46
Paper Input...............................................................................................................46
List/Test Print ........................................................................................................... 46
Maintenance............................................................................................................. 47
System .....................................................................................................................48
Host Interface........................................................................................................... 52
PCL Menu ................................................................................................................ 53
Machine Condition............................................................................................... 55
Printing the Configuration Page ............................................................................... 55

6. Appendix
Finisher ................................................................................................................. 57
Staple ....................................................................................................................58
Staple Position .........................................................................................................58
Punch ....................................................................................................................61
Punch Position .........................................................................................................61
Collate ................................................................................................................... 63
Covers................................................................................................................... 65
Chaptering ............................................................................................................67
Slip Sheets............................................................................................................69
Tab Sheet..............................................................................................................71
Spool Printing ...................................................................................................... 72
Specifications.......................................................................................................74
Options.....................................................................................................................75

INDEX......................................................................................................... 78

ii
Manuals for This Machine
The following manuals describe the operational procedures and maintenance of
this machine.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of this machine, all users should read
and follow the instructions carefully.

❖ General Settings Guide

Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions
of the machine. It also introduces the options that allow you to use additional
functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the ma-
chine easier to use.

❖ Copy Reference
Describes the procedures and functions for using the machine as a copier.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 1

Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a printer.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 2 (this manual)

Describes procedures and provides information about using the machine as
a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Op-
erating Instructions”.

❖ Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions

Describes procedures and provides information about setting up and using
the machine as a printer in a network environment. We recommend you read
this manual first. It is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Oper-
ating Instructions” .

❖ PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement

Describes menus and features you can set using the PostScript 3 printer driv-
er. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating
Instructions”.
Note
❒ Printing with the PostScript 3 printer driver is available when the Post-
Script 3 board option is installed on your machine.

❖ UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the machine as a printer in
a UNIX environment. For UNIX printing information, please visit our web
site or consult your authorized dealer.

❖ Scanner Reference
Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a scanner.
Note
❒ Scanner function is available when the Printer/Scanner option is installed
on your machine.
1
 How to Read This Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.

R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-
eration.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.

2
 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver
and Cancelling a Print Job
Accessing the Printer Properties

Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties

Changing the default machine settings

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

B Click the icon of the machine whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.

D Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the
application's own settings are applied.

Making machine settings from an application

To make the machine settings for a specific application, open the [Printer Proper-
ties] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to
make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/Me.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the [Printer Properties] dialog
box may vary depending on the application. For more information, see the
documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.

A On the [File] menu, click [Print].

The [Print] dialog box appears.

B Select the machine you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click
[Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.

C Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

D Click [OK] to start printing.
3
 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

Windows 2000/XP - Accessing the Printer Properties

Changing the default machine settings - Printer Properties

1
Limitation
❒ Changing the setting of the machine requires Manage Printers permission.
Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Print-
ers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account
that has Manage Printers permission.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Note
❒ In Windows XP Professional, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from
[Start] on the taskbar.
❒ In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window by
clicking [Control Panel] from [Start] on the taskbar. Then click [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the machine whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.

D Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ Normally you do not have to change the “Form to Tray Assignment” set-
tings on the [Device Settings] tab in the PostScript 3 printer driver.
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

4
 Accessing the Printer Properties

Changing the default machine settings - Printing Preferences Properties

Limitation
❒ Changing the setting of the machine requires Manage Printers permission.
Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Print- 1
ers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account
that has Manage Printers permission.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Note
❒ In Windows XP Professional, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from
[Start] on the taskbar.
❒ In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window by
clicking [Control Panel] from [Start] on the taskbar. Then click [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the machine whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences Properties] dialog box appears.

D Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Making machine settings from an application

To make the machine settings for a specific application, open the [Print] dialog
box from that application. The following example describes how to make set-
tings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000/XP.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the [Print] dialog box may
vary depending on the application. For more information, see the documen-
tation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.

A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].

The [Print] dialog box appears.

B Select the machine you want to use in the [Select Printer] box.
Click the tab that you want to change its print settings.
Note
❒ In Windows XP, click [Preference] to open the Printing Preference window. 5
 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

C Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

D Click [OK] to start printing.
Note
1 ❒ In Windows XP, click [Print] to start printing.

Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties

Changing the default machine settings - Printer Properties

Limitation
❒ Changing the setting of the machine requires Full Control access permission.
Members of Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power
Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up op-
tions, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

B Click the icon of the machine whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.

D Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ Normally you do not have to change the “Form to Tray Assignment” set-
tings on the [Device Settings] tab in the PostScript 3 printer driver.
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

6
 Accessing the Printer Properties

Changing the default machine settings - Default Document Properties

Limitation
❒ Changing the setting of the machine requires Full Control access permission.
Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Pow- 1
er Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up
options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

B Click the icon of the machine whose default settings you want to change.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The [Default Document Properties] dialog box appears.

D Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.

Making machine settings from an application

To make the machine settings for a specific application, open the [Printer Proper-
ties] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to
make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0.
Note
❒ The actual procedures you should follow to open the [Printer Properties] dialog
box may vary depending on the application. For more information, see the
documentation that comes with the application you are using.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.

A On the [File] menu, click [Print].

The [Print] dialog box appears.

B Select the machine you want to use in the [Name] list box, and then click
[Properties].
The [Printer Properties] dialog box appears.

C Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].

D Click [OK] to start printing.

7
 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

Macintosh - Setting Up for Printing

Making paper settings from an application

1
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup].
The [AdobePS Page Setup] dialog box appears.

C Make sure that the machine you want to use is shown in the [Format for:]
box.
Note
❒ In Mac OS X, this is called [Paper Size].
❒ If the machine is not shown in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu
to display a list of available machines.
Reference
The actual appearance of the Page Setup depends on the application you
are using. See the documentation that comes with the Macintosh for more
information.

D From the [Paper:] box, select the paper size.

E Make any settings you require, and then click [OK].
Setting up for printing from an application

A Open the file you want to print.

B On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Printer Features] dialog box appears.

C Make sure that the machine is selected in the [Printer:] box.

D Make any settings you require, and then click [Print] to start printing.

8
 Cancelling a Print Job

Cancelling a Print Job

Windows - Cancelling a Print Job 1

A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows taskbar.
A window appears, showing all the print jobs that are currently queuing to
be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.

B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
Note
❒ In Windows XP, click [cancel] on the [Document] menu.
❒ In Windows 95/98/Me, 2000 or NT 4.0, you can also open the print job
queue window by double-clicking the machine icon in the [Printers] win-
dow, and in Windows XP, the [Printers and Faxes] window.

D Press the {Printer}} key on the machine's control panel.

E Press [Job Reset] on the display panel.

F Press [Reset Current Job] or [Reset All Jobs].

• [Reset Current Job]: cancels the print job that is being processed by the ma-
chine
• [Reset All Jobs]: cancels all the jobs in the print queue
• [Resume Printing]: resumes printing jobs
A confirmation screen appears.

G Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.

Note
❒ Press [No] to return to the previous screen.

9
 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

Important
❒ When the machine is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not
to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
❒ When the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, a
1 print job sent from the computer may be also cancelled when cancelling
the print jobs by pressing [Reset All Jobs] and while “Waiting...” is dis-
played on the display panel. After the interval set in “I/O Timeout” in
“Printer Features” has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job
sent from a different client computer will not be cancelled in the above
case.
Note
❒ You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the machine. Because of this, printing may continue for a few pages af-
ter you press [Job Reset].
❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.

Macintosh - Cancelling a Print Job

A Double-click the printer icon on the desktop.
A window appears, showing all the print jobs that are currently queuing to
be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
Note
❒ In Mac OS X, start Print Center.

B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.

C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
D Press the {Printer}} key on the machine's control panel.
E Press [Job Reset] on the display panel.

10
 Cancelling a Print Job

F Press [Reset Current Job] or [Reset All Jobs].

1
• [Reset Current Job]: cancels the print job that is being processed by the ma-
chine
• [Reset All Jobs]: cancels all the jobs in the print queue
• [Resume Printing]: resumes printing jobs
A confirmation screen appears.

G Press [Yes] to cancel the print job.

Note
❒ Press [No] to return to the previous screen.
Important
❒ When the machine is being shared by multiple computers, be careful not
to accidentally cancel someone else's print job.
❒ When the machine is connected to the computer using a parallel cable, a
print job sent from the computer may be also cancelled when cancelling
the print jobs by pressing [Reset All Jobs] and while “Waiting...” is dis-
played on the display panel. After the interval set in “I/O Timeout” in
“Printer Features” has passed, the next print job can be sent. A print job
sent from a different client computer will not be cancelled in the above
case.
Note
❒ You cannot stop printing data that has already been processed internally
by the machine. Because of this, printing may continue for a few pages af-
ter you press [Job Reset].
❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time
to stop.

11
 Setting Up the Printer Driver and Cancelling a Print Job

12
2. Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

This section describes how to uninstall the printer drivers. Actual procedures
may vary depending on the operating system.
Follow the procedures below as appropriate.

Windows 95/98/Me - Uninstalling the Printer Driver

A Close all the applications that are currently running.
B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

C Click the icon of the machine you want to remove.

D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.

E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.

Windows 2000/XP - Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Limitation
❒ Uninstalling a printer driver requires Manage Printers permission. Members
of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permis-
sion by default. When you uninstall a printer driver, log on using an account
that has Manage Printers permission.

A Close all the applications that are currently running.

B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
Note
❒ In Windows XP Professional, access the [Printers and Faxes] window from
[Start] on the taskbar.
❒ In Windows XP Home Edition, access the [Printers and Faxes] window by
clicking [Control Panel] from [Start] on the taskbar. Then click [Printers and
Other Hardware] and then [Printers and Faxes].

C Click the icon of the machine you want to remove.

13
 Uninstalling the Printer Driver

D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].

A confirmation dialog box appears.

E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.

Note
❒ You can also uninstall the printer driver using the following procedure.
2 • Windows 2000
A In the [Printers] window, click [Server Properties] on the [File] menu to
display the [Print Server Properties] window.
B On the [Drivers] tab, click the driver you want to remove, and then
click [Remove].
C Click [Yes].
D Click [OK].
• Windows XP
A In the [Printers and Faxes] window, click [Server Properties] on the [File]
menu to display the [Print Server Properties] window.
B On the [Drivers] tab, click the driver you want to remove, and then
click [Remove].
C Click [Yes].
D Click [Close].

Windows NT 4.0 - Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Limitation
❒ Uninstalling a printer driver requires Full Control access permission. Mem-
bers of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Us-
ers groups have Full Control permission by default. When you uninstall a
printer driver, log on using an account that has Full Control permission.

A Close all applications that are currently running.

B Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.

C Click the icon of the machine you want to remove.

D On the [File] menu, click [Delete].
A confirmation dialog box appears.

E Click [Yes] to uninstall the printer driver.

14
 Uninstalling the Printer Driver

Mac OS - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver

A Drag the “AdobePS” file from the [Extensions] folder in [System Folder] to
[Trash].

B Drag the PPD file and plug-in file from the [Printer Descriptions] folder in the
[Extensions] folder in [System Folder] to [Trash].
2
Mac OS X - Uninstalling the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
A Run Print Center.
B Select the printer driver you want to uninstall in the Printer List window,
and then click [Delete].

15
 Uninstalling the Printer Driver

16
3. Printing with the Control Panel

Sample Print
Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print job. After you
have checked the result, the remaining sets can be printed or cancelled from the
machine's control panel. This can help in avoiding large amounts of misprints in
case of mistakes in the content or in the print settings.
Note
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated
by the printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application print
dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.
❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the User ID and the date and
time when the job was stored.
❒ The number of pages the machine can save depends on the contents of the
print image. For example, the machine can save up to 30 jobs or 2,000 pages
including locked print files depending on data volume.
❒ If the first set of the sample print files is not as you expected and you do not
want to print the remaining sets, delete the sample print file using the display
panel. If you print the remaining sets of the sample print file, the job in the
machine is deleted automatically.

Printing a Sample Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a sample print file with the PCL
6/5e printer driver. For information about how to print a sample print file with
the PostScript 3 printer driver, see the PostScript3 Board Type 1075 Operating In-
structions Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Limitation
❒ Applications, like PageMaker, which use their own drivers do not work with
this function.

A Configure the sample print in the properties of the printer driver.

Reference
For details on configuring the PCL 6/5e or RPCS™ printer driver, see the
corresponding Help files.

B Click [OK] in the application's print dialog box to start printing.

Note
❒ Make sure to set more than 2 copies.
The sample print job is sent to the machine and the first set is printed.
17
 Printing with the Control Panel

C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer
Screen.

3
ZGXH302E

D Press [View Sample Print jobs].

A list of the sample print files stored in the machine is displayed.

The following will also be displayed:

• User ID: The User ID set up by the printer driver.
• Date/Time : The date and time when the job was sent from the computer.
• Qty. : The number of remaining sets.

E Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to scroll through the list.
❒ Only one file can be selected at a time.

18
 Sample Print

F Press [Change Set Qty.] to change the number of sets to be printed.

If you do not want to change the set quantity, proceed to step H.

G Enter the new number of sets using the number keys and press [OK].
3

The screen returns to the file list screen.

Note
❒ You can enter up to 999 sets.
❒ Press [Clear] to correct any entry mistakes.
❒ If you want to cancel changing the set quantity, press [Cancel].

H Press [Print].
The print confirmation screen is displayed.

I Press [Yes].
The remaining sets are printed.
Note
❒ Press [No] to cancel printing.
❒ When printing is completed, the stored file will be deleted.
❒ If printing is stopped by pressing [Job Reset] after printing has started, the
file will be deleted.

19
 Printing with the Control Panel

Deleting a Sample Print File

If you are not satisfied with the sample printout, you can delete the sample print
file, revise it and print it again until the settings are fine.

A Press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer Screen.

ZGXH302E

B Press [View Sample Print jobs].

A list of the sample print files stored in the machine is displayed.

C Select the file you want to delete by pressing on it.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to scroll through the list.
❒ Only one file can be selected at a time.

D Press [Delete].
The delete confirmation screen will be displayed.

E Press [Yes] to delete the file.

After the file has been deleted the screen will return to the file list screen.
Note
❒ If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].

20
 Sample Print

Checking the Error Log

If a file could not be stored in the machine, you can check the error log on the
control panel.
Limitation
❒ The error log displays only the 20 most recent entries. If the power is turned
off, the log will be deleted.

A Press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer Screen.

B Press [View Sample Print jobs]. 3

C Press [Show Error Log].

A list of the error log is displayed.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [TTNext] to scroll through the error files.
❒ Press [Exit] after checking the log.
❒ For printing files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
in the machine have been printed or deleted.

21
 Printing with the Control Panel

Locked Print
Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents on
the machine over a shared network. Usually, it is possible to print data by using
the control panel once the data is stored in this machine. When using Locked
Print, it will not be possible to print unless a password is entered on the ma-
chine's control panel. Your confidential documents will be safe from viewing by
other people.
Note
3 ❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by
the printer driver. If a collate option is selected from the application print di-
alog box, more sets than intended may be printed.
❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the User ID and the date and
time when the job was stored.
❒ The number of pages the machine can save depends on the contents of the
print image. For example, the machine can save up to 30 jobs or 2,000 pages
including sample print files depending on data volume.
❒ After the locked print file is printed, the job in the machine is deleted auto-
matically.
❒ Turning off the main power switch of the machine deletes the locked print
file.

Printing a Locked Print File

The following procedure describes how to print a locked print file with the PCL
6/5e printer driver. For information about how to print a locked print file with
the PostScript 3 printer driver, see the PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating In-
structions Supplement included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM.
Limitation
❒ Applications, like PageMaker, which use their own drivers do not work with
this function.

A Configure the locked print in the properties of the printer driver.

Reference
For details on configuring the PCL 6/5e or RPCS™ printer driver, see the
corresponding Help files.

B Click [OK] in the application's print dialog box to start printing.

The locked print job is sent to the machine.

22
 Locked Print

C On the machine's control panel, press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer
Screen.

3
ZGXH302E

D Press [View Locked Print jobs].

A list of the locked print files stored in the machine is displayed.

The following will be also be displayed:

• User ID: The User ID set up by the printer driver.
• Date/Time: The date and time when the job was sent from the computer.

E Select the file you want to print by pressing on it.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to scroll through the list.
❒ Only one file can be selected at a time.

F Press [Print].
The password screen is displayed.

23
 Printing with the Control Panel

G Enter the password using the number keys and press [OK].
The print confirmation screen is displayed.
Note
❒ A confirmation screen will appear when the password has not been en-
tered correctly. Press [OK] to enter the password again.

H Press [Yes].
The locked file is printed.
Note
3 ❒ Press [No] to cancel printing.
❒ If printing is stopped by pressing [Job Reset] after printing has started, the
file will be deleted.

Deleting Locked Print Files

A Press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer Screen.

ZGXH302E

B Press [View Locked Print jobs].

A list of the locked files stored in the machine is displayed.

C Select the file you want to delete by pressing on it.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to scroll through the list.
❒ Only one file can be selected at a time.

24
 Locked Print

D Press [Delete].
The password screen is displayed.

E Enter the password using the number keys and press [OK].
The delete confirmation screen is displayed.
3
F Press [Yes].
After the file has been deleted, the screen returns to the file list screen.
Note
❒ If you do not want to delete the file, press [No].
❒ If you forget your password, set [Display Password with Stored File] to “On”
on the [Key Operator Tools] tab of the System Settings screen. With this set-
ting, the password screen is not displayed in the procedure above. For
more information about [Display Password with Stored File], see the General
Settings Guide.

Checking the Error Log

If a file could not be stored in this machine, you can check the error log on the
control panel.
Limitation
❒ The error log displays only the 20 most recent entries. If the power is turned
off, the log will be deleted.

A Press the {Printer}} key to display the Printer Screen.

B Select [View Locked Print jobs].

25
 Printing with the Control Panel

C Press [Show Error Log].

A list of error log is displayed.

Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [TTNext] to scroll the error files.
❒ Press [Exit] after checking the log.
❒ For printing files that appear in the error log, resend them after stored files
in the machine have been printed or deleted.

26
 Accessing the Document Server

Accessing the Document Server

The Document Server enables you to save documents in the machine's built-in
hard disk to edit and print as you want.
Reference
For more information about Document Server functions, see the General Set-
tings Guide.
For information about how to access to Document Server from a client, see the
printer driver's Help.
Note
3
❒ When you use the Document Server, the following can be selected using the
machine's control panel:
• Copies
• Collate
• Duplex
• Staple
• Punch
• Paper selection: Paper source tray, Paper type, Paper output tray.
• Functions related to the paper selection: Cover sheets, Slip sheets, Chapter-
ing.
❒ The above items are dimmed, so you cannot set them from the [Printer Proper-
ties] dialog box when the Document Server is selected.
❒ You must enter a User ID of up to eight alphanumeric characters.
❒ You had better enter “Password” and “File Name” to distinguish the job from
others.
❒ Up to 3,000 files can be saved on the Document Server. No new files can be
saved once 3,000 files are saved. Even if less than 3,000 files are saved, new
files cannot be saved when
• a file to be saved contains more than 2,000 pages,
• the total number of pages contained in files saved exceeds 10,000,
• the hard disk is full.
❒ The Document Server also saves files that scanned via Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF) or exposure glass. You should delete unnecessary saved files
once in a while so as not to exceed the capacity of the hard disk. For how to
delete saved files, see the General Settings Guide.
❒ When using the hard disk for functions other than Document Server func-
tions, you may be unable to save new files on the Document Server even if
there are less than 3,000 files saved.

27
 Printing with the Control Panel

28
 4. Troubleshooting

Error & Status Messages on the Display

Panel
❖ Status Messages
Messages/Second messages Status
Hex Dump Mode The machine receives data in hexadecimal numbers in the Hex
Dump mode. Turn off the machine after printing, and then
turn back on.
Offline The machine is offline. Set the machine online by pressing [On-
line] on the display panel to start printing.
Please Wait The machine is initializing the development unit. Wait for a
while.
Printing... The machine is printing. Wait for a while.
Ready The default ready message. The machine is ready for use. No
action is required.
Resetting Job... The machine is resetting the print job. Wait until “Ready” ap-
pears on the display panel.
Waiting... The machine is waiting for the next data to print. Wait for a
while.

29
 Troubleshooting

❖ Alert Messages
Messages/Second messages Description Solution
Hole punch receptacle is full. Hole punch receptacle is full. Empty the punch receptacle.
Open finisher cover and emp-
ty punch receptacle.
dStaple (centre) is almost There are few staples remain- Load more staples.
empty. ing in the stapler.
NV-RAM has a problem. An error has occurred in the Turn the main power switch
optional memory unit. off, and on. If the message ap-
pears again, call your sales or
service representative.
Parallel I/F board has a prob- An error has occurred in the Contact your sales or service
lem. parallel interface board. representative.
4 Paper in staple tray. Open fin- There is paper remaining in- Remove the paper remaining
isher cover and remove pa- side the finisher. inside the finisher.
per.
Selected paper tray is in use The specified paper tray is in Wait until the other function
for another function. Please use by another function such has finished using the speci-
wait. as the copier function. fied paper tray.
Shift tray has a problem. Call A malfunction occurs when Contact your sales or service
service representative. using the shift function. representative.
dStaple is almost empty. There are few staples remain- Load more staples.
ing.
Staple unit is in use for anoth- The staple unit is in use by an- Wait until the other function
er function. Please wait. other function such as the cop- has finished using the staple
ier function. unit.
USB has a problem. An error occurred in the USB Contact your sales or service
interface board. representative.

30
 Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel

Machine Status and Configuration

You can check the machine status and configuration using telnet or UNIX.

❖ telnet
Use the info or status command.

❖ UNIX
Use the lpr or lpstat command, or stat or info parameter of rsh, rcp, or ftp.
Reference
For more information, see “Remote Maintenance by Telnet (mshell)”, the
Network Printing Guide provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled
“Operating Instructions”.
4
machine status

Status Description
Ready Normal operation
Panel Off Mode Panel Off mode
Energy Saver Mode Energy Saver mode
Warming Up Warming up
Error: Parallel I/F Parallel interface board error
Error: NVRAM Contents of the memory unit are damaged.
Error: DIMM DIMM has a problem.
Error: HDD Hard disk drive has a problem.
Error: Ethernet Ethernet board has a problem.
Error: IEEE1394 IEEE 1394 board has a problem.
Error: IEEE802.11b Card IEEE802.11b card is not inserted when the ma-
chine is turned on or has been removed.
Error: IEEE802.11b Card or Board IEEE802.11b card or board has a problem.
Error: USB I/F USB interface board has a problem.
Low: Toner Toner is almost empty.
Replace Cleaning Web Clearing web is soon full.
Nearly Full: Waste Toner Waste toner is soon full.
In Use: Staple Unit Staple unit is in use.
In Use: Input Tray Paper tray is in use.
Malfunction: Tray X Paper cannot be fed from tray X. An error has
occurred in tray X. (X is the number of the
tray.)

31
 Troubleshooting

Status Description
Malfunction: LargeCapacity Tray Paper cannot be fed from the Large Capacity
Tray. An error occurred in the Large Capacity
Tray.
Malfunction: ExternalCharge Unit External charge unit is faulty.
Malfunction: Staple Unit Cannot staple. Staple unit is faulty.
Low: Staples Cannot staple. Staples in the staple unit are
few.
Punch Full Cannot punch. Punch container is full.
Paper in Finisher Finisher cannot be used. Paper in the finisher.
Key Counter not inserted Waiting for key counter insertion.
Key Card not inserted Waiting for key card insertion.
4 Prepaid Card not inserted Waiting for prepaid card insertion.
Coin or amount not inserted Waiting for coin insertion.
Key Card/Counter not inserted Waiting for key card or key counter insertion.
Card/Counter not inserted Waiting for prepaid card or key counter inser-
tion.
Coin/Key Counter not inserted Waiting for coin or key card insertion.
Empty: Staples Cannot staple. No staples.
Tray Error: Duplex Printing Cannot duplex print. A restricted tray has
been selected.
Empty: Toner No Toner
Full: Waste Toner Waste toner container is full.
No Paper No paper in the paper tray
Not Detected: Selected Tray Paper tray is not set correctly.
Mismatch: Paper Type Paper type set in paper tray is different from
selected paper type.
Mismatch: Paper Size Paper size set in paper tray is different from se-
lected paper size.
Mismatch: Paper Size and Type Paper size and type set in paper tray is differ-
ent from selected paper size and type.
Full: Standard Tray Copy tray is full.
Full: Mailbox Tray X Mailbox tray X is full. (X is the number of the
optional Mailbox tray.)
Full: Finisher Upper Tray Finisher upper tray is full. (option: Finishier
3000M, 3000B, Booklet Finisher)
Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1 Finisher shift tray 1 is full. (option: Booklet
Finisher)
Full: Finisher Shift Tray 2 Finisher shift tray 2 is full. (option: Booklet
Finisher)

32
 Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel

Status Description
Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1,2 Shift tray 1 and 2 are full with the Auto Tray
Output function.
Paper on Finisher Shift Tray 1,2 Paper on the finisher shift tray 1 or 2 without
the Auto Tray Select function.
Cover Open: Front Cover Front cover is open.
Cover Open: Finisher Finisher cover is open.
Cover Open: Mailbox Right cover on the mailbox is open.
Not Detected: B2 Lever B2 lever is not correctly set.
Paper Misfeed: Input Tray Paper misfeed in paper feed area
Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output Paper misfeed inside machine or in output
tray area
Paper Misfeed: Finisher Paper misfeed inside finisher
4
Paper Misfeed: Mailbox Paper misfeed inside mailbox
Paper Misfeed: Interposer Paper misfeed inside interposer.
Call Service Center An error has occurred.

machine configuration

Note
❒ “*” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting.
❒ Regarding *1–*5, see table below.
Item Description
Input Tray
No. ID number of the paper tray
Name Name of the paper tray*1
PaperSize Paper size loaded in the paper tray*2
Status Current status of the paper tray*3
Output Tray
No. ID number of the output tray
Name Name of the output tray*4
Status Current status of the output tray*5

❖ *1 Input Tray: Name

Name Description
Tray X Name of installed paper tray (X is the number
of tray.)
LCT Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Bypass Tray Bypass tray

33
 Troubleshooting

❖ *2 Input Tray: Paper Size

Paper Size Description
A3 (297 × 420) A3L
B4JIS (257 × 364) B4L
A4 (297 × 210) A4L
A4 (210 × 297) A4K
B5JIS (257 × 182) B5L
B5JIS (182 × 257) B5K
A5 (210 × 148) A5L
A5 (148 × 210) A5K
A6 (105 × 148) A6L
4 11 × 17 DLTK
81/2 × 14 LGL
8 /2 × 11
1
LTK
11 × 81/2 LTL
51/2 × 81/2 HLTK
8 /2 × 5 /2
1 1
HLTL
Custom Size Custom Size
10 /2 × 7 /4
1 1
ExecutiveK
71/4 × 101/2 ExecutiveL
81/4 × 13 FolioL
81/ 2 × 13 FoolscapL
8 × 13 8"×13"L
8K (267 × 390) 8KL
16K (195 × 267) 16KK
16K (267 × 195) 16KL

❖ *3 Input Tray: Status

Status Description
Normal 
Not Detected There is no paper tray
No Paper There is no paper in the paper tray

34
 Error & Status Messages on the Display Panel

❖ *4 Output Tray: Name

Name Description
Copy Tray Copy Tray
Finisher Upper Tray Finisher Upper Tray (option: Finisher 3000M,
3000B, Booklet Finisher)
Finisher Shift Tray Finisher Shift Tray (option: Finisher 3000M,
3000B )
Finisher Shift Tray 1 Finisher Shift Tray 1 (option: Booklet Finisher)
Finisher Shift Tray 2 Finisher Shift Tray 2 (option: Booklet Finisher)
Mailbox Tray X Mailbox Tray X (option), (x is the number of
the tray)

❖ *5 Output Tray: Status 4

Status Description
Normal ----
Paper In There is paper in the output tray
Full Output tray is full of paper
Error Other error

35
 Troubleshooting

Machine Does Not Print

Possible Cause Solutions
Is the power on? Confirm the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet and
the machine.
Turn on the main power switch.
Is the machine online? If not, press [Online] on the display panel.
Does the printer function If so, check the error message on the display panel and take the re-
status indicator stay red? quired action.
Is there a warning status or If so, check the error message or warning status on the display
error message on the dis- panel and take the required action.
play panel?
4 Can you print a configura- If you cannot print a configuration page, there maybe a machine
tion page? malfunction. Contact your sales or service representative.
See p.55 “Machine Condition” for printing a configuration page.
Is the interface cable con- Connect the interface cable securely. If it has a fastener, fasten it
nected securely to the ma- securely as well.
chine and the computer? See “Connecting the Machine”, Printer Reference 1.
Are you using the correct The type of interface cable you should use depends on the compu-
interface cable? ter. Be sure to use the correct one. If the cable is damaged or worn,
replace it.
See “Connecting the Machine”, Printer Reference 1.
Was the interface cable Connect the interface cable before turning on the machine.
connected after the ma-
chine was turned on?
Is the signal status satisfac- To check the signal status, press {User Tools/Counter} } on the control
tory when using wireless panel, and then [System Settings] on the display panel. On the [In-
LAN in Infrastructure terface Settings] tab, select [IEEE 802.11b] and then press [Wireless
mode ? LAN Signal]. If signal quality is bad, move the machine to a location
where signals pass or remove any objects that block signals.

Note
❒ You can check signal status only when using a wireless LAN
in Infrastructure mode.
When using Wireless Confirm on the machine's display panel that the SSID is correctly
LAN, is the SSID correctly set.
set? See “Interface Settings/IEEE 802.11b (Option)”, General Settings
Guide.
When using Wireless Confirm the access point settings when in Infrastructure mode.
LAN, is the access point Depending on the access point, clients access may be limited by
correctly set? the MAC address.
Also, confirm there are no problems in transmission between ac-
cess point and wired clients, and between access point and wire-
less clients.

36
 Machine Does Not Print

Possible Cause Solutions

When using Wireless Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the green LED is lit or blinks
LAN, is the LED on the during transmission.
Wireless LAN card lit or
blinking?
Is the Wireless LAN being In that case, turn the main power switch off and on. Also, chang-
used in Ad Hoc mode? ing some of the settings in [Network] on the [Interface Settings] tab in
[System Settings] on the display panel may solve the problem.
Did you change the option When using the RPCS™ printer driver on Windows 2000 and con-
settings on the machine? necting to the machine using the IEEE 1394 connection, an error
may occur if you change the option settings on the machine. In
this case, follow the procedure below.
A Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cables connected to the compu-
ter.
B Run the utility tool for the IEEE 1394 Interface Board, which is 4
stored in the following path on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer
Drivers and Utilities”.
\UTILITY\1394\

Reference
For more information about using the utility tool for IEEE
1394, see the README file in the same directory on the CD-
ROM.
C Restart the computer.
D Connect the computer to the machine using the IEEE 1394 in-
terface cables.

37
 Troubleshooting

Possible Cause Solutions

Is the Data In indicator If not, the data is not being sent to the machine.
blinking or lit after starting
the print job? ❖ When the machine is connected to the computer using
the interface cable
Confirm that the machine port settings are correct. For a paral-
lel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be set.
• Windows 95/98/Me
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that
the correct port is selected.
4 • Windows 2000
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that
the correct port is selected.
• Windows XP Professional
A Click [Start], and then click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D Check the [Point to the following port(s)] box to confirm
that the correct port is selected.
• Windows XP Home Edition
A Click [Start], [Control Panel], [Printers and Other Hardware],
and then [Printers and Faxes].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab.
D Check the [Point to the following port(s)] box to confirm
that the correct port is selected.
• Windows NT 4.0
A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Click the icon of the machine. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that
the correct port is selected.

❖ Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.

38
 Other Printing Problems

Other Printing Problems

Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
The print on the If “Toner Saver” is selected in the [Print Quality] tab on the printer driver tab,
entire page is fad- the entire page will be faded when printed.
ed. See the printer driver's Help.
The print smudg- The settings have not been set to thick paper when printing on thick paper.
es. • PCL 6/5e and PostScript 3
Select “Thick” for [Type] on the printer driver's [Paper] tab.
• RPCS™
Select “Thick” for [Paper Type] on the printer driver's [Print Settings] tab.
When printing If the printer driver is configured to use the graphics command, the graph-
graphic data, the
output and the
ics command from the machine is used to print. 4
If you want to print accurately, set the printer driver to print without using
screen are differ- the graphics command.
ent.
See the printer driver's Help.
Page layout is not Print areas differ depending on the machine used. Information that fits on
as expected. a single page on one machine may not fit on a single page of another ma-
chine.
Adjust the [Printable area] setting in the [Printer Configuration] dialog box on
the [Print Settings] tab in the RPCS™ printer driver.
See the printer driver's Help.
Duplex printing is • Duplex printing cannot be done with paper set in the bypass tray.
malfunctioning. When using duplex printing, make settings to use paper from a tray
other than the bypass tray.
• Duplex printing cannot be done with thick paper, OHP transparencies,
labels, or thin paper specified as the paper type. Specify another paper
type.
• Duplex printing cannot be done with a tray for which [1-Sided Copy] has
been specified as “Paper Type” on the System Settings menu. Change
the “Paper Type” setting for the tray to [2-Sided Copy] on the System Set-
tings menu. See the General Settings Guide.
When using Win- Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those
dows 95/98/Me, of the printer driver.
Windows 2000/XP, If a different paper size and orientation are set, select the same size and ori-
or Windows NT4.0, entation.
either combined
printing or booklet
print does not come
out as expected.
When using Win-
dows 95/98/Me,
Windows 2000/XP,
or Windows NT4.0,
Auto Reduce/En-
large print does not
come out as expected.

39
 Troubleshooting

Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions

A print instruc- User code management may have been set. Ask the administrator about
tion was issued valid user codes. To print, the user code must be entered from the printer
from the compu- driver.
ter, but printing
did not start.
The print job is not Even when the machine is offline, printing is performed when [Job Receive]
cancelled even has been set in “Signal Control” in the System Settings menu. Change the
when the machine system setting of “Signal Control” to “Printer priority”.
is switched to of- See “User Tools (System Settings)”, General Settings Guide.
fline status.
Photo images are Some applications lower print resolution.
coarse.
Fine dot pattern Make the following settings with the printer driver.
4 does not print. • Change the [Dithering] setting on the [Image Adjustments] tab in the
[Change User Settings] dialog box on the [Print Quality] tab in the RPCS™
printer driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver's Help.
Images are cut off, You may be using paper smaller than the size selected in the application.
or excess is print- Use the same size paper as that selected in the application. If you cannot
ed. load paper of the correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the im-
age, and then print.
See the printer driver's Help.
It takes too much Photographs and other data intensive pages take a long time for the ma-
time to complete chine to process, so simply wait when printing such data.
print job. Changing the following settings with the printer driver may help to speed
up printing.
• PCL 6/5e
Select the lowest value for [Resolution] on the [Print Quality] tab in the
printer driver's dialog box.
• PostScript 3
Select the lowest value for [Gradation] on the [Print Quality] tab in the
printer driver's dialog box.
Select “PostScript (optimize for speed)” for PostScript output format on
the [PostScript] tab in the printer driver's dialog box.
• RPCS™
Select the lowest value for [Resolution] on the [Image Adjustments] tab in
the [Change User Settings] dialog box on the [Print Quality] tab in the print-
er driver's dialog box.
Select “Speed” for [Print priority] on [Print Quality] tab in the printer driv-
er's dialog box.
See the printer driver's Help.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process. If the Data In
indicator is blinking, data is being processed. Just wait until printing
resumes.
If "Warming Up..." appears on the display panel, the machine is warming
up. Wait for a while.

40
 Other Printing Problems

Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions

It takes too much The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process. If the Data In
time to resume indicator is blinking, data is being processed. Just wait until printing
printing. resumes.
The machine was in Energy Saver mode. To resume from Energy Saver
mode, it has to warm up, and this takes time. To disable Energy Saver
mode, select “Off” for “Energy Saver 1” in the System Settings menu. See
the General Settings Guide.
Paper is not fed When you are using a Windows operating system, printer driver settings
from the selected override those set using the display panel. Set the desired input tray using
tray. the printer driver.
See the printer driver's Help.
Solid lines are Make the following settings with the printer driver.
printed as broken
lines.
• Change the [Dithering] setting under the [Image Adjustments] tab in the
[Change User Settings] dialog box, under the [Print Quality] tab in the
4
RPCS™ printer driver's dialog box.
See the printer driver's Help.
Optional compo- You have to configure the option setup in printer properties when bidirec-
nents connected to tional transmission is not enabled.
the machine are See the printer driver's Help.
not recognized
when using Win-
dows 95/98/Me,
Windows
2000/XP, and
Windows NT 4.0.
Images are print- The feed direction you selected and the feed direction selected in the print-
ed in the wrong er driver's Option Setup might not be the same. Set the machine's feed di-
orientation. rection and the printer driver's feed direction same.
See the printer driver's Help.
The printed image With certain functions, such as enlargement and reduction, the layout of
is different from the image might be different to that on the computer display.
the image on the
You might have selected to replace True Type fonts with machine fonts in
computer's dis-
the printing process.
play.
To print an image similar to the image on the computer display, make set-
tings to print True Type fonts as an image.
See the printer driver's Help.

41
 Troubleshooting

Status Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions

No transmission Check using the following procedure.
when you use A Confirm the IEEE 1394 interface cable is connected securely.
1394 interface con-
B Restart the computer.
nection
If the error occurs even after executing the above operation, go to the
following steps.
C Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable connected to the computer.
D Run the utility tool for the IEEE 1394 Interface Board, which is stored in
the following path on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utili-
ties”.
\UTILITY\1394\

Reference
For more information about using the utility tool for IEEE 1394, see
4 the README file in the same directory on the CD-ROM.
E Restart the computer.
Printing stops and Follow the one of the procedures below.
a paper error is • Press [Job Reset] on the display panel to stop printing. Set the custom
displayed if the size paper in the bypass tray, and then start printing.
custom size paper
• Select the paper feed tray with custom size paper, and then press [Con-
in the paper feed
tinue] to force printing.
tray is specified
when printing
with the Post-
Script 3 printer
driver.
When connecting Confirm that “USB Printing Support” is installed on your computer.
the machine using
the USB2.0 inter- Reference
face, the first page See “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”, Printer Reference 1.
of a print job that
contains a large
volume of data is
printed, and the
rest of the pages
are not printed.

Note
❒ If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.

42
 5. Using the Control Panel

Though the factory default settings of the machine are suitable for most printing
jobs, the “Printer Features” gives you access to a number of settings that control
basic printer operations. The “Printer Features” settings you make are retained
even when you turn off the machine.
Reference
For more information about the copier features and the system settings, see
the Copy Reference and the General Settings Guide.

Adjusting Printer Features

Printer Features Menu

There are six menu items in the “Printer Features” menu.
• Paper Input
• List/Test Print
• Maintenance
• System
• Host Interface
• PCL Menu
You can select functions in the following table.
Category Function menu
Paper Input ⇒ p.46 Bypass Paper Size
List/Test Print ⇒ p.46 Config. Page
Menu List
PCL Config./Font Page
PS Config./Font Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance ⇒ p.47 Menu Protect

43
 Using the Control Panel

Category Function menu

System⇒ p.48 Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Edge Smoothing
Spool Image
Resolution PCL
PS
Toner Saving
Reserved Job Waiting Time
5 Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Edge to Edge Print
Quantity of Print Sets
Host Interface ⇒ p.52 I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
PCL Menu⇒ p.53 Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF

44
 Adjusting Printer Features

Accessing the Printer Features

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key on the control panel.
B Press [Printer Features].
C Select the desired item by pressing the tab, and then change the settings.
Note
❒ [OK] : Press to set the new settings and return to the previous menu.
❒ [Cancel] : Press to return to the previous menu without changing any set-
ting.

Exiting from the Printer Features

A After changing the Printer Features, press [Exit] to return to the User
5
Tools/Counter/Inquiry menu.

B Press [Exit].
Note
❒ You can also exit from the User Tools/Counter/Inquiry menu by pressing
the {User Tools/Counter}
} key.

45
 Using the Control Panel

Printer Features Parameters

Paper Input
Menu Description
Bypass Paper Size The paper size for the bypass tray.

Reference
For more information about paper sizes that can be set in the
bypass tray, see the General Settings Guide.
For information about setting paper in the bypass tray, see the
Printer Reference 1.

Note
❒ Default:
• Metric version: A4
5 • Inch version: 11 × 8/

List/Test Print
Menu Description
Config. Page You can print the current configuration of the machine.

Reference
See p.55 “Machine Condition” for printing a configuration
page.
Menu List You can print the Menu List which shows the function menus of
the machine.
PCL Config./Font Page You can print the current configuration of the installed PCL fonts
PS Config./Font Page You can print the current configuration of the installed PostScript
fonts.

Note
❒ This menu can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3
board is installed in the machine.
Hex Dump You can print the Hex Dump.

46
 Printer Features Parameters

Maintenance
Menu Description
Menu Protect This procedure lets you protect menu settings against accidental
changes. It makes it impossible to change the menu settings you
make with the normal procedure unless you perform the required
key operation. In a network environment, protecting settings re-
stricts changes to menu settings to network administrators.
• Level 1
• Level 2
• Off

Note
❒ Default: Off

The table below lists the menus that can be protected at level 1 or 2.
Menu Level 1 Level 2
Paper Size Settings × ❍
5
Maintenance ❍ ❍
System Settings ❍ ❍
Interface Settings ❍ ❍
PCL Menu ❍ ❍

❍: Protected
×: Not protected
Note
❒ You can also use SmartNetMonitor for Admin to protect menus. To do so,
you must set an access code on the machine beforehand.

47
 Using the Control Panel

System
Menu Description
Print Error Report You can select whether or not to have an error report printed
when a printer error or memory error occurs.
• Off
• On

Note
❒ Default: Off
Auto Continue You can select whether or not to enable Auto Continue. When it
is “On”, printing continues after a system error occurs.
• Off
• 0 minute
• 1 minute
• 5 minutes
5 • 10 minutes
• 15 minutes

Note
❒ Default: Off
Memory Overflow You can select whether the memory overflow error report should
be printed.
• Not Print
• Error Report

Note
❒ Default: Not Print
Job Separation You can enable “Job Separation”.
• Off
• On

Note
❒ Default: Off
❒ This menu appears only when the optional finisher is in-
stalled.
Memory Usage You can select the amount of memory to be used in “Font Priori-
ty” or “Frame Priority”, according to the paper size or resolution.
• Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
• Frame Priority
This setting uses frame memory for high speed printing.

Note
❒ Default: Frame Priority

48
 Printer Features Parameters

Menu Description
Duplex You can select whether you want to print on both sides of each
page.
• Off
• Short Edge Bind
• Long Edge Bind

Note
❒ Default: Off
Edge Smoothing You can set whether or not to enable “Edge Smoothing”.
• On
• Off

Note
❒ Default: On
❒ If “Toner Saving” is set to “On”, “Edge Smoothing” is ignored
even if it is set to “On”.
Spool Image You can set whether or not to spool printing data. 5
When set to “On”, all the data from the computer will be stored as
images in a folder in the hard disk , and then printing will start.
This shortens printing time.
• On
• Off

Note
❒ Default: Off
Resolution You can set the print resolution in dots per inch.

❖ PCL
300 dpi, 600 dpi

❖ PS
300 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi

Note
❒ Default: 600 dpi
❒ “PS” can be selected only when the optional PostScript 3 board
is installed in the machine.
Toner Saving You can select whether or not to enable “Toner Saving”.
• Off
• On

Note
❒ Default: Off

49
 Using the Control Panel

Menu Description
Reserved Job Waiting Time You can set waiting time until the next reserved job starts.
• Long wait
• Medium wait
• Short wait
• In reserved job order

Note
❒ Default: Short Wait
❒ This function is available when “Print Priority” is set to “Job
Order” in the System Settings. For details, see the General Set-
tings Guide.
Printer Language You can set the default printer driver language.
• Auto
• PCL
• PS

5 Note
❒ Default: Auto
❒ “PS” appears only when the optional PostScript 3 board is in-
stalled in the machine.
Sub Paper Size You can enable the “Auto Substitute Paper Size (A4↔LT)” fea-
ture.
• Auto
• Off

Note
❒ Default: Off

50
 Printer Features Parameters

Menu Description
Paper Size You can select the default paper size.
• 11 × 17
• 8/× 14
• 8/× 11
• 5/ × 8/
• 71/4×10/
• 8×13
• 8/×13
• 81/4×13
• A3
• B4JIS
• A4
• B5JIS
• A5
• A6
• 8K
5
• 16K
• Custom Size

Note
❒ Default:
• Metric version: A4
• Inch version: 8/ × 11
Letterhead Setting You can select whether or not to rotate original images when
printing.
When printing, original images are always rotated by 180 de-
grees. Therefore, output might not be as expected when printing
onto a letterhead or preprinted paper that requires orientation.
Using this function, you can specify image rotation.
• Off
• Auto Detect
• On (Always)

Note
❒ Default: Off
❒ When set to “Off”, original images are rotated by 180 degrees.
❒ When set to “Auto Detect”, the machine detects a letterhead or
preprinted paper automatically, and does not rotate original
images.
❒ When set to “On (Always)”, the machine does not rotate orig-
inal images.
❒ This function reduces the printing speed.

51
 Using the Control Panel

Menu Description
Edge to Edge Print You can select whether or not to leave margins on the paper.
• On
• Off

Note
❒ Default: Off
Quantity of Print Sets You can set the number of print sets when you use the PCL or
RPCS™ printer driver.
• 1 to 999 by 1

Note
❒ Default: 1

Host Interface
5 Menu Description
I/O Buffer You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary
to change this setting.
• 128 KB
• 256 KB
• 1 MB

Note
❒ Default: 128 KB
I/O Timeout You can set how many seconds the machine should wait before
ending a print job. If data from another port often arrives in the
middle of the print job, you should increase the timeout value.
• 10 seconds
• 15 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 25 seconds
• 60 seconds

Note
❒ Default: 15 seconds

52
 Printer Features Parameters

PCL Menu
Menu Description
Orientation You can set the page orientation.
• Portrait
• Landscape

Note
❒ Default: Portrait
Form Lines You can set the number of lines per page.
• 5 to 128 by 1

Note
❒ Default:
• Metric version: 64
• Inch version: 60
Font Source You can set the location of the default font. 5
• Resident
• RAM
• HDD

Note
❒ Default: Resident
❒ “RAM” and “HDD” can be selected only when fonts have been
downloaded to the machine.
Font Number You can set the ID of the default font you want to use.
• 0 to 50 by 1

Note
❒ Default: 0
Point Size You can set the point size you want to use for the selected font.
• 4.00 to 999.75 by 0.25

Note
❒ Default: 12.00
❒ This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
Font Pitch You can set the number of characters per inch you want to use for
the selected font.
• 0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01

Note
❒ Default: 10.00
❒ This setting is effective only for a fixed-space font.

53
 Using the Control Panel

Menu Description
Symbol Set You can specify the set of print characters for the selected font. The
available options are as follows.
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-
852, PC8-TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl,
VN US, MS Publ, Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4,
ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0

Note
❒ Default: Roman-8
Extend A4 Width You can extend printing area width, when printing on A4 sheet
with PCL.
• Off
• On

Note
❒ Default: Off
❒ When the setting is “On”, the width will be 8/ inches.
5 Append CR to LF When set to “On”, a carriage return will be appended to each line
feed: CR=CR, LF=CR−LF, FF=CR−FF.
• Off
• On

Note
❒ Default: Off

54
 Machine Condition

Machine Condition
We recommend that you print the configuration page and check the machine's
settings before changing them.

Printing the Configuration Page

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key on the control panel.
The User Tools/Counter/Inquiry menu appears.

B Press [Printer Features].

The Printer Features menu appears.

C Press [Config. Page] on the [List/Test Print] tab.

The configuration page is printed.

55
 Using the Control Panel

56
 6. Appendix

Finisher
You can collate, staple or punch holes in printed paper by installing the optional
finisher on this machine. Make sure to read the following precautions when us-
ing the optional finisher.
Reference
For information about optional finishers, see the General Settings Guide.
To use the staple function, see p.58 “Staple”.
To use the punch function, see p.61 “Punch”.

❖ Make sure to set the options installed on the machine in the printer drivers.
Reference
To set options in the printer drivers, see the Printer Reference 1.

❖ Make sure to set the paper size and paper orientation in the printer driver when using
duplex printing, combine (layout), staple and punch functions.
Reference
For information about duplex printing and combine (layout), see the print-
er driver's Help.
To use the staple function, see p.58 “Staple” and the printer driver's Help.
To use the punch function, see p.61 “Punch” and the printer driver's Help.
Note
❒ Depending on the application, print settings may not be enabled and the
printed output may not be as expected.

❖ When setting staple or collate in the printer driver, make sure that “Collate” check
box is cleared in the print settings of the application.
If “Collate” is enabled in the application, printing will not occur as intended.

57
 Appendix

Staple
With optional finisher installed, printed sets can be stapled individually when
printing multiple sets.

Staple Position
The specified staple position varies depends on paper size, type, quantity and
feed direction. The following table shows staple positions.

Paper Orientation Print Data Staple Position

on the Machine Direction
Finisher 3000M / 3000B Booklet Finisher

Vertical

Horizontal

6
Vertical

Horizontal

ZGXH999E

Reference
• For paper sizes and maximum numbers of sheets available for stapling, see
“Specification”, General Settings Guide.
• For printing method, see the printer driver's Help.
• The stapling position will vary when using the PostScript 3 printer driver.
For more information, see the PostScript 3 printer driver's Help.

58
 Staple

Precaution on stapling

Limitation
❒ Stapling can be done only with the optional finisher installed.
❒ Stapling cannot be done when paper is fed from the bypass tray.
❒ Thick paper, OHP transparencies, and labeled paper cannot be stapled.
❒ You cannot interrupt the current job with a job for another function requiring
stapling or collating.
Note
❒ When the finisher is installed, and when an output tray that cannot output us-
ing the staple function has been selected, the paper will be output according
to the System Settings.
❒ If you cannot make staple settings even with the finisher installed, options
may not be set up correctly in the printer driver. Correct option settings in the
printer driver. For details, see the printer driver's Help.
❒ When duplex printing is selected, adjust staple positions to the binding direc-
tion.
❒ When the finisher is being used for another function's job (for example, a copy 6
job), printing will start after the current job ends.
❒ When setting “Staple” in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate
option is not selected in the print settings of the application. If a collate option
is selected in the application, printing will not occur as intended.
❒ Be sure to set the paper size and orientation in the printer driver when sta-
pling.
• Depending on the software you are using, print settings may not be saved
and the printed result may not be as expected.
❒ Do not pull out paper until stapling has completed as this may cause a paper
jam. When paper jams occur, check the error message on the display panel of
the machine and remove the paper. If a paper jam occurs, see the General Set-
tings Guide.
❒ When printing restarts after removing the jammed paper, the printing posi-
tion may be different depending on the location of the paper jam.
• If the paper jam occurred in the optional finisher, printing will restart from
the top page of the data currently being printed, or from the page on which
the paper jam occurred.
• If the paper jam occurred in the machine, printing will restart from the
page on which the paper jam occurred.
❒ Even if the paper jam occurred in the machine, the error will not be cleared
unless the cover of the finisher is opened and closed.

59
 Appendix

❒ Staple printing will be cancelled under the following conditions:

• If the number of staple jobs exceeds maximum number. For information
about the maximum number, see “Specification”, General Settings Guide.
• If a paper size that cannot be stapled is selected. For information about pa-
per sizes that can be stapled, see “Specification”, General Settings Guide.
• If a paper type that cannot be stapled is selected.
The paper types that can be stapled are plain and recycled. Labels, thick
paper and OHP transparencies cannot be stapled.
• If positions other than those fixed for stapling are specified.
• If there are inconsistencies between the duplex folding direction and the
staple printing folding location during duplex printing.
• If paper sizes are mixed when a different paper size is specified during a
print job.
• When staples have run out.
• When feeding paper from the bypass tray.

60
 Punch

Punch
With the optional finisher installed, holes can be punched into printed output.

Punch Position
The specified punch position varies depending on the paper feed direction and
print data direction. The following table shows punch positions.

Paper Orientation Print Data Punch Position

on the Machine Direction 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes

Vertical

Horizontal

6
Vertical

Horizontal

GAAY012E

Note
❒ Hole positions will vary from page to page as holes punched on each page.
Reference
For information about paper sizes that can be punched, see “Specification”,
General Settings Guide.
For printing methods, see the printer driver's Help.
The punch position will vary when using the PostScript 3 printer driver. For
details, see the PostScript 3 printer driver's Help.

61
 Appendix

Precautions when punching

Limitation
❒ Punching can be done only with the optional finisher installed.
❒ OHP transparencies cannot be punched.
❒ Punching cannot be done when paper is fed from the bypass tray.
Note
❒ If you cannot make punch settings even with the finisher installed, options
may not be set correctly in the printer driver. Correct option settings in the
printer driver. For details, see the printer driver's Help.
❒ When duplex printing is selected, adjust punch positions to the binding direc-
tion.
❒ Be sure to set the punch position same as the staple position when using it to-
gether with the staple function.
❒ Be sure to set paper size and orientation in the printer driver when punching.
• Depending on the software you are using, print settings may not be ena-
bled and the printed result may not be as expected.
6 ❒ When setting “Punch” in the printer driver, make sure that a collate option is
not selected in the print settings of the application. If a collate option is select-
ed in the application, printing will not occur as intended.
❒ Punch will be cancelled under the following conditions:
• When a paper size that cannot be punched is selected. For information
about paper sizes that can be punched, see “Specification”, General Settings
Guide.
• When a paper type that cannot be punched is selected. OHP transparencies
cannot be punched.
• If positions other than those fixed for punching are specified.
• If there are inconsistencies between the duplex folding section and the
punch position during duplex printing.
• When feeding paper from the bypass tray.
• When the punch receptacle has become full and when “Auto Continue”
has been set, printing will continue without punching after the message
has been displayed.

62
 Collate

Collate
When printing multiple documents such as materials for meetings, you can sep-
arate sets into order. This function is known as “Collate”. “Collate” stores data
transmitted from a computer into the machine's memory. The following are the
three types of collate:

❖ Collate
Printed output is assembled as sets in sequential order.

3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1

GPSY013E

❖ Rotating Collate
Every other print set is rotated by 90 degrees KL.

6
1

3 3 3
2 2
2

2
1 1 1
3

GPSY014E

❖ Shift Collate
The optional finisher is required for this function.
The finisher shift tray moves backward or forward a job or set is output, caus-
ing the next to shift so you can separate each set or job.

3
2
123 123

1
123

GPSY015E

Limitation
❒ The optional finisher is required for Shift Collate.
❒ Rotating Collate is not possible when feeding paper from the bypass tray.
❒ Shift Collate is not possible when printing on 81/2” × 51/2”L.
❒ When jobs containing pages of various sizes have been set, Rotating Collate
will not work.
❒ Rotating Collate, staple and punch functions cannot be combined.

63
 Appendix

Note
❒ You can set collate or rotate in the RPCS™ printer driver.
• If you cannot make Shift Collate even with the optional finisher installed,
options may not be set up correctly in the printer driver. Correct option set-
tings in the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver's Help.
❒ If “Auto Continue” occurs on the first set, Collate will be cancelled.
❒ If forced printing occurs on the first set, Collate will be cancelled.
❒ When a document with mixed paper sizes or sizes larger than A4, 81/2 “× 11”
have been set, it will only be collated, even if Rotating Collate has been select-
ed.
❒ If tab sheets are used, Rotating Collate will not work.
❒ When Cover/Slip Sheet or Chaptering has been selected, Collate or Shift Col-
late will occur even if Rotating Collate has been selected.
❒ When Rotating Collate has been selected, printing speed will be slower than
the other collate functions.
❒ When setting “Collate” in the printer driver settings, make sure that a collate
option is not selected in the print settings of the application. If a collate option
is selected, printing will not occur as intended.
6 Reference
For information about paper sizes and number of sets that can use Collate,
Rotating Collate and Shift Collate in every option, see the Copy Reference.
For printing methods, see the printer driver's Help.

64
 Covers

Covers
Using this function, you can insert cover and back sheets, feeding from a differ-
ent tray from that of the paper for the body, and print on them as well.
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver's Help.
Limitation
❒ To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collate cannot be set.
Note
❒ The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the
paper.
❒ If “Auto Tray Select” has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper,
the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to L orientation, the orienta-
tion of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
❒ The cover sheets will not be printed when the sheet for the cover page is fed
from the optional interposer.
• For information about setting paper when using the optional interposer,
6
see “Loading Paper in the Interposer”, General Settings Guide.

❖ Cover sheet
Prints the first page of the document on the sheet for the cover page.
• Print on one side
Prints on one side of the cover sheet only, even when duplex printing is se-
lected.

4 4

GCPY016E

• Print on both sides

Prints on both sides of the cover sheet when duplex printing is selected.

3
1

4
3 4
2
2
1

GCPY030E

65
 Appendix

• Blank

4 4

GCPY017E

❖ Front/Back Covers
Prints the first and last page of the document on the sheet for the cover and
back cover pages.
• Print on one side
Prints on the one side of the cover sheets only, even when duplex printing
is selected.

6 6
4 5 4 5
2 3 2 3
1 1

6 GCPY018E

• Print on both sides

Prints on both sides of the cover sheets when duplex printing is selected.

5
3
1

6
6 4
4 5 2
2 3
1

GCPY031E

• Blank

6 6
4 5 4 5
2 3 2 3
1 1
GCPY023E

66
 Chaptering

Chaptering
The specified page is printed on the same side as the first page, like a book. Also,
you can insert chapter slip sheets before specified pages, and select whether or
not to print on the slip sheets.
Limitation
❒ This function is available in the RPCS™ printer driver only.
Reference
For printing methods, see the printer driver's Help.
Note
❒ Up to 20 pages can be specified as the front pages of chapters using the printer
driver.

❖ No slip sheets

7 7 9

4 4
6
8
6
1 1 3
5

GCPY024E

Note
❒ This function is only valid with duplex printing.
❒ This function can be used together with combine (layout) printing.

❖ Inserting chapter slip sheets

• Print
Prints on the chapter slip sheets. When duplex printing is selected, both
sides of the slip sheets are printed on.

GCPY026E

67
 Appendix

• Print on front side only

Prints on the front side of the chapter slip sheets even if duplex printing is
selected.

9
8
7 10
5
4

1 3 6

GCPY032E

• Blank

6
GCPY027E

Note
❒ The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the body of the
paper.
❒ If “Auto Tray Select” has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper,
the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to L orientation, the orien-
tation of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
❒ The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the body of the document and
the slip sheet.
❒ Slip sheets cannot be printed on when paper is fed from the optional inter-
poser.
• For information about setting paper when using the optional interposer,
see “Loading Paper in the Interposer”, General Settings Guide.

68
 Slip Sheets

Slip Sheets
❖ Inserting a slip sheet between each page
• Print

GPAY019E

• Blank

GPAY020E

❖ Inserting a slip sheet between OHP transparencies

• Print

2 122
1 1
GCPY021E

• Blank

2
1 12
GCPY022E

69
 Appendix

Note
❒ Collate cannot be set.
❒ Slip sheets cannot be inserted while duplex printing.
❒ The slip sheet should be the same size and orientation as the body of the pa-
per.
❒ If “Auto Tray Select” has been set as the paper feed tray for the body paper,
the paper will be delivered from a tray containing paper in K orientation.
Therefore, when the cover paper has been set to L orientation, the orienta-
tion of the output cover paper and body paper will be different.
❒ Slip sheets cannot be printed when paper for the slip sheet is fed from the op-
tional interposer.
• For information about setting paper when using the optional interposer,
see “Loading Paper in the Interposer”, General Settings Guide.
❒ The same paper feed tray cannot be set for the body of the document and the
slip sheet.

70
 Tab Sheet

Tab Sheet
Prints on tab sheets.

GCPY025E

Important
❒ Make sure to install the optional tab sheet holder when setting tab sheets.
Contact your service representative regarding the optional tab sheet holder
installation.
Limitation
❒ Only tab sheets with the tab on the right (at the top part of the paper) can be
printed on.
Reference
For information about tab sheets size that can be printed, see the General Set-
tings Guide.
6
For printing method, see the printer driver's Help.
Note
❒ Make sure to check the position of the tab beforehand, so that images to be
printed do not come out slanted. If there are any letters in a position where
the tab is not present, toner may dirty the back of the paper.
❒ If there are any inconsistencies between the position of the tab, the staple and
the punch hole, the tab position will be prioritized.

71
 Appendix

Spool Printing
Spool Printing allows print jobs transferred from a computer to be temporarily
stored, and then prints them after they are transferred. This shortens printing
time as it maximizes printer efficiency.
Important
❒ During Spool Printing, the hard disk is accessed and the Data-In indicator
blinks. Turning off the computer or machine during Spool Printing can dam-
age the hard disk. Also, if the computer or machine is turned off during Spool
Printing, spooled jobs will be deleted. Do not turn the power off to the com-
puter or machine during Spool Printing.
Limitation
❒ If data is sent to the machine using other protocols besides “LPD” or “IPP”,
spool printing cannot be performed.
❒ Up to a maximum of 150 jobs at once can be spool printed.
Note
❒ Printing the first page using Spool Printing will be slow.
6 ❒ The computer will be released quicker from print processing, when large
amounts of data are spooled.
❒ Spool jobs stored in the machine can be viewed or deleted using a Web
browser.

- Viewing/Deleting spool jobs in a Web browser

Launch the web browser and enter the machine's IP address in the address bar.
This displays the top page.
Example : http://192.168.155.160
(In this example, the IP address of the machine is 192.168.155.160)
Click “Admin Info”, and then “Spool Printing Job List (Printer)” to display the
spool jobs. To delete, check the box next to the name of the file you want to de-
lete. Enter the password *1 , and then click [Delete]. For more information, see the
Network Printing Guide.
*1
The default password is “password”.

72
 Spool Printing

- Setting Spool Printing

Spool Printing can be set using telnet or a web browser.
• Using a web browser
Click ”Configuration”, and then “General”. Set “Spool Printing”to “Enable”.
See Network Printing Guide or Help for more information.
• Using telnet
Enter “spoolsw spool on” to set Spool Printing.
See Network Printing Guide for more information about telnet.

73
 Appendix

Specifications
This section contains the electrical and hardware specifications for the machine
including information about the options.
Component Specification
Resolution PCL 6 : 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
PCL 5e: 300 dpi, 600 dpi
RPCS™ : 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
PostScript 3 : 300 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
Printing Speed 60 ppm/75 ppm
(A4K, 8/" × 11"K plain paper)

Note
❒ The printing speed depends on the machine. Check which type
of machine you have. See the General Settings Guide.
Interface Standard:
• IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface

Note
6 ❒ Use a standard 36-pin printer cable that is not longer than 3
metres (10 feet).
• Ethernet Interface (100 BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Option:
• IEEE 1394 Interface
• IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN Interface
• USB2.0 Interface
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI *1 , AppleTalk
Printer Language Standard: PCL 6, PCL 5e, RPCS™
Option: PostScript 3
Fonts PCL 6/5e :
Afga Monotype Font Manager 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts,
and 1 Bitmap font Font Manager available.
PostScript 3 :
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
Memory Resident : 128 MB (Max.: 384 MB)
Optional SDRAM : 128 MB, 256 MB

Note
❒ A minimum of 256 MB is necessary to use the printer feature
(printer option).
Hard Disk Storage capacity : 40 GB

74
 Specifications

Component Specification
Operating Systems sup- Windows 95/98/Me
ported by this machine Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2
Mac OS X
Network Cable 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T shielded twisted-pair (STP, Catego-
ry/Type5) cable.
*1
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.

Options
Limitation
❒ Only one optional interface board can be installed in the machine at a time.
Therefore, the optional IEEE 1394 Interface Board, the optional 802.11b Inter-
face Kit (Wireless LAN board) and the optional USB2.0 Interface board can-
not be installed in the machine simultaneously.
6
IEEE 1394 Interface Board Type A

❖ Transmission Spec.:
IEEE 1394

❖ Interface:
IEEE std 1394-1995 compliant
IEEE std 1394a-2000 compliant

❖ Device Class:
SCSI print (Windows 2000, Windows XP)
IP over 1394 (Windows Me, Windows XP)

❖ Protocol:
SBP-2 (SCSI print)
TCP/IP (IP over 1394)

❖ Interface Connector:
IEEE 1394 (6 pin × 2)

❖ Required cable:
1394 interface cable (6 pin x 4 pin, 6 pin x 6 pin)
Important
❒ You cannot plug devices together so as to create loops.
❒ Do not use a cable more than 4.5 meters long.

75
 Appendix

❖ Data Transfer Speed:

Maximum 400 Mbps

❖ Connectable number of devices on a bus:

Maximum 63

❖ Allowed cable hops on a bus:

Maximum 16

❖ Power supply:
Non power supply
Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant)

IEEE 802.11b Interface Kit Type B

❖ Transmission Spec.:
Based on IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)

❖ Protocol:
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk

6 Note
❒ SmartNetMonitor and WebStatusMonitor are supported.

❖ Data Transfer Speed:

Auto select from below speed
1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps

❖ Frequency Range:
• Inch version:
2400-2497 MHz (1-11 channels)
• Metric version:
2400-2497 MHz (1-13 channels)

❖ Transmittable Distance:
1Mbps 400m *1
2Mbps 270m *1
5.5Mbps 200m *1
11Mbps 140m *1
*1 These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable dis-
tance indoors is 10-100 m, depending on the environment.

❖ Transmission Mode:
Ad hoc mode and Infrastructure mode

76
 Specifications

USB2.0 Interface Board Type A

❖ Transmission Spec:
Based on USB2.0

❖ Data Transfer Speed:

High Speed: 480Mbps
Full Speed: 12Mbps

❖ Supported Operating System:

Windows 98SE/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Mac OS 9.x, Mac OS X Classic mode
Note
❒ This USB2.0 Interface Board is compatible with devices that support
USB1.1.
❒ For Windows 98SE/Me, make sure to install “USB Printing Support” in-
cluded on the CD-ROM that comes with this machine. When USB2.0 is
used with Windows 98SE/Me, only a speed equal to that of USB1.1 is pos-
sible.
❒ Macintosh supports only the standard USB port.
6
PostScript 3 Board Type 1075

Reference
See the PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement for in-
formation.

Memory Unit Type C 128MB/256MB

❖ Module Type:
SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)

❖ Memory Type:
SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)

❖ Number of Pins:
144 pins

77
 INDEX
C M
Cancelling a job Machine condition, 55
Macintosh, 10 Machine configuration, 31, 33
Windows, 9 Machine status, 31
Chaptering, 67 Macintosh
Collate, 63 cancelling a job, 10
Configuration page, 55 setting up, printer driver, 8
Control panel Mac OS
locked print, 17 PostScript 3, uninstalling, 15
printer features, adjusting, 43 Mac OS X
sample print, 17 PostScript 3, uninstalling, 15
Covers, 65 Maintenance, 47
Memory, 74
D Memory Unit Type C 128MB/256MB, 77

Data In indicator, 38, 40, 41 N

Display panel
error messages, 29 Network Cable, 75
Document Server, 27 Network protocol, 74

E O
Error messages, 29 Operating system, 75
Options, 75
F
P
Finisher, 57
Fonts, 74 Paper Input, 46
PCL menu, 53
H PostScript 3 Board Type 1075, 77
Printer driver
Hard disk, 74 Printer properties, Windows 2000/XP, 4
Host Interface, 52 Printer properties, Windows 95/98/Me, 3
Printer properties, Windows NT 4.0, 6
I
setting up, Macintosh, 8
IEEE 1394 Interface Board Type A, 75 uninstalling, Mac OS PostScript 3, 15
IEEE 802.11b Interface Kit Type B, 76 uninstalling, Mac OS X PostScript 3, 15
Interface, 74 uninstalling, Windows 2000/XP, 13
uninstalling, Windows 95/98/Me, 13
L uninstalling, Windows NT 4.0, 14
Printer features
List/Test Print, 46 accessing, 45
Locked print, 22 menu, 43
deleting, 24 parameters, 46
Printer Language, 74
Printing speed, 74
Punch, 61

78
R
Resolution, 74

S
Sample print, 17
deleting, 20
Slip Sheets, 69
Specifications, 74
Spool printing, 72
Staple, 58
System, 48

T
Tab Sheet, 71
Telnet, 31
Troubleshooting, 29
error messages, 29
machine does not print, 36
other printing problems, 39
status messages, 29

U
UNIX, 31
USB2.0 Interface Board Type A, 77

W
Windows
cancelling a job, 9
Windows 2000/XP
printer driver, uninstalling, 13
printer properties, printer driver, 4
Windows 95/98/Me
printer driver, uninstalling, 13
printer properties, printer driver, 3
Windows NT 4.0
printer driver, uninstalling, 14
printer properties, printer driver, 6

79
80 EE GB G339
Network Printing Guide

1 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

2 Windows 2000 Configuration
3 Windows XP Configuration
4 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration
5 NetWare Configuration
6 Macintosh Configuration
7 Appendix

For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the
“General Settings Guide” before you use it.
Introduction
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.

Software Version Conventions Used in this Manual

• NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2.
• NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare.

Trademarks
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh and Mac are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corpora-
tion.
Novell, NetWare and NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SunOS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:

• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95.
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98.
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
• Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Manuals for This Machine .....................................................................................1
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................2
Introduction ............................................................................................................ 3
Setting Up the Machine on a Network.................................................................. 5
Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0......................................... 5
NetWare ..................................................................................................................... 6
Macintosh................................................................................................................... 8
UNIX...........................................................................................................................8
Printing using the IEEE 802.11b Interface ................................................................. 9
Printing using the IEEE 1394 Interface ....................................................................10

1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

Configuring Windows 95/98/Me..........................................................................11
Printing without a Print Server.................................................................................. 11
Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server...............................11
Configuring Protocols ......................................................................................... 12
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing .................................................................. 12
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .............................................................................13
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client ......................................................................15
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .......................................................................16
Setting Up the Printer Driver .................................................................................... 17
Changing Port Settings ............................................................................................19
Setting Up a Client Computer .............................................................................20

2. Windows 2000 Configuration

Configuring Windows 2000.................................................................................23
Printing without a Print Server.................................................................................. 23
Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port .......................................................................23
Printing with a LPR Port ........................................................................................... 24
Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server...............................24
Configuring Protocols ......................................................................................... 25
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing .................................................................. 25
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .............................................................................26
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client ......................................................................27
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .......................................................................28
Setting Up the Printer Driver .................................................................................... 29
Changing Port Settings ............................................................................................31
Configuring LPR Port Printing............................................................................32
Setting Up a Client Computer .............................................................................33

i
 3. Windows XP Configuration
Configuring Windows XP .................................................................................... 35
Printing without a Print Server.................................................................................. 35
Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port .......................................................................35
Printing with a LPR Port ........................................................................................... 36
Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server...............................36
Configuring Protocols ......................................................................................... 37
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing .................................................................. 37
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client ......................................................................39
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .......................................................................40
Setting Up the Printer Driver .................................................................................... 41
Changing Port Settings ............................................................................................43
Configuring LPR Port Printing............................................................................44
Setting Up a Client Computer .............................................................................45

4. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Configuring Windows NT 4.0 .............................................................................. 47
Printing without a Print Server.................................................................................. 47
Printing with a LPR Port ........................................................................................... 47
Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server...............................47
Configuring Protocols ......................................................................................... 48
Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing .................................................................. 48
Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .............................................................................49
Using SmartNetMonitor for Client ......................................................................51
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client .......................................................................52
Setting Up the Printer Driver .................................................................................... 53
Changing Port Settings ............................................................................................55
Configuring LPR Port Printing............................................................................56
Setting Up a Client Computer .............................................................................57

5. NetWare Configuration
Installing the NIB Setup Tool .............................................................................. 59
Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin ..................................................................... 60
Running the NIB Setup Tool ...................................................................................60
Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard ................................................. 61
NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings....................................................... 64
Setting Up as a Print Server..................................................................................... 65
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 Environment ....................................................70
Setting Up as a Remote Printer ............................................................................... 71
Setting Up a Client Computer .............................................................................77
Windows 95/98/Me...................................................................................................77
Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0 .......................................................................78

ii
6. Macintosh Configuration
Configuring Macintosh........................................................................................81
Changing to EtherTalk .............................................................................................82
Configuring the Printer .............................................................................................82
Changing the Printer Name......................................................................................82
Changing the Zone...................................................................................................82

7. Appendix
Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin..................................................................... 83
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration..............................................84
Locking the Operation Panel Menu..........................................................................85
Selecting the Paper Type.........................................................................................86
Managing the User Information................................................................................87
Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs ....................................................................88
Managing the E-mail Information .............................................................................89
Configuring the Energy Save Mode .........................................................................89
Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser ...................... 90
Going to the Top Page .............................................................................................91
Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings .......................................................92
Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings ................................................... 93
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer.............................................................95
Changing Names and Comments ............................................................................ 95
Displaying the Status of Printer................................................................................98
Using the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)........................................................... 101
Setting IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)....................................................................101
Using in Infrastructure Mode .................................................................................. 102
Using in Ad hoc Mode ............................................................................................ 102
Confirming the Connection.....................................................................................103
When Moving the Machine.....................................................................................104
Remote Maintenance by telnet ......................................................................... 105
Using telnet ............................................................................................................ 105
Commands List ...................................................................................................... 106
SNMP................................................................................................................... 124
Understanding the Displayed Information ...................................................... 125
Print Job Information ..............................................................................................125
Print Log Information..............................................................................................125
Configuring the Network Interface Board ...............................................................126
Message List ...................................................................................................... 129
System Log Information ......................................................................................... 129
Precautions ........................................................................................................ 136
Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network ............................................................136
PostScript Printing from Windows.......................................................................... 137
NetWare Printing....................................................................................................137
Using DHCP........................................................................................................... 138
Configuring a WINS Server....................................................................................139
When Using the NIB Setup Tool ............................................................................ 140
When Using IPP with SmartNetMonitor for Client ..................................................140
Specifications..................................................................................................... 141
INDEX....................................................................................................... 142
iii
iv
Manuals for This Machine
The following manuals describe the operational procedures and maintenance of
this machine.
To enhance safe and efficient operation of the machine, all users should read and
follow the instructions carefully.

❖ General Settings Guide

Provides an overview of the machine. This manual introduces the functions
of the machine. It also introduces the options that allow you to use additional
functions and describes how to access the system user tools to make the ma-
chine easier to use.

❖ Copy Reference
Describes procedures and functions for using the machine as a copier.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 1

Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a printer.

❖ Printer Kit Type 1075 Printer Reference 2

Describes procedures and provides information about using the machine as
a printer. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Op-
erating Instructions”.

❖ Network Printing Guide Operating Instructions (this manual)

Describes procedures and provides information about setting up and using
the machine as a printer in a network environment. We recommend you read
this manual first. It is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Oper-
ating Instructions”.

❖ PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement

Describes menus and features you can set using the PostScript 3 printer driv-
er. This manual is included as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating
Instructions”.
Note
❒ Printing with the PostScript 3 printer driver is available when the Post-
Script 3 board option is installed on your machine.

❖ UNIX Supplement
Provides information about setting up and using the machine as a printer in
a UNIX environment. For UNIX printing information, please visit our web
site or consult your authorized dealer.

❖ Scanner Reference
Describes system settings, procedures and functions for using the machine as
a scanner.
Note
❒ Scanner function is available when the Printer/Scanner option is installed
on your machine.
1
 How to Read This Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.

R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-
eration.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{ }
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.

2
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on configuring the machine as a net-
work printer. Read the section appropriate to your network environment on
how to configure the machine correctly.

Windows 2000/XP or
Windows NT (Server)

NetWare (Server)

Windows 95/98/Me

Windows 2000/XP

Windows NT

NetWare
(Client)
Macintosh

UNIX

Important
❒ The procedures written in this manual assume that you are a network admin-
istrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your network administrator before
configuration.
Reference
For more information about configuring the Network Interface Board with
the control panel, see the General Settings Guide.

❖ Features
• Support for 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) and IEEE
802.11b.
• The Network Interface Board is compatible with NetWare *1 (IPX/SPX,
TCP/IP), Windows NT 4.0 (TCP/IP, NetBEUI *2 , IPP *3 ), Windows 2000
(TCP/IP, NetBEUI *2 , IPP *3 ), Windows XP (TCP/IP, IPP *3 ), Windows
95/98/Me (TCP/IP, NetBEUI *2 , IPP *3 ), UNIX (TCP/IP) and Macintosh
(AppleTalk) *4 protocols. This allows you to use the machine in a network
that uses different protocols and operating systems.
• A computer used as a dedicated print server is not required because the
Network Interface Board can be configured as a NetWare print server.

3
 • The Network Interface Board can connect the machine to the network
without requiring its own power supply because the Network Interface
Board is installed inside the machine.
*1
If the optional 802.11b Interface Kit has been installed, you cannot use the ad hoc
mode.
*2 To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.
*3
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a protocol for printing via the Internet.
*4
An optional multi-module is necessary.

❖ Interface supported protocols

Interface
Ethernet IEEE 802.11b IEEE 1394
(IP over 1394)
TCP/IP ❍ ❍ ❍
NetBEUI ❍ ❍ ×
Protocol
NetWare ❍ ❍ *1 ×
AppleTalk ❍ ❍ ×

❍ means that the protocol is supported.

× means that the protocol is not supported.
*1
If the optional 802.11b Interface Kit has been installed, you cannot use the ad hoc
mode.

4
Setting Up the Machine on a Network

Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

For setting up the machine as a network printer in Windows 95/98/Me, Win-
dows 2000/XP and Windows NT 4.0 environment;
See p.11 “Windows 95/98/Me Configuration”.
See p.23 “Windows 2000 Configuration”.
See p.35 “Windows XP Configuration”.
See p.47 “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”.
❖ Printing Without a Print Server

TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP

NetBEUI NetBEUI IPP NetBEUI
IPP IPP LPR IPP
LPR LPR

Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows NT 4.0

❖ Printing With a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server

Windows 2000/XP or
Windows NT Server (or Workstation)
Print Server

Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000/XP Windows NT 4.0

5
 NetWare
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a NetWare environment, see
p.59 “NetWare Configuration”. The Network Interface Board allows you to use
the machine as either a print server or a remote printer.
For more information about setting up the clients, see the following pages.
• See p.77 “Windows 95/98/Me” .
• See p.78 “Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0” .

Configuring the machine as a print server

A dedicated NetWare print server is not required because the machine can be
configured as a print server.
Print Server

NetWare
File Server

Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000/XP Windows NT 4.0

Actual procedures for configuring the machine depend on the NetWare version.
• NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1
See p.65 “Setting Up as a Print Server”.

6
Configuring the machine as a remote printer
If a dedicated NetWare print server is being used, the machine should be config-
ured as a remote printer.
Remote Printer

NetWare NetWare
Print Server File Server

Windows 95/98/Me Windows 2000/XP Windows NT 4.0

The actual procedures for configuring the machine depend on the NetWare ver-
sion, see p.71 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer”.

7
 Macintosh
For setting up the machine as a network printer in a Macintosh environment, see
p.81 “Macintosh Configuration”.

AppleTalk

Macintosh

UNIX
For UNIX printing information, please visit our web site or consult your author-
ized dealer.

TCP/IP

UNIX

8
Printing using the IEEE 802.11b Interface
This section describes how to print after installing the optional 802.11b Interface Kit.
There are two methods of using this machine as a network printer with IEEE
802.11b.
Note
❒ IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) is unavailable in some countries, or its use may
be limited.

❖ ad hoc mode (802.11 ad hoc mode/ad hoc mode)

This is the mode for transmitting between each wireless LAN client. You must
make the channels the same for each wireless LAN client to transmit using this
basic transmitting method which does not require an access point. When using
“802.11b ad hoc mode”, the SSID must be set. The ad hoc mode settings can be
made from telnet or a web browser. See p.102 “Using in Ad hoc Mode”.

❖ infrastructure mode
This is the mode for transmitting via an access point. The SSID *1 must be the
same as the access point. When setting WEP *2 , you must set the same values
as an access point. By connecting the access point to Ethernet, you can transmit
the current network environment. See p.102 “Using in Infrastructure Mode”.
*1
This is called a Service Set ID and is used in the connection between the wireless
LAN client and the access point. Only a wireless LAN client and an access point
that have the same SSID can transmit to each other. (The character strings to be set
are in the range ASCII 0x20-0x7e and the SSID is case-sensitive to 32 bytes.)
*2 This is used to protect coded wireless data transmission. When both the wireless
LAN client and the transmission access point are coded using a 64-bit key, you
must set the same WEP key as the printer. (You can set only 10 hexadecimal char-
acters when using 64-bit or 26 hexadecimal characters when using 128-bit.)
❖ad hoc mode ❖infrastructure mode

access point

9
 Printing using the IEEE 1394 Interface
This section describes how to print via the IEEE 1394 interface after installing the
1394 interface Board.
There are two methods of using the machine as a network printer with IEEE
1394.

❖ SCSI print
You can print using the SCSI print device provided by Windows 2000 and
Windows XP. For more information, see “Printing with SCSI Print”, Printer
Reference 1 and p.93 “Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings”.

❖ IP over 1394
You can print by setting the IP address for this machine and the computer on
which Windows Me or Windows XP is installed. For more information, see
“Printing with IP over 1394”, Printer Reference 1 and p.35 “Printing with a
Standard TCP/IP Port” in the Windows XP Configuration.

SCSI print
IP over 1394

10
 1. Windows 95/98/Me
Configuration
Configuring Windows 95/98/Me
Note
❒ Windows 95/98 does not support IP over 1394.

Printing without a Print Server

The following procedure describes how to configure Windows 95/98/Me to use
the machine on a network without Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Profes-
sional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition, Windows NT
Server, Windows NT Workstation, or NetWare based print server.

A Specify the protocol to use.

Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols is ap-
propriate.
• TCP/IP
• IPP
• NetBEUI

B Configure the chosen protocol.

• See p.12 “Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing”.
• See p.13 “Configuring NetBEUI for Printing”.

C Install the software and set the printer driver port.

• Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer
Drivers and Utilities”. For more information about how to install the soft-
ware and how to specify the printer driver port, see the Printer Reference 1.

Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server

See p.20 “Setting Up a Client Computer” for configuring Windows 95/98/Me
with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server.

11
 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

Configuring Protocols

1 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows 95/98/Me to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.

Configuring the machine

Configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP
protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.138 “Using DHCP”.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to make sure that it has
been set correctly.
A Enable the use of the command prompt as follows:
• On Windows 95 or Windows 98
Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt].
• On Windows Me
Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click
[MS-DOS Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message ap-
pears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-
pears.
Request timed out.

12
 Configuring Protocols

Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer

These steps are for configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer to use the
TCP/IP protocol.

A Open [Control Panel] and then double-click the [Network] icon. Make sure that 1
“TCP/IP” is listed in the [The following network components are installed] box on
the [Configuration] tab.
Note
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Configuration] tab
to install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
Windows 95/98/Me Help.

B Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet

mask and other settings.
Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.

Configuring NetBEUI for Printing

Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows 95/98/Me to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.

Configuring the machine

Configure the machine to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Make sure that the NetBEUI protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.

13
 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer

Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows 95/98/Me computer and set it as
the default protocol.
1 A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Network] icon. Make sure
that “NetBEUI” is listed in the [The following network components are installed]
box on the [Configuration] tab.
Note
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Configuration] tab
to install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol,
see Windows 95/98/Me Help.
❒ If “NetBEUI →Dial-Up Adaptor” is listed in the [The following network com-
ponents are installed] box, select it and click [Remove] to remove the binding.

B Click [OK] to close the [Network] dialog box.

14
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

SmartNetMonitor for Client is a utility that helps you to use network printers ef-
fectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are
used. It is recommended that you install SmartNetMonitor for Client to use Par- 1
allel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about SmartNet-
Monitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Client features

• Sends a print job directly to the network printers without using a print
server.
• Notifies when a printing error occurs.
• Prints documents using other printers in the printer group when the spec-
ified printer is busy (Recovery Printing).
• Notifies on print job (data sent) completion.
• Equally divides the number of copies to be printed among the selected
printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing).
Important
❒ The following must be the same for the specified printer and the print-
ers selected for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
• Printer models (for Parallel Printing only)
• Installed options (e.g. Paper tray unit)
• Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray unit
• Total memory
• Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts)
Note
❒ Failure to meet any of the conditions above may result in unexpected
print results.

15
 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client

Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”. For more information about how to install, see the Printer Refer-
1 ence 1.
After the installation is complete, configure the printer port with SmartNetMon-
itor for Client. See p.17 “Setting Up the Printer Driver”.

Deleting the port

The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to de-
lete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such
as “FILE”, and then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for
Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Smart-
NetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Details] tab, and then make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for
Client port is shown in the [Print to the following port] box.
Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later.

C From the [Print to the following port] box, select [FILE].

D Click [Delete Port].
E Click the SmartNetMonitor for Client port name as in step B, and then click
[OK].
The port is deleted.

F Click [OK] to close the printer properties.

Uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client

Preparation
Before uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client, make sure that:
• The SmartNetMonitor for Client settings dialog box is closed.
• No printer is using the SmartNetMonitor for Client port as a printer port.

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click
[Add/Remove].

C After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of SmartNetMonitor for Client.

16
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

D After the confirmation message, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Question] dialog box.
F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK].
1
Setting Up the Printer Driver
The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Smart-
NetMonitor for Client.
Preparation
The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.

A Install the printer driver for the printer you want to use.
B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].

C Click the [Details] tab and click [Add Port].

D Click [Other], click [SmartNetMonitor] from the list, and then click [OK].
The [Add Port] dialog box appears.
The displayed items are as follows:
Model Name: The model name of the printer.
Name: The name of the Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board.
Address: The IP address of the printer.

E Select the printer.

TCP/IP
A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be dis-
played. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
then type the IP address or host name.
❒ You cannot add an address partially similar to that already used. For exam-
ple, when “192.168.0.2” is already used, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Sim-
ilarly, when “192.168.0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.

NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
A list of printers that can be printed to by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
17
 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be dis-
played. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
1 then type the NetBEUI address. Make sure that the NetBEUI address is
on the configuration page. For more information about the printing of
the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Printer Ref-
erence 2. The NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the
configuration page. Type the printer's network path name in the form
of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not type “\\” as head char-
acters but “%%”.
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.

IPP
A Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://(printer's-ip-ad-
dress)/printer” or “ipp://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer
URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name].
Type a name different from any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP
port name.
D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and
configure the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for
Client Help.

F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the fol-
lowing Port] box, and then click [OK].
This completes the settings.
To print, select the specified printer. SmartNetMonitor for Client will now di-
rect print data to the printer automatically.

18
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Changing Port Settings

Follow these steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Par-
allel Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server and IPP URL.
1
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.
❒ You can configure Timeout Settings for the TCP/IP protocol.

A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Set-
tings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client
Help.

19
 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client on a network that
uses Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a
1 print server.
When using a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server, select a shared
printer on Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT.

Windows 2000/XP or
Windows NT Print Server

Windows 95/98/Me

Limitation
❒ When using a print server connected to the machine with SmartNetMonitor
for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
❒ When using Windows XP as a print server, the client computer cannot receive
notification of print job completion.
Note
❒ This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communi-
cate with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the
following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly.

A Install the printer driver as a local printer.

Reference
For more information about installing the printer driver, see the Printer
Reference 1.
Note
❒ Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recom-
mended.

20
 Setting Up a Client Computer

B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

C Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Prop-
erties].

D Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Add Port]. 1

E Click [Network], and then click [Browse].
F On the network tree, double-click the name of a computer used as the print
server.
The printers connected to the network are displayed.

G Click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
H Click [OK].
I Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port]
box, and then click [OK].

21
 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration

22
 2. Windows 2000
Configuration
Configuring Windows 2000

Printing without a Print Server

The following procedure describes how to configure Windows 2000 to use the
machine on a network without Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Profes-
sional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition, Windows NT
Server, Windows NT Workstation or NetWare based print server.

A Specify the protocol to use.

Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols is ap-
propriate.
• TCP/IP
• IPP
• NetBEUI

B Configure the chosen protocol.

• See p.25 “Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing”.
• See p.26 “Configuring NetBEUI for Printing”.

C Install the software and set the printer driver port.

• Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer
Drivers and Utilities”. For more information about how to install the soft-
ware and how to specify the printer driver port, see the Printer Reference 1.

Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port

The standard TCP/IP port is standard to Windows 2000, enabling Peer-to-Peer
printing in a network environment.
For more information about Standard TCP/IP port settings, see Windows 2000
Help.
Note
❒ If a device model selection dialog box appears during the procedure to add
the standard TCP/IP port, select “RICOH Network Printer C Model”.

23
 Windows 2000 Configuration

Printing with a LPR Port

See p.32 “Configuring LPR Port Printing” for configuring a LPR port in Win-
dows 2000.

Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server

2 See p.33 “Setting Up a Client Computer” for configuring Windows 2000 with a
Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server.

24
 Configuring Protocols

Configuring Protocols

Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows 2000 to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.
2
Configuring the machine
Configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP
protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.138 “Using DHCP”.
To use the IP over 1394, see the General Settings Guide.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to make sure that it has
been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Com-
mand Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message ap-
pears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-
pears.
Request timed out.

Configuring a Windows 2000 computer

These steps are for configuring a Windows 2000 computer to use the TCP/IP
protocol.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and
Dial-up Connections].

B Double-click [Local Area Connection]. On the [General] tab, click [Properties].

25
 Windows 2000 Configuration

C Make sure that the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected in the [Compo-
nents checked are used by this connection] box on the [General] tab.
Note
❒ Select the TCP/IP protocol if it is not already selected.
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab to
install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
2 Windows 2000 Help.

D Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet

mask and other settings.
Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.

Configuring NetBEUI for Printing

Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows 2000 to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.

Configuring the machine

Configure the machine to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Make sure that the NetBEUI protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.

Configuring a Windows 2000 computer

Follow these steps to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use the NetBEUI
protocol.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and
Dial-up Connections].

B Double-click [Local Area Connection]. On the [General] tab, click [Properties].

C Make sure that the“NetBEUI Protocol” is selected in the [Components
checked are used by this connection] box on the [General] tab.
Note
❒ Select the NetBEUI protocol if it is not already selected.
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab
and install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol,
see Windows 2000 Help.
26
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

SmartNetMonitor for Client is a utility that helps you to use network printers ef-
fectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are
used. It is recommended that you install SmartNetMonitor for Client to use Par-
allel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about SmartNet-
Monitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
2
❖ SmartNetMonitor for Client features
• Sends a print job directly to the network printers without using a print
server.
• Notifies when a printing error occurs.
• Prints documents using other printers in the printer group when the spec-
ified printer is busy (Recovery Printing).
• Notifies on print job (data sent) completion.
• Equally divides the number of copies to be printed among the selected
printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing).
Important
❒ The following must be the same for the specified printer and the print-
ers selected for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
• Printer models (for Parallel Printing only)
• Installed options (e.g. Paper tray unit)
• Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray unit
• Total memory
• Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts)
Limitation
❒ When using a computer as a print server, do not use the notification of
print completion function. For more information about how to set this
function to off, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Note
❒ Failure to meet any of the conditions above may result in unexpected
print results.

27
 Windows 2000 Configuration

Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client

Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”. For more information about how to install, see the Printer Refer-
ence 1.
After the installation is complete, configure the printer port with SmartNetMon-
itor for Client. See p.29 “Setting Up the Printer Driver”.
2
Deleting the port
The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to de-
lete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such
as “FILE”, and then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for
Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Smart-
NetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Ports] tab, and then make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for Cli-
ent port is shown in the [Print to the following port(s)] box.
Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later.

C Select the [FILE] check box in the [Port] column.

D Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
The port which is currently in use is changed.

E Open the Printer Properties of the same printer.

F Select the [Ports] tab.
G At the [Port] column in the [Print to the following port(s)] box, click the Smart-
NetMonitor for Client port name as in step B.

H Click [Delete Port].

I After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].
The port is deleted.

J Click [Close] to close the Printer Properties.

28
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client

Preparation
Before uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client, make sure that:
• The port settings dialog box is closed.
• No printer is using the SmartNetMonitor for Client port as a printer port.
• You logged in with the same user authority as that used to install Smart- 2
NetMonitor for Client.

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
B Click the [Change or Remove Programs] tab, click [SmartNetMonitor for Client],
and then click [Change/Remove].

C After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of SmartNetMonitor for Client.

D After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box.
F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK].

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Smart-
NetMonitor for Client.
Preparation
The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.

A Install the printer driver for the printer you want to use.
B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].

C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client] in the [Available port types] box, and then click
[New Port].
The [Select Printer] dialog box appears and printers on the network are
browsed.
The displayed items are as follows:
Model Name: The model name of the printer.
Name: The name of the Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board.
Address: The IP address of the printer.
29
 Windows 2000 Configuration

E Select the printer.

TCP/IP
A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
2 ❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be dis-
played. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
then type the IP address or host name.

NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
A list of printers that can be printed by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be dis-
played. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
then type the NetBEUI address. Make sure that the NetBEUI address is
on the configuration page. For more information about the printing of
the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Printer Ref-
erence 2. The NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the
configuration page. Type the printer's network path name in the form
of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not type “\\” as head char-
acters but “%%”.
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.

IPP
A Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://(printer's-ip-ad-
dress)/printer” or “ipp://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer
URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name].
Type a name different from any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP
port name.

30
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and
configure the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for
Client Help.

F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the fol- 2
lowing Port(s)] box, and then click [Close].
This completes the settings.
To print, select the specified printer. SmartNetMonitor for Client will now di-
rect print data to the printer automatically.

Changing Port Settings

Follow these steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Par-
allel Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server and IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.

A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Parallel Printing, Recovery Print-
ing and Timeout Settings.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Set-
tings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client
Help.

31
 Windows 2000 Configuration

Configuring LPR Port Printing

This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows
2000.
Note
❒ The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more
2 information about configuring the protocols, see p.25 “Configuring TCP/IP
and IPP for Printing”.

A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

The [Printers] window appears.

B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Prop-
erties].

C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

D In the [Available port types] box, click “LPR Port”, and then click [New Port].
Note
❒ If “LPR Port” does not appear, “Print Services for Unix” has not been in-
stalled. For more information about how to install “Print Services for Un-
ix”, see Windows 2000 Help.

E Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address
of server providing lpd] box.

F Type “lp” into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box], and then
click [OK].

G Click [Close].
H Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)]
box and the check box is selected, and then click [OK].

32
 Setting Up a Client Computer

Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that
uses Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a
print server.
When using a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server, select a shared
printer on Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT.
2

Windows 2000/XP or
Windows NT Print Server

Windows 2000

Limitation
❒ When using a print server connected to the machine with SmartNetMonitor
for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
Note
❒ This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communi-
cate with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the
following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly.
❒ When using Windows NT 4.0 as the print server, make sure to install the Win-
dows NT 4.0 printer driver before connecting the print server. There is a Win-
dows NT 4.0 printer driver on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.
Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer.

A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
This launches the Add Printer Wizard.

C Click [Next >].

33
 Windows 2000 Configuration

D Click [Network printer], and then click [Next >].

E Click [Next >].
F In the [Shared printers] box, double-click the name of the computer used as
the print server.
The printers attached to the network are displayed.
2 G Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
H Select if you want to use this printer as the default printer, and then click
[Next >].

I After the installation is complete, click [Finish].

The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window.

34
 3. Windows XP Configuration

Configuring Windows XP

Printing without a Print Server

The following procedure describes how to configure Windows XP to use the ma-
chine on a network without Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition, Windows NT Server,
Windows NT Workstation or NetWare based print server.

A Specify the protocol to use.

Consult your network administrator about which of the two protocols is ap-
propriate.
• TCP/IP
• IPP

B Configure the protocol.

• See p.37 “Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing”.

C Install the software and set the printer driver port.

• Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer
Drivers and Utilities”. For more information about how to install the soft-
ware and how to specify the printer driver port, see the Printer Reference 1.

Printing with a Standard TCP/IP Port

Standard TCP/IP port is a standard port of Windows XP to enable Peer-to-Peer
printing in a network environment.
For more information about Standard TCP/IP port settings, see Windows XP
Help.
Note
❒ If a device model selection dialog box appears during the procedure to add
the standard TCP/IP port, select “RICOH Network Printer C Model”.

35
 Windows XP Configuration

Printing with a LPR Port

See p.44 “Configuring LPR Port Printing” for configuring a LPR port in Win-
dows XP.

Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server

See p.45 “Setting Up a Client Computer” for configuring Windows XP with a
Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server.
3

36
 Configuring Protocols

Configuring Protocols

Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows XP to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.

Configuring the machine

Configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol. 3
• Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP
protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.138 “Using DHCP”.
To use the IP over 1394, see the General Settings Guide.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to make sure that it has
been set correctly.
A Click [Start], point to [All Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click
[Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message ap-
pears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-
pears.
Request timed out.

Configuring a Windows XP computer

These steps are for configuring a Windows XP computer to use the TCP/IP pro-
tocol.

A Click [Start] on the taskbar, click [Control Panel], and then click [Network and
Internet Connections].

B Click [Network Connections], and then double-click [Local Area Connection].

37
 Windows XP Configuration

C On the [General] tab, click [Properties].

Note
❒ With the IP over 1394, click [1394 Connection].

D Make sure that the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected in the [This con-
nection uses the following items] box on the [General] tab.
Note
❒ Select the TCP/IP protocol if it is not already selected.
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab to
3 install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
Windows XP Help.

E Configure the TCP/IP protocol with the appropriate IP address, subnet

mask and other settings.
Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.

38
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

SmartNetMonitor for Client is a utility that helps you to use network printers ef-
fectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are
used. It is recommended that you install SmartNetMonitor for Client to use Par-
allel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about SmartNet-
Monitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Client features

• Sends a print job directly to the network printers without using a print
server. 3
• Notifies when a printing error occurs.
• Prints documents using other printers in the printer group when the spec-
ified printer is busy (Recovery Printing).
• Notifies on print job (data sent) completion.
• Equally divides the number of copies to be printed among the selected
printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing).
Important
❒ The following must be the same for the specified printer and the print-
ers selected for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
• Printer models (for Parallel Printing only)
• Installed options (e.g. Paper tray unit)
• Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray unit
• Total memory
• Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts)
Limitation
❒ When using a computer as a print server, do not use the notification of
print completion function. For more information about how to set this
function to off, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
Note
❒ Failure to meet any of the conditions above may result in unexpected
print results.

39
 Windows XP Configuration

Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client

Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”. For more information about how to install, see the Printer Refer-
ence 1.
After the installation is complete, configure the printer port with SmartNetMon-
itor for Client. See p.41 “Setting Up the Printer Driver”.

Deleting the port

3 The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to de-
lete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such
as “FILE”, and then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for
Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

A From the [Printers and Faxes] window, click the icon of the printer which uses
SmartNetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Ports] tab, and then make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for Cli-
ent port is shown in the [Print to the following port(s)] box.
Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later.

C Select the [FILE] check box in the [Port] column.

D Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.
The port which is currently in use is changed.

E Open the Printer Properties of the same printer.

F Select the [Ports] tab.
G At the [Port] column in the [Print to the following port(s)] box, click the Smart-
NetMonitor for Client port name as in step B.

H Click [Delete Port].

I After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].
The port is deleted.

J Click [Close] to close the Printer Properties.

40
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client

Preparation
Before uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client, make sure that:
• The port settings dialog box is closed.
• No printer is using the SmartNetMonitor for Client port as a printer port.
• You logged in with the same user authority as that used to install Smart-
NetMonitor for Client.

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Add or Remove Programs] icon. 3
B Click the [Change or Remove Programs] category, click [SmartNetMonitor for Cli-
ent], and then click [Change/Remove].

C After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of SmartNetMonitor for Client.

D After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box.
F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK].

Setting Up the Printer Driver

The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Smart-
NetMonitor for Client.
Preparation
The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.

A Install the printer driver for the printer you want to use.
B From the [Printers and Faxes] window, click the icon of the printer. On the
[File] menu, click [Properties].

C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

D Click [SmartNetMonitor for Client] in the [Available port types] box, and then click
[New Port].
The [Select Printer] dialog box appears and printers on the network are
browsed.
The displayed items are as follows:
Model Name: The model name of the printer.
Name: The name of the Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board.
Address: The IP address of the printer.
41
 Windows XP Configuration

E Select the printer.

TCP/IP
A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be dis-
played. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
then type the IP address or host name.
3
IPP
A Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://(printer's-ip-ad-
dress)/printer” or “ipp://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer
URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name].
Type a name different from any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP
port name.
D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and
configure the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for
Client Help.

F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the fol-
lowing Port(s)] box, and then click [Close].
This completes the settings.
To print, select the specified printer. SmartNetMonitor for Client will now di-
rect print data to the printer automatically.

42
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Changing Port Settings

Follow these steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Par-
allel Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server and IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.

A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
Windows XP Professional 3
A Click [Start], and then click [Printers and Faxes].

Windows XP Home Edition

A Click [Start], and then click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the printer. On the [file] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Parallel Printing, Recovery Print-
ing and Timeout Settings.
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Set-
tings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client
Help.

43
 Windows XP Configuration

Configuring LPR Port Printing

This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows
XP.
Note
❒ The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more
information about configuring the protocols, see p.37 “Configuring TCP/IP
and IPP for Printing”.

3 A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
Windows XP Professional
A Click [Start], and then click [Printers and Faxes].

Windows XP Home Edition

A Click [Start], and then click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].

B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Prop-
erties].

C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

D In the [Available port types] box, click “LPR Port”, and then click [New Port].
Note
❒ If “LPR Port” does not appear, “Print Services for Unix” has not been in-
stalled. For more information about how to install “Print Services for Un-
ix”, see Windows XP Help.

E Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address
of server providing lpd] box.

F Type “lp” into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then
click [OK].

G Click [Close].
H Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)]
box and the check box is selected, click [Apply] and then click [OK].

44
 Setting Up a Client Computer

Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that
uses Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a
print server.
When using a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server, select a shared
printer on Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT.

Windows 2000/XP or
3
Windows NT Print Server

Windows XP

Limitation
❒ When using a print server connected to the machine with SmartNetMonitor
for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
Note
❒ This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communi-
cate with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the
following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly.
❒ When using Windows NT 4.0 as the print server, make sure to install the Win-
dows NT 4.0 printer driver before connecting the print server. There is a Win-
dows NT 4.0 printer driver on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.
Use the [Printers and faxes] window to set up the printer.

A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
Windows XP Professional
A Click [Start], and then click [Printers and Faxes].

45
 Windows XP Configuration

Windows XP Home Edition

A Click [Start], and then click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].

B Click [Add a printer] in the Printer Tasks category.

This launches the Add Printer Wizard.

C Click [Next >].

3 D Click [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer], and then click
[Next >].

E Click [Next >].

F In the [Shared printers:] box, double-click the name of the computer used as
the print server.
The printers attached to the network are displayed.

G Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Next >].
H Select if you want to use this printer as the default printer, and then click
[Next >].

I After the installation is complete, click [Finish].

The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window.

46
 4. Windows NT 4.0
Configuration
Configuring Windows NT 4.0
Note
❒ Windows NT 4.0 does not support IP over 1394.

Printing without a Print Server

The following procedure describes how to configure Windows NT 4.0 to use the
machine on a network without Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Profes-
sional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition, Windows NT
Server, Windows NT Workstation or NetWare based print server.

A Specify the protocol to use.

Consult your network administrator about which of the three protocols is ap-
propriate.
• TCP/IP
• IPP
• NetBEUI

B Configure the chosen protocol.

• See p.48 “Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing”.
• See p.49 “Configuring NetBEUI for Printing”.

C Install the software and set the printer driver port.

• Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer
Drivers and Utilities”. For more information about how to install the soft-
ware and how to specify the printer driver port, see the Printer Reference 1.

Printing with a LPR Port

See p.56 “Configuring LPR Port Printing” for how to configure a LPR port in
Windows NT 4.0.

Printing with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT Print Server

See p.57 “Setting Up a Client Computer” for configuring Windows NT 4.0 with
a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server.

47
 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Configuring Protocols

Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing

These instructions are for configuring the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows NT to use the TCP/IP protocol and IPP.

Configuring the machine

Configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol.
• Make sure that the TCP/IP protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
• Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using the TCP/IP
4 protocol.
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.
If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.138 “Using DHCP”.
Note
❒ After setting the IP address, use the ping command to make sure that it has
been correctly set.
A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt].
B Type the following: (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
C:\> ping 192.168.15.16
If the address has been configured correctly, the following message ap-
pears.
Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32
If the address has been configured incorrectly, the following message ap-
pears.
Request timed out.

Configuring a Windows NT computer

These steps are for configuring a Windows NT computer to use the TCP/IP pro-
tocol.

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Network] icon. Make sure
that “TCP/IP Protocol” is listed in the [Network protocols] box on the [Proto-
cols] tab.
Note
❒ If the TCP/IP protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab to
install it. For more information about installing the TCP/IP protocol, see
Windows NT Help.
48
 Configuring Protocols

B Configure the TCP/IP protocols with the appropriate IP address, subnet

mask and other settings.
Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.

Configuring NetBEUI for Printing

Follow these instructions to configure the Network Interface Board and Win-
dows NT to use the NetBEUI protocol.
Preparation
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.

Configuring the machine

4
Configure the machine to use the NetBEUI protocol.
• Make sure that the NetBEUI protocol is set to active. (The default is active.)
Reference
For more information about how to make the above settings, see the General
Settings Guide.

Configuring a Windows NT computer

Install the NetBEUI protocol on the Windows NT computer, and then change the
LAN adapter number (Lana Number).

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Network] icon. Make sure
that “NetBEUI Protocol” is listed in the [Network Protocols] box on the [Proto-
cols] tab.
Note
❒ If the NetBEUI protocol is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab to
install it. For more information about installing the NetBEUI protocol, see
Windows NT Help.

B Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click “NetBIOS Inter-
face” in the [Services] tab, and then click [Properties].

C Click the Lana Number corresponding the Nbf protocol of the [Network
Route] headline, and then click [Edit].

D Type “0” as the Lana Number.

Note
❒ If the other protocol's Lana Number is configured with “0”, you must
change the Lana Number a number other than “0”.

49
 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

E Click [OK].
F Click [Close], and then close the [Network] dialog box.
G After checking the message to restart, click [Yes].
Note
❒ After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer.

50
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

SmartNetMonitor for Client is a utility that helps you to use network printers ef-
fectively. It is useful in environments where two or more network printers are
used. It is recommended that you install SmartNetMonitor for Client to use Par-
allel Printing and Recovery Printing. For more information about SmartNet-
Monitor for Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Client features

• Sends a print job directly to the network printers without using a print
server.
• Notifies when a printing error occurs.
• Prints documents using other printers in the printer group when the spec-
ified printer is busy (Recovery Printing). 4
• Notifies on print job (data sent) completion.
• Equally divides the number of copies to be printed among the selected
printers in the printer group (Parallel Printing).
Important
❒ The following must be the same for the specified printer and the print-
ers selected for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
• Printer models (for Parallel Printing only)
• Installed options (e.g. Paper tray unit)
• Size and orientation of paper in each paper tray unit
• Total memory
• Installed fonts (including the downloaded fonts)
Limitation
❒ When using a computer as a print server, do not use the notification of
print completion function. For more information about how to set this
function to off, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.
❒ On a computer that is used as a print server, do not use the features such
as Parallel Printing, Recovery Printing and Notify. For more informa-
tion about turning off these features, see SmartNetMonitor for Client
Help.
Note
❒ Failure to meet any of the conditions above may result in unexpected
print results.

51
 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Installing SmartNetMonitor for Client

Install SmartNetMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”. For more information about how to install, see the Printer Refer-
ence 1.
After the installation is complete, configure the printer port with SmartNetMon-
itor for Client. See p.53 “Setting Up the Printer Driver”.

Deleting the port

The following procedure allows you to delete the printer port. If you want to de-
lete the port which is currently used in Windows, switch the port to another such
as “FILE”, and then delete it. For more information about SmartNetMonitor for
4 Client, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer which uses Smart-
NetMonitor for Client to print. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Ports] tab, and then make sure that the SmartNetMonitor for Cli-
ent port is shown in the [Print to the following port] box.
Remember the port name because this port should be deleted later.

C From the [Print to the following port] box, select [FILE].

D Click [Apply].
The port which is currently in use is changed.

E Click [Delete Port].

F After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].
The port is deleted.

G Click [OK] to close the printer properties.

Uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client

Preparation
Before uninstalling SmartNetMonitor for Client, make sure that:
• The port settings dialog box is closed.
• No printer is using the SmartNetMonitor for Client port as a printer port.
• You have performed login with the same user authority as that used to in-
stall SmartNetMonitor for Client.

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.

52
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

B On the [Install/Uninstall] tab, click [SmartNetMonitor for Client], and then click
[Add/Remove].

C After the confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

UninstallShield removes all of the components of SmartNetMonitor for Cli-
ent.

D After a confirmation message appears, click [Yes].

E Acknowledge the [Remove Shared File?] dialog box.
F When the uninstallation is complete, click [OK].

Setting Up the Printer Driver

4
The following procedure allows you to configure the printer port to use Smart-
NetMonitor for Client.
Preparation
The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process.

A Install the printer driver for the printer you want to use.
B From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer. On the [File] menu,
click [Properties].

C Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

D Click [SmartNetMonitor] from the list, and then click [New Port].
The [Select Printer] dialog box appears .
The displayed items are as follows:
Model Name: The model name of the printer.
Name: The name of the Network Interface Board.
Comment: Additional information about the Network Interface Board.
Address: The IP address of the printer.

E Select the printer.

TCP/IP
A Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be dis-
played. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and
then type the IP address or host name.

53
 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
A list of printers that can be printed by the NetBEUI protocol appears.
B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Note
❒ Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed.
To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then type
the NetBEUI address. Make sure that the NetBEUI address is on the con-
figuration page. For more information about the printing of the configu-
ration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Printer Reference 2. The
NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration
page. Type the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer
4 name\Share name”. Do not type “\\” as head characters but “%%”.
❒ You cannot print to printers beyond routers.

IPP
A Click [IPP].
The IPP setting dialog box appears.
B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://(printer's-ip-ad-
dress)/printer” or “ipp://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer
URL] field.
(Example IP address is 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
ipp://192.168.15.16/printer
C As necessary, type the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name].
Type a name different from any existing port names.
If you omit this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP
port name.
D If using a proxy server and IPP user name, click [Detailed Settings] and
configure the necessary settings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for
Client Help.

F Click [OK].
G Make sure that the specified printing port is displayed in the [Print to the fol-
lowing Port] box, and then click [OK].
This completes the settings.
To print, select the specified printer. SmartNetMonitor for Client will now di-
rect print data to the printer automatically.
54
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Client

Changing Port Settings

Follow these steps to change SmartNetMonitor for Client settings, such as Par-
allel Printing, Recovery Printing, TCP/IP, the proxy server and IPP URL.
Note
❒ There are no settings for the NetBEUI protocol.

A From the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].

B Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Port Configuration].

The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP protocol, you can configure Parallel Printing, Recovery Print-
ing and Timeout Settings. 4
• For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Set-
tings.
Note
❒ For more information about these settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Client
Help.

55
 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

Configuring LPR Port Printing

This section explains the procedure for printing to a LPR port from Windows
NT.
Note
❒ The following procedure assumes that the printer drivers have already been
installed. This is the procedure to change the printer port to LPR.
❒ The TCP/IP protocols must be installed and configured correctly. For more
information about configuring the protocols, see p.48 “Configuring TCP/IP
and IPP for Printing”.

A When using the LPR port, click the [Services] tab, and then make sure “Mi-
crosoft TCP/IP Printing” is installed.
4
If “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is not installed, click [Add] on the [Services]
tab, to install it. For more information about installing and configuring net-
work services, see Windows NT Help.

B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

C Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Prop-
erties].

D Click the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

E In the [Available Printer Ports] box, click “LPR Port”, and then click [New Port].
Note
❒ If “LPR Port” does not appear, “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” has not been
installed.

F Type the IP address of the Network Interface Board into the [Name or address
of server providing lpd] box.

G Type “lp” into the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then
click [OK].

H Click [Close].
I Make sure that the port name is displayed in the [Print to the following port(s)]
box and the check box is selected, and then click [OK].

56
 Setting Up a Client Computer

Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes the procedures for setting up a client in a network that
uses Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT Server or Windows NT Workstation as a
print server.
When using a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server, select a shared
printer on Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT.

Windows 2000/XP or
Windows NT Print Server

Windows NT 4.0

Limitation
❒ When using a print server connected to the machine with SmartNetMonitor
for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
❒ When using Windows XP as a print server, the client computer cannot receive
a notification of print job completion.
Note
❒ This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communi-
cate with a Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT print server. Do not begin the
following procedure until the client has been set up and configured correctly.
Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer.

A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.
This launches the Add Printer Wizard.

C Click [Network printer server] and click [Next >].

57
 Windows NT 4.0 Configuration

D In the [Shared Printers] box, double-click the name of the computer used as
the print server.
The printers attached to the network are displayed.

E Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
F Select if you want to use this printer as the default printer, and then click
[Next >].

G After the installation is complete, click [Finish].

The icon of the newly installed printer appears in the [Printers] window.

58
 5. NetWare Configuration

This chapter describes how to configure the machine to use as a print server or
a remote printer in a NetWare environment.
Note
❒ NetWare must be set to active using the machine's control panel. For more in-
formation about how to set it, see the General Settings Guide.

Installing the NIB Setup Tool

A utility called the NIB Setup Tool is provided to configure the machine to work
in a network environment. This section describes how to install the SmartNet-
Monitor for Admin, and how to run the NIB Setup Tool.
Limitation
❒ The NIB Setup Tool is supported to work with the following operating sys-
tems.
• Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
• Microsoft Windows 2000/XP
• Microsoft Windows NT 4.0

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Using a printer in a NetWare environment, configure the NetWare printing
environment by using SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
Note
❒ If you configure the NetWare printing environment by using SmartNet-
Monitor for Admin under the following environments, NetWare Client
provided by Novell is required.
• NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me
• NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0

59
 NetWare Configuration

Installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Install SmartNetMonitor for Admin on your computer. For the installation pro-
cedure, see “Installing the SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin”, Printer Refer-
ence 1.
After installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see one of the following sections:
• To configure the Network Interface Board as a NetWare print server for the
first time, see p.61 “Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard”.
• To use this computer with NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1 as a print server, see p.64
“NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings”.
• To use this computer with NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1 as a remote printer, see p.64
“NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings”.

Running the NIB Setup Tool

5 A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [NIB Setup Tool] in the [Smart-
NetMonitor for Admin] program folder.

60
 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard

Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool

Wizard
With the NIB Setup Tool, you can easily set up a NetWare printing environment.
Reference
For more information about installing the NIB Setup Tool, see p.59 “Installing
the NIB Setup Tool”.
You can select [Wizard] or [Property Sheet] as an installation method.
When you configure the Network Interface Board for the first time, use the Wiz-
ard method.
If you want to use the Property Sheet method, see p.64 “NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1-
Advanced Settings”.
Note
❒ This section assumes that NetWare is functional and that the necessary envi- 5
ronment for NetWare Print Services is available.
❒ If you configure the Network Interface Board in a NetWare environment us-
ing the NIB Setup Tool, you should install the client software released from
Novell in the following cases.
• Windows 95/98/Me in NDS mode configuration
• Windows NT 4.0 in NDS mode configuration
• Windows NT 4.0 in Bindery mode configuration
• Windows 2000 in NDS mode configuration
• Windows 2000 in Bindery mode configuration

A Log on to the Netware file server or the NDS tree as an administrator or ad-
ministrator equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference
See p.60 “Running the NIB Setup Tool” .

C Click [Wizard] and click [OK].

The [NIB Setup Tool - Network board list] dialog box of the Network Interface
Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol].

61
 NetWare Configuration

E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board you are configuring,
and then click [Next >].
Note
❒ If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,
print a network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network
address).

F Make sure that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and then click
[Finish].

G Type the print server name into the [Device Name] box, and then click [Next >].
The default setting is “RDP_” followed by the 6-digit serial number. We rec-
ommend that you change it to something that is easier to remember or some-
thing based on the structure of the network.

H In a dialog box for selecting a network environment, click the [NetWare]

check box and click to clear the [TCP/IP] check box.
5
I Click [Next >].
A dialog box for configuring the NetWare environment appears.

J Select [Bindery] when printing under Bindery mode, or select [NDS] when
printing under NDS mode.
When you are using NetWare version 4.x, you should select [NDS].

K If you selected [Bindery], type into the [File Server Name:] box the name of the
file server in which a print server is to be created.
After clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.

L If you selected [NDS], type into the [Tree:] box the name of the NDS tree in
which the print server is created, and then type the context into the [Con-
text:] box.
Clicking [Browse], you can select an NDS tree and an NDS context among
those listed in the [Browse] dialog boxes.
As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a pe-
riod. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS,
type “NET.DS”.

M Click [Next >].

62
 Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard

N Type the name of the printer into the [Printer Name] box, and the name of the
print queue into the [Print Queue Name] box.
The default setting for Printer Name is “Print Server Name” followed by “_1”
and for Print Queue Name is “Print Server Name” followed by “_Q” (quota-
tion marks are not included). You can change them if necessary.

O If you have selected the NDS mode, type the volume of the print queue into
the [Queue Volume] box.
Clicking [Browse], you can select one of those shown in the [Browse] dialog
box.

P Click [Next >].

A dialog box to acknowledge the printing environment appears.

Q After checking the environment, click [Next >].

If you want to change the settings, click [< Back], and then make the settings
again.
Clicking [Next >], the NIB Setup Tool automatically creates the Print Server,
5
the Printer, and the Print Queue in the NetWare network.

R After the confirmation dialog box appears, select [Quit] and click [Finish] to
exit the NIB Setup Tool.

63
 NetWare Configuration

NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced

Settings
The actual procedures for configuring the machine vary depending on whether
the Network Interface Board is configured as a print server or as a remote print-
er. This section describes how to configure the machine in the NetWare 3.x, 4.x,
5/5.1 environment.

NetWare 3.x Basic Procedure

Install the NIB Setup Tool

Print Server Remote Printer

Configure the Network Interface Board

5 Restart the printer Configure the NetWare

Start the print server

NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1 Basic Procedure

Install the NIB Setup Tool

Print Server Remote Printer

Configure the Network Interface Board

Configure the NetWare

Restart the printer Start the print server

Preparation
The following procedures use the Property Sheet method in configuring the
Network Interface Board. If you configure the Network Interface Board as a
NetWare print server for the first time, we recommend you use the Wizard
method. See p.61 “Quick Setup Using the NIB Setup Tool Wizard” .

64
 NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings

Note
❒ This section assumes NetWare is functional and that the necessary environ-
ment for the NetWare Print Service is available.
❒ When using NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, you should install the client software re-
leased from Novell in Windows, before running the NIB Setup Tool for con-
figuring in NDS mode or using Windows NT 4.0.

❖ To use NetWare 5/5.1

• Use the printer as a print server. Do not use as a remote printer.
• If you use Pure IP, configure the machine to use the TCP/IP protocol. For
more information about how to make the settings, see the General Settings
Guide.

Setting Up as a Print Server

Important
❒ You can set up the print server using NDS or Bindery mode in NetWare 4.x,
5
5/5.1. The following procedure is for NetWare 3.x and for setting up the print
server using NDS mode in NetWare 4.1. When you set up the print server us-
ing Bindery mode, use the NIB Setup Tool Wizard. See p.61 “Quick Setup Us-
ing the NIB Setup Tool Wizard”.
Note
❒ If you use Pure IP in NetWare 5/5.1, follow the procedure on p.70 “Using
Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 Environment”.

A Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.

Note
❒ When using NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, log on the file server as an administrator
or an administrator equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference
See p.60 “Running the NIB Setup Tool” .

C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK].

The [NIB Setup Tool - Network board list] dialog box of the Network Interface
Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol].

65
 NetWare Configuration

E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be config-
ured, and then click [Next >].
Note
❒ If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring, see
the network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network Ad-
dress).

F Make sure that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and then click
[Finish].
The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears.

G Click [Configure].
The property sheet appears.

H Click the [General] tab, and then type the name of the print server into the
[Device Name] box.
5 I Click the [NetWare] tab, and then make the following settings.
NetWare 3.x
A Select [Bindery].
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a
print server is to be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.
C Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
D After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].

NetWare 4.1
A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a
print server is to be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.
C In the [NDS Context] box, type the context in which the print server is to
be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a context among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.

66
 NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings

As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a
period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under
DS, type “NET.DS”.

D Click [OK] to close the property sheet.

E After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].

J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.
NetWare 3.x
A Type “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE
5
NetWare 4.1
A From Windows, run NWAdmin.
Reference
For more information about NWAdmin, see the documentation that
comes with the NetWare.

K Create a print queue as follows:

Note
❒ If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step L.

NetWare 3.x
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information], and then
press the {ENTER} } key.
B Press the {INSERT}} key, and then type a print queue name.
C Press the {ESC}} key to return to the [Available Options] menu.

NetWare 4.1
A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in
the directory tree, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click “Print Queue”, and then click [OK].
C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue.

67
 NetWare Configuration

D In the [Print Queue volume] box, click [Browse].

E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
F After checking the settings, click [Create].

L Create a printer as follows:

NetWare 3.x
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] , and then
press the {ENTER}} key.
B To create a new print server, press the {INSERT} } key, and then type a
print server name.
If you use a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers
shown in the [Print Server] list.
Important
5 ❒ Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. ( Step H).
C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
E Select the printer which is indicated as “Not Installed”.
F If you want to change the name of the printer, type a new name.
A name “Printer x” is assigned to the printer. “x” stands for the number of
the selected printer.
G For type, select [Remote Other/Unknown].
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automat-
ically configured.
H Press the {ESC}} key, and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
I Press the {ESC}} key to return to the [Print Server Configuration] menu.

NetWare 4.1
A Select the container object the printer is located in, and then click [Create]
on the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click “Printer”, and then click [OK]. When
you are using NetWare 5/5.1, click “Printer (Non NDPS)”.
C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer.
D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].

68
 NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings

M Assign print queues to the created printer as follows:

NetWare 3.x
A From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
B Select the printer created in step L.
C Press the {INSERT} } key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
Note
❒ You can select more than one queue at a time.
D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.
When you have finished the above steps, make sure that the queues are as-
signed.
E Press the {ESC}} key until “Exit?” appears, and then select [Yes] to exit
PCONSOLE.
Note 5
❒ To make sure that the printer is correctly configured, type the following
from the command prompt.
F:> USERLIST
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears
as an attached user.
❒ NetWare 3.x ends here.

NetWare 4.1
A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.
B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step K, and then
click [OK].
C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the
drop-down menu, and then click [Communication].
D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and then click [OK].
E After checking the settings, click [OK].

N Create a print server as follows:

A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (step I-A A), and on
the [Object] menu, click [Create].
B In the [Class of new object] box, click “Print Server”, and then click [OK].
When you are using NetWare 5/5.1, click “Print Server (Non NDPS)”.
C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server.
Important
❒ Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H)
D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
69
 NetWare Configuration

O Assign the printer to the created print server as follows.

A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.
B In the [Available objects] box, click the printer created in step L, and then
click [OK].
C After checking the settings, click [OK].
Note
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears
as an attached user.

Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 Environment

A Log on to the file server as an Administrator or an administrator equivalent.
B Run the NIB Setup Tool.
5 Reference
See p.60 “Running the NIB Setup Tool” .

C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK].

The [Network board list] dialog box appears.

D Click [TCP/IP protocol].

E Click the IP address of the Network Interface Board which is to be config-
ured, and then click [Next >].
Note
❒ If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,
see the network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network
Address).

F Make sure that the MAC address and IP address are correct, and then click
[Finish].
The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears.

G Click [Configure].
The property sheet appears.

H Click the [General] tab, and then type the name of the print server into the
[Device Name] box.

I Click the [NetWare] tab, and then make the following settings.
A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.

70
 NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings

B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a
print server is to be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse File Server] dialog box.
C In the [NDS Context] box, type the context of the print server.
Clicking [Browse], you can select an NDS tree and an NDS context among
those listed in the [Browse Context] dialog box.
As a context, object names are typed from a lower object and divided by a
period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under
DS, type “NET.DS”.

D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Print Server]. 5
E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
F After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].

J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.
After this step, go to step J on p.65 “Setting Up as a Print Server”.
Note
❒ When not using IPX, it is recommended that you change the print server
protocol in the web browser from [TCP/IP+IPX] to [TCP/IP].

Setting Up as a Remote Printer

A Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or a Supervisor equivalent.
Note
❒ When using NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, log on to the file server as an administra-
tor or administrator equivalent.

B Run the NIB Setup Tool.

Reference
See p.60 “Running the NIB Setup Tool” .

C Click [Property Sheet] and click [OK].

The [NIB Setup Tool - Network board list] dialog box of the Network Interface
Board appears.

D Click [IPX protocol].

71
 NetWare Configuration

E Click the IPX address of the Network Interface Board which is to be config-
ured, and then click [Next >].
Note
❒ If you do not know which Network Interface Board you are configuring,
see the network configuration page to check the MAC address (Network
Address).

F Make sure that the MAC address and IPX address are correct, and then click
[Finish].
The [NIB Setup Tool] window appears.

G Click [Configure].
The property sheet appears.

H Click the [General] tab, and then type the name of the print server into the
[Device Name] box.
5 I Click the [NetWare] tab, and then make the following settings.
NetWare 3.x
A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a
print server is to be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.
C In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].
D In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the printer number.
Important
❒ Use the same printer number as that to be created in the printer server.
E Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
F After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].

NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1

A In the [Print Server Name] box, type the name of the print server.
B In the [File Server Name] box, type the name of the file server in which a
print server is to be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.

72
 NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings

C In the [NDS Context] box, type the context in which the print server is to
be created.
Clicking [Browse], you can select a context among those listed in the
[Browse] dialog box.
As a context, object names are typed from a lower level object and divided
by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET un-
der DS, type “NET.DS”.

D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].
E In the [Remote Printer No.] box, type the number of the printer.
Important
❒ Use the same number as that of the printer to be created in the print
5
server.
F Click [OK] to close the property sheet.
G After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK].

J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit the NIB Setup Tool.
NetWare 3.x
A Type “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE

NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1

A From Windows, run NWAdmin.
Reference
For more information about NWAdmin, see the documentation that
comes with the NetWare.

K Create a print queue as follows:

Note
❒ If you use a currently defined print queue, go to step L.

NetWare 3.x
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information], and then
press the {ENTER}} key.

73
 NetWare Configuration

B Press the {INSERT}} key, and then type a print queue name.
C Press the {ESC}} key to return to the [Available Options] menu.

NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1

A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in
the directory tree, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click “Print Queue”, and then click [OK].
C In the [Print Queue name] box, type the name of the print queue.
D In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
F After checking the settings, click [Create].

L Create a printer as follows:

5 NetWare 3.x
A From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information], and then
press the {ENTER}} key.
B To create a new print server, press the {INSERT} } key, and then type a
print server name.
If you use a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers
shown in the [Print Server] list.
Important
❒ Use the same name as that specified in the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H).
C From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
D From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
E Select the printer which is indicated as “Not Installed”.
Important
❒ Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using the
NIB Setup Tool. (Step I-D).
F If you want to change the name of the printer, type a new name.
A name “Printer x” is assigned to the printer. x stands for the number of
the selected printer.
G Select [Remote Parallel, LPT1] as printer type.
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automat-
ically configured.
H Press the {ESC}} key, and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box.
I Press the {ESC}} key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu].

74
 NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5/5.1- Advanced Settings

NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1

A Select the container object the printer is located in, and then click [Create]
in the [Object] menu.
B In the [Class of new object] box, click “Printer”, and then click [OK]. When
you are using NetWare 5/5.1, click “Printer (Non NDPS)”.
C In the [Printer name] box, type the name of the printer.
D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].

M Assign print queues to the created printer as follows:

NetWare 3.x
A From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
B Select the printer created in step L.
C Press the {INSERT} } key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
5
Note
❒ You can select more than one queue at a time.
D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.
When you have finished the above steps, make sure that the queues are as-
signed.
E Press the {ESC} } key until “Exit?” appears, and then select [Yes] to exit
PCONSOLE.
F Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the
NetWare Server.
If it is running, restart it after exiting it.

❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver

❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Note
❒ If the printer works as configured, “Waiting for job” appears.
❒ NetWare 3.x ends here.

NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1

A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.
B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step K, and then
click [OK].

75
 NetWare Configuration

C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] box, select [Parallel] using the
drop-down menu, and then click [Communication].
D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and then click [OK].
E After checking the settings, click [OK].

N Create a print server as follows:

A Select the context specified using the NIB Setup Tool (Step I-A A), and on
the [Object] menu, click [Create].
B In the [Class of new object] box, click “Print Server”, and then click [OK].
When you are using NetWare 5/5.1, click “Print Server (Non NDPS)”.
C In the [Print Server name] box, type the name of the print server.
Important
❒ Use the same name as that specified using the NIB Setup Tool. (Step H).
D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].

5 O Assign the printer to the created print server as follows.

A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group.
B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in the step K, and
then click [OK].
C In the [Printers] group, click the printer assigned in step B , and then click
[Printer Number].
D Type the printer number and click [OK].
Important
❒ Specify the same printer No. as used with the NIB Setup Tool. (Step I-
E).
E After checking the settings, click [OK].

P Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the Net-
Ware Server.
If it is running, restart it after exiting it.

❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver

❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name

76
 Setting Up a Client Computer

Setting Up a Client Computer

This section describes how to set up a client computer when using a NetWare
print server.
Note
❒ Use the version of Novell Client provided with your operating system or the
latest version.
❒ This section assumes that the client has NetWare client applications installed
and is correctly configured to communicate with a NetWare print server. If
not, install the necessary applications before starting the setting up proce-
dure.

Windows 95/98/Me
Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 95/98/Me client.
5
Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.

A Install the printer driver you want to use as “Local printer”.

Reference
For more information about installing the printer driver, see the Printer
Reference 1.
Note
❒ Any port can be selected during the installation, however, LPT1 is recom-
mended.

B Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].

C In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use.
D On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
E Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Add Port].
F Click [Network] and click [Browse].
G On the network tree, double-click the name of the file server.
The queues are displayed.

H Click the queue you want to print, and then click [OK].
I Click [OK].
In the [Print to the following port] box, a network path to the printer appears.

77
 NetWare Configuration

J Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and again, open it.
K Click the [Printer Settings] tab.
L Select to clear the [Form feed] and [Enable banner] check boxes.
Note
❒ You should not select these boxes because they should be specified in the
printer driver. If they are selected, the printer might not print correctly.

When using the PostScript printer driver

Follow these steps to set up for the PostScript printer driver.
A Click the [PostScript] tab.
B Click [Advanced].
C Click to clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check
boxes.
5
M Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

Follow the procedure to set up a Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0 client.
Preparation
Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure.

A Double-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop and navigate to the
queue you want to use, and then double-click it.
The [printers] dialog box appears.
Note
❒ When using Windows NT 4.0, the [Network Neighborhood] icon appears on
the desktop instead of the [My Network Places] icon.

B Click [No].
C Close all the applications that are currently running.
D Insert the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities” into the CD-
ROM drive.
If the setup menu starts automatically, you can go to the next step. If not, see
the Printer Reference 1.

E The [Printer Installation] dialog box appears.

78
 Setting Up a Client Computer

F From the [Port] list, select the queue you selected in step A, and then click
[Next >].

G Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation of the

printer driver.

79
 NetWare Configuration

80
 6. Macintosh Configuration

Configuring Macintosh
This section describes how to configure a Macintosh computer to use EtherTalk.
The actual procedures to configure a Macintosh may vary depending on the ver-
sion of the Mac OS. The following procedure describes how to configure Mac OS
9.1. If you are not using Mac OS 9.1, see the manual that comes with your version
of Mac OS for more information.

Basic Procedure

Change to EtherTalk

Configure the printer

Change the printer name

Change the zone

Limitation
❒ Mac OS 8.6, or a later version, is required.
Note
❒ To print from a Macintosh, the optional module that includes PostScript 3
must be expanded.
❒ To use a Macintosh, you need to install Adobe PS Printer Driver from the CD-
ROM with the module that includes PostScript 3.

81
 Macintosh Configuration

Changing to EtherTalk
The following procedure is for configuring a Macintosh computer to use
EtherTalk.
Reference
For more information about installing the software required for EtherTalk,
see the Macintosh manuals.

A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [AppleTalk] icon.

B From the [Connect via] pop-up menu, select “Ethernet”.
C If you change zones, select a name from the [Current zone] pop-up menu.
D Close the [AppleTalk] control panels.
E Restart the Macintosh.

Configuring the Printer

6 Use the control panel to activate the EtherTalk protocol. (The default is active.)
Reference
For more information about configuration, see the General Settings Guide.

Changing the Printer Name

If the network has several similar model printers, the names will be the same.
Printers that have the same name will have their names slightly changed in the
Chooser. For example, three printers named “printer” will appear in the chooser
as “printer0”, “printer1” and “printer2”.
To change the printer name in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment, use the
Printer Utility for Mac included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.

Changing the Zone

To change the zone configuration in the Macintosh EtherTalk environment, use
the Printer Utility for Mac included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers
and Utilities”.
Reference
For more information about using Printer Utilities for Mac, see PostScript 3
Supplement provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating In-
structions”.

82
 7. Appendix

Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, not only can you monitor the status of net-
work printers, but you also can change the configuration of the Network Inter-
face Board using the TCP/IP protocol or IPX/SPX protocol.
SmartNetMonitor for Admin is equipped with the following functions.
• Limits the settings to be done from the control panel, and disables changes to
be made to some of the items.
• Enables the selection of paper type loaded in the printer.
• Switches to the Energy Saver mode, and wakes up from the Energy Saver
mode.
• Checks the information on printing, paper exhaustion, and such, on the com-
puter.
• Monitors multiple printers at the same time. When there are many printers,
you can create groups and classify the printers to facilitate management.
• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of devices.
• Enables you to change the printer's network settings.
• Checks the number of pages printed for each computer, using the user codes.
OS Protocol Stack
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98
Novell Client for Windows 95/98
Microsoft Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000
Microsoft Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000

Note
❒ Select the appropriate protocol stack for your operating system.

83
 Appendix

Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration

Limitation
❒ To use NIB Setup Tool, Internet Explorer 4.01 or a later version is required.

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printers appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer you want to change its configuration.

D From the [Tools] menu, select [NIB Setup Tool].
The NIB Setup Tool starts up.

E Select [Wizard] or [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].

• When configuring the Network Interface Board for the first time, select
[Wizard].
• When changing the configuration of the Network Interface Board or con-
7 figuring it in detail, select [Property Sheet].

Selecting [Wizard]
A Fill in the necessary items, and then click [Next].

Selecting [Property Sheet]

A A configuration list appears on the dialog box.
For more information about each item on the dialog box, see Help.

84
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Locking the Operation Panel Menu

Limitation
❒ If you use User Code Maintenance Tool, you need a computer and devices
that communicate with TCP/IP (HTTP).

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer whose statistics information you want to man-
age.

D From the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Lock Opera-
tion Panel Menu].
The screen that prompts you to type a password appears.

E Type the password, and then click [OK].

Note 7
❒ The factory default password is “password”.
The Web Status Monitor starts up.
For more information about using the Device Settings, see SmartNetMonitor
for Admin Help.

85
 Appendix

Selecting the Paper Type

Limitation
❒ If you use User Code Maintenance Tool, you need a computer and devices
that communicate with TCP/IP (HTTP).

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer whose statistics information you want to man-
age.

D From the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Select Paper
Type].
The screen that prompts you to type a password appears.

E Type the password, and then click [OK].

7 Note
❒ The factory default password is “password”.
The Web Status Monitor starts up.
For more information about using the Device Settings, see SmartNetMonitor
for Admin Help.

86
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Managing the User Information

Limitation
❒ If you use User Code Maintenance Tool, you need a computer and devices
that communicate with TCP/IP (HTTP).

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer whose statistics information you want to man-
age.

D From the [Tools] menu, select [User Management Tool].

The screen that prompts you to type a password appears.

E Type the password, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ The factory default password is “password”. 7
The User Code Maintenance Tool starts up.
For more information about using the User Management Tool, see SmartNet-
Monitor for Admin Help.

87
 Appendix

Viewing and Deleting Spool Print Jobs

Limitation
❒ If you use User Code Maintenance Tool, you need a computer and devices
that communicate with TCP/IP (HTTP).

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer whose statistics information you want to man-
age.

D From the [Tools] menu, select [Spool Printing Job List (Printer)].
The Web Status Monitor starts up.

❖ Viewing the Spool Print Job List (Printer)

When the Web Status Monitor starts up, you can check the Spool Print Job
list.
7
❖ Deleting Spool Print Jobs
On the list, select the check box of the Spool Print Job you want to delete,
enter the password, and then click [Delete].
For more information about using this function, see SmartNetMonitor for Ad-
min Help.

88
 Using SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Managing the E-mail Information

Limitation
❒ If you use E-mail Management Tool, you need a computer and devices that
communicate with TCP/IP (HTTP).

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer whose statistics information you want to man-
age.

D From the [Tools] menu, select [E-mail Management Tool].

The screen that prompts you to type a password appears.

E Type the password, and then click [OK].

Note
❒ The factory default password is “password”. 7
The E-mail Management Tool starts up.
For more information about using the User Management Tool, see SmartNet-
Monitor for Admin Help.

Configuring the Energy Save Mode

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printer appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C Click [Group], point to [Energy Save Mode], and select any energy saver mode
from the menu that appears.
For more information about settings, see SmartNetMonitor for Admin Help.
Note
❒ When you point to [Set Individually], [Timer Settings] is not displayed.

89
 Appendix

Configuring the Network Interface Board

with a Web Browser
The Network Interface Board functions as a Web server in addition to allowing
a printer to function as a network printer. You can use a Web Browser to view
the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board.
Note
❒ When using the proxy server, you must set up the Web Browser.

❖ Configuring the machine

This requires the TCP/IP protocol to be installed. After the machine has been
configured to use the TCP/IP protocol, it will be possible to adjust the settings
using a Web Browser.
Reference
For more information about configuring the machine to use the TCP/IP
protocol, see the General Settings Guide.

❖ Operating system browser requirements

OS Browser
Windows 95/98/Me
7 Windows 2000/XP
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or later
Windows NT 4.0
Netscape Navigator 4.06 or later
Mac OS 8.6 ∼ 9.1
Solaris 2.5/2.6/2.7/7/8

Limitation
❒ Sometimes after clicking [Back] , the previous page may not appear. In this
case, click [Refresh] or [Reload] .
❒ The text on the screen may disappear or be aligned incorrectly if the font
size settings of the browser are too large. It is recommended that you use
a font size equal to or smaller than “10 point” with Netscape Navigator,
and “Medium” or smaller with Internet Explorer.
❒ This machine information cannot reload automatically. Click [Reload] or
[Refresh] on the Web Browser when you want to reload this machine infor-
mation.

90
 Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser

Going to the Top Page

After launching the Web Browser, type the IP address of the machine. See the
example below. This example is for the English version.
http://192.168.15.16/
(In this example, the IP address of the Network Interface Board is 192.168.15.16.)
Note
❒ If a DNS server is used on the network, you can type the host name as a URL.
For example, http://webmonitor.netprinter.com/. In order to do this, you
must register the IP address and the host name of the Network Interface
Board with the DNS server. Consult the network administrator for informa-
tion about how to do this.
❒ Make sure to set the appropriate proxy server settings in the Web Browser
you are using. Otherwise you may not be able to connect to the local network
printer. Consult the network administrator for information about how to set
the proxy server.

1
2

3
7
1. Header Buttons 2. Menu Buttons
You can register favorite URLs with These Buttons are to configure the Net-
[URL]. To view the Help section, click work Interface Board and for checking
[Help]. the status of the machine.

Important Note
❒ When connecting via a dial-up con- ❒ When you click [Configuration], a dia-
nection, please be aware that there log box appears requesting the user
will be a communication charge as name and password. Type only the
you are logging onto the Internet. password in this dialog box. The de-
fault password is “password”.
Note ❒ The password is the same as that used
❒ The Help files are stored on the CD- for remote maintenance and that used
ROM labeled “Operating Instruc- in the NIB Setup Tool. If you change a
tions” in HTML format. password with the Web Browser, the
other passwords are also changed.
3. Status
Displays the name and comments of the
Network Interface Board, and the printer
status.

91
 Appendix

Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings

A Start the Web browser.
B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. ht-
tp://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where the Xs are the number of the IP address).
The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser.

C Click [Config. Reference].

The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed.

D Click the item you want to check.

The following items can be checked:

❖ [General]
Shows general settings for the machine.

❖ [IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)]

Shows 802.11b Interface Kit settings related to communication.
Limitation
❒ This page is displayed when the 802.11b Interface Kit is installed.

7 ❖ [TCP/IP]
Shows TCP/IP-related settings for Network Interface Board, 802.11b Inter-
face Kit, and 1394 interface Board.

❖ [NetWare]
Shows Network Interface Board or 802.11b Interface Kit settings related to
a NetWare environment.

❖ [AppleTalk]
Shows Network Interface Board or 802.11b Interface Kit settings related to
the AppleTalk protocol.

❖ [NetBEUI]
Shows Network Interface Board or 802.11b Interface Kit settings related to
the NetBEUI protocol.

❖ [IEEE 1394]
Shows 1394 interface Board settings related to IP over 1394 and SCSI print
(SBP-2).
Limitation
❒ This page is displayed when 1394 interface Board is installed.

❖ [SMTP]
Shows SMTP settings.

92
 Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser

- Linking the address (URL) to the [Help] button

You can link the address (URL) of the [Help] button to the Help files on the com-
puter or on a Web server.
A Copy the Help files on the CD-ROM to the desired location. The Help files are
located in folders labeled with abbreviated language names; for example,
English Help files are in the [EN] folder. Make sure to copy the entire [EN] fold-
er to the new location.
B Using a Web Browser, navigate to the Top Page and click [Network config].
C Type your password, (it is not necessary to type a user name) and click [OK].
D Type the path to the Help files in the [Help URL] box.
If you copied the Help files to “C:\HELP\EN”, type “file ://C:/HELP/”. For
example, if you copied the files to a Web server and the index URL is “ht-
tp://a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html”, type “http://a.b.c.d/HELP/”.
E Click [Apply].
When a warning message appears, select to continue configuration.

Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings

A Start the Web browser. 7
B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. ht-
tp://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where the Xs are the number of the IP address).
The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser.

C Click [Configuration].
The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed.

D Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the factory default account, enter no user name and type “password”
for the password.

E Click the item you want to configure, and then make all the settings.
The following items can be configured:

❖ [General]
Configure the general settings for the machine here.

❖ [IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)]

Configure 802.11b Interface Kit settings related to communication.
Limitation
❒ This page is displayed when the 802.11b Interface Kit is installed.

93
 Appendix

Note
❒ For more information about the settings, see the Help.

❖ [TCP/IP]
Configure TCP/IP-related settings for Network Interface Board, 802.11b
Interface Kit, and 1394 interface Board.

❖ [SNMP]
Configure the appropriate community settings here. Up to 10 types of
community names can be registered.

❖ [NetWare]
Configure Network Interface Board or 802.11b Interface Kit settings relat-
ed to a NetWare environment.

❖ [AppleTalk]
Configure Network Interface Board or 802.11b Interface Kit settings relat-
ed to the AppleTalk protocol.

❖ [NetBEUI]
Configure Network Interface Board or 802.11b Interface Kit settings relat-
ed to the NetBEUI protocol.

❖ [IEEE 1394]
Configure 1394 interface Board settings related to IP over 1394 and SCSI
7 print (SBP-2).
Limitation
❒ This page is displayed when 1394 interface Board is installed.

❖ [SMTP]
Configure SMTP settings.

❖ [IPP Authentication]
If using IPP protocol, configure the authentication settings for printing
here.

❖ [Paper Type]
Select the paper type loaded in the machine from the drop-down menu.

❖ [Password]
Follow the procedure below to change the password.
Enter the password to change the network and machine settings or delete
spooled print jobs.

94
 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Changing Names and Comments

You can change printer names and make a comment on printers to easily iden-
tify the printers listed on SmartNetMonitor for Client.
The following utilities are used to change printer names and comments.

❖ SmartNetMonitor for Admin

Allows you to change names and comments when the TCP/IP protocol or
IPX/SPX protocol is available. You can install SmartNetMonitor for Admin
from the CD-ROM that comes with the printer. For more information about
installing SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see p.60 “Installing SmartNetMoni-
tor for Admin”.

❖ Web Browser
Allows you to change names and comments when the TCP/IP protocol is
available.
Note
❒ Each of the names, in a TCP/IP protocol form (printer name) and in a Net-
BEUI protocol form, is changed individually. Comments are, however,
common to both of them.
7
❒ The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the
MAC address on the Network Interface Board. For example, when the
MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is
“RNP627DD5”. Comments are not configured.

SmartNetMonitor for Admin

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
A list of printers appears.
Note
❒ Select the protocol of the printer you want to change its configuration.

C On the list, select a printer whose Network Interface Board you want to
change its configuration.

D From the [Tools] menu, select [NIB Setup Tool].

The NIB Setup Tool starts up.

95
 Appendix

E Select [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].

TCP/IP
A Click the [General] tab, and then type the device name into the [Device
Name] box and comment into the [Comment] box.
• In the [Device Name] box, type the name of the printer in under 13 char-
acters. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes
of the MAC address on the Network Interface Board. For example,
when the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is
“RNP627DD5”. No name of 9 characters is permitted if the prefix is
“RNP”. Also, when DHCP is selected as an IP address setting, the
number of characters is limited to 13 characters.
• In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers in under 31 charac-
ters.

NetBEUI
A Click the [General] tab, and then type the comment into the [Comment]
box.
In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers in under 31 characters.
B Click the [NetBEUI] tab.
7 C Type the computer name into the [Computer Name] box.
• In the [Computer Name] box, type the name that helps you to identify
printers using the NetBEUI protocol. The factory default name consists
of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the Network In-
terface Board. For example, when the MAC address is
00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. A maxi-
mum of 13 characters consisting of uppercase English letters, numeric,
or symbols (except "*+,/:;<=>?[\]|. and space) can be used. No name is
permitted if the prefix is “RNP”. You must avoid the duplication of the
same name on a network.

F When the configuration message appears, click [OK].

The NIB Setup Tool exits, and the setting is transmitted to the printer.

G Exit SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

96
 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

Web Browser

A Run the Web browser.

B Type the address “http:// (IP address of the printer you want to change the
settings)”.
The status of the selected printer is displayed on the Web browser.

C Click [Configuration].
A dialog box that prompts you to type the user name and a password ap-
pears.

D Type the user name and the password, and then click [OK].
Type only the password in this dialog box. The factory default password is
“password”.

E Change names and comments.

TCP/IP
A Click [General], and then type the name into the [Device Name] box and
comment into the [Comment] box.
• In the [Device Name] box, enter the name of the printer in under 13 char-
acters. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes 7
of the MAC address on the Network Interface Board. For example,
when the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is
“RNP627DD5”. No name of 9 characters is permitted if the prefix is
“RNP”. Also, when DHCP is selected as an IP address setting, the
number of characters is limited to in under 13 characters.
• In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers in under 31 charac-
ters.
B Click the [IEEE 1394], and then type the name into the [Device Name] box
when you change the device name for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface.
• In the [Device Name] box, enter the name of the printer in under 13 char-
acters. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 5 bytes
of the EUI-64 on the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) Interface. For example,
when the EUI-64 is 00:00:74:00:02:01:0A:66, the factory default name is
“RNP0002010A66”. No name of 13 characters is permitted if the prefix
is “RNP”.

97
 Appendix

NetBEUI
A Click [NetBEUI].
B Type the name into the [Computer Name] box and comment into the [Com-
ment] box.
• In the [Computer Name] box, type the name that helps you to identify
printers using the NetBEUI protocol. The factory default name consists
of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the Network In-
terface Board. For example, when the MAC address is
00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. A maxi-
mum of 13 characters consisting of uppercase English letters, numeric,
or symbols (except "*+,/:;<=>?[\]|. and space) can be used. No name is
permitted if the prefix is “RNP”. You must avoid the duplication of the
same name on a network.
• In the [Comment] box, type any comment on printers in under 31 charac-
ters.

F Click [Apply].
The setting is transmitted to the printer.

G Exit the Web browser.

7 Displaying the Status of Printer

You can view the status of printers using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, Smart-
NetMonitor for Client, or Web browser.

SmartNetMonitor for Admin

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Admin.

B Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then select [TCP/IP] or
[IPX/SPX].
The status of printers is indicated with an icon in the list.
Note
❒ For more information about the status icons, see SmartNetMonitor for Ad-
min Help.

C Getting further information, click the desired printer to select from the list,
and then click [Open] on the [Device] menu.
The status of the printer is displayed on the dialog box.
Note
❒ For more information about each item on the dialog box, see Help.

98
 Monitoring and Configuring the Printer

SmartNetMonitor for Client

Viewing the status of printers using SmartNetMonitor for Client, you must, in
advance, configure SmartNetMonitor for Client so it monitors the printer whose
status you want to view.

Monitoring Printers

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Client.

The SmartNetMonitor for Client icon appears at the right end of the taskbar.

B Right-click the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon, and check if the desired
printer is configured on the pop-up menu that appears.
If it is configured, see SmartNetMonitor for Client Help.

C If the desired printer is not configured, click [Options] on the pop-up menu.
The [SmartNetMonitor for Client - Options] dialog box appears.

D Click the printer to be monitored, and select the [To be Monitored] check box
from the [Monitoring Information Settings] group.
Note
❒ Selecting the [Displayed on Task Bar] check box will bring up the status of a
printer with an icon on the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon on the task 7
tray.

E Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the configured printer is monitored.

Displaying the Status of Printers

A Run SmartNetMonitor for Client.

B The status of printers is displayed on the SmartNetMonitor for Client icon
on the task tray.
Note
❒ For more information about the status icons, see SmartNetMonitor for Cli-
ent Help.

C Getting further information on the status, right-click the SmartNetMonitor

for Client icon, and then click the desired printer.
The status of the printer is displayed on the dialog box.
Note
❒ For more information about each item on the dialog box, see Help.

99
 Appendix

Web Browser

A Run the Web browser.

B Type the address “http:// (IP address of the printer whose status you want
to view)”.
The status of the selected printer is displayed on the Web browser.

C Click [Status] and you can check the status of the printer.
Note
❒ For more information about each item, see Help.

100
 Using the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)

Using the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)

Preparation
Make sure to configure the IP address and Subnet mask of this machine. To
make settings from the control panel of this machine, see the General Settings
Guide.
Use the WiFi authorized card for an access point and the IEEE 802.11b card in
the computer.

Setting IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)

Note
❒ When using Windows XP standard Driver or Utilities to communicate with
Windows XP wireless LAN clients, select “802.11 ad hoc mode”.

101
 Appendix

Using in Infrastructure Mode

Infrastructure mode is for transmitting data to the network via an access point.
The infrastructure mode settings can be made on the machine control panel;
however, they can also be made from telnet or a web browser.
Reference
For more information about how to make settings from the control panel of
the printer, see the General Settings Guide.
For more information about how to use telnet and a Web browser, see p.90
“Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser” or p.105
“Remote Maintenance by telnet”.
Important
❒ If you cannot connect after making SSID and WEP key settings, press [System
Settings] then [Interface Settings] then [IEEE 802.11b], and then [Return to Defaults]
to return to the default settings.
❒ With some products, depending on the access point or IEEE 802.11b card in
use, it is possible to set more than one WEP key. In this case, make the first
key the same as the WEP key set in the printer.

Using in Ad hoc Mode

7
Ad hoc mode is for transmitting data between wireless LAN clients without us-
ing an access point. Depending on the client's operating environment, make sure
to select “802.11 ad hoc mode” which need a SSID or “ad hoc mode” which does
not need a SSID. The ad hoc mode settings can be made on the machine control
panel; however, they can also be made from telnet or a web browser.
Reference
For more information about how to make settings from the control panel of
the machine, see the General Settings Guide.
For more information about how to use telnet and a Web browser, see p.90
“Configuring the Network Interface Board with a Web Browser” or p.105
“Remote Maintenance by telnet”.
For more information about how to make setting for the IEEE 802.11b card in-
stalled in the computer and the computer in use, see the appropriate operat-
ing instructions or consult your network administrator.
Note
❒ Depending on the client software of the IEEE 802.11b card installed in the
computer, the channels might not be able to be set. In this case, set the printer
channel to the channel specified by the computer.
❒ When there are multiple ad hoc mode clients using different communication
modes, communications may not work correctly.

102
 Using the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)

2. If it is connected properly to a net-

Confirming the Connection work, the LED is green in ad hoc
mode or 802.11 ad hoc mode. When
A Make sure the LED of the IEEE the LED is blinking, the machine is
searching for devices. The LED will
802.11b card is lit.
light after a few seconds.
❖ When using in Infrastracture Mode
B Use a Web Browser to check the
printer is connected properly. See
p.90 “Configuring the Network
I n t e r f ac e B o a r d w it h a W eb
Browser”.

C Print the configuration page to

1 verify settings.
2
For more information about how
to print the configuration page, see
ZGDH600J
the Printer Reference 2.
1. If the IEEE 802.11b card is work-
ing, it is lit in orange. If the IEEE Infrastracture Mode
802.11b (wireless LAN) is not select-
ed, it does not light, even if the print- You can check the machine's radio
er power is on. wave status using the machine's con-
trol panel.
2. If it is connected properly to a net-
work, the LED is green in infrastruc- A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. 7
ture mode. When the LED is
blinking, the machine is searching B Press [System Settings].
for devices.
C Press [Interface Settings].
❖ When using in Ad hoc Mode/802.11
Ad hoc Mode D Press [IEEE 802.11b].
E Press [Wireless LAN Signal].
The machine's radio wave status is
displayed.

F After checking the machine's ra-

dio wave status, press [Exit].
1
2

ZGDH600J

1. If the IEEE 802.11b card is work-

ing, it is lit in orange.

103
 Appendix

When Moving the Machine

When moving the machine with the antennas attached, keep the following
points in mind.
Detach the antennas when relocating the machine.
After moving the machine, reattach the antennas, ensuring that:
• the antennas are positioned away from obstacles.
• there is 40 to 60 mm between the antennas, so they do not touch.
• the exposure glass cover and Document Feeder (ADF) do not hit the anten-
nas.

104
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

Remote Maintenance by telnet

You can view the printer status and configure the Network Interface Board us-
ing telnet.
Note
❒ You should specify a password so that only the network administrator, or a
person having network administrator privileges, can use remote mainte-
nance.
❒ The password is the same as that used for configuring the Network Interface
Board with a Web Browser.
❒ If you change a password with remote maintenance, the other passwords are
also changed.

Using telnet
The following is a sample procedure using telnet.
Limitation
❒ Only one person at a time can be logged on to do remote maintenance.

A Using the IP address or host name of the machine, start telnet.

% telnet IP_address 7
Note
❒ In order to use the host name instead of the IP address, you must write it
to the hosts file.

B Type the password.

Note
❒ The default is “password”.

C Type a command.
Reference
For more information about telnet commands, see p.106 “Commands
List”.

D Exit telnet.
msh> logout
When the configuration is changed, a message requests whether the changes
should be saved or not.

105
 Appendix

E Type “yes” to save the changes, and then press the {ENTER}} key.
If you do not want to save the changes, type “no”, and then press the {ENTER}
}
key. If you want to make additional changes, type “return” at the command
line, and then press the {ENTER} } key.
Note
❒ If the “Cannot write NVRAM information” message appears, the changes
are not saved. Repeat the steps above.
❒ The Network Interface Board is reset automatically when the settings are
changed.
❒ When the Network Interface Board is reset, the active print job which has
already been sent to the machine will finish printing. However, jobs that
have not been sent yet will be canceled.

Commands List
Use this command to display remote maintenance use.
Note
❒ Type “help” to see a list of commands that can be used.
msh> help
❒ Type “help command_name” to display information about the syntax of that
7 command.
msh> help command_name

TCP/IP address
Use the ifconfig command to configure the Ethernet interface, the IEEE 1394 in-
terface/IEEE 802.11b, and the TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast ad-
dress, default gateway address) for the machine.

❖ Reference
msh> ifconfig

❖ Configuration
msh> ifconfig interface_name parameter address
Interface name Interface to be configured
ether Ethernet Interface *1
sie0
ip1394 *2 IEEE 1394 Interface
fwip0 *2
wlan *3 IEEE 802.11b Interface
wi0 *3

106
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

*1 If you did not enter the interface name, it will be automatically set to the Ethernet
interface.
*2
Available when the 1394 Interface Board is installed.
*3
You can specify an interface when installing the optional 802.11b Interface Kit.
Parameter Meaning
(no parameter) IP address
netmask subnet mask
broadcast broadcast address

❖ Changing the Interface

You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b interface when
using the optional 802.11b Interface Kit.
msh> ifconfig interface up
Note
❒ You cannot specify the optional IEEE 1394 Interface Board (ip1394 or
fwip0).
The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16 on
Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16
The following is an example for configuring a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 on
Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0 7
Note
❒ This affects the configuration of the Network Interface Board of the IP ad-
dress used.
❒ The TCP/IP setting is the same as that for the Ethernet interface and IEEE
802.11b interface.
❒ To type an address using hexadecimal, prefix it by “0x”.
❒ When using IEEE 802.11b, see p.116 “Setting IEEE 802.11b” for settings.

- Address

❖ Subnet Mask
A number used to mathematically “mask” or hide the IP address on the net-
work by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the ma-
chines on the network.

❖ Broadcast address
A specified address for sending data to specific devices on the network.

107
 Appendix

Note
❒ To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.
❒ If you don't know the address to configure, use the machine's default settings.
❒ The subnet mask is the same as that for the Ethernet interface and IEEE
802.11b interface. When changing interface, the settings of the former are
used.
❒ When installing the optional 1394 Interface Board, set the subnet so that it
does not overlap with the Ethernet interface or the 1394 interface.

Access Control
Use the access command to view and configure access control. You can also
specify two or more access ranges.

❖ Reference
msh> access

❖ Configuration
msh> access ✩ range start-address end-address
• ✩ represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges
can be registered and selected.)
7 Example: To specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and
192.168.0.20:
msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20
Note
❒ The access range restricts the workstations from which printing is possible
by means of an address. If you do not need to restrict printing, make the
setting “0.0.0.0”.
❒ The entry is invalid if the start address is greater than the end address.
❒ Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target
number is omitted.
❒ When using a Web browser, telnet or SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin,
you can use an IP address that has not been restricted by access control.
However, you cannot print from SmartNetMonitor for Client.

❖ Access Control Initialization

msh> access flush
Note
❒ This restores the factory-default settings so that all access ranges become
“0.0.0.0”.

108
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

Network Boot
Use the set command to configure the boot method.
msh> set parameter {on | off}
• “on” means active and “off” means inactive.
Parameter Meaning
dhcp DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol)

Note
❒ When you use DHCP, the server also needs to be configured.
❒ DHCP takes precedence over all other settings.

Protocol
Use the set command to allow/prevent remote access for each protocol.
msh> set protocol {up | down}
Protocol
appletalk “up” means active and “down” means
tcpip inactive.
netware 7
netbeui
scsiprint *1
ip1394 *1
lpr
ftp
rsh
diprint
web
snmp
ipp
*1
Available when the 1394 Interface Board is installed.
Note
❒ If you prohibit remote access using TCP/IP and then log out, you cannot use
remote access. If this was a mistake, you can use the control panel to allow ac-
cess by TCP/IP.
❒ When you prevent access via TCP/IP, you are also prevented from using
ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp and ipp.

109
 Appendix

Printer status
The following commands can be used to get information about the current status
of the printer.
msh> command
Command Information that is displayed
status Status of printer.
Information about the print jobs.
info Information about the paper tray, output tray,
printer language of printer.
prnlog [ID] Lists the last 16 print jobs.

Note
❒ More information about any print job is displayed when the ID number is
added after the prnlog command.
Reference
For more information about the meaning of the data returned with these com-
mands, see p.125 “Understanding the Displayed Information”.

Network Interface Board configuration settings information

7 Use the show command to display the Network Interface Board configuration
settings.
msh> show [-p]
Note
❒ Add “-p” to the show command to have the information displayed one screen
at a time.
Reference
For more information about the meaning of the data returned with this com-
mand, see p.126 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”.

System log information

Use the syslog command to display information stored in the machine's system
log.
msh> syslog
Reference
For more information about the displayed information, see p.129 “System
Log Information”.

110
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

SNMP
Use the snmp command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such
as the community name.
Note
❒ The 1394 Interface Board supports TCP/IP only.
❒ You can configure from ten SNMP access settings numbered 1-10.
❒ Default access settings 1 and 2 are as follows.
Number 1 2
Community name public admin
IP address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Access type read-only read-write
trap off trap off

❖ Display
Shows the SNMP information and available protocols.
msh> snmp ?
msh> snmp [-p] [registered_number]
Note
❒ If the -p option is added, you can view the settings one by one.
7
❒ Omitting the number displays all access settings.

❖ Community name configuration

You can set the community name of the registered number.
msh> snmp number name community_name
Note
❒ The community name must consist of 15 characters or less.

❖ Access type configuration

You can select the access type from those listed below.
msh> snmp number type access_type
Access type Type of access which is permitted
read Read only
write Read and write
trap User is notified of trap messages.
no All access is denied.

111
 Appendix

❖ Protocol configuration
You should use the following command to set the protocols to active or inac-
tive. If you set a protocol to inactive, all access settings set to use that protocol
will be disabled.
msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}
• “on” means active and “off” means inactive.
To change the protocol of an access settings, use the following command.
However, if you disabled a protocol with the above command, making it ac-
tive here will have no effect.
msh> snmp number active {ip | ipx} {on | off}

❖ Access configuration
You can configure the address of a host depending on the protocols used.
The Network Interface Board accepts requests only from hosts having ad-
dresses with access types of “read-only” or “read-write”. Type “0” to have the
Network Interface Board accept requests from any host without requiring a
specific type of access.

msh> snmp number {ip | ipx} address

Note
❒ To specify the TCP/IP protocol, type ip followed by a space, and then the
IP address.
7 ❒ To specify the IPX/SPX protocol, type ipx followed by a space, and then
the IPX address followed by a decimal, and then the MAC address of the
Network Interface Board.
The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with
the IP address 192.168.15.16.
msh> snmp 3 ip 192.168.15.16
The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with
the IPX address 7390A448, and the MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65.
msh> snmp 3 ipx 7390A448:000074625C65

IPP
Use the ipp command to configure the IPP settings.

❖ Viewing setting
The following command displays the current IPP settings.
msh> ipp
Example output:
timeout=900(sec)
auth basic
• The “timeout” setting specifies how many seconds the computer keeps try-
ing to access the network printer to send print jobs when no connection can
be made.
• The “auth” setting indicates the user authorization mode.
112
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

❖ IPP timeout configuration

Specify how many seconds to wait before canceling a print job if it has been
interrupted for some reason. The range of time can be changed between 30 to
65535 seconds.
msh> ipp timeout {30 - 65535}

❖ IPP user authorization configuration

Use the IPP user authorization to restrict users that can print with IPP. The de-
fault is “off” .
msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
• “basic” and “digest” are user authorization setting.
• “off” removes the user's authorization.
Note
❒ If you select “basic” or “digest”, see next section “Configuring the IPP User
Authorization” for how to configure the user name. Up to ten user names
are available.

❖ Configuring the IPP user authorization

Use the following command:
msh> ipp user
The following message appears.
Input user number (1 to 10):
Type the number, user name and password. 7
IPP user name:user1
IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the following message appears.
IPP configuration changed.

Direct Printing Port

The direct printing port allows printing directly from a computer, connected to
the network, to the printer.
Use the diprint command to change the direct printing port settings.

❖ View settings
The following command displays the current direct printing port settings.
msh> diprint
Example output:
port 9100
timeout=300(sec)
bidirect off
• The “Port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port.
• The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirec-
tional.
113
 Appendix

❖ Setting timeout
You can specify the timeout interval to use when receiving data from the net-
work.
msh> diprint [0~65535]
Note
❒ The factory default is 300 seconds.
❒ If 0 is set, timeout is disabled.

❖ Bidirectional configuration for the direct printing port

Use this setting to configure whether the direct printing port is bidirectional.
The factory default is “off”.
msh> diprint bidirect {on|off}
Note
❒ If you select “on”, SmartNetMonitor for Client or Standard TCP/IP on
Windows 2000 might not work correctly.

SPRINT
Use the sprint command to view and configure SCSI print (SBP-2) of the IEEE 1394.
Limitation
❒ You can use this function when the optional IEEE 1394 Board is installed.
7
❖ Viewing settings
The following command displays the current IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings.
msh> sprint

❖ Bidirectional configuration for the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)

msh> sprint bidi {on|off}
Use this setting to configure whether the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) is bidirectional.
The factory default is “on”.

SMB
Use the smb command to configure or delete the computer name or workgroup
name for NetBEUI.
msh> smb parameter
Parameter Settings
comp Your computer name consisting of up to 13 characters
group Workgroup name consisting of up to 15 characters
comment Comment consisting of up to 31 characters
clear comp Clears the computer name

114
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

Parameter Settings
clear group Clears the Workgroup name
clear comment Clears comment

Note
❒ You cannot use the computer name starting with RNP or rnp.

ROUTE
Use the route command to control the routing table.
This command allows you to configure and display routing information. You
can change the network configuration from remote PCs using this command.
Note
❒ The maximum number of routing tables are 16.
Commands Topics of setting
route add {host | net} desti- Adds a host/network route to “destination”, and a gateway ad-
nation *1 gateway *1 dress to “gateway” in the table. Host becomes the default setting.
route delete {host | net} Deletes a host/network route from the table. Host becomes the
destination *1 default setting.
route get {destination *1 } Displays only route information corresponding to a specified
destination. When the destination is unspecified, all routing in-
formation is displayed. 7
route active {host | net} des- You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes
tination *1 on/off the default setting.
route add default gateway *1 You can set the default gateway address.
route flush Deletes all routing information.
*1
IP address

SLP
Use this command to configure SLP settings.
You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of
NetWare5/5.1. To use the slp command, you can configure the value of TTL
which can be used by the SLP multi-cast-packet.
Note
❒ The default value of TTL is “1”. A search is executed only within a local seg-
ment. If the router does not support multi-cast, the settings are not available
even if the TTL value is increased.
❒ The acceptable TTL value is 1 - 255.
msh> slp ttl {1 - 255}

115
 Appendix

Setting IEEE 802.11b

Use the wiconfig command to configure the IEEE 802.11b settings.
Limitation
❒ You can make settings when installing the optional 802.11b Interface Kit.

❖ View settings
The following command displays the current IEEE 802.11b settings.
msh> wiconfig
The IEEE 802.11b card information is displayed.
msh> wiconfig cardinfo
Note
❒ If the IEEE 802.11b interface is not working correctly, the IEEE 802.11b card
information is not displayed.

❖ Configuration
Parameter Value to be configured
mode [ap|802.11adhoc|adhoc] You can set infrastructure mode (ap), 802.11
ad hoc mode (802.11adhoc) or ad hoc mode
(adhoc).
The default is 802.11 ad hoc mode.
7 ssid ID value You can set for SSID in infrastructure mode.
The characters that can be used are ASCII
0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
A SSID value is set automatically to the near-
est access point if the setting has not been
made.
If the setting has not been made for ad hoc
mode, the same value as for infrastructure
mode or an “ASSID” value is set automati-
cally if the setting has not been made.
channel frequency channel no. You can set the channel.
You can specify from following channel.
• Metric Version :1-13
• Inch Version :1-11
Set the same channel for all the machines you
are using.
enc [on|off] You can enable or disable the WEP function.
To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to
disable it, specify [off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct
WEP key.

116
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

Parameter Value to be configured

key [key value] 64-bit or 128-bit can be set.
Only 10 hexadecimal characters can be set
when using 64-bit or 26 hexadecimal charac-
ters when using 128-bit.
Also, set 0x as prefix.
To use this function, set the same WEP key
for all the ports that transmit to each other.
auth [open|shared] You can set the authorized mode when using
WEP. The specified value and the authorized
mode are as follows:
open: Open system authorized (default)
shared: Shared key authorized
rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m] You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting
speed.
The transmitting speed you specify here is
the speed at which data is sent. You can re-
ceive data at any speed.
auto: automatically set (default)
11m: 11 Mbps fixed
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed
2m: 2 Mbps fixed
1m: 1 Mbps fixed
7
Note
❒ When changing the Interface to IEEE 802.11b, see p.106 “TCP/IP address”
❒ When configuring the IEEE 802.11b TCP/IP, see p.106 “TCP/IP address”

Job Spool
Use this command to configure Job Spool settings.
Limitation
❒ You can only specify the LPR and IPP protocol.
Note
❒ This machine information cannot reload automatically when you confirm the
Job spool settings on the Web browser. Click [Reload] or [Refresh] on the Web
browser when you want to reload this machine information.

❖ Reference
The job spool setting appears.
msh> spoolsw

117
 Appendix

❖ Job Spool Setting

msh> spoolsw spool {on | off}
Note
❒ Specify “on” to enable the job spool function or “off” to disable it.

❖ Clearing Spool Job

If the machine is turned off accidentally during a spool job, you can specify
whether the job will be reprinted when the printer is turned back on.
msh> spoolsw clearjob {on |off}

❖ Protocol Configuration
To change the protocol settings, use the following command. You can specify
the setting for [lpr] or [ipp].
• lpr
msh> spoolsw lpr {on |off}
• ipp
msh> spoolsw ipp {on |off}

Changing the Host Name

Use the hostname command to change the printer name.
7 msh> hostname interface_name printer_name
interface name Interface to be configured
ether Ethernet interface *1

wlan *2 IEEE 802.11b interface

ip1394 *3 IEEE 1394 interface

*1 If you did not enter the interface name, it will be automatically set to the Ethernet in-
terface.
*2
If you install the 802.11b Interface Kit, you can set the command.
*3 If you install the 1394 Interface Board, you can set the command.
Note
❒ Enter the printer name using up to 13 characters.
❒ You cannot use a printer name starting with RNP or rnp.
❒ The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same printer
name.

118
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

WINS
Use the wins command to configure the WINS server settings.
For more information about WINS server settings, see p.139 “Configuring a
WINS Server”.

❖ Viewing setting
The following command displays the WINS server IP address.
msh> wins
Example out put:
wins: primary server 0.0.0.0 secondary server 0.0.0.0
DHCP current config:
primary server 192.168.10.1 secondary server
192.168.10.2
hostname RNP620B47 ScopeID
Note
❒ If DHCP is used to start from the network, the current WINS server ad-
dress is displayed. This address, however, is not displayed if DHCP is not
used.
❒ If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address,
the DHCP address is the valid address.

❖ Configuration 7
Use the set command to make WINS active or inactive.
msh> set wins {on|off}
• “on” means active and “off” means inactive.

❖ Address configuration
Use this command to configure a WINS server IP address.
msh> wins {primary|secondary} IP_address
Note
❒ Use the “primary” to configure a primary WINS server IP address.
❒ Use the “secondary” to configure a secondary WINS server IP address.

AutoNet
Use the set command to configure AutoNet.
Note
❒ For more information about AutoNet, see p.138 “Using AutoNet”.
msh> set autonet {on|off}
• “on” means active and “off” means inactive.

119
 Appendix

Changing the password

Use the passwd command to change the remote maintenance password.
Important
❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the password.
Note
❒ The default password is “password”.

A Type “passwd”.
msh> passwd

B Type the current password.

Old password:

C Type the new password.

New password:
Note
❒ The password must consist of 3 to 8 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Upper and lower case characters are considered unique. For example, R is
different from r.
❒ The password is the same as that used in the configuration of the Network
7 Interface Board using a Web Browser and that used in the NIB Setup Tool.
If you change a password from telnet, the other passwords are also
changed.

D Type the new password once again.

Retype new password:

SNTP
The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using the Simple
Network Time Protocol (SNTP). To change the SNTP settings, use the sntp com-
mand. Confirm with the network administrator that the NTP server settings are
correct.
Limitation
❒ SNTP supports the NTP servers running xnptd V3 and V4.

❖ Reference
msh> sntp

❖ NTP Server Address Configuration

You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.
msh> sntp server IP_address

120
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

❖ Interval Configuration
You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the oper-
ator-specified NTP server.
msh> sntp interval polling_time
Note
❒ The factory default setting is 3600 seconds.
❒ You can set the interval from 16 to 16384 seconds.
❒ If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you
turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the
NTP server.

❖ Time-zone Configuration
You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and the NTP
server clock.
msh> sntp timezone +/-hour_time
Example: To set the time-zone difference to +8 hours:
msh> sntp timezone +08:00
Note
❒ The time is in 24-hour notation.

SMTP
7
Use the smtp command to configure SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) set-
tings.

❖ View setting
The following command displays the current SMTP settings.
msh> smtp

❖ SMTP server name configuration

The following command sets the SMTP server name.
msh> smtp server / server_name
The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16 on
SMTP server.
msh> smtp server 192.168.15.16
The following is an example for configuring a Host name of mail.xyz.com on
SMTP server.
msh> smtp server mail.xyz.com
Note
❒ You can configure the SMTP server name using a Host name or IP address.
❒ A maximum of 127 alphanumeric or numeric characters can be used.

121
 Appendix

❖ SMTP port number configuration

The following command sets the port number of the SMTP.
msh> smtp port port_number
Note
❒ The acceptable value is 1-65535.

DNS
Use the dns command to configure or display the DNS (Domain Name System)
settings.

❖ View setting
The following command displays the current DNS settings.
msh> dns

❖ Using the DNS server obtained from the DHCP server

The following command sets the use of the DNS server obtained from the
DHCP server.
msh> dns dhcp {valid | invalid}
• If you use the DNS server obtained from the DHCP server, designate “val-
id”. If not, designate “invalid”.
If you set “valid”, the DNS server from the DHCP server is prioritized.
7 ❖ DNS server configuration
The following command sets the DNS server address.
msh> dns number server / server address
The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16 on
DNS 1 server.
msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16
• You can register up to 3 DNS server numbers.
• You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the DNS server address.

Domainname
Use the domainname command to display or configure the domain name set-
tings.
You can configure the Ethernet interface, the IEEE 1394 interface or the IEEE
802.11b interface.

❖ View setting
The following command displays the current domain name.
msh> domainname

122
 Remote Maintenance by telnet

❖ Interface domain configuration

The following command displays or sets the Ethernet interface domain name,
the IEEE 1394 interface or the IEEE 802.11b interface.
msh> domainname / interface_name
The following is an example for configuring a domain name on Ethernet in-
terface.
msh> domainname ether
Interface Interface that can be set
ether Ethernet interface
ip1394 *1 IEEE 1394 interface
wlan *2 IEEE 802.11b interface
*1
Available when the optional 1394 interface Board is installed.
*2
Available when the optional 802.11b interface kit is installed.
Note
❒ Domain name can contain a maximum of 63 characters.

123
 Appendix

SNMP
The Network Interface Board functions as an SNMP (Simple Network Manage-
ment Protocol) agent using the UDP and IPX protocols. Using the SNMP man-
ager you can get information about the printer.
The default community names are “public” and “admin”. You can get MIB in-
formation using these community names.
Reference
You can configure SNMP from the command line using telnet. See p.111
“SNMP”.
You can configure SNMP from SmartNetMonitor for Admin using the NIB
Setup Tool. See Help for SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
You can configure SNMP from your Web browser. See Help on the CD-ROM.
Limitation
❒ The kinds of supported MIBs vary depending on the printer.
❒ The 1394 interface Board supports TCP/IP only.

❖ Supported MIBs
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
7 • HostResourceMIB
• RicohPrivateMIB

124
 Understanding the Displayed Information

Understanding the Displayed Information

This section describes how to read the status information returned by the Net-
work Interface Board.

Print Job Information

The status of the print job can be viewed using the following commands.
• telnet : Use the status command. See p.110 “Printer status” .
Item name Meaning
Rank Print job status.
• Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
• Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner Print request user name.
Job Print request number.
Files The name of the document.
Total Size The size of the data (spooled).
The default is “0 bytes”.
7
Print Log Information
This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs that have been printed.
This log can be displayed with the following commands.
• telnet : Use the prnlog command. See p.110 “Printer status” .
Name Meaning
ID Print request ID.
User Print request user name.
Page The number of pages that is printed.
Result The result of the print request.
Time The time when the print request was received.
UserID *1 User ID that is to be configured in the printer driver.
*1
JobName The name of the document for printing.
*1 Appears the UserID and JobName information when entering the info command
with the ID.

125
 Appendix

Configuring the Network Interface Board

The Network Interface Board settings can be displayed by using the commands
below.
• telnet : Use the show command. See p.110 “Network Interface Board config-
uration settings information” .
Item name Meaning
Common
Mode
Protocol Up/Down Up means active, Down means inactive.
AppleTalk
TCP/IP
NetWare
NetBEUI
IP over 1394 *1
SCSI print *1
Ethernet interface Internal version number.
Syslog priority
NVRAM version Internal version number.
Device name
Comment
7 Location
Contact
Soft switch
AppleTalk
Mode AppleTalk protocol in selection.
Net Network number.
Object Macintosh printer name.
Type The type of printer.
Zone Name of the zone that the printer belongs to.

126
 Understanding the Displayed Information

Item name Meaning

TCP/IP
Mode Up means active, Down means inactive.
ftp
lpr
rsh
telnet
diprint
web
ftpc
snmp
ipp
wins
autonet
EncapType Frame type.
Network boot Network boot.
Address IP address.
Netmask Subnet mask.
Broadcast Broadcast address.
Gateway Default gateway address.
*2
Access Range[✩] Access Control Range.
Primary WINS
Secondary WINS
Primary WINS server address.
Secondary WINS server address.
7
Time server NTP server address.
Time Zone NTP server time difference.
Time server polling time Synchronizes interval.
SYSLOG server
Home page URL URL of homepage.
Home page link name URL name of homepage.
Help page URL URL of help page.
SNMP protocol Protocol used with SNMP.
NetWare
EncapType Frame type.
RPRINTER number Remote printer number.
Print server name Print server name.
File server name Name of the connect file server.
Context name Context of print server.
Switch
Mode Active mode.
NDS/Bindery (this value is fixed)
Packet negotiation
Print job timeout Time of the job timeout.

127
 Appendix

Item name Meaning

NetBEUI
Switch
Mode (this value is fixed)
Direct print (this value is fixed)
Notification Notification of print job completion.
Workgroup name Name of the workgroup.
Computer name Name of the computer.
Comment Comment.
Share name[1] Share name (name of the printer type).
IEEE 802.11b *3
SSID SSID being used.
Channel range Channels available for use.
Channel Channel being used.
Communication mode IEEE 802.11b interface transmitting mode.
Rate IEEE 802.11b interface speed.
WEP encryption Whether WEP is enabled or disabled.
Auth Validity or invalidity of the authorized mode setting
when using WEP.
Encryption key 64-bit WEP key/128-bit WEP key.

IP over 1394 *4
7 Device name Name of the machine.
Address IP address.
Netmask Subnet mask.
Broadcast Broadcast address.
SCSI print *4
Bidi. Bidirectional setting (on/off).
SMTP
Server name SMTP server name.
Port number SMTP port number.
DNS
Server [✩] *5 DNS server address.
Dhcp
Domain name
ether Ethernet Interface domain name.
*3
wlan IEEE 802.11b Intrface domain name.
ip1394 *4 IEEE 1394 Interface domain name.
Shell mode Mode of the remote maintenance tool.
*1 The 1394 interface Board supports TCP/IP only.
*2 ✩ represents a target number between 1 and 5.
*3
You can display the item names when installing the optional 802.11b Interface Kit.
*4
You can display the item names when installing the optional 1394 interface Board.
*5
✩ represents a target number between 1 and 3.
128
 Message List

Message List
This is a list of messages written to the machine's system log. The system log can
be viewed using the syslog command.

System Log Information

You can use the following methods to view the system log.
• telnet : Use the syslog command. See p.110 “System log information” .
Message Description and Solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name> (In print server mode) Cannot log in to the file
denied. Either there is no account for this print server. Make sure that the print server is reg-
server on the NetWare server or the password istered on the file server. If a password is spec-
was incorrect. ified for the print server, delete it.
add_sess: community<community name> al- The same community name already exists.
ready defined. Use another community name.
add_sess: session<community name> not de- A requested community name is not defined.
fined.
add_sess: bad trap addr:<IpAddress>, The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when
community:<community name> the community access type is TRAP. Specify
the host IP address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: <IPX address>, The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavail- 7
community:<community name> able when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the
TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <community The same community name already exists.
name> already defined. Use another community name.
add_sess_ipx: session_ipx<community name> A requested community name is not defined.
not defined.
ANONYMOUS FTP LOGIN FROM An anonymous login has been made with a
<IP address>, <password> password <password> from the host <IP ad-
dress>.
anpd start. (AppleTalk) An anpd (AppleTalk Network Package Dae-
mon) has started.
Attach FileServer =<file server name> Attached to the file server as a nearest server.
Attach to print queue <print queue name> (In print server mode) Attached to the print
queue name.
Cannot create service connection (In remote printer mode) Cannot establish a
connection with the file server. The number of
file server users may exceed the maximum
number that the file server can handle.

129
 Appendix

Message Description and Solutions

Cannot find rprinter (<print server (In remote printer mode) The printer having
name>/<printer number>) the number displayed on the print server does
not exist. Make sure that the number of the
printer is registered in the print server.
Change IP address from DHCP Server. The IP address changes when DHCP LEASE is
renewed. To always assign the same IP ad-
dress, set a static IP address to the DHCP serv-
er.
child process exec error! (process name) Failed to start the network service. Turn the
printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representatives.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server ad- The IP address was successfully received from
dress>). the DHCP server.
connection from <IP address> Logged on from the host <IP address>.
Could not attach to FileServer<error number> (In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the
file server. For some reason, the file server
refuses the connection. Check the file server
configuration.
Could not attach to PServer<print server (In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the
name> print server. For some reason, the print server
refuses the connection. Check the print server
configuration.
7 Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps The speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mb-
ps).
Current IP address <current IP address> The IP address <current IP address> was re-
ceived from the DHCP server.
Current IPX address<IPX address> The current IPX address.
DHCP lease time expired. DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries
to discover the DHCP server again. The IP ad-
dress used up to now becomes invalid.
DHCP server not found. The DHCP server cannot be found. Make sure
the DHCP server is running on the network.
dhcpcd start. A dhcpcd (DHCP client server) has started.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from <MAC ad- The same IP address is used. An IP address
dress>). must be unique. Check the address of the de-
vice indicated in <MAC address>.
Established SPX Connection with PServer, (In remote printer mode) A connection with
(RPSocket=<socket number>, connID= the print server has been established.
<connection ID>)
exiting lpd service has ended and the system is exit-
ing the process.

130
 Message List

Message Description and Solutions

Exit pserver (In print server mode) Exits the print server
because the necessary print server settings
have not been made.
Frametype =<frame type name> The <frame type name> is configured to be
used on NetWare.
httpd start. An httpd has started.
IEEE 802.11b <Transmission mode> mode Transmission mode of the IEEE 802.11b.
(Example: Current mode is infrastructure
mode.)
IEEE 802.11b [infrastructure] mode
(Example: Current mode is 802.11 ad hoc
mode.)
IEEE 802.11b [802.11 ad hoc] mode
(Example: Current mode is ad hoc mode.)
IEEE 802.11b [ad hoc] mode
IEEE 802.11b current channel <Channel> The current channel is displayed.
The value chosen by the user is displayed in
ad hoc mode.
The channel used in the access point is dis-
played in infrastructure mode.
(Example: Current channel is 11.)
IEEE 802.11b current channel 11 7
IEEE 802.11b Card Firmware REV. <Version> Wireless LAN Card Firmware version.
(Example: Current version is 0.8.3.)
IEEE 802.11b Card Firmware REV. 0.8.3
IEEE 802.11b MAC Address = <MAC Ad- The IEEE 802.11b I/F MAC address is dis-
dress> played.
(Example: Current MAC address is
00:00:74:XX:XX:XX.)
IEEE 802.11b MAC Address =
00:00:74:XX:XX:XX
IEEE 802.11b SSID <ssid> (AP MAC Address The SSID of the access point used in infra-
< MAC Address>) structure mode and the MAC address of the
access point are displayed.
(Example: Current MAC address is
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx and SSID value is “test-ssid”.)
IEEE 802.11b SSID test-ssid (AP MAC Ad-
dress xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)

131
 Appendix

Message Description and Solutions

IEEE 802.11b Tx Rate <Transfer Speed> The IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed (set
speed) is displayed.
(Example: Current Tx Rate is 11Mbps.)
IEEE 802.11b Tx Rate 11Mbps
Transmission speeds vary depending on sig-
nal quality. Displayed values may differ from
actual transmission speed.
inetd start. An inetd has started.
<interface> started with IP: <IP address> <IP address> has been set for <Interface> and
<Interface> started.
<Interface>: Subnet overlap. Subnet from Netmask and the IP address you
tried to set for <Interface> overlap the subnet
for another interface.
Set Subnet so that it does not overlap with an-
other interface.
IPP cancel-job: permission denied. The printer could not authenticate the name of
the user attempting to cancel a job.
ipp disable. Printing with ipp is disabled.
ipp enable. Printing with ipp is enabled.
IPP job canceled. jobid=%d. The spooled job has been canceled due to an
error or by user request.
7 job canceled. jobid=%d. The spooled job has been canceled due to an
error or by user request.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), Renew- The resource lease time that was received
Time=<renew time>(sec). from the DHCP server is <lease time> in sec-
onds. The renewal time is also <renew time>
in seconds.
Login to fileserver <file server name> (In print server mode) Logged in to the file
(<IPX|IP>,<NDS|BINDERY>) server with NDS or BINDERY mode.
multid start. Data transmission service for multiprotocols
has started.
nbstart start. (NetBEUI) The service for NetBEUI protocol stack setting
has started.
NBT Registration Broadcast(<NetBIOS Use a local broadcast to map <NetBIOS
name>) name> with the IP address.
nbtd start. A nbtd (NetBIOS over TCP/IP Daemon) has
started. (Available only in DHCP mode)
NetBEUI Computer Name =<computer name> The NetBEUI Computer Name is defined as
<computer name>.
nmsd start. (NetBEUI) A nmsd (Name Server Daemon) has started.
npriter start. (NetWare) (In remote printer mode) NetWare service has
started.

132
 Message List

Message Description and Solutions

nwstart start. (NetWare) The service for NetWare protocol stack setting
has started.
Open log file <file name> (In print server mode) The specified log file
has been opened.
papd start. (AppleTalk) AppleTalk print service has started.
permission denied. Job cancellation was determined to be unau-
thorized after checking the user name and
host address (except for ROOT authorization).
phy release file open failed. Replacing the Network Interface Board is re-
quired. Contact your sales or service repre-
sentatives.
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be (In print server mode) The print queue name
serviced by printer 0, <print server name> cannot be serviced. Make sure that print
queue volume exists on the specified file serv-
er.
Print server <print server name> has no print- (In print server mode) The printer object is not
er. assigned to the print server <print server
name>. Using NWAdmin, assign the printer
object, and then restart the printer device.
Print session full Cannot accept the print session.
Printer <printer name> has no queue (In print server mode) The print queue is not
assigned to the printer. Using NWAdmin, as-
sign the print queue to the printer, and then
7
restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare) (In print server mode) NetWare service has
started.
Required computer name (<Computer name>) The same computer name is detected on the
is duplicated name network. The start job determines the compu-
ter name by adding the computer name to the
suffix (0,1....). Configure a new computer
name that is unique.
Required file server (<file server name>) not Cannot find the required file server.
found
restarted. LPD has started.
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sap- The SAP function has started. The SAP (SAP
name=<SAP name> type and SAP name) packet is issued to adver-
tise the service on the SAP table on the Net-
Ware server.
Set context to <NDS context name> A <NDS context name> has been set.
shutdown signal received. network service re- Rebooting the network service.
booting...
smbd start. (NetBEUI) An smbd (SMB (Server Message Block) serv-
ice) has started.

133
 Appendix

Message Description and Solutions

Snmp over ip is ready. Communication over TCP/IP with SNMP is
available.
Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready. Communication over IP over 1394 with SNMP
is available.
Snmp over ipx is ready. Communication over IPX with SNMP is avail-
able.
snmpd start. SNMP service has started.
started. Direct print service has started.
The print server received error <error Cannot log in to the file server. The print serv-
number> during attempt to log in to the net- er is not registered or the password is speci-
work.Access to the network was denied.Verify fied. Register the print server without
that the print server name and password are specifying a password.
correct.
win2kspd protocol-DOWN (APPEXIT). NVRAM setting ioctl (SPIO CAPPEXIT) of de-
vice SBP2TSP was set by protocol-DOWN.
SCSI print is not receiving data.
win2kspd protocol-UP (APPENTRY). NVRAM setting ioctl (SPIO CAPPENTRY) of
device SBP2TSP was set by protocol-UP.
SCSI print is not receiving data.
win2kspd started. SCSI print (SBP-2) service has started.

7 WINS name refresh :Server No Response There has been no response to the update re-
quest from the server. Confirm that the WINS
server address is correct and the WINS server
is working properly.
WINS name registration/refresh error Enter a different name. Confirm that the
code<error number> WINS server address is correct and the WINS
server is working properly.
WINS name registration:Server No Response There has been no response to the registration
request from the server. Confirm that the
WINS server address is correct and the WINS
server is working properly.
WINS server address0.0.0.0 The WINS server address has not been speci-
fied. Specify the WINS server address to
match the printer name with WINS.
WINS Server=< WINS server address > NetBI- The printer name has been successfully regis-
OS Name=<NetBIOS name> tered in <WINS server address>.
WINS wrong scopeID The scope ID is wrong.
Specify the correct scope ID.
write error occurred. (diskfull) The hard disk became full while the spool file
was being written.
Wait until enough HDD space becomes avail-
able as printing proceeds.

134
 Message List

Message Description and Solutions

write error occurred. (fatal) A fatal error occurred while the spool file was
being written.
Turn the printer off and then on. If this does
not work, contact your service or sales repre-
sentative.
failed to get smtp server ip-address. Failed to get SMTP server IP address. This is
caused by the following.
• The DNS server could not be find.
• There is no connection to the network.
• The specified DNS server could not be con-
nected to.
• Incorrect DNS server specification.
• No specified SMTP server IP address in
the DNS server.
failed to connect smtp server. timeout. Failed to connect the SMTP server because of
timeout. This is caused by the following.
• The SMTP server name is incorrect.
• There is no connection to the network.
• The network configuration is incorrect, so
there is no response from the SMTP server.
refused connect by smtp server. The connection to the SMTP server is denied.
This is caused by the following.
• Another server other than the SMTP server
7
has been designated.
• The SMTP server port number is incorrect.
no smtp server. connection close. No response from the SMTP protocol. Cannot
connect to the SMTP server. This is caused by
the following.
• Another server other than the SMTP server
has been designated.
• The SMTP server port number is incorrect.
failed to connect smtp server. Failed to connect the SMTP server. This is
caused by the following.
• Not connected to the network.
• The network configuration is incorrect, so
there is no response from the SMTP server.
• The SMTP server name is incorrect.
• The specified SMTP server is incorrect.
• No specified SMTP server IP address in
the DNS server.
• Another server other than the SMTP server
has been designated.
• The SMTP server port number is incorrect.

135
 Appendix

Precautions
Please pay attention to the following when using the Network Interface Board.
When configuration is necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below.

Connecting a Dial-Up Router to a Network

When the NetWare file server and the printer are on the opposite side of a router,
packets are continuously sent back and forth, possibly causing communications
charges to increase. Because the packet transmission is a specification of Net-
Ware, you need to change the configuration of the router. If the network you are
using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the machine.

Configuring the router

Filter the packets so that they do not pass over the dial-up router.
Note
❒ The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer
configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration
page, see the Printer Reference 2.
❒ For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be
7 configured, see the instructions below.

Configuring the printer with NetWare

A Following the setup method in this manual, configure the file server.
B Set the frame type for a NetWare environment.
Reference
For more information about selecting a frame type, see the General Settings
Guide.

Configuring the printer without NetWare

A While not printing, the Network Interface Board sends packets on the net-
work. Set the NetWare to inactive.
Reference
For more information about selecting a protocol, see the General Settings
Guide.

136
 Precautions

PostScript Printing from Windows

When printing PostScript from Windows, see the PostScript 3 Operating Instruc-
tions Supplement provided as a PDF file on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating In-
structions”.

NetWare Printing

Form Feed
You should not configure the form feed on NetWare. The form feed is controlled
by the printer driver on Windows. If the NetWare form feed is configured, the
printer might not work properly. If you want to change the form feed setting, al-
ways configure it on Windows.
• With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Set-
tings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• With Windows 2000/XP, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Set-
tings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings]
tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Banner Page
7
You should not configure a banner page on NetWare. If you want to change the
banner page setting, always configure it on Windows.
• With Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• With Windows 2000/XP, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• With Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Set-
tings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.

Printing after resetting the machine

After resetting the remote printer, the connection from the print server will be
cut off for about 30-40 seconds before re-connecting. Due to the NetWare speci-
fication, print jobs may be accepted, but they will not be printed during this in-
terval.
When using the machine as a remote printer, wait about 2 minutes after resetting
the printer before attempting to print.

137
 Appendix

Using DHCP
You can use the printer under a DHCP environment. You can also register the
printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server when it is running.
Limitation
❒ DHCP cannot be used with IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394). Set a fixed IP address
with the control panel, telnet or a Web browser.
• See the General Settings Guide.
• See p.106 “TCP/IP address”.
• See p.93 “Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings”.
Note
❒ Printers that register the printer NetBIOS name on a WINS server must be
configured for the WINS server. See p.119 “WINS”.
❒ Supported DHCP server is Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later,
Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional Server and NetWare 5/5.1.
❒ If you do not use the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the
DHCP server so that the same IP address is assigned every time.
❒ DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent on a net-
work via an ISDN line, it will result in expensive line charges. This is because
your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred
7 from the printer.

Using AutoNet
If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a tem-
porary IP address starting with 169.254 which is not used on the network can be
selected automatically by the printer.
Note
❒ The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority to that selected
by AutoNet.
❒ You can confirm the current IP address on the configuration page. For more
information about the configuration page, see the Printer Reference 2.
❒ When AutoNet is running, the NetBIOS name is not registered on the WINS
server.

138
 Precautions

Configuring a WINS Server

The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server
when power is turned on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be
specified from SmartNetMonitor for Admin even under a DHCP environment.
This section describes how to configure the WINS server.
Limitation
❒ IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) is not supported by a WINS Server.
Note
❒ The WINS Server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or
later, and Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager.
❒ For more information about the WINS Server settings, see Windows Help.
❒ If there is no reply from the WINS Server, the NetBIOS name will be regis-
tered by broadcast.
❒ The NetBIOS name consists of up to 13 alphanumeric characters.

Using a WWW browser

A Start the Web browser.

B Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. ht- 7
tp://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where the Xs are the number of the IP address).
The status of the printer you chose appears on the Web browser.

C Click [Network Config].

The dialog box for entering the password and user name is displayed.

D Enter your user name and password, and then click OK.
To use the factory default account, enter no user name and type “password”
for the password.

E Click [TCP/IP].
F Set WINS to active and enter the IP address of the WINS server in Primary
WINS Server and Secondary WINS Server.

G Click [Refresh].
H Exit the Web browser.
Using telnet

A Connect to the remote printer using telnet.

139
 Appendix

B Use the “set” command to make WINS active.

msh> set wins on

C Specify the IP addresses (primary and secondary) using the following com-
mands.
msh> wins primary Ipaddress
msh> wins secondary Ipaddress
Note
❒ To confirm the current configuration, use the “show” command.

D Log out from telnet.

When Using the NIB Setup Tool

If the Network Interface Board cannot browse using the TCP/IP protocol, make
sure that the TCP/IP environment is correctly configured in your computer.

When Using IPP with SmartNetMonitor for Client

When using IPP with SmartNetMonitor for Client, note the following:
• The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartNetMonitor for
7 Client at a time. While the network printer is printing a job, another user can-
not access the network printer until it completes the job. In this case, Smart-
NetMonitor for Client tries to access the network printer until the retry
interval expires.
• If SmartNetMonitor for Client cannot access the network printer and times
out, SmartNetMonitor for Client stops sending the print job. In this case, you
should cancel the paused status from the print queue window. SmartNet-
Monitor for Client will resume access to the network printer. You can delete
the print job from the print queue window, but canceling a print job that has
been printed by the network printer might cause the next print job sent from
another user to be incorrectly printed.
• If a print job that is sent from SmartNetMonitor for Client is interrupted and
the network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, launch
the print job again.
• Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue win-
dow regardless of the protocol.
• If various users send print jobs using SmartNetMonitor for Client to network
printers, the printing order might not be in the order in which the jobs were
sent.
• An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address is
used for the SmartNetMonitor for Client port name.

140
 Specifications

Specifications
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) *1 , IEEE 802.11b
Frame type EthernetII, IEEE 802.2, IEEE 802.3, SNAP
Protocol • TCP/IP
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows NT 4.0
Netware 5/5.1
• IPX/SPX
NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 4.2, IntranetWare, 5, 5.1
• NetBEUI *2
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Windows NT 4.0
• AppleTalk
Mac OS
SNMP MIB-II, PrinterMIB, HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB
*1
The 1394 interface Board supports only TCP/IP. 7
*2
To use NetBEUI, use the SmartNetMonitor for Client port.

141
 INDEX
A D
Access Control, 108 DHCP, 109, 138
access type, 111 dial-up router, 136
Ad hoc mode, 102 Direct Printing Port, 113
AutoNet, 119, 138 Displaying the Status of Printer
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 98
B DNS, 122
Domainname, 122
Boot, 109
Broadcast address, 107 E
C Energy save mode, 89
EtherTalk
Changing Names and Comments, 95 Macintosh, 82
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 95
Web Browser, 97 H
client computer, setup
Windows 2000, 33 Host Name, 118
Windows 95/98/Me, 20
Windows NT 4.0, 57 I
Windows XP, 45
IEEE 802.11b, 116
community name, 111
setting, 101
configuration
using, 101
access type, 111
information
community name, 111
Network Interface Board configuration, 110
LPR port printing, Windows 2000, 32
print job, 125
LPR port printing, Windows NT 4.0, 56
print log, 125
LPR port printing, Windows XP, 44
system log, 110, 129
Macintosh, 81
Infrastructure mode, 102
NetWare, 59
install
NetWare 3.x, 64
NIB Setup Tool, 59
NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 64
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Network Interface Board configuration, 126
Windows 2000, 28
Web Browser, 90
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows 2000, 23
Windows 95/98/Me, 16
Windows 95/98/Me, 11
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows NT 4.0, 47
Windows NT 4.0, 52
Windows XP, 35 SmartNetMonitor for Client,
WINS server, 139 Windows XP, 40
IP address, 106
IPP, 112, 140

142
J S
Job Spool, 117 setup
client computer, Windows 2000, 33
L client computer, Windows 95/98/Me, 20
client computer, Windows NT 4.0, 57
LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 49 client computer, Windows XP, 45
LPR port printing, 32, 44, 56 SLP, 115
SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 83
M SmartNetMonitor for Client, 140
Macintosh Windows 2000, 27
configuration, 81 Windows 95/98/Me, 15
EtherTalk, 82 Windows NT 4.0, 51
printer name, 82 Windows XP, 39
zone, 82 SmartNetMonitor for Client, delete the port
message, 129 Windows 2000, 28
MIB, 124 Windows 95/98/Me, 16
Windows NT 4.0, 52
N Windows XP, 40
SmartNetMonitor for Client, install
NetWare Windows 2000, 28
configuration, 59 Windows 95/98/Me, 16
NetWare 3.x Windows NT 4.0, 52
configuration, 64 Windows XP, 40
NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1 SmartNetMonitor for Client, printer port
configuration, 64 Windows 2000, 29
network boot, 109 Windows 95/98/Me, 17
NIB Setup Tool, 61 Windows NT 4.0, 53
install, 59 Windows XP, 41
install, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, 60 SmartNetMonitor for Client, uninstall
precautions, 140 Windows 2000, 29
Run NIB Setup Tool, 60 Windows 95/98/Me, 16
Windows NT 4.0, 52
P Windows XP, 41
SMB, 114
password, 91, 120
SMTP, 121
precautions, 136
SNMP, 111, 124
printer name
sntp, 120
Macintosh, 82
specifications, 141
printer status, 110
Pure IP SPRINT, 114
NetWare 5/5.1, 70 Status of Printer, displaying
SmartNetMonitor for Client, 99
R Web Browser, 100
subnet mask, 107
remote maintenance system Log, 129
telnet, 105 system log
remote printer, setup information, 110
NetWare 3.x, 71
NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 71
ROUTE, 115

143
 T
telnet
remote maintenance, 105
using, 105

U
uninstall
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows 2000, 29
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows 95/98/Me, 16
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows NT 4.0, 52
SmartNetMonitor for Client,
Windows XP, 41

W
Web Browser, 90
Windows 2000
configuration, 23
Windows 95/98/Me
configuration, 11
Windows NT 4.0
configuration, 47
Windows XP
configuration, 35
WINS, 119
WINS server
configuration, 139

Z
zone
Macintosh, 82

144 EE GB UE USA G339

Copyright © 2002
Network Printing Guide

UE USA G339-8640
EE GB
Copyright © 2002
Printer Kit Type 1075 Operating Instructions Printer Reference 2

G339-8620
GB
EE
 PostScript 3 Board
Type 1075
Operating Instructions
Supplement

1 Using PostScript 3
2 Printer Utility for Mac

For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the
“General Settings Guide” before you use it.
Introduction
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-
ating the machine.

Note
Printing with the PostScript 3 printer driver is available when the PostScript 3 board option is installed
on your machine.

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Adobe® and PostScript® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Appletalk, Apple, Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights in those marks.

Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Using PostScript 3
Setting up Options................................................................................................. 3
Job Type .................................................................................................................... 3
Collate ......................................................................................................................11
Duplex Printing.........................................................................................................12
Paper Size................................................................................................................ 13
Paper Type...............................................................................................................14
Paper Source ........................................................................................................... 14
Orientation................................................................................................................ 14
Destination Tray ....................................................................................................... 15
Resolution ................................................................................................................ 15
Edge Smoothing....................................................................................................... 15
Toner Saving............................................................................................................16
Staple ....................................................................................................................... 16
Punch ....................................................................................................................... 17
User Code ................................................................................................................ 17
Options.....................................................................................................................18

2. Printer Utility for Mac

Installing the Printer Utility for Mac ................................................................... 19
Starting the Printer Utility for Mac......................................................................20
Printer Utility for Mac Functions ........................................................................21
Downloading PS Fonts.............................................................................................22
Displaying the Machine's Fonts................................................................................23
Deleting Fonts .......................................................................................................... 23
Initializing the Hard Disk........................................................................................... 24
Page Setup .............................................................................................................. 24
Printing the Font Catalog .........................................................................................24
Printing Font Samples.............................................................................................. 25
Renaming the Machine ............................................................................................25
Restarting the Machine ............................................................................................26
Downloading PostScript Files .................................................................................. 26
Selecting the Zone ...................................................................................................26
Displaying the Machine Status................................................................................. 27
Launching the Dialogue Console .............................................................................27

INDEX......................................................................................................... 29

i
ii
 1. Using PostScript 3

Setting up Options
This documentation describes the specific printer functions and menus that are
added by installing the PPD file. For more information about the functions and
menus of the Windows 95/98/Me PostScript 3 printer driver, see the printer
driver's Help.

Job Type
Use this function to select the type of print job.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Job Type] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Job Type] on the [Job/Log] tab in the Printing Preferences
dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Job Type] on the [Job/Log] tab in the Printer Properties di-
alog box.
Macintosh [Job Type] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.

You can select the following items.

Limitation
❒ If you use Mac OS X 10.1 or later (native environment), the following func-
tions cannot be used:
• Sample Print
• Locked Print
• Document Server

❖ Normal
Select this function for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after
the print command is given.
Note
❒ Under Windows 95/98/Me, if you want to use an User ID, click the [De-
tails] button.

3
 Using PostScript 3

❖ Sample Print
Use this function to print only one set of a multiple print jobs.
The other sets are saved in the machine. The saved job can be printed from the
machine's control panel. You can also delete the saved job.
1 Note
❒ You can enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a- z, A- Z, 0- 9)
characters.
❒ Entering the “User ID” helps you to distinguish the print job from others.
Reference
For more information about how to use Sample Print, see p.5 “How to Use
Sample Print”.

❖ Locked Print
Use this function to store in the machine's hard disk with a password, and
then edit and print them as you want.
Note
❒ You can enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) char-
acters.
❒ The “Password” must be four digits.
Reference
For more information about how to use Locked Print, see p.7 “How to Use
Locked Print”.

❖ Document Server
Use this function to store in the machine's hard disk documents that you want
to print and as well as documents you might want to later combine or process
for printing.
Note
❒ You can enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) char-
acters.
❒ The “Password” must be four digits.
❒ You can enter a “File name” of up to sixteen characters.
Reference
For more information about how to use Document Server, see p.9 “How to
Use Document Server” .

4
 Setting up Options

How to Use Sample Print

Follow the procedures to print a document using the “Sample Print” function.
Note
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
1
sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated
by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print
dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed.

Windows 95/98/Me

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Open the Printer Properties to set the Sample Print.

C Click the [Setup] tab.
D Select [Sample Print] in [Job Type].
E Click [Details].
F Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID].
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.

G Click [OK].
H Click [Apply] to apply the settings you made.
I After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the Printer
Properties.

J Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

The Sample Print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.

K Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, remaining sets can be printed using the control pan-
el. See “Printing a Sample Print File”, Printer Reference 2.
If the settings are incorrect, the saved job can be deleted using the control pan-
el. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Reference 2.

5
 Using PostScript 3

Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

1 The print dialog box appears.

B Open the Printer Properties to set the Sample Print.

C Click the [Job/Log] tab.
D Select [Sample Print] in [Job Type].
E Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID].
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.

F Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and then click [Apply].
Note
❒ When using Windows 2000, click [Apply].
❒ When using Windows NT 4.0, click [OK].

G Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

The Sample Print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.

H Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, remaining sets can be printed using the control pan-
el. See “Printing a Sample Print File”, Printer Reference 2.
If the settings are incorrect, the saved job can be deleted using the control pan-
el. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Reference 2.

Macintosh

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Click [Job Log] from the pop up menu.

C Select [Sample Print] in [Job Type], and then select the appropriate setting.
D Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID].
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.

6
 Setting up Options

E After making all of the settings you want, click [Print].

The Sample Print job is sent to the machine and one set is printed.

F Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, remaining sets can be printed using the control pan- 1
el. See “Printing a Sample Print File”, Printer Reference 2.
If the settings are incorrect, the saved job can be deleted using the control pan-
el. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Reference 2.

How to Use Locked Print

Follow the procedures to print a document using the “Locked Print” function.
Note
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by
the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dia-
log box, more prints than intended may be printed.

Windows 95/98/Me

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Open the Printer Properties to set the Locked Print.

C Click the [Setup] tab.
D Select [Locked Print] in [Job Type].
E Click [Details].
F Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID]. Then enter a password in [Password]. The “Password” must be four
digits.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.

G Click [OK].
H Click [Apply] to apply the settings you made.
I After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the Printer
Properties.

7
 Using PostScript 3

J Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

The document file is saved in the machine.
It is possible to print the saved job using the control panel. See “Printing a
Locked Print File”, Printer Reference 2.
1 It is possible to delete the saved job using the control panel. See “Printing a
Locked Print File”, Printer Reference 2.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Open the Printer Properties to set the Locked Print.

C Click the [Job/Log] tab.
D Select [Locked Print] in [Job Type].
E Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID]. Then enter a password in [Password]. The “Password” must be four
digits.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.

F Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and then click [Apply].
Note
❒ When using Windows 2000, click [Apply].
❒ When using Windows NT 4.0, click [OK].

G Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

The document file is saved in the machine.
It is possible to print the saved job using the control panel. See “Printing a
Locked Print File”, Printer Reference 2.
It is possible to delete the saved job using the control panel. See “Printing a
Locked Print File”, Printer Reference 2.

Macintosh

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Click to select [Job Log] from the pop up menu.

8
 Setting up Options

C Select [Locked Print] in [Job Type], and then select the appropriate setting.
D Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID]. Then enter a password in [Password]. The “Password” must be four
digits.
1
Note
❒ Set [User ID] and [Password] to identify the user associated with the job.

E After making all of the settings you want, click [Print].

The document file is saved in the machine.
It is possible to print the saved job using the control panel. See “Printing a
Locked Print File”, Printer Reference 2.
It is possible to delete the saved job using the control panel. See “Printing a
Locked Print File”, Printer Reference 2.

How to Use Document Server

Follow the procedures to print a document using the “Document Server” func-
tion.

Windows 95/98/Me

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Open the Printer Properties to set the Document Server.

C Click the [Setup] tab.
D Select [Document Server] in [Job Type].
E Click [Details].
F Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID]. Then enter a “Password” in [Password]. The “Password” must be
four digits.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.
❒ If necessary, enter the “Document file's name” in [File name]. You can enter
a [File name] of up to sixteen characters.

G Click [OK].
H Click [Apply] to apply the settings you made.

9
 Using PostScript 3

I After making all of the settings you want, click [OK] to close the printer
properties.

J Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

1 Reference
For more information about the Document Server function, see “Accessing
the Document Server”, Printer Reference 2 or the General Settings Guide.

Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0

A From an application, select the menu command to print.

The print dialog box appears.

B Open the Printer Properties to set the Locked Print.

C Click the [Job/Log] tab.
D Select [Document Server] in [Job Type].
E Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID]. Then enter a “Password” in [Password]. The “Password” must be
four digits.
Note
❒ Select this to identify the user associated with the job.
❒ If necessary, enter the “Document file's name” in [File Name]. You can enter
a [File Name] of up to sixteen characters.

F Click [OK] to close the Printer Properties, and then click [Apply].
Note
❒ When using Windows 2000, click [Apply].
❒ When using Windows NT 4.0, click [OK].

G Start printing from the application's print dialog box.

Reference
For more information about the Document Server function, see “Accessing
the Document Server”, Printer Reference 2 or the General Settings Guide.

Macintosh

A From an application, select [Print] from the file menu.

The print dialog box appears.

B From the pop-up menu, select [Job Log].

10
 Setting up Options

C From the [Print Job] pop-up menu, select [Print Job].

D Enter a “User ID” of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters in
[User ID]. Then enter a “password” in [Password]. The “Password” must be
four digits.
1
Note
❒ Set [User ID] and [Password] to identify the user associated with the job.

E Click [OK].
F Start printing from the application's print dialog box.
Reference
For more information about the Document Server function, see “Accessing
the Document Server”, Printer Reference 2 or the General Settings Guide.

Collate
Use this function to enable collation. With this feature, the machine can efficient-
ly print collated sets of multiple-page documents.
Limitation
❒ If you select Upper Tray as an output tray, it is shift-collated automatically.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Collate] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] or
[Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced]
tab.
Macintosh [Collate] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.

11
 Using PostScript 3

Duplex Printing
Use this function to select duplex printing.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
1
Windows 95/98/Me [Duplex] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Print on Both Sides] on the [Layout] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)] on the [Page Setup] tab
in the Document Default dialog box.
Macintosh [Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog box.

You can select the following items. The following items may vary depending on
the operating system you are using.

Windows 95/98/Me

❖ Off
Disables Duplex Printing.

❖ Open to Left
Prints output so that you can open it to the left when bound along the left
edge.

❖ Open to Top
Prints output so that you can open it to the top when bound along the top
edge.

Windows 2000/XP, Macintosh

Note
❒ If you use a Macintosh, click to select the button that means [Flip on Long Edge]
or [Flip on Short Edge].

❖ None
Disables Duplex Printing.

❖ Flip on Long Edge

Prints output so that you can open it to the long edge when bound along the
long edge.

❖ Flip on Short Edge

Prints output so that you can open it to the short edge when bound along the
short edge.

12
 Setting up Options

Windows NT 4.0

❖ None
Disables Duplex Printing.
1
❖ Long Side
Prints output so that you can open it to the long edge when bound along the
long edge.

❖ Short Side
Prints output so that you can open it to the short edge when bound along the
short edge.

Paper Size
Use this to select the paper size.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Size] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Paper/Output] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] or [Lay-
out] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Paper Size] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document De-
fault dialog box.
Macintosh [Paper] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the Page Setup dia-
log box.

Limitation
❒ If you use Mac OS X 10.1 or later (native environment), Custom Paper Size
cannot be used.
Reference
For more information about the paper sizes supported by this machine, see
the General Settings Guide.

13
 Using PostScript 3

Paper Type
Use this to select the paper type.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
1
Windows 95/98/Me [Type] on [All Pages] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Media] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing Preferenc-
es dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Media] on [Paper/Output] on the [Advanced] tab.
Macintosh [Paper Type] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.

Reference
For more information about the paper type supported by this machine, see
the General Settings Guide.

Paper Source
Use this to select the paper sources.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Tray] on [All Pages] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Paper Source] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Paper Source] on the [Page Setup] tab in the Document
Default dialog box.
Macintosh [Paper Source] on [General] in the print dialog box.

Orientation
Use this to select the feed direction of the paper.
The following table shows the tab or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Orientation] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Orientation] on the [Layout] tab.
Windows NT 4.0 [Orientation] on [Paper/Output] on the [Advanced]
tab.
Macintosh [Orientation] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the
Page Setup dialog box.

14
 Setting up Options

Destination Tray
Use this to select the output tray.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
1
Windows 95/98/Me [Destination] on the [Paper] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] or
[Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced]
tab.
Macintosh [Destination] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.

Resolution
Use this to set the resolution to [1200dpi] or [600dpi].
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Resolution] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Graphic] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] or
[Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog
box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Graphic] on the [Advanced] tab.
Macintosh [Resolution] on [Printer Specific Options] in the
print dialog box.

Edge Smoothing
Use this function to improve the print quality of text and graphics. Indentations
in curved lines are automatically smoothed to produce a cleaner appearance.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Edge Smoothing] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Pa-
per/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the Printing Pref-
erences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the
[Advanced] tab.
Macintosh [Print Mode] on [Printer Specific Options] in the
print dialog box.

15
 Using PostScript 3

Toner Saving
Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
1
Windows 95/98/Me [Toner Saving] on the [Print Quality] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] or
[Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced]
tab.
Macintosh [Print Mode] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog
box.

Staple
Use this function to staple sheets of printed paper together.
Limitation
❒ When stapling, use the finisher option. See the Copy Reference or the Printer
Reference 2.
Reference
For more information about the stapling location, see “Staple”, Printer Refer-
ence 2.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Staple] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Paper/Quality] or
[Layout] tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced]
tab.
Macintosh [Staple] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box.

16
 Setting up Options

Punch
Use this function to punch holes in separately printed sheets.
Limitation 1
❒ When punching holes, use the finisher option.
Reference
For more information about punching holes, see the Copy Reference or the
Printer Reference 2.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [Punch] on the [Setup] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Printer Features] on [Advanced] on the [Pa-
per/Quality] or [Layout] tab in the Printing Pref-
erences dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the
[Advanced] tab.
Macintosh [Punch] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print
dialog box.

User Code
Use this to set a user code for print logging.
Enter a user code using up to eight digits. A user code identifies a group of users
and allows you to check the number of sheets printed under each code with
SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
Windows 95/98/Me [User Code] on the [Statistics] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [User Code] on the [Job/Log] tab in the Printing Preferenc-
es dialog box.
Windows NT 4.0 [User Code] on the [Job/Log] tab in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Macintosh [User Code] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box.

Note
❒ You can enter a “User Code” of up to eight digits.
Limitation
❒ If you use Mac OS X 10.1 or later (native environment), this function cannot
be used.
Reference
For more information about using SmartNetMonitor for Admin, see the Help
file.
17
 Using PostScript 3

Options
Use this to set the options mentioned below.
The following table shows the tabs or menus where you can select this function.
1
Windows 95/98/Me [Options] on the [Accessories] tab.
Windows 2000/XP [Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab.
Windows NT 4.0 [Installable Options] on the [Device Settings] tab.
Macintosh [Chooser] on the Apple Menu.

❖ Large Capacity Tray, Interposer

• Select the tray with the following menu:
Paper Source, see p.14 “Paper Source”

❖ Copy Tray, Booklet Finisher, Finisher 3000M (50-Sheet Staples), Finisher 3000B
(100-Sheet Staples), Mailbox
• Select the tray with the following menu:
Destination, see p.15 “Destination Tray”

18
 2. Printer Utility for Mac

Using the Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of
the machine and so on.
Note
❒ The Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Driv-
ers and Utilities”.
❒ The Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 8.6 or later. (Mac OS X Classic en-
vironment is supported.)

Installing the Printer Utility for Mac

Follow these steps to install the Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.

A Start the Macintosh.

B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM icon appears.

C Double-click the icon of hard disk to open it.

D Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.

E Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM, and then drag the [Print-
er Utility for Mac] file, and then drop it into the Macintosh hard disk.

F Drag the CD-ROM icon and drop it into [Trash] to eject the CD-ROM.
Printer Utility for Mac is installed.

19
 Printer Utility for Mac

Starting the Printer Utility for Mac

The following instructions describe how to start the Printer Utility for Mac.
Important
❒ Before starting the Printer Utility for Mac, confirm that the machine is select-
ed with [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
2 A Double-click the icon of the Printer Utility for Mac.
The Printer Utility for Mac dialog box appears.

B Click [OK].
The Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Reference
For more information, see p.21 “Printer Utility for Mac Functions”.

20
 Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below.

❖ File menu
• [Download PS Fonts...]
Download fonts (PostScript Type 1) to the machine. See p.22 “Download-
ing PS Fonts”. 2
• [Display Printer's Fonts...]
Display and delete the fonts in machine memory and the machine's hard
disk drive. See p.23 “Displaying the Machine's Fonts”.
• [Initialize Printer's Disk...]
Initialize the machine's hard disk drive. See p.24 “Initializing the Hard
Disk”.
• [Page Setup...]
Set up the paper size to print “Printer Font Catalog” and “Printer Font
Sample”. See p.24 “Page Setup”.
• [Print Font Catalog...]
Print the names of available fonts. See p.24 “Printing the Font Catalog”.
• [Print Font Sample...]
Print a sample of fonts. See p.25 “Printing Font Samples”.
• [Rename Printer...]
Change the machine's name when viewed via Appletalk. See p.25 “Renam-
ing the Machine”.
• [Restart Printer]
Restart the machine. See p.26 “Restarting the Machine”.

❖ Utility menu
• [Download PostScript File...]
Download a PostScript File. See p.26 “Downloading PostScript Files”.
• [Select Zone...]
Change the zone the machine belongs to via Appletalk. See p.26 “Selecting
the Zone”.
• [Display Printer Status...]
Display the status of the machine. See p.27 “Displaying the Machine Sta-
tus”.
• [Launch Dialogue Console...]
Create and edit a PostScript file, and download it to the machine. See p.27
“Launching the Dialogue Console”.

21
 Printer Utility for Mac

Downloading PS Fonts
You can download the PS fonts to the machine's memory or hard disk drive.
Important
❒ The following procedures to download the fonts assume that you are a sys-
tem administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administra-
2 tor.
❒ If the machine restarts, all the machine settings return to their defaults.
❒ Confirm that Macintosh and the machine are connected with Appletalk.
Note
❒ Some fonts cannot be downloaded.
❒ Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to
use.

A Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.

C Click to select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.

D After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.

E Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
Important
❒ During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel
or open or close the cover.

F When the completion message appears, click [OK].

G Click [Cancel].

22
 Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Displaying the Machine's Fonts

You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the machine. Fonts
in the machine's memory and hard disk drive can be displayed.
Note
❒ The fonts displayed in Italics are the default fonts.

A Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu. 2

A dialog box appears.

B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

C Click [OK].

Deleting Fonts
You can delete fonts from the machine's memory or hard disk drive.

A Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.

A dialog box appears.

B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].

C Select the fonts you want to delete.
Limitation
❒ You cannot delete the fonts displayed in Italic.

D Click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.

E Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the machine name from which
you want to delete the fonts.

F Click [Continue], and then click [OK].

G Click [OK].

23
 Printer Utility for Mac

Initializing the Hard Disk

When initializing the machine's hard disk, all the fonts downloaded to the ma-
chine's hard disk drive are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts
on the hard disk drive.
Important
2 ❒ When initializing the machine's hard disk drive from the control panel, all of
the data on the machine's optional hard disk drive, including other areas that
do not use PostScript 3, are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the
data on the optional hard disk kit.

A Select [Initialize Printer's Disk...] on the [File] menu.

The confirmation message appears.
Note
❒ To cancel initialization, click [Cancel].

B Click [Execute].
Initializing starts.
Important
❒ Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise
the hard disk drive may get damaged.

C When the completion message appears, click [OK].

Page Setup
You can set the paper size on which to print “Print Fonts Catalogue” and “Print
Fonts Sample”.

A Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.

B Choose the paper size.

Printing the Font Catalog

You can print the names of fonts available on the machine.
Note
❒ The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.

A Select [Print Fonts Catalogue] on the [File] menu.

B Click [Print].

24
 Printer Utility for Mac Functions

Printing Font Samples

You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.
Note
❒ The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.

A Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu. 2

B Click [Print].

Renaming the Machine

You can change the machine's name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect
several printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them.
If several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the machine name
in [Chooser].

A Select [Rename Printer...] on the [File] menu.

B Type a new name in the [New Name] field.
Limitation
❒ You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.
❒ Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”,”@”, “~”.

C Click [Rename].
The machine name is changed.

D Press [OK].
E Select [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Click to select the machine name renamed in step B, and then close [Choos-
er].
Note
❒ If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.

25
 Printer Utility for Mac

Restarting the Machine

You can restart the machine.

A Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.

B Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
2 The machine restarts.
Note
❒ The fonts that you downloaded in the machine's memory will be deleted.
❒ If the machine restarts, all the machine settings return to their defaults.

Downloading PostScript Files

You can download a Postscript file to the machine.

A Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.

B Select the file name to download and click the file name, and then click
[Open].

C Type the log file name, and then click [Save].

The selected file is downloaded.
Note
❒ Errors are recorded in the log file.

Selecting the Zone

You can change the zone to which the machine belongs under Appletalk.
Important
❒ Confirm that the machine and a Macintosh are connected in an Appletalk en-
vironment.

A Select [Select Zone...] on the [Utility] menu.

The zone to which the machine belongs and the available zone list appear.

B Select the zone to which you want to switch the printer to, and then click
[Change].
A confirmation message appears.

C Click [Continue].
A confirmation message appears.

26
 Printer Utility for Mac Functions

D Press [OK].
E Select [Chooser] on the Apple menu.
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Select the zone selected in step B on the [Appletalk zone] list.
H Click to select the machine you want to use on the [Select a PostScript Printer] 2
list.

I Close [Chooser].

Displaying the Machine Status

You can display and confirm the current status of the machine.

A Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.

The current status of the machine appears.

B Confirm the current status of the machine.

You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the
hard disk drive status and available space on the hard disk drive. You can
also confirm the zone to which the machine belongs.

C Click [OK].

Launching the Dialogue Console

You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and download it to the ma-
chine.
Important
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understand-
ing of PostScript.
❒ Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the machine.
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own responsibility.

A Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.

Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.

B Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.

Note
❒ To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
❒ You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.

27
 Printer Utility for Mac

C After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on [Console]
menu to start printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the machine.
Note
❒ The [Reply from Printer] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you
sent.
2 D Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript file.

28
INDEX
C M
Collate, 11 Macintosh
Deleting fonts, 23
D Displaying the machine's fonts, 23
Displaying the machine status, 27
Destination Tray, 15 Document Server, 10
Dialogue Console Downloading PostScript files, 26
Launching, 27
Downloading PS Fonts, 22
Document Server, 9
Duplex Printing, 12
Duplex Printing, 12
Initializing the Hard Disk, 24
Launching the Dialogue Console, 27
E
Locked Print, 8
Edge Smoothing, 15 Page Setup, 24
Printing Font Samples, 25
F Printing the Font Catalog, 24
Renaming the machine, 25
Font Catalog Restarting the machine, 26
Printing, 24 Sample Print, 6
Fonts Selecting the Zone, 26
Deleting, 23
Displaying, 23 O
Font Samples
Printing, 25 Options, 18
Functions Setting up, 3
Printer Utility for Mac, 21 Orientation, 14

H P
Hard Disk Page Setup, 24
Initializing, 24 Paper Size, 13
Paper Source, 14
J Paper Type, 14
PostScript files
Job Type, 3 Downloading, 26
Printer Utility for Mac, 19
L
Functions, 21
Locked Print, 7 Installing, 19
Starting, 20
PS Fonts
Downloading, 22
Punch, 17

29
 R
Renaming the machine, 25
Resolution, 15
Restarting the machine, 26

S
Sample Print, 5
Staple, 16
Status
Displaying, 27

T
Toner Saving, 16

U
User Code, 17

W
Windows 2000/XP
Document Server, 10
Duplex Printing, 12
Locked Print, 8
Sample Print, 6
Windows 95/98/Me
Document Server, 9
Duplex Printing, 12
Locked Print, 7
Sample Print, 5
Windows NT 4.0
Document Server, 10
Duplex Printing, 13
Locked Print, 8
Sample Print, 6

Z
Zone
Selecting, 26

30 EE GB UE USA G339
Copyright © 2002
PostScript 3 Board Type 1075 Operating Instructions Supplement

UE USA G339-8680
EE GB
 Printer/Scanner Kit
Type 1075
Operating Instructions
Scanner Reference

1 Network Scanner
2 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner
3 Setting Originals
4 Scanning Originals Using Network TWAIN Scanner
5 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner
6 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail
7 Using the Document Server
8 Appendix

For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the
General Settings Guide before you use it.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Scanner function is available when the Printer/Scanner option is installed to your machine.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1
Symbols ..................................................................................................................... 1
Names of Major Options ............................................................................................ 2
Manuals for This Machine .....................................................................................3
Important ................................................................................................................5

1. Network Scanner
Outline..................................................................................................................... 7
Network TWAIN Scanner ........................................................................................... 7
Network Delivery Scanner.......................................................................................... 8
E-mail ......................................................................................................................... 9
Document Server .....................................................................................................10
Names and Functions of Components .............................................................. 11
Control Panel ........................................................................................................... 11
Display Contents ......................................................................................................12

2. Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

Preparation Sequence ......................................................................................... 15
Using as a Network TWAIN Scanner .......................................................................15
Using as a Network Delivery Scanner......................................................................16
Using E-mail............................................................................................................. 17
Initial Scanner Setup ........................................................................................... 18
Default Settings........................................................................................................ 18
Setting Scanner Features ........................................................................................ 21
Making Scanner Settings .........................................................................................25
Making Scan Data Subject Settings.........................................................................29
Making E-mail Settings........................................................................................32
Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 32
Verification of Settings .............................................................................................33
Installing Software ............................................................................................... 34
Auto Run Program ...................................................................................................34
Software for using a Network TWAIN Scanner ........................................................ 36
Software for using a Network Delivery Scanner.......................................................37
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite ............................................................................................38
Software Supplied on CD-ROM ............................................................................... 38

3. Setting Originals
Placing the Original on the Exposure Glass ..................................................... 44
Placing the Original in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)...................... 45
Placing the Divided Original in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ..................46
Original Orientation and Scan Area Setting ......................................................47
For a Network Delivery Scanner and Document Server ..........................................47
For a Network TWAIN Scanner................................................................................49

i
 4. Scanning Originals Using Network TWAIN Scanner
Flow of Operations ..............................................................................................51
Scanning Originals ..............................................................................................52
Functions of the TWAIN Driver ................................................................................54

5. Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

List Displays of Destinations and Senders ....................................................... 55
Delivery Procedure ..............................................................................................57
Checking the Status of Delivery ......................................................................... 64
Using the Network Delivery Scanner with the Document Server.................... 65
Simultaneous Delivery and Storage.........................................................................65
Delivering Stored Files .............................................................................................66

6. Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

List Displays of Destinations and Senders ....................................................... 67
Procedure for Sending E-mails ..........................................................................68
Checking the Status of E-mail ............................................................................76
Using E-mail with the Document Server............................................................ 77
Simultaneous E-mail and Storage............................................................................ 77
Sending Stored Files................................................................................................78

7. Using the Document Server

Storing Data.......................................................................................................... 79
Storage Procedure ...................................................................................................80
Viewing a List of Stored Files .............................................................................84
Viewing the List ........................................................................................................ 84
Searching for Files ...................................................................................................87
Deleting Stored Files ........................................................................................... 88
Changing File Information .................................................................................. 89

8. Appendix
The Relationship between the Resolution and the Data Size..........................91
Troubleshooting...................................................................................................92
When Scanning Is Not Performed as Expected.......................................................92
Delivery Function Does Not Work ............................................................................ 92
When an Error Message Is Displayed on the Control Panel....................................93
When an Error Message Is Displayed on the Computer ..........................................98
Specifications..................................................................................................... 100
INDEX....................................................................................................... 101

ii
How to Read This Manual

Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation or actions to take after misoper-
ation.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[ ]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.
[ ]
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
{ }
Keys built into the operation panel of the machine.
{ }
Keys on the computer's keyboard.

1
 Names of Major Options
Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this documentation.
• Printer/Scanner Kit Type 1075 → printer/scanner controller
For other options, see the respective documentation.

The following software products are referred to using a general name.

• DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional → DeskTop-
Binder V2 Lite/Professional
• ScanRouter V2 Lite and ScanRouter V2 Professional → ScanRouter V2
Lite/Professional

2
Manuals for This Machine
The following manuals describe the operational procedures and maintenance of
this machine.
Note
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is necessary to view the manuals in PDF format. Ac-
robat Reader can be installed from the Setup screen of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
or ScanRouter V2 Lite.

❖ General Settings Guide

Describes the settings of basic items to use this machine by connecting to a
network. The machine must be connected to a network to use scanner func-
tions. See this manual to set up necessary items.

❖ Copy Reference
Describes the procedures and functions for using this machine as a copier.
The type of originals that can be used in this machine refer to this manual.

❖ Scanner Reference (this manual)

Describes basic settings for using scanner functions, installing necessary soft-
ware, and operations for using the scanner functions.

❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is software included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scan-
ner Driver & Document Management Utilities” for this machine. For informa-
tion about the functions of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, see p.40 “DeskTopBinder
V2 Lite”.
• DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF)
Describes the operating environment for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite in detail
and installation. This guide is displayed from the Setup screen when Desk-
TopBinder V2 Lite is installed.
• DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Introduction Guide (PDF)
Describes the outlined functions and use of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. This
guide is added to the Start menu when DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is installed.
• ScanRouter V2 Link Guide (PDF)
Describes the functions and operations of “ScanRouter V2 Link” installed
with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. This guide is added to the Start menu when
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is installed.

3
 ❖ Manuals for ScanRouter V2 Lite
Note
❒ ScanRouter V2 Lite is software included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner
Driver & Document Management Utilities” for this machine. For informa-
tion about ScanRouter V2 Lite, see p.8 “Network Delivery Scanner”, p.41
“ScanRouter V2 Lite”.
• ScanRouter V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF)
Describes the operating environment for ScanRouter V2 Lite in detail, in-
stallation, and settings. This guide is displayed from the Setup screen
when ScanRouter V2 Lite is installed.
• ScanRouter V2 Lite Management Guide (PDF)
Describes the outlined functions of ScanRouter V2 Lite and the manage-
ment and operation of a delivery server. This guide is added to the Start
menu when ScanRouter V2 Lite is installed.

4
Important
When the machine is connected to a network, observe the following points when
setting up the machine or changing settings.
For more details, see the documentation and Help for ScanRouter V2 Lite/Pro-
fessional and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional.

❖ When a dial-up router is connected in a network environment

The settings for the delivery server to be connected must be made appropri-
ately for the machine with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional, ScanRouter V2
Link, or DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional. In addition, appropriately set
up connected devices with the I/O settings of ScanRouter V2 Administration
Utility.
If the network environment changes, make the necessary changes for the de-
livery server with the machine, administration utility of client computers,
ScanRouter V2 Link, and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional. Also, set the
correct information for the connected device with the I/O settings of Admin-
istration Utility.
Important
❒ When the software is set up to connect to the delivery server via a dial-up
router, the router will dial and go online whenever connection to the deliv-
ery server is initiated. Telephone charges may be incurred.

❖ When connected to a computer that uses dial-up access

• Do not install ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional on a computer which uses
dial-up access.
• When using ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional, DeskTopBinder V2
Lite/Professional, ScanRouter V2 Link, or TWAIN driver on a computer
with dial-up access, dial-up may be performed when connecting to the de-
livery server and other equipment, depending on the setup. If the compu-
ter is set up to connect to the Internet automatically, the confirmation
dialog box will not appear, and telephone charges may be incurred with-
out the user being aware of it. To prevent unnecessary dial-ups, the com-
puter should be set up so that the confirmation dialog box is always
displayed before establishing a connection. Do not make unnecessary dial-
ups when using the above listed software.

❖ When working in a WAN environment

In a WAN environment, do not use the ScanRouter V2 Link or other admin-
istration utility installed on a client computer. In some network environ-
ments, time-out may occur and normal delivery may not be possible.

❖ When connected to a mail server

When the machine is connected to an SMTP server managed by an Internet
service provider (hereafter called “Provider(s)”), the POP identity (POP Be-
fore SMTP) may be required by the Provider. When the machine is connected
to an SMTP server through a direct dial-up connection with the Provider, the
POP identity (POP Before SMTP) is not required.

5
6
 1. Network Scanner

Outline
By installing the printer/scanner controller, the machine can be used as a net-
work scanner.
The network scanner offers four functions: operating as a network TWAIN scan-
ner, operating as a network delivery scanner, sending e-mail, or storing scan
data in the document server.

Network TWAIN Scanner

The scanner of this machine is used from the computer via a network Ethernet
(TCP/IP) or IEEE 1394(option) or Wireless LAN(option). The originals can be
read in the same operation as for SCSI and USB-connected scanners. For more
information, see p.51 “Scanning Originals Using Network TWAIN Scanner”.

ZGZX020E

1. This machine 2. Computer

The scanner of the machine is used from Originals are scanned by TWAIN driver
the computer via a network. for the machine from an application.

7
 Network Scanner

Network Delivery Scanner

The machine is used as the delivery scanner with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profes-
sional. The original scanned by the machine is stored in the delivery server and
1 delivered to the folder of the computer on the same network. For more informa-
tion, see p.55 “Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner”.
Note
❒ Using optional ScanRouter V2 Professional, the machine can deliver scan data as
mail, and view the document from the client computer using the Web browser.

ZGZH010E

1. This machine 3. Client computer

The original scanned by the scanner is The contents of the stored document are
sent to the delivery server. checked in the following way.
Together with the document server, mul- • View the document in an in-tray of
tiple documents are stored and then de- DeskTopBinder V2 Lite to check the
livered. ⇒ p.65 “Using the Network contents. (C in the figure)
Delivery Scanner with the Document • Use ScanRouter V2 Link to receive the
Server” document in an in-tray, and check the
contents with an application corre-
2. Delivery server sponding to the file format. (D in the
ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional is in- figure)
stalled and used as a delivery server.
• Connect to a Windows folder via a
The sent data is delivered to an in-tray (A network, and check the contents with
in the figure) of a specified destination. an application corresponding to the
The delivered document is stored in an in- file format. (E in the figure)
tray or Windows folder (B in the figure).

Reference
For more information about ScanRouter V2 Lite, DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, or
ScanRouter V2 Link, see the respective documentation. ⇒ p.3 “Manuals for
This Machine”
8
 Outline

E-mail
A scanned image that is attached to an e-mail can be delivered using the e-mail
system through a LAN or the Internet.
See p.67 “Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail” for detailed information.
1

ZGZX021E

1. This machine 2. Mail server

A scanned image that is attached to an e- A mail server is the SMTP server used for
mail can be delivered to a mail server. In an e-mail system. It transfers a transmit-
combination with a document storage ted e-mail to a designated destination
function, scanned images and a number through a LAN or the Internet.
of documents that have been temporarily
stored can be delivered all at once.
3. Client computer
An e-mail with images attached to it is re-
ceived, using mail software.

9
 Network Scanner

Document Server
The scanned original is stored as a document on the hard disk of the machine,
and viewed, printed, copied, or deleted using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Profes-
1 sional from the computer via a network. Documents can be searched by the user
name or the document name. Also, others can be kept from viewing the docu-
ment by setting a password for the document. For more information, see p.79
“Using the Document Server”.

ZGZX030E

1. This machine 2. Computer

The originals scanned by the scanner are The stored document can be viewed or
stored. copied by connecting to the machine us-
ing DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Profession-
al.

Reference
For more information about DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, see the DeskTopBinder
V2 Lite manual. ⇒ p.3 “Manuals for This Machine”

10
 Names and Functions of Components

Names and Functions of Components

This section explains the names and functions of various controls used to oper-
ate the scanner.
1
Control Panel
This illustration shows the product with options installed.

ZGZS300E

1. The {User Tools/Counter}} key 6. Main power indicator, power in-

Use to change default values or operation dicator
parameters according to the operating The main power indicator lights up when
conditions. the main power switch is set to On. The
power indicator lights up when this ma-
2. Display chine is on.
Shows operation status and various mes-
sages. Important
3. The {Check Modes}} key ❒ Do not turn off the main power
Press to check the current settings. while the power indicator is blink-
ing. Doing so may cause a failure
4. The {Clear Modes}} key of the hard disk.
Use to cancel settings.
7. Operation switch
5. The {Energy Saver}} key Pressing this switch turns the machine
Press this key for about one second to be- on. The power indicator lights up. To
gin warm-up. turn the machine off, press this switch
Pressing this key again while in warm-up again.
mode cancels warm-up.
Note
Note ❒ This key is inactive while setting scan-
❒ This key is inactive while scanning or ner default values.
setting scanner default values.

11
 Network Scanner

8. Status indicators 10. Number keys

Show the status of the various functions. Use to enter numeric values.
• When lit yellow, the corresponding 11. The {#}} key (Enter key)
function is selected.
Use to enter a numeric value.
1 • When lit green, the corresponding
function is active. 12. The {Clear/Stop}} key
• When lit red, the corresponding func- • Clear: Clears an entered numeric val-
tion is interrupted. ue.
Press the respective key and follow the • Stop: Stops scanning.
instructions that appear on the screen.
13. The {Start}} key
9. Function keys Use to begin scanning, file storing, or de-
Pressing the Copy, Document Server, livery.
Printer, or Scanner key activates the re-
spective function. The display content
changes accordingly.
The indicator for the selected function
lights up.

Display Contents
The normal screen configuration is as follows:
The display's contents differ depending on the mode.
Important
❒ Protect the display from shocks and strong pressure to prevent the possibility
of damage. The maximum allowable is 30 N *1 (3 kgf *2 ).
*1
:N: Newton
*2
:kgf: kilogram-force (1kgf = approx. 9.8N)
Note
❒ The “Copy” screen is set as the default screen when the machine is turned on.
You can change this setting under the “Priority Function” of the [Basic Set-
tings] tab in System Settings. ⇒General Settings Guide
❒ Selected or specified items are highlighted like .

12
 Names and Functions of Components

Using as a network TWAIN scanner

When using the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, it is not necessary to se-
lect the {Scanner}} key on the control panel. When the TWAIN driver becomes
active on a client computer, the display automatically switches to the following 1
screen.

Press [Cancel] to use functions other than network TWAIN scanner.

Using as a network delivery scanner

Press the {Scanner}
} key to display the network delivery scanner screen (when
delivery server has been selected in Destination List Priority). If the network
TWAIN scanner screen is displayed, press [Cancel].

Reference
⇒ p.25 “Making Scanner Settings” for Destination List Priority.

Using E-mail
Press the {Scanner}} key to display the e-mail screen. If the network TWAIN
scanner screen is displayed, press [Cancel].
The e-mail screen differs depending on whether the machine is connected to the
delivery scanner.

Reference
⇒ p.25 “Making Scanner Settings” for Destination List Priority.

13
 Network Scanner

14
 2. Preparations for Use as a
Network Scanner
To use the machine as a network scanner, you must make settings required for
use as a scanner, as well as basic settings for use in a network.
First, see the General Settings Guide for details about how to make basic set-
tings, and then make scanner settings.

Preparation Sequence
The preparation sequence is different depending on whether the machine is to
be used as a network TWAIN scanner or network delivery scanner, or the Doc-
ument Server is used.

Using as a Network TWAIN Scanner

Connect the machine to the network with an Ethernet cable,
1 IEEE 1394(option) cable or Wireless LAN(option).
Connect to Network
⇒General Settings Guide

Check the network settings in System Settings, and change if re-

2 quired.
Make System Settings
⇒General Settings Guide

On the client computers, install the software required for using

3 the network TWAIN scanner functions, such as TWAIN driver
Install Software
and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
⇒ p.36 “Software for using a Network TWAIN Scanner”

15
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

Using as a Network Delivery Scanner

Connect the machine to the network with an Ethernet cable,
1 IEEE 1394(option) cable or Wireless LAN(option).
Connect to Network
⇒General Settings Guide

2 Check the network settings in System Settings, and change if re-

2 quired.
Make System Settings
⇒General Settings Guide

Make settings for the network delivery scanner, such as the set-
3 Make Scanner tings of the scanning feature and subject information.
Settings ⇒ p.18 “Initial Scanner Setup”

Install the software required for using the network delivery

4 scanner functions, such as ScanRouter V2 Lite on the delivery
Install Delivery
Software server. Then, make the required settings for server maintenance
and delivery service.
⇒ p.37 “Software for using a Network Delivery Scanner”

Reference
For information about ScanRouter V2 Lite, see the ScanRout-
er V2 Lite manual. ⇒ p.3 “Manuals for This Machine”
Use ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility to set the destination
5 Set Destination and and sender information.
Sender Information

On the client computers, install the software required for view-

6 Install Client Computer ing or auto-receiving documents by connecting to the delivery
Software server, such as DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
⇒ p.38 “DeskTopBinder V2 Lite”

16
 Preparation Sequence

Using E-mail
Connect the machine to the network with an Ethernet cable or
1 IEEE 1394(option) cable or Wireless LAN(option).
Connect to Network
⇒General Settings Guide

Check the network or the destination settings in System Set-

2
2 tings, and change if required.
Make System Settings
⇒General Settings Guide

Make settings for sending e-mail such as mail information lan-

3 Make Scanner guage and file type priority.
Settings ⇒ p.18 “Initial Scanner Setup”

Make settings for sending e-mail for the SMTP server using the
4 computer's Web browser.
Make E-mail Settings
⇒ p.32 “Making E-mail Settings”

Set up a mail server as necessary.

5
Install Software For information about setting up, refer to the instruction manu-
als of the e-mail server to be used and the software to be in-
stalled.

17
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

Initial Scanner Setup

This section explains all required settings and procedures for using the machine
as a network scanner.

Default Settings
2
Settings to use the functions of the machine as a network scanner are listed be-
low. Make correct setting of necessary items.
Important
❒ Items marked ✩ are the minimum required settings for using the machine as
a network scanner. Be sure to set these items before use.
❒ Items marked ❍ should be set if required.

❖ System settings
For information about the settings, see the General Settings Guide.
Settings TWAIN Delivery E-mail Store *4
*1 *2 *3

Timer Settings Scanner Auto Reset ❍ ❍ ❍

Timer
Interface settings IP Address ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
[Network] Sub-net Mask ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Gateway Address ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Network Boot ❍ ❍ ❍
Effective Protocol *5 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
NW Frame Type ❍ ❍ ❍
LAN Type ❍ ❍ ❍
Ethernet Speed ❍ ❍ ❍
File transfer settings Delivery Option *6
❍
Scanner Recall Interval ❍ ❍
time
Number of Scanner ❍ ❍
Recalls

18
 Initial Scanner Setup

Settings TWAIN Delivery E-mail Store *4

*1 *2 *3

Key Operator Tools Address Book Manage- ❍

ment
Address Book: Pro- ❍
gram/Change/Delete
Group
Address Book: Change
Order
❍ 2
Address Book: Edit Ti- ❍
tle
Address Book: Select Ti- ❍
tle
*1 Settings for use as network TWAIN scanner
*2 Settings for use as network delivery scanner
*3
Settings for e-mail
*4
Settings for use as document server
*5
Do not change this setting. It must be left at the factory default value.
*6
When delivery option sets “On”, make sure that IP address is set.

19
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

❖ Scanner settings
Explanation of scanner settings is provided in this manual.
Settings Factory TWAIN Delivery E-mail Store *4
*1 *2 *3
default value
Scanner Scan Type Text (Print) ❍ ❍ ❍
Features Resolution 200dpi ❍ ❍ ❍
⇒ p.21 Image Density Auto Image ❍ ❍ ❍
2 Density
(Medium)
Scan Size Auto Detect ❍ ❍ ❍
Scanner Send/Store 10 sec ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Settings Connection Timeout
⇒ p.25 Compression On ❍ ❍ ❍
(Black & White)
Compression Standard ❍ ❍ ❍
(Gray Scale)
Destination List E-mail ❍ ❍
Priority
Update Delivery -- ❍
Server Destination
Sender's Name No ❍
Default
Max. E-mail Size 2048KB ❍
Divide & Send Yes ❍
E-mail (per max. size)
E-mail Informa- British English ❍
tion Language
Job Reset Time in Off ❍ ❍ ❍
Adding Original
Original Setting 1 Sided ❍ ❍ ❍
Original
Original Orienta- ❍ ❍ ❍
tion Priority
Mixed Original Siz- Off ❍ ❍ ❍
es Priority
Switch to Batch SADF ❍ ❍ ❍
File Type Priority Multi-Page: ❍
TIFF
Print & Delete Delete all ❍ ❍
Scanner Journal after-printing
Select Title Title 1 ❍
Subject Settings Not ❍ ❍
⇒ p.29 Programmed

*1 Settings for use as network TWAIN scanner

*2 Settings for use as network delivery scanner
*3
Setting items for e-mail
*4
Settings for use as document server
20
 Initial Scanner Setup

❖ E-mail Settings
Make settings for sending e-mail using the computer's Web browser. For in-
formation about the settings. ⇒ p.32 “Making E-mail Settings”.
Settings Factory TWAIN Delivery E-mail Store
default value
TCP/IP DNS Server 1 0.0.0.0 ❍
SMTP SMTP Server (Empty) ✩
Name 2
SMTP Port No. 25 ❍

• Text (OCR)
Setting Scanner Features Standard original containing
mainly text (for OCR)
Various Scanner Features (resolution, • Text/Photo
scan size, scan type, image density) Original containing a mixture of
can be set here. When using the same text and photographs
type of original repeatedly, storing
the optimum settings in advance • Photo
makes them easy to select whenever Original containing photo-
you deliver or store scan data. graphs and other pictures (2-
value)
Note • Gray Scale
❒ Ten sets of scan settings named Original containing photo-
“Initial Setup” and “Program 1” - graphs and other pictures (mul-
“Program 9” can be stored for ti-value)
quick recall. The settings stored as
“Initial Setup” are the scanning de- Note
faults. If the Scanner Features are ❒ Printer printing is best done
not selected during delivery, the with “Text (Printer)”. “Text
originals are scanned with the (OCR)” is suitable for higher
Scanner Features stored in the “In- OCR accuracy.
itial Setup”. ❒ An image is scanned with black
❒ “Program 1” - “Program 9” can be & white in “Photo”, and with
changed to any name of up to 20 gray scale in “Gray Scale”. As a
characters. general rule, scanning for the
The Scanner Features consist of the purpose of printing is best done
following items. with “Photo”, and scanning for
viewing on the computer screen
❖ Scan Type with “Gray Scale”.
Select the scan type suitable for the
original from the following. ❖ Resolution
Set the resolution to 100 dpi, 200
• Text (Print) dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.
Standard original containing
mainly text (Print)

21
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

❖ Image Density
Set the image density. The setting
B Press [Scanner Features].
can be made in “Auto Image Den-
sity” or seven steps from “Lighter”
(1) to “Darker” (7).

❖ Scan Size
Select the size of the original to be
2 scanned. The Scanner Features screen is dis-
played.
• When “Auto Detect” is selected,
the auto detect function of the C Verify that the [Basic Settings] tab
machine is used to set the origi- is shown.
nal size.
• When the size is specified, scan- D Verify that [Program/Change] is se-
ning is performed for that size, lected, and then select the scan
regardless of the actual size of setting you want to program.
the original. The following size
can be selected.
A3S, A4R, A4S, A5R, A5S,
11x17S, 81/2x14S, 81/2x13S,
81/2x11R, 81/2x11S,
5 1/ 2 x8 1/ 2R, 51 / 2x81 /2 S, B4
JISS, B5 JISS, B5 JISR, Cus- The screen for entering a scan set-
tom Size ting name is displayed.

Note E Enter the desired name and press

❒ When [Custom size] is select- [OK].
ed, the dimensions of the
scan area (width and height)
can be specified.

Setting Procedure

A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key. Reference

For information about entering
characters, see the General Set-
tings Guide.
The screen for the basic settings is
displayed.

ZGZS320E

The User Tools/Counter/Inquiry

screen is displayed.
22
 Initial Scanner Setup

F Select the item to be set. Selecting a custom size

To select an item, touch its key on
the screen. The item is highlighted. When [Custom size] is selected as the
scan size, follow the procedure be-
Example: resolution setting low.

A Press [Custom size] on the Scan

Size setting screen.
2

Example: image density setting

B Enter the original size with the

number keys.
Select and enter values for [X1] and
[Y1].
Note
❒ When selecting [Custom size] for
[Scan Size], see p.23 “Selecting a
custom size”.

G When all settings have been

made, press [OK].
The scan type setting is stored. C Enter the scan starting point in re-
lation to the standard scan start-
H To program other scan settings, ing point.
repeat the procedure from step D. Select and enter values for [X2] and
I When all settings have been [Y2].
made, press [Exit].

The screen returns to the User

Tools/Counter/Inquiry.

J Press [Exit].
The main menu is shown again.

23
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

D Enter the scan size (area) with the E When all dimensions have been
number keys. entered, press [OK].
Select and enter values for [X3] and
[Y3].

2
F Verify that the area set in step D
(X3 and Y3) is shown next to the
Depending on how the original is [Custom size] field, then press [OK].
positioned, the scan area will be as
shown:
A When the original is placed on
the exposure glass

G Press [Exit].
The screen returns to the User
Tools/Counter/Inquiry.

H Press [Exit].
The main menu is shown again.
ZGZY060E

B When the original is placed on Deleting programmed scan settings

the ADF
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.

Scan sizes can be 10 - 432mm

(0.4” - 17”) in the X direction ZGZS320E

(width) and 10 - 297mm (0.4” -

11.7”) in the Y direction The User Tools/Counter/Inquiry
(height). screen is displayed.
The size of originals can be 140 -
432mm (5.6” - 17”) in the X di-
rection (width) and 140 -
297mm (5.6” - 11.7”) in the Y di-
rection (height). Keep the scan
area settings within this range.
24
 Initial Scanner Setup

B Press [Scanner Features]. Making Scanner Settings

This section explains how to switch
from network TWAIN scanner mode
to network delivery scanner or docu-
ment server mode, and how to set the
compression of image data and initial
The Scanner Features screen is dis-
played.
values for setting originals. 2
The scanner settings consist of the fol-
C Verify that the [Basic Settings] tab lowing. For the list about settings and
is shown. factory defaults, see p.20 “Scanner
settings”.
D Press [Delete].
❖ Send/Store Connection Timeout
E Select the setting you want to de- When using the machine as a net-
lete. work delivery scanner or docu-
ment server, scanning request to
the machine as a TWAIN scanner
will switch the machine to the net-
work TWAIN scanner mode. This
setting determines the delay until
the machine switches to network
A confirmation message is dis- TWAIN scanner mode.
played. • Selecting [Immediate] causes the
F Press [Yes]. network TWAIN scanner mode
to be activated at once.
• When you select [Set Time], you
can enter the delay time with
the number keys (3 - 30 sec-
onds). When the TWAIN scan-
ner mode is activated, only the
The selected scan setting is delet- time specified here passes from
ed. the last key operation.

G Press [Exit]. ❖ Compression (Black & White)

This setting determines whether
The screen returns to the User image data read with the black-
Tools/Counter/Inquiry. and-white setting is to be com-
H Press [Exit]. pressed. Compression reduces the
time required for transferring the
The main menu is shown again. scan data to the computer.
Note
❒ The actual time required for
data transfer will vary, depend-
ing on the data size and net-
work load.
25
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

❖ Compression (Gray Scale) ❖ Max. E-mail Size

This setting determines to which Select whether the size of an image
extent image data read with the attached to an e-mail is limited or
gray scale setting is to be com- not.
pressed. You can select [Standard], When [On] is selected, enter the
[High], [Low], or [Off]. size limit (64 to 102400KB) using
the number keys.
Note
2 ❒ Compression ratio decreases in Note
the order [High], [Standard], ❒ When the SMTP limits the size,
[Low], [Off], and the time re- match that setting.
quired for data transfer increas-
es accordingly. ❖ Divide & Send E-mail
This function is effective only
❒ The actual time required for
when [per max. size] is selected with
data transfer will vary, depend-
[Yes].
ing on the data size and net-
Select whether or not an image ex-
work load.
ceeding the size set in Max. E-mail
❖ Destination List Priority Size should be divided and sent
Select a destination list to be dis- using more than one e-mail.
played when the machine is in the Select either [No], [Yes (per page)], or
initial state. Press either [Delivery [Yes (per max. size)].
Server] or [E-mail]. Note
❖ Update Delivery Scanner Destination ❒ When [Multi-page: TIFF] or [Multi-
List page: PDF] has been selected for
To update Delivery Server Desti- File Type Priority, the image
nation List, press [Update Delivery will not be divided even if [Yes
Server Destination List]. (per page)] is selected.
Ordinarily, Delivery Server Desti- ❒ When [Yes (per max. size)] is se-
nation List is automatically updat- lected, some received files may
ed. This function allows updating not be able to be restored, de-
at any time. pending on the type of mail
software.
❖ Sender’s Name Default ❒ When [No] is selected, the e-mail
Select whether a manager is regis- is not sent if its size exceeds the
tered as a sender or a sender is des- limit, and an error message is
ignated each time a mail is sent. displayed. The scanned data is
• Select [No] when a sender is to lost.
be designated each time. ❒ Set the Max. E-mail Size within
• Select [Yes] when a manager is the capacity of the SMTP server.
to be the sender.
Important
❒ It is recommended that a pass-
word be set to prevent the send-
er's name from being misused.

26
 Initial Scanner Setup

❖ E-mail Information Language ❖ Original Setting

Select a language for E-mail Infor- Set the initial value for original
mation Language with which Title, type and orientation. When the
Document name, Sender's name original is always similar, selecting
and others are sent. this as the default makes operation
Select one of 18 languages. easier. You can select “1 Sided
British English, American English, Original”, “2 Sided Orig.: T to T”
German, French, Italian, Spanish, (Top to Top), “2 Sided Orig.: T to
Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Czech, B” (Top to Bottom). 2
Swedish, Finnish, Hungarian,
Norwegian, Danish, Japanese, Reference
Simplified Chinese, Traditional ⇒ p.47 “Original Orientation
Chinese and Scan Area Setting”

Note ❖ Original Orientation Priority

❒ The e-mail text is a template and Select the initial value for original
cannot be changed. placement orientation. When the
original is always positioned in the
❖ Job Reset Time in Adding Original same way, selecting this as the de-
Defines whether or not to set a fault makes operation easier.
waiting time for inserting another
original after all originals in the Reference
ADF or on the exposure glass have ⇒ p.47 “Original Orientation
been scanned. and Scan Area Setting”
• If [Off] is selected, the count- ❖ Mixed Original Sizes Priority
down does not occur and the This setting determines whether
machine enters the waiting state the original size is to be automati-
when all originals in the ADF or cally detected when originals of
on the exposure glass have been different sizes are inserted in the
scanned, until another original ADF. You can select [On] or [Off].
is inserted or the { #} } key is
pressed. Note
• If set to [On], enter the number ❒ If the original size is specified
of seconds (3 - 900) for the Job when scanning, this setting is
Reset Time in Adding Original discarded.
with the number keys. When ❒ When [OFF] is selected and the
the original is placed within this originals of different sizes are
time, it is scanned as one docu- set to ADF, the size of the first
ment. page is detected as the max. size
and the whole originals are
scanned accordingly to the end.

27
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

❖ Switch to Batch ❖ Select Title

When placing additional originals Select a Title with destinations in-
in the ADF, select whether to add cluding destinations of e-mail. The
sheets individually or to add selected Title is displayed on the
batches. screen as an at-a-glance chart of desti-
nations, which allows easy retrieval.
Note Select either [Title 1](for 10 classifica-
❒ When [SADF] is selected, it is not tions), [Title 2](for 10 classifications),
2 necessary to press the { Start} } or [Title 3](for 5 classifications).
key after adding more originals.
❒ Even if [On] is selected for [Job Setting Procedure
Reset Time in Adding Original], the
countdown to scan another
original stops when scanning A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
conditions are changed, the ex-
posure glass is used to scan, or
the function is switched to an-
other function such as copying.
Press the {Start}
} key to restart
scanning.

❖ File Type Priority

Select whether data of scanned
originals is delivered in a single
ZGZS320E
page or multiple pages.
When delivered in multiple pages, The User Tools/Counter/Inquiry
select either TIFF or PDF. screen is displayed.
Note B Press [Scanner Features].
❒ When data stored in a JPEG for-
mat is designated as TIFF for
multiple pages, it is automati-
cally changed to a PDF format.

❖ Print & Delete Scanner Journal

Select whether Scanner Journal is The Scanner Features screen is dis-
automatically printed or not when played.
the number of delivered mails
reaches 50. C Press the [Scanner Settings] tab.
Note D Press the item to be set.
❒ When printed, all records are
deleted after printing. When not
printed, records are automati-
cally deleted in succession from
the oldest record.
❒ While records are being printed,
e-mail sending is in a [Waiting] The screen for changing the item
state. setting is displayed.
28
 Initial Scanner Setup

E Change the setting. Making Scan Data Subject

Example: “Send/Store Connection
Timeout” setting Settings
Subject information can be added to
the scan data files. This information is
added to the data to be delivered.
When the file is sent by the e-mail
with optional ScanRouter V2 Profes- 2
sional, the subject is automatically en-
• To select an item, touch its key tered as the title in the subject of the e-
on the screen. The item is high- mail. If you often send files with sim-
lighted. ilar content, storing subject names
• To enter numerals, use the will allow you to easily select a sub-
number keys. ject at the time of delivery.
Note The subject can be up to 20 characters
long. Up to 12 subjects can be stored.
❒ To cancel a setting, press [Can-
cel]. The value is not changed
and the screen returns to the Setting Procedure
previous condition before
pressing [OK]. This section describes the steps for
making subject settings.
F Press [OK].
A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
G Repeat steps D to F to make other
settings.

H Press [Exit].
The screen returns to the User
Tools/Counter/Inquiry.

I Press [Exit].
The main menu is shown again.
ZGZS320E

The User Tools/Counter/Inquiry

screen is displayed.

B Press [Scanner Features].

The Scanner Features screen is dis-

played.

29
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

C Press the [Subject Settings] tab. Deleting programmed subject settings

D Verify that [Program/Change] is se-
lected, and select the subject you A Press the {User Tools/Counter}} key.
want to program.

E Enter the subject string.

ZGZS320E

The User Tools/Counter/Inquiry

screen is displayed.

B Press [Scanner Features].

Reference
For information about how to
enter characters, see the System
Settings manual.
Note
❒ If an item is selected for which a The Scanner Features screen is dis-
subject is already programmed, played.
the subject can be edited.
C Press the [Subject Settings] tab.
F Press [OK]. D Press [Delete].
G To program more subjects, repeat
steps D to F.

H Press [Exit].
The screen returns to the User
Tools/Counter/Inquiry.

I Press [Exit]. E Select the subject you want to de-

lete.
The main menu is shown again.

A confirmation message is dis-

played.

30
 Initial Scanner Setup

F Press [Yes].
The selected subject is deleted.

2
G To delete more subjects, repeat
steps E to F.

H Press [Exit].
The screen returns to the User
Tools/Counter/Inquiry.

I Press [Exit].
The main menu is shown again.

31
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

Making E-mail Settings

This section explains how to set all re-
quired items for sending e-mail from
D Enter the password, and then
press [OK].
a computer's browser.
The factory setting for the user
Consult with your network manager
name is blank, and the factory set-
about make settings for necessary
2 items.
ting for the password is “pass-
word”.
The password is set to “password”
The items to be set are shown.
before shipment from the factory.
It is recommended that the password E Register the IP address of the
be changed for actual operation. DNS Server.
A Click [TCP/IP].
❖ DNS Server 1, DNS Server 2, and DNS
Server 3 The screen for the TCP/IP set-
Enter the DNS Server's IP address ting is displayed.
used in the network. B Enter the IP address of the
When more than one DNS Server DNS Server in [DNS Server 1].
is installed, enter the IP address for Enter an IP address in DNS
each DNS Server. Server 2 and Server 3, if neces-
sary.
❖ SMTP Server Name
Enter the SMTP Server Name or an C Scroll down the browser, and
IP address to be used for sending click [Change].
e-mail. The IP address is registered.

❖ SMTP Port Number F Register the SMTP Server Name

Enter the Port Number to be used and SMTP Port Number.
when connected for SMTP send- A Click [SMTP].
ing.
The screen for the SMTP setting
is displayed.
Setting Procedure B Enter the host name of the
SMTP Server in [SMTP Server
A Start up a Web browser. Name].
C Enter the port number in [SMTP
B Enter “http://(IP Address of this Port Number].
machine)” in the address bar of
the Web browser. D Scroll down the browser, and
click [Change].
The status of connected equipment
is shown in the Web browser. The SMTP Server Name and
Port Number are registered.
C Click [Setting].
A dialog box for entering a user
name and password is displayed.

32
 Making E-mail Settings

Verification of Settings
A Start up a Web browser.
B Enter “http://(IP Address of this
machine)” in the address bar of
the Web browser.
The status of connected equipment
2
is shown in the Web browser.

C Click [Setting Reference].

The items that can be checked are
shown.

D Verify the IP address of the DNS

Server.
A Click [TCP/IP].
The setting reference screen for
TCP/IP is displayed.

E Verify the SMTP Server Name

and SMTP Port Number.
A Click [SMTP].
The setting reference screen for
SMTP is displayed.

33
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

Installing Software
The machine comes with two CD-ROMs containing various software.
The CD-ROM labeled “Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities” con-
tains the necessary software to use the machine as a network scanner. The CD-
ROM labeled “Printer Driver & Utilities” contains the necessary software to use
the machine as a printer.
2 This section explains the software contained on the “Scanner Driver & Docu-
ment Management Utilities” CD-ROM.
Reference
For information about the software contained on the “Printer Driver & Utili-
ties” CD-ROM, see the Printer Reference manual.

Auto Run Program

When the CD-ROM is inserted into a computer in Windows 95/98/Me, Win-
dows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, the installer starts automatically
(Auto Run) to install the TWAIN driver and various software.
Note
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain OS settings. In this case,
launch “Set up.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ If you want to install without using Auto Run, hold down the Shift key while
inserting the CD-ROM. Keep the Shift key held down until the computer has
finished accessing the CD-ROM.
❒ If [Cancel] is pressed during installation, the installation will be stopped and
the remaining scanner driver and utilities will not be installed. If [Cancel] has
been pressed, reinstall the remaining scanner driver and utilities after restart-
ing the computer.
Limitation
❒ If your system is Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0, log on us-
ing an account that has Administrators permission.

34
 Installing Software

The installing sequence using Auto Run is as follows:

Installation Sequence

TWAIN Driver Ver.3

Insert the
CD-ROM.
TWAIN
Driver 2
ScanRouter V2 Lite
The installer
starts up.

ScanRouter V2
ScanRouter Acrobat
Administration
V2 Lite Reader
Utility

Select Install all at once, or select and install individually.

the software.

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

DeskTopBinder ScanRouter Acrobat Acrobat

V2 Lite V2 Link Reader Reader
The
installation
complete
message is Install all at once, or select and install individually.
displayed.

Restart
your PC.

ZGZY070E

For information about the outline of the software that can be installed by Auto
Run, see p.38 “Software Supplied on CD-ROM”.

35
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

Software for using a Network TWAIN Scanner

To use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, it is essential to install the
TWAIN driver.
If you do not have applications that work with TWAIN, it is necessary to also
install the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. For information about the installation of
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, see p.38 “DeskTopBinder V2 Lite”.
2
Preparation
Before installing, check the operating environment for the TWAIN driver.⇒
p.39 “Type1075 TWAIN Driver”

Using Windows 95/98/Me, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0

Install the TWAIN driver using Auto Run.

A Verify that Windows is running. Insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled

“Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities” into the CD-ROM
drive of the computer.
The choose setup language screen is displayed.
Reference
If the installer does not start automatically, see p.34 “Auto Run Program”.

B Select a setup language, and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM Launcher screen is displayed.

C Click [Type1075 TWAIN Driver].

The software setup screen is displayed.

D The installer of the TWAIN driver starts. Follow the instructions on the
screen.
Note
❒ When the installation is complete, a message to prompt you to restart the
computer may appear. In this case, restart the computer, and continue the
operation.
❒ After the installation is complete, “Type1075 TWAIN V3” folder is created
in the “Program” folder of the Start menu. Help can be displayed from
here. Notes on using the network TWAIN scanner are provided in “Re-
adme.txt”. Be sure to read them before use.

36
 Installing Software

Software for using a Network Delivery Scanner

To use the machine as a network delivery scanner, it is essential to install Scan-
Router V2 Lite on the delivery server. To check an in-tray or auto-receive the
documents, it is necessary to install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on the client compu-
ter. Also, the documents can be auto-received by installing only ScanRouter V2
Link on the client computer.
Use Auto Run for installation. 2
Preparation
Before installing, check the operating environment for each software.⇒ p.38
“Software Supplied on CD-ROM”

A Verify that Windows is running. Insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled

“Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities” into the CD-ROM
drive of the computer.
The choose setup language screen is displayed.

B Select a setup language, and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM Launcher screen is displayed.

C Click the key of the software to be installed.

• The ScanRouter V2 Lite installer starts by clicking [ScanRouter V2 Lite].
• The DeskTopBinder V2 Lite installer starts by clicking [DeskTopBinder V2
Lite].
The change the language screen is displayed.
Reference
For information about the subsequent installation procedure, see the Setup
Guide that can be displayed from the Setup screen of the respective soft-
ware.

D Select a language used by this component, and then click [OK].

The software setup screen is displayed.

37
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
Use Auto Run for installation.
Preparation
Before installing, check the operating environment for DeskTopBinder V2
Lite. ⇒ p.40 “DeskTopBinder V2 Lite”
2 A Verify that Windows is running. Insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled
“Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities” into the CD-ROM
drive of the computer.
The choose setup language screen is displayed.

B Select a language, and then click [OK].

The CD-ROM Launcher screen is displayed.

C Click [DeskTopBinder V2 Lite].

The change the language screen is displayed.
Reference
For information about the subsequent installation procedure, see the Setup
Guide that can be displayed from the Setup screen of DeskTopBinder V2
Lite.

D Select a language, and then click [OK].

The software setup screen is displayed.

Software Supplied on CD-ROM

List of Files

CD- Wizard for the TWAIN driver and utilities

ROM
Driv- Twain TWAIN driver for Windows 95/98/Me, Windows XP,
Drive
ers Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0
Utility Router ScanRouter V2 Lite ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility
V2 Acrobat Reader 4.05
DeskV2 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite ScanRouter V2 Link Acrobat Read-
er 4.05

38
 Installing Software

Type1075 TWAIN Driver

This driver is required to scan an original on the machine.
To use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, the driver must be installed.

❖ File storage folder

Files on the CD-ROM are contained in the following folder.
\DRIVERS\TWAIN 2
❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT compatible
Limitation
❒ Under Windows NT, machines with RISC-based processors (MIPS R se-
ries, Alpha AXP, PowerPC) are not compatible.
• CPU
Pentium or faster (Pentium 150MHz or faster recommended)
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
• Memory
OS min. Operation Memory + 8 MB (64 MB or more recommended)
• Hard disk space
100 MB or more
• Display resolution
800×600 pixels, 256 colours or higher
• Network protocol
TCP/IP

39
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is to be installed on the client computers for integration
and management of various kinds of data such as scanned image data, files cre-
ated with applications, and existing image files. The software allows you to use
view documents in in-trays of the delivery server. This software can be used to
the machine as a network TWAIN scanner. Also, the documents stored in the
2 document server can be viewed.
For more information, see the manuals for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite or DeskTop-
Binder V2 Lite Help file.

❖ File storage folder

The files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM provided with this
machine.
\UTILITY\DESKV2

❖ System requirements
• Hardware
PC/AT compatible
• CPU
Pentium 133 MHz or faster (Pentium II 266 MHz or faster recommended)
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR 2 or later)
Microsoft Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack 1 or later)
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 1 or later)
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
• Memory
48 MB or more (64 MB or more recommended)
• Hard disk space
50 MB or more (200 MB or more recommended)
• Display resolution
800×600 pixels, 64K colours or higher
• Network protocol
TCP/IP

❖ Software installed with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

• ScanRouter V2 Link
ScanRouter V2 Link on the client computer monitors in-trays of the deliv-
ery server regularly. In addition, the documents delivered to in-trays are
auto-received or a notification of document arrival can be received at the
client computer with this software.
40
 Installing Software

ScanRouter V2 Lite
ScanRouter V2 Lite is to be installed on the delivery server. The data scanned by
the machine can be sorted on the delivery server, stored in specified in-trays, or
saved in folders of client computers on the same network.
For more information, see the manuals for ScanRouter V2 Lite or ScanRouter V2
Lite Help file.

❖ File storage folder

2
The files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM provided with this
machine.
\UTILITY\ROUTERV2

❖ System requirements
The following system requirements must be met to use ScanRouter V2 Lite.
Limitation
❒ If you install this software in OS in which a client server, such as Windows
NT Workstation and Windows 2000 Professional, cannot be permitted to
use in a network, you may violate the license agreement of Microsoft Cor-
poration.
Note
❒ Install the software on a stand-alone server running Windows NT Server
or Windows 2000 Server. It must not be installed on the primary domain
controller or backup domain controller.
• Hardware
PC/AT compatible
• CPU
Pentium 200 MHz or faster (Pentium II 350 MHz or faster recommended)
• Operating system
Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR 2 or later)
Microsoft Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack 1 or later)
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 1 or later)
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
• Memory
64 MB or more (128 MB or more recommended)
• Hard disk space
Minimum free space required for installing: 200 MB
Note
❒ In addition to the space required for installation, the hard disk should
have at least 500 MB of free space for files. 41
 Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner

• Network protocol
TCP/IP

❖ Software installed with ScanRouter V2 Lite

• ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility
ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility manages the delivery system run by
ScanRouter V2 Lite.
You can register destination and sender information about the scanned
2 documents in the delivery server. In addition, this utility can monitor free
disk space, record error logs, and maintain the delivery server.
Note
❒ ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility can be installed not only on the
delivery server but also on client computers. To install it, click [Scan-
Router V2 Administration Utility] on the ScanRouter V2 Lite Setup screen.

42
 3. Setting Originals

This chapter explains the procedure for placing the original on the exposure
glass and in the automatic document feeder (ADF), and setting original scan
area and orientation according to the placement method.
To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of the scanned original on a
computer, the correct placement must be chosen by setup on the control panel
and scanner driver.
There are two orientations for placing the original. See the table below.
Note
❒ Normally, the original size is or , but in the table below, a square original
is used to make the original orientation easy to understand. If the actual orig-
inal size changes, a combination of original orientation and the orientation
specified on the control panel or scanner driver does not change.

Scanned original

Place the original on the ex- Place the original in the auto-
posure glass. matic document feeder
Select the placement method. (ADF).
Place the Place the Place the top Place the
original so original so edge of the original so
Place the original. that the top that the top original first. that the top
(There are two original orienta- edge touches edge touches edge is set
tions.) the top left of the rear of the into the ADF.
the exposure exposure
glass. glass.

When scanned by the

delivery scanner, e-
Speci- mail or document serv-
fy the er
orien- (Specified on the con-
tation. trol panel)
When scanned by the
TWAIN scanner
(Specified by the Scan-
ner Control dialog box)

Original displayed on a compu-

ter *1

*1
When sending a gray scale image file in the TIFF (single or multi-page) or JPEG for-
mat, the image may not appear in the same orientation as it was scanned in.
43
 Setting Originals

Placing the Original on the Exposure Glass

Originals which do not fit into the B Place the original so that the
ADF, such as sheets with glued-on top edge touches the top left of
parts, books, etc., can be placed di- the exposure glass.
rectly on the exposure glass for scan- When using the machine as a
ning. network TWAIN scanner, this
Note orientation is standard setting
in the TWAIN driver. Normal-
❒ For information about the origi-
ly, use this orientation for set-
3 nals which can be placed on the ex-
posure glass, see the Copy
ting.
Reference manual.

A Lift the exposure glass cover or

the ADF.
Note
❒ Raise the exposure glass cover
or ADF fully (more than 30 de-
grees). The opening/closing ac-
tion triggers the automatic
ZGZY030E
original size detection process.

B Place the original on the exposure C Close the exposure glass cover or
glass with the side to be scanned the ADF.
facing down. Align the far left
edge of the original with the
D Select the original orientation ac-
cording to the setting orientation.
mark.
There are two original orienta- Reference
tions. Either orientation can be ⇒ p.47 “Original Orientation
used for placement. and Scan Area Setting”
A Place the original so that the
top edge touches the rear of the
exposure glass.

ZGZY040E

44
 Placing the Original in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Placing the Original in the Automatic

Document Feeder (ADF)
The ADF allows you to insert several Note
originals at one time. Originals placed
❒ When using the network deliv-
in the ADF can be scanned on one
ery scanner and document serv-
side or both sides.
er, or th e network T WAIN
❖ Originals that can and cannot be scanner, originals with different
placed in the ADF sizes can be placed at the same
For information about the origi- time. Place the originals as 3
nals that can and cannot be placed shown in the figure below.
in the ADF, see the Copy Reference
manual.
Attempting to use unsuitable orig-
inals in the ADF can lead to mis-
feed and damage to the original.
Place such originals directly on the
exposure glass. ZGZY080E

❒ Originals are scanned in the in-

Important
serted order, starting with the
❒ For information about which topmost page.
original sizes can be detected
automatically and notes on A Place the original so that the
placing originals in the ADF, top edge is in the ADF tray.
see the Copy Reference manual.

A Align the original guide with the

original size.

B Insert the originals with the side

to be scanned facing up. (For orig-
inals which are to be scanned on
both sides, the first side should
face up.)
ZGZY020E

There are two orientations. Either

orientation can be used for place-
ment.

45
 Setting Originals

B Place the top edge of the origi-

nal first. Placing the Divided Original in the
When using the machine as a Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
network TWAIN scanner, this
orientation is the standard set- When originals are placed in the
ting in the TWAIN driver. Nor- ADF, scanning finishes as one docu-
mally, use this orientation for ment when the scan of all originals is
placement. completed by factory default.
If the auto-reset time is set in [Job Re-
set Time in Adding Original], it is possible
to scan a large number of originals as
3 a single document by dividing the
originals into several parts, scanning
one part and then placing the next
part within a certain amount of time
and so on.
Reference
ZGZY010E

⇒ p.27 “Job Reset Time in Adding

C Select the appropriate orientation Original”
so that it matches the orientation After the originals are scanned, the
of originals placed. remaining time for accepting the next
original is displayed.
Reference
⇒ p.47 “Original Orientation
and Scan Area Setting”

When there is another original to

scan, set it within the specified time. If
set, the original is fed and scanned au-
tomatically. If there is no more origi-
nal, press the {#} } key.
Note
❒ Originals are scanned in order.
Place them from the first page.
❒ Press the {Start}
} key to restart
when a countdown is stopped.

46
 Original Orientation and Scan Area Setting

Original Orientation and Scan Area Setting

To correctly display the top/bottom
orientation of the scanned original on For a Network Delivery
a computer, original orientation and Scanner and Document Server
page flow must be set when placing
the original.
When using the network delivery
A On the scanner function screen,
press [Original Settings].
scanner and document server, set-
tings are made on the control panel of
the machine. When using the ma- 3
chine as a network TWAIN scanner,
settings are made on the TWAIN
driver.
Note B Make settings for original orien-
❒ The difference between scanning tation, 1 sided/2 sided combina-
with the TWAIN scanner and the tion, and mixed original sizes.
network delivery scanner/e-mail
is shown in the following table.
TWAIN Network
Scanner Delivery
Scanner/E-
mail
Auto Detect A whole A whole Note
Non-Mixed batch of batch of
Original originals is originals is ❒ The initial values can be
Sizes scanned us- scanned us- changed under [Original Setting],
ing the size ing the max. [Original Orientation Priority], or
of the first size set for [Mixed Original Sizes Priority] in
original. the ADF. the Scanner Initial Setup. ⇒
Auto Detect Auto detec- Auto detec- p.25 “Making Scanner Settings”
Mixed tion is used tion is used
Original to deter- to deter-
Sizes mine the mine the
size of each size of each
original. original
placed on
the expo-
sure glass.
Size Specifi- When an When an
cation original is original is
smaller than smaller than
the speci- the speci-
fied size, a fied size, a
margin ap- margin ap-
pears. pears.

47
 Setting Originals

1-sided original/2-sided original Mixed size selection

selection
A When originals of different
A When scanning one-sided orig- sizes are placed, make sure that
inals, make sure that [2 Sided [Mixed Size] is highlighted.
Original] is not highlighted.
Note
B When scanning two-sided
❒ If [Mixed Size] is not set, the
originals, press [2 Sided Original]
scan size is set as the maxi-
to select [T to T] or [T to B] ac-
mum size detected. Blank
cording to the binding orienta-
space is inserted in smaller
3 tion of the original.
originals.

C Press [OK].
Top to top
original: RS R S
Top to bot- Note
tom original: R R ❒ The current settings are dis-
played with characters and
S S icons.
When the last side of a batch of
two-sided originals is blank, se-
lect [1 Sided Original] to skip that
side and finish scanning, or se-
lect [2 Sided Original] to scan that
side as a blank page.
Note
❒ When scanning originals on
the exposure glass with the [2
Sided Original] setting, set [1
Sided Original] for the last
original.

Orientation selection
A Press the key for the same ori-
entation as the actual orienta-
tion of the original or .
Note
❒ When sending a gray scale
image file in the TIFF (single
or multiple page) or JPEG
format, the image may not
appear with the same orien-
tation as it was scanned in.

48
 Original Orientation and Scan Area Setting

For a Network TWAIN Scanner

A Open the Scanner Control dialog
box.
Reference
⇒ p.52 “Scanning Originals”

B Select the position from the drop-

down menu of the [Place] box in
the [Document] group. 3
C Select [ / ] or [ / ] from
the drop-down menu of the [Orien-
tation:].
Reference
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals”

D When the original is placed in the

ADF, select [Simplex] or [Duplex]
from the drop-down menu of the
[Side:] box.
Note
❒ If originals of different sizes are
placed in the ADF, specify the
document size in the [Size:] box.
If [Auto Detect (Non-Mixed)] is se-
lected, all originals are scanned
as the size of the first page.

49
 Setting Originals

50
 4. Scanning Originals Using
Network TWAIN Scanner
This chapter describes the operations for scanning originals with the network
TWAIN scanner using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. In addition, some functions of
the TWAIN driver are introduced.

Flow of Operations
When using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite for scanning, the basic flow of operations is
as follows:
Start up DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and select the scanner.
1
Select Scanner

Place the originals in the scanner.

2
Place Originals

Make the required scan settings, using the TWAIN driver.

3 Make Scanner
Settings

Scan and save the originals.

4
Start to Scan The scanned image can be edited and printed by DeskTopBinder
V2 Lite.

51
 Scanning Originals Using Network TWAIN Scanner

Scanning Originals
This section explains the method for scanning a single original following p.51
“Flow of Operations”.

A Start up DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and select the driver of the scanner.

A Click [Start], point to [Program], and then [DeskTopBinder V2] from [DeskTop-
Binder V2].
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite starts up.
B Click [Scanner Settings] from the [Tools] menu.
The [Scanner Settings] dialog box is displayed.
If the scanner is already selected, no scanner settings are necessary. Check
4 [File format for scanned image(s)] and go to step E.
C Click [Select Scanner Driver].
The [Select Source] dialog box is displayed.
D Click the machine name you want to use in the list, and then click [Se-
lect].
E Click [OK].
The [Scanner Settings] dialog box closes.

B Place the original in the scanner.

Reference
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals”

C Make the scan settings.

A From the [File] menu, point to [Add Document], and then click [Scan].
The TWAIN driver starts up.
After a short while, the dialog box of the TWAIN driver that operates the
scanner is displayed. This dialog box is called the Scanner Control dialog
box.
Note
❒ The title bar displays the scanner currently being used. When multiple
machines are connected, confirm that the indicated machine name is the
machine to be used. If the intended machine is different, click [Select
Source] to select the scanner again.
❒ If the machine to be used does not appear in the list, make sure that the
IP address is configured and that the machine is correctly connected to
the network. If the driver is still not displayed in the list after the above
operations, consult with your network administrator.

52
 Scanning Originals

B Depending on the type of original or the objective for scanning, select

the icon in [Mode].
• [Standard] is suitable for scanning standard originals that comprise
mainly of text.
• [Photo] is suitable for scanning originals that include photos, shaded il-
lustrations, etc.
• [OCR] is suitable for conversion processing with an OCR (Optical Char-
acter Reading) application after scanning the original.
• [Filing] is suitable for use with filing applications, etc.
Note
❒ For advanced settings, click [Detail] to display “Detail Window”. For
more information about the “Detail Window”, see TWAIN Driver Help.
C According to the original scan area and orientation, change the setting of 4
the [Document] group.
Reference
⇒ p.47 “Original Orientation and Scan Area Setting”
For information about the setting of the [Document] group, see Help.

When you want to configure the scanning area

When you do not configure the scanning area, the area is scanned with the
size specified in the [Size:] box.
A Click [Preview].
The original that was placed is scanned and the [Preview] dialog box is dis-
played. The scanning area in the preview is displayed within the broken
lines.
B Configure the scanning area by dragging a border or the top line.
When reconfiguring the area, click and drag one corner of the area to-
wards its opposite corner.
Note
❒ Depending on the scanning resolution, the area to be scanned may pos-
sibly be subject to restrictions.
C Click [Close].
The [Preview] dialog box closes.
Note
❒ When the original placed in the ADF is previewed, place the original
scanned during preview again.

D Click [Scan].
The original is scanned. A message asking whether there is another original
is displayed. When there is another original to scan, place the original, and
then click [Continue]. When there are no more originals, click [Complete].
53
 Scanning Originals Using Network TWAIN Scanner

E Save the scanned image in DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.

A Click [Exit] from the [File] menu.
The [Input Document Information] dialog box is displayed.
B Enter the file name and click [OK].
The image is stored in DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, and the DeskTopBinder
viewer closes.

- Editing and printing scanned data

With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, it is possible to edit and print scanned data. For
more information about how to edit and print, see DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Help.

4
Functions of the TWAIN Driver
The following is an introduction to the various functions of the TWAIN driver.
Reference
For more information about each function or other functions, see Help.

❖ Automatic Tilt Correction

This function automatically corrects character strings that were scanned
slanted.

❖ Printing to the Image

This function allows you to imprint dates, page numbers, or your favorite
characters to a scanned image. You can also change the fonts of the imprints
as well as the numerical order of the scanned images to ascending or descend-
ing order.

❖ Scanning Mode Registration

This function allows you to register other scanning configurations that are of-
ten used as scanning modes besides the already pre-installed ones. After reg-
istration, you can quickly scan with these scanning configurations.

54
5. Delivering Stored Scan Data by
the Network Delivery Scanner
Stored scan data can be sent to a specified destination using the network deliv-
ery scanner function. This chapter explains the various display screens, delivery
procedures, and how to check the delivery result when this function is used.
Note
❒ A delivery server in which ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional is installed is
necessary to use the network delivery server function. Information about de-
livery destinations and senders must be registered first into the delivery serv-
er. Also, program a connected device in [Set I/O Device] of ScanRouter V2
Administration Utility. For more information, see ScanRouter V2 Adminis-
tration Utility Help.

List Displays of Destinations and Senders

The screen configuration when using the machine as network delivery scanner
is as shown:

1 2 3 4

1. [ ] Network Delivery Scanner 3. [Registration No.]

Icon Press this to specify a destination using a
This icon shows that the screen for net- 5-digit short ID number.
work delivery scanner is displayed.
4. [Manual Input]
2. Destination Display When specifying a destination that is not
The selected destination is shown here. If listed, press [Manual Input] and enter the
several destinations are selected, the des- destination with the soft keyboard that is
tinations are displayed in the order they displayed. For information about send-
were selected by pressing [U U Prev.] or ing e-mail from the delivery server, see
TNext].
[T p.3 “Manuals for This Machine”

Note 5. [Attach Sender’s Name] [Attach Sub-

❒ Pressing the {Check Modes} } key lets ject]
you verify the selected destinations. Set the sender and subject of the deliv-
ered document.

55
 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

6. [ ] Switch Destination List/Search

by User Name
Press this button to switch a destination
from the delivery server list to the desti-
nation list of this machine or to search us-
ing the sender's name.
7. Destination List
Displays the list of destinations pro-
grammed in the delivery server.

Note
❒ When the entire list does not fit on one
U] or [T
screen, [U T] can be used to scroll
the display.
❒ Group destinations are denoted by
this symbol ( ).
❒ A bar above a title indicates that a des-
tination that belongs to it has been se-
5 lected.

56
 Delivery Procedure

Delivery Procedure
Data is delivered after specifying scan
settings and destination. If necessary,
D Place the original in the machine,
and adjust the settings for origi-
you can select a sender and a subject.
nal size and orientation if re-
A Press the {Scanner}} key. quired.
Reference
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals”

E If the e-mail screen appears,

switch to the screen for network
delivery scanner.
A Press [ ].
The Search/Switch List screen
is displayed.
ZGZS331E

B Press [Switch Destination List]. 5

B If user codes are set, enter a user
code (consisting of up to eight
characters) with the number keys,
and then press the {#}} key.
The scanner function screen is dis-
played.
The switch destination screen is
Reference displayed.
For information about the user C Press [Delivery Server].
code, see the General Settings
Guide.
Note
❒ If the network TWAIN scanner
screen is displayed, press [Can-
cel]. D Press [Exit].
The network delivery scanner
screen is displayed.
Reference
⇒ p.25 “Making Scanner Set-
tings”.
C Make sure that no previous set-
tings remain.
Note
❒ If a previous setting remains,
press the {Clear Modes}
} key.

57
 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

F Make the scan settings. B Select resolution, original size,

and other items to change the
To make the scan settings, call up corresponding setting.
stored settings or make the settings
individually.
Reference
⇒ p.21 “Setting Scanner Fea-
tures”
Scan settings are made in the
Calling up stored scan settings same way they are pro-
grammed. See p.21 “Setting
A Press [Recall Program]. Scanner Features”.
The Program Recall screen is C Press [OK].
displayed.
The scan settings are applied.
B Select a user program of scan
settings. G Select the destination.
5 Four methods are available for se-
lecting a destination: selecting it
from the list, by specifying a short
ID number, by searching it, or by
directly typing the e-mail address.

C Press [OK]. Note

❒ When using ScanRouter V2 Pro-
fessional, the destination list is
updated automatically.

When selecting a destination

from the list
The selected user program set-
tings are applied. A Press the title for the desired
destination. The destinations
Making the settings individually for that title are displayed.
If the desired destination is not
A Press [Scan Settings]. displayed, press [U U] or [T
T] to
The screen for making scan set- display the destination.
tings is displayed.

Note
❒ The destination titles are pro-
grammed in the delivery
server.
58
 Delivery Procedure

B Select the destination to which The destination corresponding

the scan data is to be delivered. to the short ID number is dis-
played in the destination field at
the top of the screen.
Note
❒ To deselect a destination,
UPrev.] or [T
press [U TNext] to
The selected destination is high- display the destination in the
lighted and also appears in the destination field, and then
destination field at the top of the press [Clear].
screen. A line appears over the C To select more destinations, re-
title of the category to which the peat step B.
destination belongs.
Note Searching for a destination to
❒ To deselect a destination, select
press the destination once
A Press [ ]. 5
more, or press [U U Prev.] or
TNext] to bring up the desti-
[T
nation in the destination
field, and then press [Clear].
C To select more destinations, re-
peat step B.
The Search/Switch List screen
Using a short ID number to select is displayed.
a destination B Press [Search].
A Press [Registration No.].
B Use the number keys to enter
the 5-digit ID number that has
been assigned to a destination.
If the entered number is less
than 5 digits long, press the {#}
} C Press [Search by User Name].
key after the last number. The soft keyboard is displayed
Example: for searching by user name.
To enter 00009 Note
Press the {9}} key and then the ❒ When using ScanRouter V2
{#}} key using the number keys. Professional, it is possible to
search by comments.

59
 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

D Enter part of the destination

name. Manual input of a destination

Note
❒ When using ScanRouter V2 Pro-
fessional, it is possible to enter
the destination e-mail address
directly.
Note A Press [Manual Input].
❒ Enter the first character or The soft keyboard is displayed
characters of the destination to enter a destination.
name. B Enter the destination with the
E Press [OK]. soft keyboard.
A list of destination names
found is displayed.
F Select a destination.
5
Note
❒ Enter the e-mail address of
the destination when send-
G Press [Exit]. ing via the delivery server.
H Press [OK]. ❒ It is possible to use alphabets,
numbers and periods. The
The destination name is dis-
symbols ()\,;:” cannot be
played in the destination field at
used.
the top of the screen.
For more information to enter
an e-mail address, see the Gen-
eral Settings Guide.
C Press [OK].
The name of the destination ap-
pears in the destination display
area on the upper side of the
screen.
Note
❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to se-
lect the destination.
❒ Pressing the {Check Modes} }
key lets you verify the select-
ed destinations.
D To enter more than one desti-
nation, repeat steps A to C.

60
 Delivery Procedure

B Select the sender.

Checking selected destinations
A Use the destination field at the
top of the scre en to check
which destinations are select-
ed.
Note The selected sender and its
❒ When multiple destinations short ID number are displayed.
are selected, the selected des-
Note
tinations are displayed in or-
der they were selected by ❒ When using ScanRouter V2
pressing [UUPrev.] or [T
TNext]. Professional, [Return Receipt]
appears when a sender is se-
❒ Pressing the {Check Modes} } lected.
key on the control panel lets
you verify the list of selected To verify receipt, press [Return
destination(s). Receipt].

H Specify the sender (scan data de- 5

livery source).
Note
❒ When a sender has been speci-
fied, this information is added C Press [OK].
to the scan data file. Select a
The sender is displayed above
sender from the senders pro-
[Attach Sender’s Name].
grammed in the delivery server.
Three methods are available for se-
lecting a sender: select the sender Using a short ID number to select
from the list, enter the 5-digit short a sender's name
ID number of the sender with the
number keys, and search for the A Press [Attach Sender’s Name]
sender and select it.

When selecting a sender from the

list
A Press [Attach Sender’s Name]. A list of senders registered in
the delivery server is displayed.

A list of senders registered in

the delivery server is displayed.

61
 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

B Use the number keys to enter B Press [ ].

the 5-digit ID number that has
been assigned to a sender.
Example:
To enter 00006
Press the {6}} key and then the
{#}
} key using the number keys. The Search by Sender’s Name
screen is displayed.
C Press [Search by User Name].

Note
❒ When using ScanRouter V2
Professional, [Return Receipt] The soft keyboard is displayed
5 appears when a sender is se- to search for a sender.
lected. D Enter part of the sender name.
To verify receipt, press [Return
Receipt].

Note
❒ Enter the first character or
C Press [OK].
c h ara c t e r s o f t he s e nd e r
The sender is displayed above name.
[Attach Sender’s Name].
E Press [OK].
A list of senders is displayed.
Searching for a sender to select
F Select a sender.
A Press [Attach Sender’s Name]. G Press [Exit].
H Press [OK].
The sender is displayed above
[Attach Sender’s Name].

I If required, select a subject.

A list of senders registered in Select a subject from the registered
the delivery server is displayed. ones. ⇒ p.29 “Making Scan Data
Subject Settings”

62
 Delivery Procedure

Note B Press [Manual Input].

❒ When a subject has been speci- The soft keyboard is displayed
fied, this information is added to enter a subject.
to the scan data file. C Enter the subject with the soft
❒ When ScanRouter V2 Profes- keyboard.
sional is used to send docu-
ments using e-mail, the subject
is automatically entered as a ti-
tle in the message subject.
Two methods are available for se-
lecting a subject, selecting it from
the list or entering it directly. D Press [OK].
The name of the subject is dis-
played above [Attach Subject].
When selecting a subject from
the list J Press the {Start}} key.
A Press [Attach Subject]. The original is scanned and deliv-
ered to the specified destination. 5
Set up the original and press the
{Start}
} key.
Note
❒ To interrupt the scanning, press
B Select a subject. the {Clear/Stop}
} key or [Stop] in
the displayed screen.
❒ To use the SADF function, set
up the next original. ⇒ p.46
“Placing the Divided Original
in the Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)”
C Press [OK].
The name of the subject is dis-
played above [Attach Subject].

Manual input of the subject

A Press [Attach Subject].
A list of registered subjects is
displayed.

63
 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

Checking the Status of Delivery

The status of the last 50 deliveries can Note
be checked. For every new delivery
❒ One screen shows the records
record after 50, the oldest record is
for five delivery operations. Use
deleted.
U Prev.] or [T
[U T Next] to scroll
❖ Items to be checked through the screen.
• Date/Time ❒ When [Print & Delete Scanner Jour-
The time when the delivery re- nal] is set to [Print], the whole
quest was received from this journal is printed when the
machine is displayed. number of delivery operations
reaches 50.
• Destination
When multiple destinations ❒ When the status of a document
were selected, the first selected is [Waiting], the delivery can be
destination is displayed. stopped by selecting that docu-
ment and pressing [Cancel].
5 • Sender
• File Name C Press [Exit].
• Status The display returns to the network
Information is registered delivery scanner screen.
whether the delivery has been
properly completed, an error
has occurred, or if the delivery
is in waiting or has stopped.

A Press [Scanned Files Status] on the

network delivery scanner screen.

The delivery status is displayed.

B Check the displayed records.

64
 Using the Network Delivery Scanner with the Document Server

Using the Network Delivery Scanner with

the Document Server
You can use the network delivery
scanner with the document server.
F Make sure [Send & Store] is select-
ed.

Simultaneous Delivery and

Storage
Scanned data is stored in the docu-
ment server at the same time the data
is delivered. G Press [File Information] to set file in-
formation.
Note
❒ This section explains mainly the Reference
operation for simultaneous deliv- For more information, see p.81 5
ery and storage. For more informa- “Specifying file information”.
tion, see p.57 “Delivery
Procedure”. H Press [OK].
A Place the original and adjust the I Press the {Start}} key.
settings for original size and ori- The original is scanned, and the
entation if required. file is delivered to the destination
and stored in the document server.
Reference
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals”

B Make the scan settings.

C Select the destination.
D If required, specify the sender
(scan data delivery source) and a
subject.

E Press [Store File].

The screen for setting storage pa-

rameters for scanned data is dis-
played.

65
 Delivering Stored Scan Data by the Network Delivery Scanner

Note
Delivering Stored Files ❒ You can select up to 30 files for
Files stored in the document server one operation.
can be delivered. ❒ If you select multiple files, the
files will be delivered in the or-
Note der they were selected.
❒ This section explains mainly how ❒ If you press [Display Selection],
to select files to be delivered. For the selected files will be shown
more information about the deliv- in the order of delivery.
ery procedure, see p.57 “Delivery
Procedure”. D Press [OK].
❒ When the stored files are deliv- The screen for specifying a destina-
ered, scan settings cannot be made. tion is displayed.
The files are delivered with the
specified scan settings when they E Specify a destination.
are stored in the document server.
F If required, select the sender (scan
5 A Display the list of stored files. data delivery source) and a sub-
ject.
Reference
⇒ p.84 “View ing a List of G Press the {Start}} key.
Stored Files” The selected stored files are deliv-
B Select a file to be delivered. ered.

Note
❒ When you select a password
protected file, the Password
screen is displayed. After you
have entered the correct pass-
word and pressed [OK], the file
will be selected.

C To select multiple files, repeat

step B.

66
 6. Sending Stored Scan Data
by E-mail
Stored scan data can be sent to a specified destination using the e-mail. This
chapter explains the various display screens, delivery procedures, and how to
check the sending result when this function is used.

List Displays of Destinations and Senders

The screen configuration when using the machine as e-mail is as shown:

1 2 3 4

1. Destination Display 5. [Attach Sender’s Name] [Attach Sub-

The selected destination is shown here. If ject] [File Type]
several destinations are selected, the des- Set the sender and the subject of the de-
tinations are displayed in the order they livered document.
were selected by pressing [U U Prev.] or If necessary, select the file type of the im-
TNext].
[T age file attached to the e-mail.
Note 6. [ ] Switch Destination List/Search
❒ Pressing the {Check Modes} } key lets by User Name
you verify the selected destinations. Press this button to switch a destination
2. [ ] E-mail Icon from the delivery server list to the desti-
nation list of this machine or to search us-
This icon shows that the screen for send-
ing the user's name.
ing e-mail is displayed.
3. [Registration No.] 7. Destination List
Displays the list of destinations pro-
Press this to specify a destination using a
grammed in the delivery server or this
5-digit short ID number.
machine.
4. [Manual Input]
When specifying a destination that is not Note
listed, press [Manual Input] and enter the ❒ When the entire list does not fit on one
destination with the soft keyboard. screen, [UU] or [T
T] can be used to scroll
the display.
❒ Group destinations are denoted by
this symbol ( ).
❒ A bar above a title indicates that a destina-
tion that belongs to it has been selected.
67
 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

Procedure for Sending E-mails

Data is sent after specifying scan set-
tings and destination. If necessary,
D Place the original in the machine,
and adjust the settings for origi-
you can select a sender and a subject.
nal size and orientation if re-
A Press the {Scanner}} key. quired.
Reference
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals”

E If the network delivery scanner

screen appears, switch to the
screen for sending e-mail.
A Press [ ].
The Search/Switch List screen
is displayed.
ZGZS331E

B Press [Switch Destination List].

B If user codes are set, enter a user The switch destination screen is
code (consisting of up to eight displayed.
6 characters) with the number keys,
and then press the {#}} key.
The scanner function screen is dis-
played.
Reference
For information about the user C Press [E-mail].
code, see the General Settings
Guide.
Note
❒ If the network TWAIN scanner
screen is displayed, press [Can-
cel]. D Press [Exit].
The send e-mail screen is dis-
played.
Reference
⇒ p.25 “Making Scanner Set-
tings”.
C Make sure that no previous set-
tings remain.
Note
❒ If a previous setting remains,
press the {Clear Modes}
} key.

68
 Procedure for Sending E-mails

F Make the scan settings. B Select resolution, original size,

and other items to change the
To make the scan settings, call up corresponding setting.
stored settings or make the settings
individually.
Reference
⇒ p.21 “Setting Scanner Fea-
tures”
Scan settings are made in the
Calling up stored scan settings same way they are pro-
grammed. See p.21 “Setting
A Press [Recall Program]. Scanner Features”.
The Recall Program screen is C Press [OK].
displayed.
The scan settings are applied.
B Select a user program of scan
settings. G Select the file type if necessary.
A Press [File Type].
B Select the file type of the file to
be attached to the e-mail from
the displayed types. 6
C Press [OK].

The selected file type is dis-

played under File Type.
The selected user program set- H Select the destination.
tings are applied.
Four methods are available for se-
lecting a destination: selecting it
Making the settings individually from the list, by specifying a short
ID number, by directly typing the
A Press [Scan Settings]. e-mail address, or by searching it.
The screen for making scan set-
tings is displayed. Note
❒ Before selecting the destination,
make sure to select [To]. When
necessary, select [Cc] or [Bcc]
and the respective destinations.
It cannot specify more than 100
destinations including [To], [Cc]
and [Bcc].

69
 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

When selecting a destination Using a short ID number to select

from the list a destination
A Press the title for the desired A Press [Registration No.].
destination. The destinations B Use the number keys to enter
for that title are displayed. the 5-digit ID number that has
If the desired destination is not been assigned to a destination.
displayed, press [U U] or [T
T] to If the entered number is less
display the destination. than 5 digits long, press the {#}
}
key after the last number.
Example:
To enter 00003
Press the {3}} key and then the
{#}} key using the number keys.
Note
❒ The destination titles are pro-
grammed in the delivery
server.
6 B Select the destination to which
the scan data is to be sent. The destination corresponding
to the short ID number is dis-
played in the destination field at
the top of the screen.
Note
❒ To deselect a destination,
The selected destination is high- UPrev.] or [T
press [U TNext] to
lighted and also appears in the display the destination in the
destination field at the top of the destination field, and then
screen. A line appears over the press [Clear].
title of the category to which the C To select more destinations, re-
destination belongs. peat step B.
Note
❒ To deselect a destination,
press the destination once
more, or press [U U Prev.] or
TNext] to bring up the desti-
[T
nation in the destination
field, and then press [Clear].
C To select more destinations, re-
peat step B.

70
 Procedure for Sending E-mails

Manual input of the e-mail Note

address ❒ Press [U
UPrev.] or [T
TNext] to se-
lect the destination.
A Press [Manual Input]. ❒ For changing a destination e-
The soft keyboard is displayed mail address that has been
to enter the e-mail address. entered, press [Change] locat-
B Enter the e-mail address with ed on the left side of the des-
the soft keyboard. tination list field. A software
keyboard for entering the
destination e-mail address is
displayed. Enter any e-mail
address, and then press [OK].
❒ Pressing the {Check Modes} }
key lets you verify the select-
Example: ed destinations.
To input @ D To enter more than one desti-
nation, repeat steps A to C.
Press [Shift Lock] or [Shift] and
then [@].
Searching for a destination to
select 6
A Press [ ].

It is possible to use alphabets,

numbers and periods. The sym-
bols ()\,;:” cannot be used.
For more information to enter
The Search/Switch List screen
the e-mail address, see the Gen-
is displayed.
eral Settings Guide.
B Press [Search].
C Press [OK].
The name of the destination ap-
pears in the destination display
area on the upper side of the
screen.

C Press [Search by User Name].

To search using e-mail address-
es, press [Search by E-mail].

71
 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

D Enter part of the destination Note

name.
❒ When multiple destinations
are selected, the selected des-
tinations are displayed in the
order they were selected by
pressing [UUPrev.] or [T
TNext].
❒ Pressing the {Check Modes} }
key on the control panel lets
Note you verify the list of selected
❒ Enter the first character or destination(s).
characters of the destination
name. I Specify the sender.
❒ It is also possible to perform Note
a combined search using ❒ When a sender is selected, the
[Search by User Name] and sender name is automatically
[Search by E-mail]. placed in the “From” field of the
E Press [OK]. e-mail so that the sender can be
A list of destinations is dis- identified when the e-mail is re-
played according to the user ceived.
6 name search. ❒ An example of “E-mail Informa-
F Select a destination. tion Language” is shown below.
This e-mail has been sent from
[XXX]. The scanning time was
YYYY:MM:DD HH:MM:SS
(+0900). The administrator's e-
mail address is sent for refer-
ence. ⇒ p.27 “E-mail Informa-
G Press [Exit]. tion Language”
H Press [OK]. ❒ To prevent misuse of a sender
name, we recommend you set
The destination name is dis- up a password for the sender.
played in the destination field at
the top of the screen. ❒ Be sure to select or enter a send-
er’s name. Otherwise [Key Oper-
ator’s E-mail Address] is used as
Checking selected destinations the sender’s name. ⇒General
Settings Guide
A Use the destination field at the
top of the scre en to check Three methods are available for se-
which destinations are select- lecting a sender: select the sender
ed. from the list, enter the 5-digit short
ID number of the sender with the
number keys, and search for the
sender and select it.

72
 Procedure for Sending E-mails

When selecting a sender from the Using a short ID number to select

list a sender's name
A Press [Attach Sender’s Name]. A Press [Attach Sender’s Name].

The list of senders registered in The list of senders registered in

this machine is displayed. this machine is displayed.
B Select the sender. B Use the number keys to enter
the 5-digit short ID number
that has been assigned to a
sender.
If the entered number is less
than 5 digits long, press the {#}
}
key after the last number.
Note
❒ If a password has been set, a
Example: 6
To enter 00006
screen for entering the pass-
Press the {6}} key and then the
word is displayed after se-
{#}} key using the number keys.
lecting the sender.
Enter the password, and then
press [OK].
After verification of the pass-
word, the sender name is dis-
played.
C To verify receipt, press [Return Note
Receipt]. ❒ If a password has been set, a
screen for entering the pass-
word is displayed after se-
lecting the sender.
Enter the password, and then
press [OK].
[Return Receipt] is highlighted. After verification of the pass-
word, the sender name is dis-
D Press [OK].
played.
The sender is displayed above
[Attach Sender’s Name].

73
 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

C To verify receipt, press [Return D Enter part of the sender name.

Receipt].

Note
[Return Receipt] is highlighted.
❒ Enter the first character or
D Press [OK]. c h ara c t e r s o f t he s e nd e r
The sender is displayed above name.
[Attach Sender’s Name]. ❒ It is also possible to perform
a combined search using
Searching for a sender to select [Search by User Name] and
[Search by E-mail].
A Press [Attach Sender’s Name]. E Press [OK].
A list of senders is displayed ac-
cording to the user name search.
F Select the sender.
6
The list of senders registered in
this machine is displayed.
B Press [ ].

Note
❒ If a password has been set, a
screen for entering the pass-
word is displayed after se-
lecting the sender. Enter the
The Search by Sender’s Name password, and then press
screen is displayed. [OK]. After verification of the
C Press [Search by User Name]. password, the sender name
is displayed.
To search using e-mail address-
es, press [Search by E-mail]. G Press [Exit].
H To verify receipt, press [Return
Receipt].

[Return Receipt] is highlighted.

74
 Procedure for Sending E-mails

I Press [OK].
Manual input of the subject
The sender is displayed above
directly
[Attach Sender’s Name].
A Press [Attach Subject].
J If required, select a subject.
The list of registered subject is
Select a subject from the registered
displayed.
ones. ⇒ p.29 “Making Scan Data
Subject Settings”
Note
❒ The selected subject name is au-
tomatically placed in the Subject
field of the mailing soft.
B Press [Manual Input].
Two methods are available for se-
lecting a subject, selecting it from The soft keyboard is displayed
the list or entering it directly. to enter a subject.
C Enter the subject with the soft
When selecting a subject from keyboard.
the list
A Press [Attach Subject]. 6

D Press [OK].
The name of the subject is dis-
played above [Attach Subject].
The list of registered subjects is
displayed. K Press the {Start}} key.
B Select a subject. The original is scanned and the scan
data file is sent to the destination(s).
Note
❒ To abort the scan process, press
the { Clear/Stop}} key or press
[Stop] on the screen.
C Press [OK]. ❒ To use the SADF function, set
up the next original. ⇒ p.46
The selected subject is dis-
“Placing the Divided Original
played above [Attach Subject].
in the Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)”
❒ Regardless of the divide e-mail
size setting, it is not possible to
send e-mail containing over
725.3MB per document. It is
also not possible to send more
than 2,000 pages.
75
 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

Checking the Status of E-mail

The status of the last 50 e-mails can be ❒ When [Print & Delete Scanner Jour-
checked. For every new e-mail record nal] is set to [Print], all records
after 50, the oldest record is deleted. are printed when the number of
records reaches 50.
❖ Items to be checked
❒ When the status of a document
• Date/Time is [Waiting], the sending e-mail
The date and time when the de- can be stopped by selecting that
livery request was received document and pressing [Can-
from this machine is displayed. cel].
• Destination
When multiple destinations C Press [Exit].
were selected, the first selected The display returns to the screen
destination is displayed. for sending e-mail.
• Sender
• File Name
• Status
Indicates whether delivery was
6 successful or resulted in an er-
ror

A Press [Scanned Files Status] on the

screen for sending e-mail.

The delivery status of e-mail is dis-

played.

B Check the displayed records.

Note
❒ One screen shows the records
for five sending operations. Use
U Prev.] or [T
[U T Next] to scroll
through the screen.

76
 Using E-mail with the Document Server

Using E-mail with the Document Server

You can use e-mail delivery with the
document server.
F Make sure [Send & Store] is select-
ed.
This section explains mainly the oper-
ation for simultaneous e-mail sending
and storage. For more information,
see p.57 “Delivery Procedure”.

Simultaneous E-mail and

Storage G Press [File Information] to set file in-
formation.
Scanned data is stored in the docu- Reference
ment server at the same time the data
is sent by e-mail. For more information, see p.81
“Specifying file information”.
A Place the original and adjust the H Press [OK].
settings for original size and ori-
entation if required. I Press the {Start}} key. 6
Reference The original is scanned, and the
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals” file is delivered to the destination
and stored in the document server.
B Make the scan settings.
C Select the destination.
D If required, specify the sender
(scan data delivery source) and a
subject.

E Press [Store File].

The screen for setting storage pa-

rameters for scanned data is dis-
played.

77
 Sending Stored Scan Data by E-mail

Sending Stored Files D Press [OK].

The screen for specifying a destina-
Files stored in the document server tion is displayed.
can be sent by e-mail.
When the stored files are delivered,
E Specify a destination.
scan settings cannot be made. The F If required, select the sender (scan
files are delivered with the scan set- data delivery source) and a sub-
tings specified when they were stored ject.
in the document server.
G Press the {Start}} key.
A Display the list of stored files. The selected stored files are sent.
Reference
⇒ p.84 “View ing a List of
Stored Files”

B Select a file to be delivered.

Note
❒ When you select a password
protected file, the Password
6 screen is displayed. After you
have entered the correct pass-
word and pressed [OK], the file
will be selected.

C To select multiple files, repeat

step B.

Note
❒ You can select up to 30 files for
one operation.
❒ If you select multiple files, the
files will be sent in the order
they were selected.
❒ If you press [Display Selection],
the selected files will be shown
in the order of delivery.

78
 7. Using the Document Server

Data obtained by scanning originals can be stored in the hard disk of the ma-
chine using the document server function, and the stored data can be used later.
Using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional, stored data can be viewed or re-
trieved with a client computer.
Important
❒ There are no special security settings for document server. When a dial-up
connection is used, there is a risk that document server will be accessed by an
external DeskTopBinder user. We recommend using a security system such
as a firewall.
Note
❒ When a delivery server is added to the network, data stored in the document
server can be delivered. You can store scanned data in the document server
and deliver it with the network delivery scanner or send it by e-mail simulta-
neously.⇒ p.65 “Using the Network Delivery Scanner with the Document
Server”

Storing Data
This section describes how to store data in the document server and how to as-
sign file information to stored data.
Note
❒ The data stored in the document server is deleted automatically later. For in-
formation about making settings and changes, see the General Settings
Guide.
❒ The theoretical maximum number of files that can be stored is 3,000(or 1,000
pages). However, the actual maximum may be less, depending on the space
used by the copy function and other functions of the machine.
❒ Documents scanned in the scanner function cannot be printed from the con-
trol panel. Print the documents using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional
after receiving.

79
 Using the Document Server

Storage Procedure E Make the scan settings.

To make the scan settings, call up
Scan and store the document in the the stored settings or make the set-
document server. tings individually.

A Press the {Scanner}} key. Reference

⇒ p.21 “Setting Scanner Fea-
tures”

Calling up stored scan settings

A Press [Recall Program].
The Recall Program screen is
displayed.
B Select a user program of scan
ZGZS331E
settings.

B If the user code is set, enter the

user code (consisting of up to
eight characters) with the number
keys, and then press [#].
The scanner function screen is dis-
played. C Press [OK].
7
Note
❒ If the network TWAIN scanner
screen is displayed, press [Can-
cel].

The selected user program set-

tings become active.

Making settings individually

C Make sure that no previous set- A Press [Scan Settings].
ting remains. The screen for making scan set-
Note tings is displayed.
❒ If the previous setting remains,
press the {Clear Modes}
} key.

D Place the original in the machine,

and adjust the settings for original
size and orientation if required.
Reference
⇒ p.43 “Setting Originals”
80
 Storing Data

B Select the desired resolution,

original size, and other items
G Specify file information.
to change the settings. Specify a user name, file name, and
password for the file to be stored.
Reference
For more information about
how to specify file information,
see p.81 “Specifying file infor-
mation”.
The way to make scan settings is
the same way as programming H Press the {Start}} key.
scan settings. See p.21 “Setting
The original is scanned and the re-
Scanner Features”.
sulting data is stored as a file in the
C Press [OK]. document server.
The scan settings are applied.
Note
F Make the settings for storing ❒ To abort the scanning process,
scanned data files. press the { Clear/Stop} } key or
A Press [Store File]. press [Stop] in the screen.
❒ When originals are being
scanned using the SADF, load
the next original. ⇒ p.46 “Plac-
ing the Divided Original in the
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF)”
7
The screen for setting storage
parameters for scanned data is Specifying file information
displayed.
B Press [Store Only]. You can specify a user name, file
name, and password for a stored scan
data file.
When this function is used, you can
search for files by user name or file
name, and you can prevent unauthor-
ized persons from accessing the files.
Note Note
❒ To store and deliver scanned ❒ The file name can be up to 64 char-
data, press [Send & Store]. ⇒ acters long, The user name can be
p.65 “Using the Network De- up to 20 characters long. The first
livery Scanner with the Doc- 16 characters are shown on the
ument Server” control panel. With DeskTopBind-
❒ [Store Only] cannot be pressed er V2 Lite/Professional installed
if even a single destination is on a client computer, you can view
selected. the entire string.
C Press [OK].

81
 Using the Document Server

A Display the File Information Note

screen. ❒ If no user name is pro-
A Press [Store File]. grammed in System Settings
under the Administrator tab,
the User Name screen does
not appear. Instead, the Non-
programmed Name screen is
displayed. Enter the user
name.
B Press [File Information]. B Select the desired user name.

The File Information screen is Note

displayed. ❒ The user names shown here
The following screen is dis- are names that were pro-
played when the network deliv- grammed in System Settings
ery scanner function is used. under the Administrator tab.
To enter a name not shown
here, press [Non-programmed
7 Name], and then enter the
user name.
C Press [OK].

The following screen is dis-

played when the e-mail func-
tion is used.

The user name is set.

Specifying a file name

B Specify file information. Scanned data files are automatical-
ly named SCAN0001, SCAN0002,
Specifying a user name etc. If desired, you can change the
file name.
A Press [User Name]. A Press [File Name].
The User Name screen is dis- The File Name screen is dis-
played. played.

82
 Storing Data

B Enter the desired file name.

C When using the network delivery
scanner function, press [OK] twice
to return to the original screen.

Reference
For information about how
to enter characters, see the
General Settings Guide.
C Press [OK].
The new file name is applied.

Specifying a password
By specifying a password, only a
person who knows the password
can view the data.
A Press [Password].
The Password screen is dis-
played.
B Enter a password consisting of 7
four numbers.

C Press [OK].
The password is applied.
Important
❒ Do not forget the password.
If you forget it, contact the
key operators in charge of
this machine.

83
 Using the Document Server

Viewing a List of Stored Files

From the list of stored files, you can Note
delete the files stored in the document
❒ If the network TWAIN scanner
server or change the file information.
screen is displayed, press [Can-
To show the displayed list of stored
cel].
files, perform the following steps.

A Press the {Scanner}} key.

B The list of stored files is dis-

played.
A Press [Select Stored File].

ZGZS331E

The scanner function screen is dis-

played.
B Press [Manage/Delete File].
7
Viewing the List
The list of stored files has the following elements.

❖ When using the network delivery scanner or e-mail

2 3

1 4

7 6 5

84
 Viewing a List of Stored Files

❖ When using the document server only

2 3

1 4

❖ When displaying information of a selected stored file

2

7 8

1. Keys for searching files 7

Note
Switch to the screens for searching for a
❒ Stored files are not shown when a
file by user name or file name, or to the
function other than the scanner func-
screen for displaying all files. tion is used.
2. Key to switch to the information dis- ❒ If the desired file is not visible, use
play UPrev.] or [T
[U TNext] to scroll through the
Use to switch between the stored file list screen.
and the detailed information of the se- ❒ For files which are password protect-
lected file. ed, a key symbol( ) is shown to the left
of the file name.
3. Keys for sorting files
Sorts the files using the selected item. Se- 6. [Manage/Delete File]
lect the same item once more for a reverse Press to manage or delete the files stored
sort. However, the delivery order cannot in the document server or change the file
be sorted in descending order. information.
4. Keys for changing file information 7. [Send]
Use for deleting, changing the user name, Press to deliver or send the files stored in
file, or password of the selected file, or for the document server. For more informa-
checking file information. tion, see p.66 “Delivering Stored Files” or
p.78 “Sending Stored Files”.
5. A list of stored files
A list of stored files is displayed. 8. Information of a selected stored file
Press [Detail] to display the information of
a file after selecting the file from the file
list.
85
 Using the Document Server

- Viewing a list of stored files in DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

The files stored in the document server are shown below in DeskTopBinder V2
Lite.

1
2

4
3

1. Connected device name 3. All Users

Displays the files stored in the connected Displays all files stored in the connected
device on the desk tree by dividing into device.
7 User name and All Users folders.
4. Folder contents display
2. User name Displays the files in the selected folder.
Displays only the files stored with the
same user name specified in the connect-
ed device properties. The files stored
from the scanner are shown on the “Scan-
ner” folder.

86
 Viewing a List of Stored Files

Searching for Files Searching by file name

You can search for desired files from A On the list of displayed files,
the stored files, using the user name press [Search by File Name].
or file name as a key. The Search by File Name screen is
displayed.
Searching by user name
B Enter the file name to search for.
A On the list of displayed files,
press [Search by User Name].
The Search by User Name screen is
displayed.

B Select the user name to be used

for the search. Reference
For information about how to
input characters, see the Gener-
al Settings Guide.

C Press [OK].
The search starts, and file whose
The user names shown here are name starts with the entered string
are displayed.
names that were registered in Sys-
tem Settings under the Adminis-
7
trator tab. To enter user name not
shown here, press [Non-programmed
Name], and then enter the name.

C Press [OK].
The search starts, and files whose
user name starts with the entered
string are displayed.

87
 Using the Document Server

Deleting Stored Files

You can delete files that are no longer
needed.
E Press [Delete].
Limitation
❒ Delivery waiting files cannot be
deleted.

A Display the list of stored files.

The file is deleted.
Reference
⇒ p.84 “View ing a List of F Press [Exit].
Stored Files”

B Press [Manage/Delete File].

The Manage/Delete File screen is
displayed.

C Select the file to be deleted.

7
Note
❒ Up to 30 files can be selected.
❒ When you select a password
protected file, the Password
screen is displayed. Enter the
correct password, and then
press [OK]. When more than one
file are selected, the Password
screen is displayed for each file.

D Press [Delete File].

A confirmation message is dis-

played.

88
 Changing File Information

Changing File Information

The information about files stored in B Select the new user name.
the document server (user name, file
name, password) can be changed.
Limitation
❒ Information about delivery wait-
ing files cannot be changed.

A Display the list of stored files. The user names shown here are
names that were registered in
Reference System Settings under the Ad-
⇒ p.84 “View ing a List of ministrator tab. To specify a
Stored Files” user name not shown here,
press [Non-programmed Name],
B Press [Manage/Delete File] and then enter the user name.
The Manage/Delete File screen is C Press [OK].
displayed.

C Select the file for which you want

to change the file information.

The user name is changed. 7

Changing the file name
Note A Press [Change File Name].
❒ When you select a password
protected file, the Password
screen is displayed. Enter the
correct password, and then
press [OK].

D Change the file information. The Change File Name screen is

displayed.
Changing the user name B Enter the new file name.
A Press [Change User Name].

Reference
The Change User Name screen For information about how
is displayed. to enter characters, see the
General Settings Guide. 89
 Using the Document Server

C Press [OK].
The file name is changed.

Changing a password
A Press [Change Password].

B Enter the new password con-

sisting of four numbers.

C Press [OK].
The new password is stored.

7 Important
❒ Do not forget the password.
If you forget it, ask the key
operators in charge of this
machine.

E Verify that the file information

change was made as desired, and
press [Exit].

90
 8. Appendix

The Relationship between the Resolution

and the Data Size
The relationship between the resolution and the data size is mutually contradic-
tory. When the resolution (dpi) is set to a high value, the scanning area becomes
smaller. Inversely, when the scanning area is set larger, the resolution becomes
lower.
When the network delivery scanner, e-mail, and document server are used, the
relationship between the scanning resolution and the data size is shown below.
If the data size is too large, the message “Exceeded max. data capacity. Check the
scanning resolution.” appears on the control panel of the machine. Specify the
scan size and resolution again.
Limitation
❒ Depending on the image compression level, the maximum image size will be
limited.

❖ When “Text”, “Text/Photo”, or “Photo” is selected as the Scan Type

All combinations up to A3/11”x17” (297mm×432mm) and 600 dpi are possi-
ble.

❖ When “Gray Scale” is selected as the Scan Type

The data can be scanned with combinations marked with ❍ in the table.
100dpi 200dpi 300dpi 400dpi 600dpi
A3 ❍ ❍ ❍
B4 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
A4 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
B5 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
A5 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
B6 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
A6 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
A7 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
11x17 ❍ ❍ ❍
Legal (81/2x14) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
81/2x13 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
1
Letter (8 /2x11) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
51/2x81/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

91
 Appendix

Troubleshooting
This section contains advice on what to do if you have problems scanning an
original or if the network delivery scanner and e-mail function do not work. Var-
ious messages that may appear on the control panel or computer are listed,
along with causes and suitable countermeasures.

When Scanning Is Not Performed as Expected

Status Possible Cause and Action
The image cannot be scanned at all. The original was placed with the front and
back reversed. Make sure that the original ori-
entation is correct. When placed directly on
the exposure glass, the side to be scanned
must face down. When fed via the ADF, the
side to be scanned must face up. ⇒ p.43 “Set-
ting Originals”
The image is distorted or out of position. • The original was moved during scanning.
Do not move the original during scanning.
• The original was not pressed flat against
the exposure glass. Make sure that the
original is pressed flat against the exposure
glass.
The image is scanned upside down. The original was placed upside down. Place
the original in the correct direction.

8 The scanned image is dirty. The exposure glass or the exposure glass cover
is dirty. Clean these parts. ⇒Copy Reference

Delivery Function Does Not Work

Status Possible Cause and Action
The delivery scanner function screen is not dis- • If the network TWAIN scanner screen ap-
played. pears when the machine is switched to
scanner operation, press [Cancel] to switch
to the network delivery scanner screen.
• If the display does not switch from net-
work TWAIN scanner to network delivery
scanner, the delivery scanner settings are
not correct. See p.18 “Default Settings” and
make the appropriate settings.

92
 Troubleshooting

When an Error Message Is Displayed on the Control Panel

Note
❒ If an error message that is not contained in this section appears, turn off the
main power switch of the machine, and then turn it on again. If the message
is still shown, note the content of the message and the error number (if listed
in the table), and contact your service representative. For information about
how to turn off the main power switch, see the General Settings Guide.
Message Possible Cause and Action
Cannot cancel sending certain file(s). Only files in waiting can be cancelled. Files
To confirm the result, check [Scanned Files Sta- with a delivery status of successful or resulted
tus]. cannot be cancelled.
Cannot communicate with SMTP server. • Check whether this machine and the SMTP
Check the server status. server are correctly connected to the net-
work.
• The SMTP server is not running or is not in
service.
• Check whether the setting of “Network” at
the initial state is correct.
Cannot communicate with the delivery server. No response from the delivery server. Possible
Check the server status. causes are as follows:
• The delivery server is not running or has
not started delivery service.
• “Delivery Server IP Address” is not set cor-
rectly in System Settings.
• The delivery server does not recognize the
connected device. Register a connected de-
8
vice in “Set I/O Device” of ScanRouter V2
Administration Utility. ⇒ScanRouter V2
Administration Utility Help
• The machine may not be correctly connect-
ed to the network. Check the LED indica-
tors of the Ethernet board. ⇒General
Settings Guide
Cannot detect original size. • Place the original correctly.
Select scan size. • Specify the scan size.
• When placing an original directly on the
Note exposure glass, the opening/closing action
❒ These messages are shown alternately. of the ADF triggers the automatic original
size detection process. Raise the ADF by
more than 30 degrees.

93
 Appendix

Message Possible Cause and Action

Cannot find SMTP server. Check DNS or • Check whether this machine and the mail
SMTP. server are correctly connected to the net-
work.
• The mail server is not running or is not in
service.
• Check whether the “Network” setting for
the initial system setup is correct.
Cannot select over 30 files at the same time. To deliver more than 30 stored files, divide the
files and perform the operation several times.
Cannot specify more than 100 destinations. When there are 100 or more destinations, split
the destinations into 2 or more groups for de-
livery.
E-mail address entered is not correct. Please Make sure the e-mail address is correct, and
reenter. then enter it again.
Exceeded max. data capacity. Specify the scan size and resolution again.
Check the scanning resolution, then press start Note that it may not be possible to scan very
again. large originals. ⇒ p.91 “The Relationship be-
tween the Resolution and the Data Size”
Exceeded max. E-mail size. Complete scan has The size of the e-mail exceeded the maximum
not been made. Press [Send] to send the current size possible.
scanned data, or press [Cancel & Delete]. Reduce the volume of images and send it
again.
Exceeded max. E-mail size. Sending E-mail has • Increase the size of [Max. E-mail Size].
been cancelled. Check [Max. E-mail Size] in Scan- • Set [Divide & Send E-mail] to “On”.
ner Features.
Exceeded max. file capacity. The maximum number of files that can be
stored is 3000. Delete unneeded files.
8 Delete the unnecessary stored files.
Exceeded max. number of destinations which More than 2001 destinations were pro-
can be programmed. grammed. Keep the number at 2000 or less.
Exceeded max. number of pages per file. The maximum number of pages per file is 500.
Do you want to store the scanned pages as 1 Specify whether to use the data or not. Scan
file? the pages that weren't scanned, and store
them as a new file.
Exceeded max. number of results. Search again after changing the search condi-
tions.
Exceeded max. number of standby files. There are 50 waiting files in the sending queue
Try again after the current file is sent. for the delivery server. Wait until files have
been sent.
Exceeded max. page capacity per file. Because the number of pages has reached the
The current scanned data will be sent. maximum number that can be sent, the data
up to this point is sent. Scan the remaining
pages after transmission.
Load paper of the following sizes. Load paper of the sizes listed in the message.
_Required: A3S B4S JIS A4R A4S...
Load the following paper in _%_. Load paper in the tray indicated.

94
 Troubleshooting

Message Possible Cause and Action

Memory is full. Because of insufficient hard disk space, the
Cannot scan. first page could not be scanned. Try one of the
following measures.
• Wait for a while and retry the scan opera-
tion.
• Reduce the scan area.
• Delete unneeded stored files.
Memory is full. There is not enough free hard disk space. No
Cannot scan. Only sending stored files is avail- more files can be stored. Delete unneeded
able. files.

Note
❒ These messages are shown alternately.
Memory is full. There is not enough free hard disk space. De-
Delete the unnecessary stored files. lete unneeded files.

Note
❒ These messages are shown alternately.
Memory is full. Because there is not enough free hard disk
Press [Send] to send the current scanned data, space in the machine, the page could only be
or press [Cancel] to delete. partially scanned. Specify whether to use this
data or not.
Memory is full. Scanning has been cancelled. Because there is not enough hard disk capacity
Do you want to store the scanned data? in the machine, the page could only be partial-
ly scanned. Specify whether to use the data or
Note not.
❒ These messages are shown alternately.
No destination is programmed for this The short ID number that can be assigned to 8
number. each destination is not programmed in the de-
livery server. Assign a correct number to each
destination.
No HDD is available for this function. Cannot Files can be scanned with TWAIN by switch-
store. Set original and select the TWAIN set- ing to the network TWAIN scanner.
tings from the PC.
No sender is programmed for this number. The short ID number that can be assigned to
each sender is not programmed in the delivery
server. Assign a correct number to each send-
er.
Output buffer is full. Sending the data has Too many files are in waiting. Please try again
been cancelled. Please try again later. after they have been delivered.
Scanner is currently in use for another func- The machine is currently using the scanner for
tion. another function, such as copying. Retry the
Cannot scan. operation after the other function is complet-
ed.
Note
❒ These messages are shown alternately.
Scanning cannot continue because of insuffi- Scanning has not been completed because of
cient memory space. Do you send the scanned insufficient hard disk space in the machine.
data? When the delivery is stopped, the Select whether or not the scanned file is deliv-
scanned data is deleted. ered. 95
 Appendix

Message Possible Cause and Action

Selected file is currently in use. The name of a file that is being edited with
Cannot change file name. DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional or that is
in a waiting queue cannot be changed. Try the
operation again after editing is finished or
waiting is cancelled.
Selected file is currently in use. The password of a file that is being edited with
Cannot change password. DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional or that is
in a waiting queue cannot be changed. Try the
operation again after editing is finished or
waiting is cancelled.
Selected file is currently in use. The user name of a file that is being edited
Cannot change user name. with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional or
that is in a waiting queue cannot be changed.
Try the operation again after editing is fin-
ished or waiting is cancelled.
Selected file is currently in use. A file that is being edited with DeskTopBinder
Cannot delete it. V2 Lite/Professional or that is in a waiting
queue cannot be deleted. Try the operation
again after editing is finished or waiting is can-
celled.
Sender's name is not selected. A sender's name should be specified before
Sending E-mail has been cancelled. sending e-mail. Send e-mail after specifying
the sender's name.
Sending the data has been cancelled due to Before sending the files, some files were delet-
containing some deleted file(s). ed with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Professional.
Try again after checking the stored files. Perform the selection process again and re-
send the files.
Sending the data has failed. Insufficient mem- There is not enough free space on the hard
8 ory in SMTP server. disk of the SMTP server. Free up the required
amount.
Sending the data to SMTP server has failed. A network error has occurred and a file was
The data will be resent later. not sent correctly to SMTP server. Wait until
delivery is retried automatically after the pre-
set interval. If the delivery fails again, notify
the network administrator.
Sending the data to SMTP server has failed. While sending a file to the SMTP server, a net-
To confirm the result, check [Scanned Files Sta- work error has occurred and the file could not
tus]. be sent correctly. Try the operation once more.
If the message is still shown, the network may
be crowded. Notify the network administra-
tor.
If multiple files were sent, use the Scanned
Files Status screen to check for which file the
problem occurred. ⇒ p.64 “Checking the Sta-
tus of Delivery”
⇒ p.76 “Checking the Status of E-mail”

96
 Troubleshooting

Message Possible Cause and Action

Sending the data to the delivery server has While sending a file to the delivery server, a
been failed. network error has occurred and the file could
To confirm the result, check [Scanned Files Sta- not be sent correctly. Try the operation once
tus]. more.
If the message is still shown, the network may
be crowded. Notify the network administra-
tor.
If multiple files were sent, use the Scanned
Files Status screen to check for which file the
problem occurred. ⇒ p.64 “Checking the Sta-
tus of Delivery”
Sending the data to the delivery server has A network error has occurred and a file was
failed. not sent correctly to the delivery server. Wait
The data will be resent later. until delivery is retried automatically after the
preset interval. If the delivery fails again, noti-
fy the network administrator.
Specified SMTP server is not set correctly. Check whether the “Network” setting for the
Sending E-mail has been cancelled. initial system setup is correct.
Switching. Please wait. No destinations can be specified until after the
switching is completed.
The destination list has been updated. A specified destination or sender's name was
Specified destination(s) or sender's name has cleared when the destination list in the deliv-
been cleared. ery server was updated.
Specify the destination or sender's name
again.
The password entered is not correct. Try again. Enter the password again.
The selected files contain the file deleted. After the files were selected, some files were
Check the stored files status. deleted with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Profes- 8
sional. Perform the selection process again.
The specified group contains some user(s) The group contains members whose e-mail
who do not have E-mail addresses. addresses are not registered. Please check the
Are you sure you want to send E-mail only to e-mail addresses of the group and repeat the
the user(s) who have addresses? selection.
Transmission has been failed. There is not enough free space on the hard
Insufficient memory in the delivery server. disk of the delivery server. Free up the re-
quired amount.
Updating the destination list. Please wait. If a destination or sender's name was already
Specified destination(s) or sender's name has selected, re-select it after this display is
been cleared. cleared.
Updating the destination list has failed. Check whether the delivery server has started
Try again? operation.

97
 Appendix

When an Error Message Is Displayed on the Computer

This section describes main possible causes and actions for error messages dis-
played on the computer when the TWAIN driver is used.
Note
❒ If an error message that is not contained in this section appears, turn off the
main power switch of the machine, and then turn it on again. If the message
is still shown after scanning is executed again, note the content of the message
and the error number (if listed in the table), and contact your service repre-
sentative. For information about how to turn off the main power switch, see
the General Settings Guide.
Message Cause and Action
[Cannot connect to the scanner. Check the network The access mask is set. Notify the network or
Access Mask settings in User Tools.] scanner administrator.
[Cannot detect the paper size of the original. Specify • Place the original correctly.
the scanning size.] • Specify the scan size.
• When placing an original directly on the
exposure glass, the opening/closing action
of the ADF triggers the automatic original
size detection process. Raise the ADF by
more than 30 degrees.
[Cannot find the scanner. Check if the scanner main Check whether the main power switch of the
power is on.] machine is turned off.
[Cannot find the scanner used for the previous scan. Check whether the power switch of the previ-
8 Another scanner will be used instead.] ously used scanner is turned on. Reselect the
scanner.
[Error has occurred in the scanner.] Check whether the scanning settings made
with the application exceed the setting range
of the machine.
[Error has occurred in the scanner driver.] • Check whether the network cable is con-
nected correctly to the computer.
• Check whether the Ethernet board of the
computer is recognized correctly by Win-
dows.
• Check whether your computer can use the
TCP/IP protocol.
[Insufficient memory. Close all applications, then re- Close unnecessary applications running on
start scanning.] the computer.

98
 Troubleshooting

Message Cause and Action

[Insufficient memory. Reduce the scanning area.] • Reset the scan size.
• Lower the resolution.
• Set with no compression. ⇒ p.25 “Making
Scanner Settings”

Note
❒ The “The Relationship between the Reso-
lution and the Scanning Area” chart in
Help for halftone scanning might not al-
ways apply. Scanning cannot be per-
formed if large values are set for brightness
when using halftone or high resolution.
❒ When a paper misfeed occurs in the ma-
chine during printing, scanning cannot be
performed. In this case, after the misfed pa-
per has been removed, proceed with scan-
ning.
[No response from the scanner.] • Check whether the machine is connected to
the network correctly.
• The network is crowded. Reconnect after a
while.
[No User Code is registered. Consult your system Access is restricted with user codes. Consult
administrator.] the system administrator of the machine.
[Please call your service representative.] An unrecoverable error has occurred in the
machine. Call your service representative.
[Please wait.] The machine is in warming up. Please wait.
Automatic scanning will start soon. 8
[Scanner is in use for other function. Please wait.] A function of the machine other than the scan-
ner function is being used such as the copy
function. Wait for a while and reconnect.
[Scanner is in use by other user. Please wait.] Another user is using the machine to scan
originals. Wait for a while and reconnect.
[Scanner is not available. Check the scanner connec- Check whether the machine is connected to
tion status.] the network correctly.
[Scanner is not ready. Check the scanner and the op- Check whether the ADF cover is closed.
tions.]
[The name is already in use. Check the registered You tried to register a name that is already in
names.] use. Use another name.
[The scanner power is off.] • Check whether the main power switch of
the machine is turned on.
• Check whether the machine is connected to
the network correctly.

99
 Appendix

Specifications
Scan method Flat bed scanning
Image sensor type CCD Image Sensor
Scan type Sheet, book
Interface Ethernet interface (10BASE-T or 100BASE-
TX), IEEE 1394(option), Wireless LAN(option)
Maximum scan size A3/11”x17” (297mm×432mm)
Scan density 600dpi
Variable range of scan resolution • When used as a network TWAIN scanner
Setting range: 100dpi - 1200dpi
• When used as a network delivery scanner
or for sending e-mail
Setting range: 100dpi, 200dpi, 300dpi,
400dpi, 600dpi

100
INDEX
A L
Automatic Tilt Correction, 54 List displays
Auto Run program, 34 Destination, 55
Stored Files, 84
C
M
Checking the status of delivery, 64
Compression (Black & White), 25 Main power indicator, power indicator, 11
Compression (Gray Scale), 26 Making E-mail settings, 32
Max. E-mail Size, 26
D Mixed Original Sizes Priority, 27
Mode, 53
Default settings, 18
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, 38, 40, 51 N
Destination List Priority, 26
Display, 11 Network delivery scanner, 8
Display Contents Network TWAIN scanner, 7
E-mail, 13 Number keys, 12
Network delivery scanner, 13
Network TWAIN scanner, 13 O
Divide & Send E-mail, 26
Operation switch, 11
Document server, 10
Original orientation and scan area setting, 47
E Original Orientation Priority, 27
Original Setting, 27
E-mail, 9
E-mail Information Language, 27 P

F Placing the original in the Automatic

Document Feeder (ADF), 45
File Type Priority, 28 Placing the original on the exposure glass, 44
Function keys, 12 Preparations
E-mail, 17
I Network delivery scanner, 16
Network TWAIN scanner, 15
Image density, 22 Preview, 53
Initial scanner setup, 18 Print & Delete Scanner Journal, 28
Installing software, 34 Printing to the image, 54
J R
Job Reset Time in Adding Original, 27 Resolution, 21

101
 S
Save, 54
Scanning mode registration, 54
Scanning originals, 52
ScanRouter V2 Lite, 41
Scan size, 22
Scan type, 21
Selecting a custom size, 23
Select Title, 28
Sender’s Name Default, 26
Send/Store Connection timeout, 25
Setting scanner features, 21
Software supplied on CD-ROM, 38
Status indicators, 12
Stored files
Changing file information, 89
Deleting, 88
Delivering, 66
Searching, 87
Sending, 78
Storing data, 79
Switch to Batch, 28

T
The {Check Modes} } key, 11
The {Clear Modes}} key, 11
The {Clear/Stop}
} key, 12
The {Energy Saver}} key, 11
The {#}
} Enter key, 12
The relationship between the resolution
and the data size, 91
The {Start}
} key, 12
The {User Tools/Counter}
} key, 11
Troubleshooting, 92
Type1075 TWAIN Driver, 39

U
Update delivery scanner destination list, 26

V
Viewing a list of stored files in
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, 86

102 EE GB G338
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
c means STAND BY.

Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage
Directive 73/23/EEC.”

Trademarks
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
MS, Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all right in those marks.
The product name of Windows®95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95.
The product name of Windows®98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98.
The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me).
The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
The product names of Windows NT® are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0

Copyright © 2002
Printer/Scanner Kit Type 1075 Operating Instructions Scanner Reference

G338-8600
GB
EE